Home

5 - Motionsolutions.com

1. suoljeoijineds SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 15 9 3 Options 3G3AX RBC12001 170 i Specifications Medium capacity Compact type Standard type tne 3G3AX RBAXxxx 3G3AX RBBxxxx Se Ee Model 12001 EE Capacity 120 W 200W W 300W W 400W W 400W W 600W W 1 200 W Tl Resistance Q ee 25 15 10 10 75 7 5 7 5 10 frequency Allowable rar Built in temperature relay Normally ON NC Contact capacity 240 VAC 3 A R load 0 2 A L load 36 VDC 2 A R load Built in thermal contact capacity 240 VAC 2 A max Fault detection minimum current 5 mA function Normally ON NC contact Built in temperature fuse non recovery suoljeoijinads z 10 to 50 C 20 to 90 RH with no condensation E 5 9 m s 0 6 G 10 to 55 Hz Complies with JISC0911 5 At a maximum altitude of 1 000 m indoors without corrosive gases or dust 0 O Cooling method Self cooling SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 16 9 3 Options DC Reactor 3G3AX DLxxxx f Dimensional Drawing Ground terminal M5 Specifications 9 17 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 3 Options Specifications SE Inverter Standard applicable wire Inverter Input power supply O 3G3MX2 A2001 AB001 3G3MX2 A2002 AB002
2. C102 Reset Selection initialized upon reset C001 to Multi function Input 47 PCLR Position deviation clear C007 Selection 85 EB Rotation direction detection 1 C021 to Multi function Output 22 DSE Excessive speed deviation C022 Terminal Selection Functions Multi function Relay Output 23 POK Position ready oe Function Selection 1 To use the EB terminal P004 01 to 03 allocate 85 EB to multi function input terminal S7 EB The selection of an NO or NC contact will be disabled The EB terminal is OFF for forward and ON for reverse 2 The run command command rotation direction and detected rotation direction are as follows Run command FW RV terminal Tells the Inverter to start operation Command rotation direction The direction in which the Inverter is intended to rotate the motor For positioning control this is determined by the sign of the position deviation Detected rotation direction The current rotation direction as detected by the Inverter P004 specifies the number of encoder phases and the method used to detect the motor rotation direction The methods for determining the command rotation direction and detected rotation direction are given in the following table For a dual phase pulse the maximum input pulse frequencies are 32 kHz for phase A and 1 8 kHz for phase B At less than 1 8 kHz which is valid for both phases A and B the motor rotation phase and direct
3. Brake release signal DI BOK input lt gt b122 Brake Acceleration Wait Time Brake confirmation signal BRK output CHE lt ER b124 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation Note This operation chart applies to a case where the Brake confirmation 44 BOK is selected for any of Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 If BOK is not selected the Acceleration Wait Time b122 starts at the brake release signal ON timing The Stop Wait Time b123 starts at the brake release signal OFF timing SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 142 suoljoun j Functions 5 10 Brake Settings To use the Brake Control function allocate the following functions to multi function I O terminals as required 1 To input a brake release signal from an external brake to the Inverter allocate the Brake confirmation 44 BOK to any of Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 2 Allocate the Brake release 19 BRK for releasing the brake to any Multi function Output Terminal Selections C021 to C022 or Multi function Relay Output Function Selection Also to use a brake error output signal allocate the Brake error 20 BER When the Brake Control function is used it is recommended to use Sensorless Vector Control A044 03 in which high torque is generated at start For details refer to Sensorless Vector Control on page 5 144 When the Brake Control func
4. Dimensions Unit mm EE E es ee 3G3AX R2 75 5 5 3G3AX R3 75 6 5 Model SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 22 suoljeoijinads 9 3 Options l Specifications Power rn arma matec input SE Power Leakage current supply Inverter model In A at an ambient loss W mA phase at 60 Hz temperature of 50 C een lt 15 2500 een lt 5 250 osaera Tee ba fersy seine eme Tewes zen Ir zeen sosmes Tee axon zeen een lt 15 2500 een lt 15 2500 en 3G3AX NFI21 lt 1 5 250 V een ir emp eem mn Ir men zeen Teens bon zeen esaxerar Teee ara 7 zeg zement Jee oo Ir omen osmena Ieaeene ax7A Ir zmen zemmer ees ben 1 zeg Some ee ban reen Somme Teaeeugs sxa Leen Soaaxnres semocaerio axa 1 zen zemmer emeng mn e sm 1 With the 3G3AX NFI123 only the CT rating is supported dr C O O O D Q a 9 23 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Model 3G3AX NFI21 3G3AX NFI22 3G3AX NF1I23 3G3AX NFI24 3G3AX NFI25 3G3AX NFI26 3G3AX NF127 3G3AX NF128 3G3AX NF141 3G3AX NF142 3G3AX NF143 3G3AX NF144 3G3AX NF145 3G3AX NF146 9 3 Options Terminal Weight Case enclosure rating aoe Fens sis oo e eem P eps e mm a Wars e e o e paro ees Sep Wee eps Iw Pass pero e Pest JP SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL kg 9 24 suoljeoijineds 9 3 Options EMC compatible Noise Filter Schaffner
5. Multi function Output 19 BRK Brake release C021 to C022 l Terminal Selection C026 Multi function Relay 20 BER Brake error Output Function Selection 1 Set a value greater than what is set in Starting Frequency b082 2 If the set current is too low sufficient torque may not be provided when the brake is released In any of the following cases the Inverter trips and outputs the brake error signal BER Brake error E36 The output current is lower than the release current after the Brake Release Wait Time b121 elapses When the brake confirmation signal BOK is used The brake confirmation signal did not turn ON within the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation 6124 during acceleration Or the brake confirmation signal did not turn OFF within the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 during deceleration In case that Brake Confirmation Signal BOK is turned OFF when Brake Release Signal BRK is output 5 143 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control _ The following explains the sensorless vector control which is based on estimation of the motor rom and output torque from the motor parameter settings Sensorless vector control cannot be selected for High frequency Induction Motor b171 02 and Light Load Mode b049 01 Sensorless Vector Control In this method the motor rom and output torque are controlled by estimatin
6. SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Gris eje yes yes 5 160 no Efe pele 4 40 ett JoJOWeIe 4 2 Function Mode Data can BEE 1e aa changed Page uring RUN Default Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Set data setting during i RUN P100 P101 P102 11 Reserved P P121 P122 12 P124 P125 ol el ei or A U U U U OI O O O O CO NI O U Uj y ml alo Ke BEN GN U U Aj ee 0j gt U U E RE NI O Ui U a NI CO Ke oO Parameter List U U U as os ok NO N N ol NI U U N O Ke OO EZ 4 41 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Parameter No Co inverter communication Function name Number of Sent Data of All Stations in Co inverter Communication Recipient Station Number of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 1 Recipient Register of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 1 Sender Register of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 1 Recipient Station Number of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 2 Monitor or data range 1 to 247 0000 to FFFF Hex 0000 to FFFF Hex 1 to 247 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Default setting Set data Page 5 1 BEE HR Fl ir Ich
7. Appendix 7 Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output ccccceeeseeeeeeeeneeeee Appendix 8 Appendix 4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL cUL Standard E Appendix 9 EC Directives Notes on UL cUL Standards SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Appendix 1 Derating Table Appendix 1 Derating Table In the following table derate the output current according to the graph shown below if any model denoted by Derating required is used in an environment of 40 C or above in ambient temperature or if multiple Inverters are installed side by side side by side installation The ambient temperature for side by side installation is specified as 10 to 40 C Set a derating output current value as electronic thermal b012 b212 For electronic thermal level refer to Electronic Thermal Function on page 5 110 Derating Need Correspondence Table Required Rated voltage Not required 3 phase 200 VAC 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 A2002 d 3G3MX2 A2004 d 3G3MX2 A2007 3G3MX2 A2015 S 3G3MX2 A2022 3G3MX2 A2037 d 3G3MX2 A2055 3G3MX2 A2075 3G3MX2 A2110 3G3MX2 A2150 1 phase 200 V AC 3G3MX2 AB001 3G3MX2 AB002 3G3MX2 AB004 d 3G3MX2 AB007 3G3MX2 AB015 3G3MX2 AB022 a 3 phase 400 VAC 3G3MX2 A4004 3G3MX2 A4007 d 3G3MX2 A4015 3G3MX2 A4022 3G3MX2 A4030 3G3MX2 A4040 d 3G3MX2 A4055 3G3MX2 A4075 3G3MX2 A4110 3G3MX2 A4150 L 2 2 I 2 e a y Derating required Derating not requi
8. SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 3 Options 9 3 Options Regenerative Braking Unit 3G3AX RBUxxxx i Dimensional Drawing 3G3AX RBU21 RBU22 RBU41 2 5 218 100 Ground terminal M5 screw SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 12 suoljeoijinads Specifications 9 3 Options 9 13 Class 3 phase 200 V class Model name 3G3AX RBU21 RBU22 resistance Operating voltage oe ON OFF OFF 355 5 V 5 or 10 setting available Operation indication LED ON Lit Maximum number of units for parallel 5 units interlocking operation 2 120 W 180 120 W 20 resistance Allowable consecutive ON 10 s max 0 5 s max time Allowable Cycle 1 10 Cycle 1 80 operation cycle 10 s ON 90 s OFF 0 5 s ON 40 s OFF Power Instantaneous 0 73 kW Instantaneous 6 6 kW consumption Short time rating 120 W Short time rating 120 W Built in relay specifications Built in resistor Built in Resistor Overheat Contact rating protection 12 VDC 42 VDC Minimum load 1mA Protective functions 10 to 50 C Ambient temperature fi Specifications Built in Resistance Type 3G3AX RBU21 RBU22 RBU41 3 phase 400 V class RBU41 34 Q min ON 725 5 V OFF 710 5 V 5 or 10 setting available 120 W 180 x 2 main element
9. Ground terminal l Do not connect the Do not connect to the motor power supply wires Power supply Motor Withstand Voltage Test Do not conduct a withstand voltage test on any part of the Inverter Doing the test may cause damage or deteriorate to the parts inside the Inverter Checking the Inverter and Converter The quality of the Inverter and converter can be checked using a tester p Preparation 1 Disconnect the externally connected power supply wires R L1 S L2 T L3 the motor connection wires U T1 V T2 W T3 and the generation control resistance P 2 RB 2 Prepare a tester Usable range is 19 measurement resistance g Checking method The quality can be judged by measuring the conduction state of Inverter main circuit terminal blocks R L1 S L2 T L3U T1 V T2 W T3 RB P 2 and N while alternating the tester polarity SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 8 6 S UBUDd UIeE pue UOI DedSuU Inspection and Maintenance 8 1 Inspection and Maintenance Before checking measure the voltage between P 2 and N at DC voltage range in advance and confirm that the smoothing capacitor is sufficiently discharged A nearly infinite value is shown in a no conduction state The value shows the range from a few to a few dozen Q in a conduction state However the value may not be infinite if the momentous conduction occurs through the influence of the smoothing capacit
10. O 3 3 gt O D ot O TI c 5 O Oo 5 no Reserved a 9h SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 56 Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register 2 Parameter Function name No No C026 141Bh MP Selection C027 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Multi function Relay 141Ah Output MA MB Function Selection 6 57 S Page parameters resolution 00 RUN During RUN 01 FA1 Constant speed reached 02 FA2 Set frequency min reached 03 OL Overload warning 04 OD PID excessive deviation 05 AL Alarm output 06 FA3 Set frequency only 07 OTQ Overtorque Undertorque 09 UV Signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ During torque limit 11 RNT RUN time over 12 ONT Power on time over 13 THM Thermal warning 19 BRK Brake release 20 BER Brake error 21 ZS OHZz 22 DSE Excessive speed deviation 23 POK Position ready 24 FA4 Set frequency min reached 2 25 FAS Set frequency only 2 26 OL2 Overload warning 2 27 FVdc Analog FV disconnection detection 28 Fildc Analog FI disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output 32 NDc Communication disconnection detection 33 LOG1 Logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 Logic operation output 2 35 LOG3 Logic operation output 3 39 WAC Capacitor life warning 40 WAF Cooling fan life warning si
11. posre VSS Tran Bias Ii iig dood oO Amount P058 Pulse Train Limit O to 100 100 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Default Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range A setting Multi step P060 Position Command 0 Multi step Position P061 Command 1 Multi step P062 Position Command 2 Multi step P063 Position Position range setting reverse side to Command 3 position range setting Multi step forward side H P064 Position Displays MSB 4 digits Command 4 including Simple position control Multi step P065 Position Command 5 Multi step P066 Position Command 6 Multi step P067 Position Command 7 Zero Return 00 Zero return mode 1 Mode 01 Zero return mode 2 Zero Return PO69 Direction Selection Zero Return Mode 090 t6 10 00 100 0 5 00 1 Frequency Zero Return Mode 0 00 to 99 99 5 00 2 Frequency 100 0 to 400 0 l 00 Forward side 01 Reverse side lt OD Gu lt OD Gu Simple position control U U U U O O O O J N N O Ql O CO Position Range P072 Setting Forward 2 0 98 438 499 268435455 Displays MSB 4 digits Side Position Range 268 435 455 to 0 P073 Setting Reverse Displays MSB 4 digits 268435455 Side including Positioning 00 Limit Mode Selection 01 Not limited Encoder P077 Disconnection 0 0 to 10 0 1 0 Detection Time
12. ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseneseneeseenees 5 94 Frequency Matching Restart and Frequency Pull in Restart 5 94 Restart Upon Momentary Power Interruption Undervoltage Overvoltage Overcurrent 5 96 Reso IRS EE 5 100 Free run Stop Function ER 5 103 Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function USP 9 105 Deceleration Stop at Power off Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss Function 5 106 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals 5 110 Electronic Thermal Function ccccccecceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 5 110 Overload Limit Overload Wammg 5 114 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Overcurrent Suppression FUNCTION ccc cece eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 116 Overvoltage Suppression Function During Deceleration 5 117 Alarm Signal EE 5 119 Extemal THPEX E EE 5 120 Thermistor Trip Fupnchon esse eeaeeseeeseeaeenes 5 120 Signal During RUN RUN A 5 121 Frequency Arrival Signal FA1 to FADS cccssceeseeeeseeeeeeeenees 9 122 RUN Time Power ON Time Over HNTIONTI 9 124 Al amp 725 AO EE 5 125 Output Signal Logic Operation LOG1 to LOGS 5 125 Capacitor Life Warning NA 5 126 Cooling Fan Operation BEE 5 127 Cooling Fan Life Signal OWWAF 5 127 Communication Disconnection Detection Signal NDc 5 128 Starting Contact Signal ERT 5 128 Fin Overheat Warning OF 5 129 L
13. uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 63 Register EE EE Parameter Monitor and setting Data Se No No parameters resolution g Multi step Speed Position Determination C169 R W 0 to 200 1 5 63 Time 00 Disabled Auto tuning Selection Hoot Rw oh SEN DEES 5 146 Enabled motor rotates Standard motor 1502h Motor Parameter 1 H002 R W parameter 5 145 Auto tuning parameter 1503h Motor Capacity 1 H003 R W 5 145 1504h Motor Pole Number 1 H004 R W 04 1506h Speed Response H005 0 to 1000 1 5 145 1507h Stabilization Parameter 1 H006 0 to 255 5 81 1508h to Reserved 1515h 1516h Motor 1 Parameter R1 H020 R W 1 to 65530 0 001 Q 5 145 smR E re empena o e smen ff RER H024 WA HIGH 0 001 5 145 Motor 1 Parameter J 1 to 9999000 2 151Eh SC R W Tom LOW 151Fh to Reserved 1524h SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULILI 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page No No parameters resolution ssh eer H030 R W 1 to 65530 0 001 Q 5 145 Auto tuning Data 1526h Reserved 1527h Ge E Ra H031 R W 1 to 65530 0 001 Greg 5 145 Auto tuning Data 1528h Reserved 1529h Ge KEE H032 R W 1 to 65530 0 01 Ta 5 145 Auto tuning Data 152Ah Reserved o 152Bh Motor 1 eae e H033 R W 1 to 65530 0 0
14. Inverter operation gt Switching to commercial power supply operation Commercial power supply operation gt Switching to inverter operation SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 80 suoinoun Functions 5 6 Operation Functions Ensure that MC3 and MC2 are mechanically interlocked Otherwise the Inverter may be damaged EN Reference If the earth leakage breaker ELB has tripped because of ground fault etc the commercial power supply circuit will not work either If backup is necessary supply power from a commercial power supply circuit ELBC For FWY RVY and CSY use low voltage relays Refer to the above sequence for timing If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching extend the setting of Restart Standby Time b003 For the Commercial Switching operation refer to Examples of connections and timing of Commercial Switching operation The system can also be set to automatically restart upon power on This does not require the CS terminal For details refer to Reset RS on page 5 100 Stabilization Parameter 5 81 This function is used for adjustment to reduce motor hunting In case of motor hunting check whether motor capacity H003 H203 and motor pole number selection H004 H204 match your motor If they do not match them If the motor s primary resistance is smaller than that of the standard motor increase the H006 H206 set value gradually To run a motor with
15. P034 Reference 0 to 200 yes yes 5 Setting 5 00 Disabled 5 l l w o P036 Torque Bias Mode pel VIA MEDIJA no no ra Operator 05 Optional board gr S P037 Torque Bias Value 200 to 200 ro yes yes Toraue Bias 00 As per sign P038 qu 01 Depends on the RUN no no Polarity Selection S direction SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 38 Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode 4 39 Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range perau Page setting Speed Limit Value in Torque 0 00 to 99 99 5 P039 Control 100 0 to 120 0 me E Forward e Speed Limit o Value in Torque 0 00 to 99 99 5 156 S P040 control 100 0 to 120 0 ne L Reverse Speed Torque P041 Control O to 1000 ms Switching Time Communications P044 Error Detection 0 00 to 99 99 S 1 00 Timer Setting 00 Trip Operation at 01 Deceleration stop and Host then trip a P045 Sommunications 02 Ignore Error Selection 03 Free run stop e 04 Deceleration stop es pose Assembly Instance 00 to 20 8 y Number 00 Trip E Operation at Idle e Ste stop and O P048 Mode Detection en IP Settin 02 Ignore g 03 Free run stop 04 Deceleration stop sas hE ae 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 Speed Setting Pose cee 1 0 to 32 0 25 0 kHz S Frequency Scale gt Pulse Train c PO56 Frequency Filter 0 01 to 2 00 0 10 S g Time Parameter 5 82 oO
16. Less than 60 of the rated current 15 0 60 55 of the rated current 12 0 72 67 of the rated current 9 0 84 79 of the rated current 6 0 96 91 of the rated current 3 0 When b089 set to 01 Carrier frequency sowo y y dE kees HH E TE e _ a 3 0 kHz nnn Roses nl ETEN 0 50 2 l r 00 60 72 84 96 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Output current 9 52 suoljoun 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method When b089 set to 02 Carrier frequency 15 0kHz 12 0kHz 9 0kHz 6 0kHz 3 0kHz 0 40 50 60 70 80 Fin temperature C The carrier frequency reduction rate is 2 kHz per second The upper limit of Carrier Frequency b083 variable with this function conforms to the set value of carrier frequency b083 and the lower limit is 3 KHz If b083 is 3 kHz or below this function is disabled regardless of the setting of b089 Functions 5 53 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method Motor 2 Control Function SET The motors specified by two different parameters can be switched and controlled accordingly Switch between the two motors can be conducted by allocating 08 SET to Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 and then turning the SET terminal ON OFF OFF Motor 1 control ON Motor 2 control Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting C001 to C007 Multi function 08 SET Mot
17. ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Description 6 28 uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Coil No 0032h 0033h 0034h 0035h 0036h 0037h 0038h 0039h 003Ah 003Bh 003Ch 003Dh 003Eh 003Fh 0040h 0041h 0042h 0043h 0044h 0045h 0046h 0047h 0048h 0049h 004Ah 004Bh 004Ch 004Dh 6 29 Function name FBV FB status output e NDc communication 1 disconnection detection O LOG1 logic operation output 1 e Ki LOG2 logic operation output 2 e S LOG3 logic operation output 3 e 7 Reserved WAC capacitor life warning e R WAF cooling fan life warning e 2 FR starting contact signal e S OHF fin overheat warning e 2 LOC low current signal e i Reserved IRDY operation ready e k FWR during forward operation e k RVR during reverse operation e i MJA fatal fault signal es 5 l l 1 Data being written e 0 1 man In i ben Overrun error 0 i a Framing error 0 l 1 Payer In Ge R W Description ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Being written Normal Error No error 2 Error No error 2 Error No error 2 Error No error 2 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Coil No 004Eh
18. 0 75 sGamxz azoo7 AWGIG M35 15A 15 scamx2 az01s AWGI4 M4 X30 hao asa S 2 2 3G3MX2 A2022 SECH e AA H20 0A seamxe az037 AWGIO M4 D has aw 55 scamx2 azoss AWGe m5 DI vs aoa AWG6 M5 EX100 7 5 3G3MX2 A2075 14 13 75A H50 OA Voltage output class Tightening torque Breaker ELB c T Q A N CA CA Bech sewszang AWG4 Me Sie 60A scamx2 aztso AWG2 M8 ore 80A 0 4 3G3MX2 A4004 o SC GE 10A 0 75 sGaMx2 agoor AWGT6 M4 10A 10A 15 3camx2 a4o15 DEI MA i 22 acmon AWS 4 M4 DI 20 wm sonase 20 3G3Mx2 A4030 E a SE H20 5A 2 15 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL esch ech ech NO OO 2 2 Wiring Terminal Fuse size Earth Inverter model Power block screw LEAKAGE Magnetic class J cable size terminal ge contactor Rated mm block width MC 1600 V AIC mm 200kA 0 1 3G3MX2 AB001 ER GE SE 10A 02 sGawx2 apoo2 AWS6 m38 10A SE scamxe agoos AWGI6 M35 10A f 0 75 acamxz asoo7 AWS12 M4 15A AWG10 M4 EX30 1 5 3G3MX2 AB015 5 5 10 20A H20 20A AWG10 M4 EX30 2 2 3G3MX2 AB022 5 5 10 20A H20 30A Note 1 Applicable devices assume use of a standard 3 phase 4 pole motor Note 2 Select an applicable circuit breaker by also considering the cutoff capacity Use an inverter type Use one circuit breaker for one inverter according to the applications shown in the above table N
19. 1229h 122Ah 122Bh 122Ch 122Dh 122Eh 122Fh 1230h 1231h 1232h 1233h 1234h 1235h 1236h 1237h 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Fumetionname PC Rw Function name No A026 Multi step Speed HIGH Reference 6 A026 LOW A027 Multi step Speed HIGH Reference 7 Multi step Speed Reference 8 A028 LOW Multi step Speed Reference 9 A029 LOW Multi step Speed Reference 10 A030 LOW A031 Multi step Speed HIGH Reference 11 A031 LOW A032 Multi step Speed HIGH Reference 12 A032 LOW A033 Multi step Speed HIGH Reference 13 A033 LOW A034 Multi step Speed HIGH Reference 14 A034 LOW A035 Multi step Speed HIGH Reference 15 A035 LOW KEE A027 A028 HIGH a Starting frequency to nth A029 Starting frequency to nth A030 Starting frequency to nth wo wo wo RW rn Starting frequency to nth R W maximum frequency Monitor and setting Data Page parameters resolution 0 01 Hz RW Starting frequency to nth maximum frequency R W maximum frequency R W maximum frequency R W maximum frequency 5 63 Starting frequency to nth R W maximum frequency Starting frequency to nth R W maximum frequency Starting frequency to nth R W maximum frequency R W o Starting frequency to nth R W maximum frequency R W rn Starting frequency to nth R W max
20. 3G3MX2 A2004 AB004 3G3MX2 A2007 3G3AX 1 25 mm DL2002 i min NO 5 2x8 z 3G3AX 1 25 mm DL2004 i min 5 2x8 Cc CO Wu Wu ech N oO Co co N N on on R T O O N on on x lt on on MN O O ag e on on O O 3G3AX 2 mm DL2007 i min 105 Wu O N N 5 2x8 rs ech Se Fig 1 3G3AX 2 mm DL2015 min 115 56 N N 5 2x8 N ech O N Wu N gt gt O O MES O z AB007 3G3MX2 Een A2015 100 116 105 7 2 aoe ABO15 3 1 phase 3G3MX2 2 200 VAC 3G3SAX A2022 100 118 120 6x9 4 26 95 mm DL2037 AB022 3G3AX 3G3MX2 8 mm DL2055 A2037 100 210 110 We eg 3G3AX 3G3MX2 Se 14 mm DL2075 A2055 min Fig 2 3G3AX 3G3MX2 r 22 mm DL2110 A2075 min 3G3AX 3G3MX2 DL2150 A2110 256 3G3AX 3G3MX2 60 mm pL2220 F 9 3 A2150 151 E O x rs 3G3AX DL4007 3G3MX2 A4004 a N x CO SE 3G3AX DL4015 3G3MX2 A4007 BE Wu o N x CO O N N N O Wu O O oO Ql O 3G3AX DL4022 116 O Wu 6x9 E D E E P P P OO OO D D CH P P Fig 1 3G3MX2 A4022 A4030 3G3AX DL4037 Zi O O HE oO N O 6x9 3 phase 3G3AX 400 VAC DL4055 3G3MX2 A4040 O O os OO CO E O x11 lt 3G3AX 3G3MX2 DL4075 A4055 3G3AX GC 146 120 250 SES 3G3MX2 GE A4075 120 252 A4110 3G3AX
21. Appendix 4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL cUL Standards Appendix 4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL cUL Standards EC Directives i Notes on EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility CE EMC Installation Guidelines You are required to satisfy the EMC directive 2004 108 EC when using a 3G3MX2 inverter in an EU country To satisfy the EMC directive and to comply with standard you need to use a dedicated EMC filter suitable for each model and follow the guidelines in this section Following table shows the compliance condition for reference Table 1 Condition for the compliance Model Cat Motor cable D 2 Table 2 Applicable EMC filter Input class Inverter model Filter model Schaffner 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 A2002 3G3MX2 A2004 3G3MX2 A2007 3G3MX2 A2015 3G3MX2 A2022 3G3MX2 A2037 FS24829 25 07 3G3MX2 A2055 3G3MX2 A2075 3G3MX2 A2110 FS24829 70 07 3G3MX2 A2150 FS24829 75 07 3G3MX2 AB001 3G3MX2 AB002 FS24828 8 07 1 phase 200V 3G3MX2 AB004 class 3G3MX2 AB007 3G3MX2 AB015 FS24828 27 07 3G3MX2 AB022 FS24829 8 07 3 phase 200V FS24829 16 07 class FS24829 50 07 Appendix 9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Appendix 4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL cUL Standards Input class Inverter model Filter model Schaffner 3G3MX2 A4004 3G3MX2 A4007 3G3MX2 A4015 3G3MX2 A4022 FS24830 12 07 3 phase 400 V 3G3MX2 A4030 class 3G3MX2 A4040 FS24830 15 07 3G
22. C lt D on lt D on C O O yes yes es es es 5 177 gt gt gt gt gt es C O J O es lt C O GN J O C O Be Ql User parameter C O ech H J O es lt O e O no C O e N O Parameter List C CG CO J O no es lt lt lt es es lt es es J O es es lt C C C C C C O O O O O O N N N N N gt Q N CH GO el O 4 45 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode 3 S Default Parameter No F t Monitor or data range setting Page User 25 User 26 User 27 ZOAN Selection U028 User 28 Selection no 5 177 User parameter ee d001 to P186 PS 1SI7 1 J WLILed SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 46 Functions Describes the details of each parameter Ss M NtOr MOGC spa cess Eug EE EES 5 1 Output Frequency Monitor d001 eee ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 5 1 Output Current Monitor d002 cece cecceeeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeaes 5 1 Rotation Direction Monitor TdOO 31 5 2 PID Feedback Value Monitor IdOO4A cc ccceccceeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeees 5 2 Multi function Input Monitor TdOO2 eee ccecceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeenes 5 3 Multi function Output Monitor IoOO6 ec eccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 3 Output Frequency Monitor After Conversion d007 0 5 4 Real Frequency Monitor TOOO 5 5 Tor
23. Check parameters P072 and P073 Check the zero point 5 83 5 160 5 161 1 It cannot be reset with STOP RESET keys Perform a reset by reconnecting the power or operating the RS reset terminal SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL suoljei9doO sduUeUDjUIeI Maintenance Operations 7 1 Error Display and Remedial Actions Warning Display If the set parameter contradicts other set value a warning will be displayed and the program LED indicator will flash The table below lists the warnings to be displayed and the conditions in which these warnings are displayed If a warning is displayed change the applicable parameter by referring to the content of the table Issuing a RUN command will not rewrite the parameter to the correct value automatically The last displayed warning is stored in d090 Warning display Warning display condition HI Frequency Upper Limit 1 A061 ka Maximum Frequency 1 A004 HOTZ Frequency Lower Limit 1 A062 K EEN Frequency 1 A004 Output Frequency Setting F001 Al Maximum Frequency 1 A004 La I ear step Speed 1 Reference 0 heat uum we Output Frequency Setting F001 Multi ai requency Upper Limit 1 A061 step Speed 1 Reference 0 en Output Frequency Setting F001 Multi step Speed 1 Reference 0 A020 Frequency Lower Limit 1 A062 HOJI Starting Frequency b082 EH Upper Limit 1 A061 Bose Starting Frequency b082 Frequency L
24. Deceleration Use a Braking Resistor or Regenerative Braking Unit The Inverter trips or The operation to be taken executes a free run upon Digital Operator or deceleration disconnection is not stop when the selected properly Digital Operator or LCD Operator cable is disconnected Set Selection of Operation on Digital Operator Disconnection b165 to 02 Ignore Reference Page 9 15 5 81 5 49 5 49 5 51 5 144 5 24 5 66 5 27 5 86 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Condition Remedial actions If the setting of Communication Speed Selection C071 Communication Parity Selection C074 or Communication Stop Bit Selection C075 was changed reconnect the power or perform a reset by turning the RS terminal ON and then OFF Operation setting Changes to cannot be communication performed via parameters are not Modbus reflected communication Modbus RTU The setting of RUN Command Selection A002 A202 is not correct The setting of Frequency Reference Selection A001 A201 is not correct The communication Set the correct communication speed in speed is not set correctly Communication Speed Selection C071 The station number is not set correctly or duplicated The communication parity is not set correctly The communication stop bit is not set correctly The wiring is incorrect Correctly wire the RS and RS terminals on the control
25. Describes the functions of the Inverter Describes the Modbus RTU communication Describes the causes and their countermeasures if the Inverter fails including the solutions to possible troubles troubleshooting Describes items for periodical inspection and or maintenance for the Inverter Provides Inverter specifications as well as the specifications and dimensions of peripheral devices Describes the derating chart capacitor life curve compliance with international standards and index SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Contents Jett CICLO BEE 1 Read and Understand this Manual 2 salet e EI e 5 Precautions for Safe Uee nere T Precautions for Correct Use 8 Checking Before Unpacking 00nannnnnnnnannnnonnonnonnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnrnnennee 10 PROVISION RISO EE 11 ADOUT THIS VE IR EE 12 Chapter1 Overview 1 1 FUNCIONS EE 1 1 1 2 Appearance and Names Of arts 1 4 Chapter2 Design 2 1 Jee lee EE 2 1 P WNN EE 2 6 Chapter3 Operation 3 1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator nnnnnnnannennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrennnenne 3 1 3 2 Operation Metho EE 3 7 J TES HE 3 10 Oe PON EE 3 12 Chapter4 Parameter List 4 1 MONKOrMOO G ioi E 4 1 4 2 FONCION ua 4 4 ChapterS Functions 5 1 MONOC Vleit 5 1 5 2 Basle F UNCUONS E 5 13 5 3 MPUVOLUPUCTErMINA S airnean R 5 29 ee E E ee eu EE 5 37 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method 5 46 90 QpPeraton in ed Le E 5 56 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Funcho
26. dm N Z CO N e N e N Z e 3 1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Mode key D Increment key Decrement key gt Enter key USB connector RJ45 connector SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 3 1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator Description Parameter is displayed Move to the beginning of the next function group Data is displayed Cancel the setting and return to the parameter display Individual input mode Move the blinking digit to the left Regardless of the displayed screen pressing and holding this key for 1 second or more displays the data for Output Frequency Monitor d001 These keys are used to increment decrement a parameter or set data Pressing and holding each key increases the incrementing decrementing speed Pressing the Increment and Decrement keys together activates the Individual Input MODE where each digit can be edited independently Parameter is displayed Move to the data display Data is displayed Confirm store the setting in the EEPROM and return to the parameter display Individual input mode Move the blinking digit to the right Use this connector mini B type to connect a PC The Inverter can still be operated from the Digital Operator even when it is being operated using a PC etc via USB communication Use this connector RS 422 to connect the optional Remote Operator Once t
27. 2 Forward rotation from the zero Reverse rotation from the zero Al c O prar L LL Position command CP3 CP2 CP1 Multi step position 0 Multi step position 1 Multi step position 2 Multi step position 3 Multi step position 4 Multi step position 5 0 1 Multi step position 6 Multi step position 7 zech To prevent an erroneous input due to a time lag between inputs in the multi step position command input mode the wait time until the terminal input is confirmed can be set using Multi step Speed Position Determination Time C169 This prevents the transition status before input establishment from being applied After an input change is detected data will be confirmed upon an elapse of the time set in C169 Note that the longer the determination time the slower the input response 5 165 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 12 Simple Position Control Function Determination Time C169 available Determination Time C169 Zero Position command CP1 CP2 CP3 Determination Time C169 TI O E O gt N SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 166 Functions 5 12 Simple Position Control Function Speed Position Switching Function SPD 5 167 To perform speed control operation in the simple position control mode turn ON this terminal While the SPD terminal is turned ON the current position counter remains at zero
28. 5 12 Remote operation function ee 5 71 KEE 5 100 Reverse rotation prevention function 5 157 Kor KEE 5 124 Rotation direction limit selection 222 22 5 23 Rotation direction monttor eee 5 2 RP EE 2 9 KEE 5 100 BRIN RE 5 121 RUN command eelechon eee 5 22 RUN command eource 5 133 RUN direction selection cece 5 23 RUN permission signal aa aononneennenannennnennn 5 63 RUN time over 5 124 Kai 5 22 ATA eee ee ener en ae ee ae ene ne ee eee 5 131 S Tee 5 170 Safety function selector switch 2 5 5 170 OERE E ee RE eee ee ee eee Sa eee 2 7 Selection of operation on digital operator ESCH tle ee es 5 86 INDEX 4 Sensorless vector Control 5 144 cal EE 5 54 Self EE 5 134 SFIO EE 5 63 eeh 5 84 Signal during forward operation 5 130 Signal during reverse operation 5 131 Signal during RUN 5 121 Simple position control mode 5 160 SIMIC NO GIG earshot tate Ge eege Ee 2 19 Soft lock FUNCTION ec ec eee ceteeeteeteeeeee 5 84 SOU CE IOGIC EE 2 19 Speed position switching function 5 167 See Eeer 5 56 Stabilization parameter cece 5 81 Start frequency cece ce ecseeeteeeteeeteeeteees 5 40 Slat PALO eege Eeer ebe 5 40 Start SClCCtION 0 0 cece cece ecteeeteeeteeeteees 5 40 User selechon EE 5 88 Starting contact snal cece 5 128 Starting frequency ou cece ccc cceeeetseeteeeeees 5 57 STOP key selechon ceeeeseeeeeteee 5 84 SLOP SCIOCUO
29. Feedforward 01 FV voltage I Selection 02 FI current ben gn A081 AVR Selection 1 00 Always ON D BEEN SS e A281 AVR Selection 2 92 OFF during deceleration el fmo Motor Incoming 500 Ce A082 Voltage 200V class 200 215 220 230 490 v Selection 1 240 5 26 Y Motor Incoming 400V class 380 400 415 440 Geen 5 148 z A282 Voltage 460 480 no no V 400 Selection 2 Aoga AYR Fher TIME pogo te 40 00 0 300 yes s Parameter A084 Deceleration 50 to 200 yes Voltage Gain 4 11 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Default Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range i setting RUN Mode 00 Normal operation Selection 01 Energy saving operation Energy saving Response Accuracy Adjustment 0 0 to 100 0 Operation mode acceleration deceleration SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode 4 12 1SI7 JoJOWIeIeY Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name 1st A092 Acceleration Time 2 2nd A292 Acceleration Time 2 1st A093 Deceleration Time 2 2nd A293 Deceleration Time 2 2 step A094 Acceleration Deceleration Selection 1 2 step A294 Acceleration Deceleration Selection 2 2 step A095 Acceleration Frequency 1 2 step A295 Acceleration Frequency 2 2 step A096 Deceleration Frequency 1 2 step A296 Deceleration Frequency 2 Acceleration A097 Pattern Selection Decelera
30. GE E i EE 9 12 Appendices Appendix 1 Deraling Table EE App 1 Appendix 2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Cumve cece ceccseec sees eeeeeeseesaeeeaneneess App 7 Appendix 3 LIfe E ga EE e E App 8 Appendix 4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL cUL Standards App 9 INDEX SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 15 Overview Be Describes the features operating procedures performance specifications and other aspects of this Unit 1 1 Functions 3G3MX2 Inverter Models International Standards EC Directives and UL cUL Standards 1 2 High performance Multi function Compact Inverter Supporting Wide ranging Applications 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Overview 1 1 Functions 1 1 Functions 3G3MX2 Inverter Models Max applicable motor capacity Enclosure Rated voltage i Model 3 phase 200 VAC IP20 3G3MX2 A2001 3 phase 400 VAC IP20 3G3MX2 A4004 1 phase 200 V AC IP20 0 1 kW mu O 75 kW 3G3MX2 AB007 2 2 kW 3 0 kW 3G3MX2 AB022 1 1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 1 1 Functions International Standards EC Directives and UL cUL Standards The 3G3MX2 Inverter meets the EC Directives and UL cUL standard requirements for worldwide use Classification Applicable standard EC Directives EMC directive EN61800 3 2004 Low voltage directive EN61800 5 1 2003 High performance Multi function Compact Inv
31. OMRON USER S MANUAL SYSDRIVE MX2 sexes Multi function Compact Inverter Introduction Introduction Thank you for choosing the multi function Inverter 3G3MX2 This User s Manual hereinafter called this manual describes the parameter setting methods required for installation wiring and operation of the 3G3MX2 model as well as troubleshooting and inspection methods This manual should be delivered to the actual end user of the product After reading this manual keep it handy for future reference This manual describes the specifications and functions of the product as well as the relations between them You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible with the product Intended readers This manual is intended for those with knowledge of the workings of electricity qualified electric engineers or the equivalent and also in charge of Introducing the control equipment Designing the control system Installing and or connecting the control equipment Field management SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 1 10148 To All Customers August 2010 OMRON Corporation Automation Systems HQ SYSDRIVE MX2 Series User s Manual Notification of Additional Information No 79 64 99 Thank you for supporting OMRON and OMRON products It was discovered that the following information is missing from the SYSDRIVE MX2 Series User s Manual We sincerely apologize for this
32. ON reference 15 TI C O E O gt N SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 604 5 6 Operation Functions With multi step speed binary operation the wait time until the terminal input is determined can be set using Multi step Speed Position Determination Time C169 set value x 10 ms Determination time This prevents the transition status before input establishment from being applied If no input is made during the time set in C169 the data is determined Note that the longer the determination time the slower the input response Determination Time ts Determination Time C169 Zero ee E C169 available Frequency reference Determination Time C169 EN CF1 input CF2 input CF3 input CF4 input i Bit Operation Selection of multi step speed references 0 to 7 becomes possible when SF1 to SF7 32 to 38 are allocated to Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 Use Multi step Speed References 1 to 7 A021 to A027 to set the frequencies for SF1 to SF7 Multi step speed operation is given priority over Frequency Reference Selection A001 However the frequency reference 0 conforms to the setting of Frequency Reference Selection A001 Multi step speed SF7 SF6 SF5 SF4 SF3 SF2 SF1 Speed reference 0 OFF Speed reference 1 ON Speed reference 2 OFF Speed reference 3 x x x x ON OFF OFF Speed reference 4 x x x ON OFF OFF OFF Speed refer
33. Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting C001 to C007 Multi function 65 AHD Analog command held 8 Input Selection Related functions C101 AHD input ON Analog input value Frequency reference If the control function is switched via the SET terminal with the AHD terminal turned ON the set frequency is retained To switch the control function turn OFF the AHD terminal once and keep the analog signal on hold again If this function is frequently used the internal EEROM element service life may be shortened SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 4 Analog Signal Analog Input Adjustment The analog input gain can be changed Use this function to fine tune analog input signals Use External Frequency Start End on page 5 40 to set for scale conversion from 0 to 10 V to 0 to 5 V for example Parameter Default Function name i Unit No setting 0 to 200 0 n Geh adao u The gain of input voltage is fine tuned SE 4 l 0 to 200 0 S SES PSEEEH The gain of input current is fine tuned a Frequency settings Maximum Ee G ss frequency 0 0 V 4 mA 5 V 12 mA 10 V 20 mA External Frequency Start End External Analog Input Frequency Reference FV SC terminal 0 to 10 V FI SC terminal 4 to 20 mA VR Volume on the external Digital Operator 3G3AX OP01 Parameter Default A Function name i Unit No setting A011 A101 FV FI VR 0 00 to 400 0 1000 Hz A16
34. Power EMC compatible Noise Filter Inverter model supply Type Schaffner Rating A 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 A2002 3G3MX2 A2004 3G3MX2 A2007 3G3MX2 A2015 3G3MX2 A2022 3G3MX2 A2037 3G3MX2 A2055 3G3MX2 A2075 3G3MX2 A2110 3G3MX2 A2150 3G3MX2 AB001 3G3MX2 AB002 1 phase 3G3MX2 AB004 Supported soon 200 VAC 3G3MX2 AB007 3G3MX2 AB015 3G3MX2 AB022 3G3MX2 A4004 3G3MX2 A4007 3G3MX2 A4015 3G3MX2 A4022 3 phase 363MX2 A4030 400 VAC 3G3MX2 A4040 3G3MX2 A4055 3G3MX2 A4075 3G3MX2 A4110 3G3MX2 A4150 3 phase 200 VAC Note The noise filter type is the same regardless of the CT rating or VT rating Specifications 9 25 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Output Noise Filter 83G3AX NFOxx 9 3 Options i Dimensional Drawing 3G3AX NFO01 NFOO2 3G3AX NFO03 NFO04 NFO05 NFOO06 ak SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 26 suoljeoijinads Specifications 9 3 Options Specifications Inverter model ES NEE current 3 phase AC 1 phase AC 3 phase AC HxWxD mm kg 3G3AX NFO01 A 200Vclass 200Vclass 400 V class 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 AB001 3G3MX2 A4004 e D ABOO2 A4007 E 3G3AX NFO0O2 12 3 pha
35. Setting range 0 to 10 Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level 2 9 132 0 to 100 no ignore 9 132 O to 100 no ignore SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Default setting Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range pose 10 to 50 Temperature b078 Integrated Cleared with the Enter key Power Clear after changing to 01 Integrated b079 Power Display 1 to 1000 Scale po82 Starting 0 10 to 9 99 100 Frequency 2 0 to 15 0 10 0 10 0 Carrier heavy load light load or high b083 Frequency frequency With derating 4 2 Function Mode rh N 3 D H D GO SE N p LD N D ES lt Wa T N q cn ech e H 00 Initialization disabled 01 Fault monitor clear b084 Initialization 02 Initializes data ge Selection 03 Fault monitor clear Data initialization 5 174 04 Do not set Initialization Frequency b086 Conversion 0 01 to 99 99 yes 5 4 5 Coefficient D 0 Enabled So Ae 1 Disabled yes 5 84 Selection l Only reset is enabled 0O Hz restart b088 Free run Stop Frequency matching yes 5 103 Selection restart Frequency pull in restart Disabled Automatic Enabled depends on b089 Carrier current no 5 52 Reduction Enabled depends on fin temperature Usage Rate of b090 Regenerative 0 0 to 100 0 yes 5 141 Braking SE Deceleration stop 00 Always 01 Only during operation b092 Cool
36. and NO contact between MB MC Pulses are output RS 485 port RS RS 485 differential signal RS RS 485 differential signal Specifications Input pulse 32 kHz max Voltage between input and SC ON voltage 4 V min OFF voltage 1 V max Allowable max voltage 27 VDC Input pulse 1 8 kHz max ON voltage 18 V min OFF voltage 3 V max Allowable max voltage 27 VDC Load current 5 mA at 24 V Open collector output Between each terminal and PC Allowable max voltage 27 V Allowable max current 50 mA Voltage drop when ON 4 V max Max contact capacity MA MC 250 VAC 2 A resistance 0 2 A induction MB MC 250 VAC 1 A resistance 0 2 A induction Contact min capacity 100 VAC 10mA 5 VDC 100mA Output pulse 32 kHz max Output voltage 10 VDC Allowable max current 2 mA Max speed 115 2 kbps Built in Terminal Resistor 200 Q Slide switch selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 2 Wiring Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals Before wiring make sure that the CHARGE indicator is OFF Once the power supply is turned on the capacitor in the Inverter is charged with high voltage for a while even after the power supply is turned off and regardless of whether the Inverter is running or not If you are going to change cable connections after the power supply is turned off wait for at least 10 minutes Before wiring check for a residu
37. train input P057 Pulse Train Bias Amount 100 to 100 Frequency Reference 06 Pulse train frequency A001 l Selection A076 PID Feedback Selection 03 Pulse train frequency A141 Operation Frequency Selection 1 A142 Operation Frequency Selection 2 Frequency Hz ES 1 measurement 1 sT Frequency Scale P055 1 0 to 32 kHz Bias limit Primary Delay Filter P056 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Pulse Train Frequency Specify the input pulse frequency at Scale the motor s Maximum Frequency Set the filter time constant for pulse 07 Pulse train frequency Parameter i Default Function name i U No setting k 25 0 1 P058 Pulse Train Limit 0 to 100 02 02 03 Hz Maximum Frequency A004 nit Hz S D 0 Reference 9 82 suoljoun 5 6 Operation Functions V f Control with Speed Feedback This function performs V f control along with slip compensation by loading as feedbacks FB the pulse trains from the encoder that have been input to the RP and EB terminals When this function is used set Control Method A044 A244 to 00 Constant torque characteristics 01 Reduced torque characteristics or 02 Free V f setting Refer to Encoder Connection on page 5 158 for details on encoder wiring and feedback pulse selection Parameter Default Function name S Unit No setting Pulse Train Input Terminal 01 Feedback pulse P003 i R
38. 02 Odd 1 1 bit 2 2 bits 00 Trip 01 Trip after deceleration stop CH NO l 02 Ignore 03 Free run 04 Deceleration stop 0 00 Timeout disabled 0 01 to 99 99 0 to 1000 3 D SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 4 Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Protocol 6 4 Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Protocol Follow the procedures below in regards to communication between the external control device and the Inverter 1 3 External control device Time Inverter Wait time Communication error timeout time C077 Silent interval C078 1 Frame to be sent from the external control device to the Inverter Query 2 Frame to be returned from the Inverter to the external control device Response 3 Unless the Inverter completes reception of a query from the host within the time set in C077 after the Inverter completes a response response transmission the Inverter becomes ready to receive the first data again In this case the Inverter sends no response Also the Inverter s operation conforms to the setting of Operation Selection on Communication Error C076 For details refer to Chapter 4 Parameter List The receiving timeout monitor will be started after the first transmission reception is performed after power on or reset Timeout will not occur until reception or transmission is performed Response from the Inverter Frame 2 will be output as return after the
39. 1102h which is smaller by 1 than the register number 1103h The register number less 1 corresponds to the register address 3 Specifies the number of actual bytes to change to not the number of holding registers Refer to Exceptional Response on page 6 18 if the writing into the multiple registers cannot be performed normally SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 16 uoljoUNy UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No Multiple Holding Register Read or Write 17h Writes into or reads from consecutive multiple registers Example Write 50 00 Hz into Output Frequency Setting F001 of the Inverter with Slave Address 1 and Read Output Frequency Monitor Value d001 Query No Field name SCH Slave address 01 Parameter No 17 Read register start address MSB 10 Read register start address LSB 00 Register address Register number 1 1 2 3 4 5 Number of read registers MSB 00 6 7 8 Number of read registers LSB 02 Write register start address MSB 00 Write register start address LSB 00 9 Number of write registers MSB 00 Register address Register number 1 10 Number of write registers LSB 02 12 Written data MSB 00 e 13 0000 1388h 5000d gt 50 00 Hz 16 CRC 16 MSB F4 17 CRC 16 LSB 86 Response i E 5 Read data 1 LSB 00 6 Read data 2 MSB 13 0000 1388h 5000d gt 50 00 Hz 7 Read dat
40. 1610h to Reserved 1619h 161Ah Sie O war P026 RW 0 to 1500 0 1 Sie O Level Speed D tion E ae teip P ea re P027 R W 0 to 12000 0 01 Hz Detection Level 161Ch to Reserved 161Eh Acceleration Deceleration Time Input P031 EH 5 2 Type 03 Do not set ean Reeves Cd e 00 Terminal FV Torque Reference Input P033 R W ole Terminal FI Selection 03 Digital Operator 06 Do not set 5 156 mee EE P034 R W 0 to 200 1 Setting ean Reeved Cd 00 Disabled 1624h Torque Bias Mode P036 R W 01 Digital Operator 05 Do not set 1625h Torque Bias Value P037 200 to 200 1 5 156 Torque Bias Polarit eeh 1626h cus y P038 R W 01 Depends on the RUN Selection direction TTT Speed Limit Value i HIGH Rw Aere 0 to 12000 0 01 Hz ee Torque Control forward P039 D LOW 1629h Sey a ETEN SE 5 156 AT eh 0 to 12000 0 01 Hz er Torque Control reverse Z i S tow 162Bh eo ee Control P041 RIW 0to 1000 id Switching Time 162Ch to Reserved 1633h 1634h to Reserved 1638h SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name i Page No i parameters resolution 1639h Pulse Train Frequency P055 R W 10 to 320 Input frequency 0 1 kHz Scale at maximum frequency Pulse Train Frequency 163Ah Filter Time Parameter P056 R W 1 to 200 0 01 sS 5 82 163Bh Pul
41. 2 4 Hz During acceleration ON at 60 1 2 58 8 Hz During deceleration OFF at 60 x 2 4 57 6 Hz i Set frequency min reached 02 FA2 24 FA4 This signal is output when the frequency exceeds the level set by Arrival Frequency During Acceleration C042 C045 or Arrival Frequency During Deceleration C043 C046 C042 C045 A C043 C046 fon ie Dm f off IN Set frequency FA2 FA4 output fon 1 of the maximum frequency foff 2 of the maximum frequency i Set frequency only 06 FA3 25 FA5 This signal is output only when the frequency corresponds to the level set by Arrival Frequency During Acceleration C042 C045 or Arrival Frequency During Deceleration C043 C046 C042 C045 d C043 C046 Output frequency FA3 FA5 output fon 1 of the maximum frequency foff 2 of the maximum frequency SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals RUN Time Power ON Time Over RNT ONT The RUN time power ON time over RNT ONT signal is output when the total sum of the Inverter power ON time and RUN time exceeds the time set in Power ON Time Level b034 Ee Default Function name Unit setting ae disabled 1 to 9999 RUN Time Power Set in increments of 10 hours 10 to 99 990 b034 ON Time Level hours 1000 to 6553 Set in increments of 100 hours 100 000 to 655 350 hours MOE UREN I AR
42. 48 20 38 ae 51 Dimensions width 140 x 180 x 220 x x height mm 68 x 128 108 x 128 140 x 260 350 EES 122 5 145 5 170 5 170 5 175 mm 1 The BRD usage is 10 Built in Braking Resistor circuit separate Discharge Resistor SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 1 Standard Specification List Three phase 400 V Class CT Heavy load VT Light load Function name 3 phase 400 V Model name 3G3MX2 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4030 A4040 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 a eepe e oo a os rs e etoj i eps fe s alo a Se eee eee S 0 wal wov or ta 2a 99 45 se 78 Desen veo 257 Rated input voltage 3 phase 380 V 15 to 480 V 10 50 60 5 Red x Rated output 3 phase 380 to 480 V The output cannot exceed the incoming voltage voltage Short time deceleration braking torque Discharge Resistor not connected Kg Kg Braking Resistor Min circuit connectable resistance DI Dimensions width 140 x x height mm 108 x 128 128 140 x 260 180 x 296 Dimensions depth 143 5 170 5 170 5 mm 1 The BRD usage is 10 Built in Braking Resistor circuit Separate Discharge Resistor suoljeoijinads SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 2 Specifications 9 1 Standard Specification List Single phase 200 V class CT Heavy load VT Light load Function name 1 phase 200 V Model name 3G3MX2 ABOO1 AB002 AB004 AB
43. A001 Frequency Reference Selection AA When data is displayed If data is changed all digits will blink Kee The new data is not yet reflected while its digits are still blinking Confirm and store the changes and return to the parameter display Cancel the change and return to the parameter display em G D p O Q en O C 5 ei Pressing the Increment Decrement keys simultaneously in the parameter display i i Function group hog l or data display can change the values o D quickly and with ease For details refer to the next page l Function group uo Return to the function group d after the function group U ee Return to d001 3 3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 0 D 8 Cc D O 5 Q S D 2 3 1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator g Example of Basic Operations An example of basic parameter change operations is given below lt Operation example of changing RUN Command Selection A002 from Digital Operator 02 to Terminal Block 01 when 0 00 is shown on the output frequency monitor screen after the power has been turned ON gt 2 Press the Mode Key to 1 The d001 Output Frequency Monitor display the parameters data is displayed during power ON time Default setting EEN gt Output Frequency Monitor 3 Press the Mode Key to move the function group lt lt 9 J 4
44. A203 to 1000 0 Frequency 2 400 0 Hz 1000 0 Hz A011 FV Start Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 Hz om 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 A012 FV End Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 Hz a 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 A044 Control Method 1 High frequency Mode ee 1 7th power lt VC if low ie 1 7th power lt VC if speed gt low speed gt Free V f setting Free V f setting Sensorless vector control A244 Control Method 2 VC VC VP 1 7th power lt VC if low VP 1 7th power lt VC if speed gt low speed gt Free V f setting Free V f setting 3 Sensorless vector control A059 DC Injection 2 0 to 15 0 kHz 2 0 to 10 0 kHz 5 0 Braking Carrier Frequency TI O O GU A063 Jump Jump Frequency 1 1 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 to 400 00 Hz om o 00 to 1 000 00 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 A064 Zooo Frequency ics 00 to 10 00 Hz Ll all i 00 to 100 00 Hz 0 50 Width 1 A065 Jump Jump Frequency 2 2 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 to 400 00 Hz om o 00 to 1 000 00 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 A066 a Frequency Eh 00 to 10 00 Hz E 00 to 100 00 Hz 0 50 Width 2 A067 Jump Jump Frequency 3 3 0 00 to 400 00 0 00 to 400 00 Hz om o 00 to 1 000 00 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 A068 BEE Frequency E e to 10 00 Hz e e to 100 00 Hz 0 50 Width 3 A069 Acceleration Stop 0 00 to 400 00 Hz 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 Frequency A092 1st Acceleration 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 10 00 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 15 00 Time 2
45. Buyer and Omron relating to the Products and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties e Severability If any provi sion hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid such provision shall not invalidate any other provision f Setoff Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice g Definitions As used herein including means including without limitation and Omron Compa nies or similar words mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect subsidiary or affiliate thereof Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use 1 Suitability of Use Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyers application or use of the Product At Buyers request Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Prod uct in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyers application product or system Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a non exhaustive list of
46. C Side by side _ 50 C Normal installation E E E ET E E E E E 6 8 10 12 14 16kHz 6 8 10 12 14 kHz Carrier frequency Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A4007 Heavy load rating 3 4 A Light load rating 4 1 A 40 C Side by side _ 50 C Normal installation 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16kHz 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 kHz Carrier frequency Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A2037 Heavy load rating 17 5 A Light load rating 19 6 A SS Rae So o pss f So j E mpage 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kHz Carrier frequency Carrier frequency Appendix 3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 AD000 Appendix 1 Derating Table 3G3MX2 A4040 Heavy load rating 9 2 A ET E E D E ME ET E OT leceessecrcdieresuscies 40 C Normal installation reer Stree 40 C Side by side 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 kHz 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kHz Carrier frequency Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A2075 Heavy load rating 33 0 A 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 kHz 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kHz Carrier frequency Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A4075 Heavy load rating 18 0 A Light load rating 23 0 A A 40 C Normal installation 50 C Normal installation 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 kHz 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kHz Carrier frequency Carrier frequency SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACILILID Appendix 4 Appendix 1 Derating Table 3G3MX2 A2110 Heavy load E ois 0 A 40 C Normal installation aa A0 T Side SE SE 50 45 40 35 30 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
47. Communication etc Parameter e Default Function name Unit No setting 51 F TM Forced terminal block Inout Selection ON Control circuit terminal block j OFF According to A001 C001 to C007 Multi function EN Reference If the forced operator terminal and forced terminal block terminal are both turned ON the forced operator function is given priority SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 20 suol uny 5 2 Basic Functions A relation diagram for frequency reference selection is as follows Du i Multi step Speed Reference A021 A035 frequency Ce FV Fl z Dnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnp ee EE terminal FV Fl terminal IEVIEI selection allocation Analog voltage input FV O O Analog current Ki input Fl Yes External Digital Operator volume PUTTE Digital Operator A020 A220 F001 4 iFrequency Reference Selection A001 A201 H Modbus E communication Ea O Optional board LL Pulse train input Ill Others Operation fOperation Aisa Function Selection 1 Operator Scie ges Selection ee gt A443 Operation Frequency 0 Selection 2 Frequency operation function 1 If the frequency reference source is a Digital Operator the frequency can be set using F001 If the frequency reference source is not a Digital Operator F001 shows a monitored value of the specified
48. Communication 1 Sender Register of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 1 Recipient Station Number of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 2 Recipient Register of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 2 Sender Register of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 2 Recipient Station Number of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 3 Recipient Register of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 3 Sender Register of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 3 Recipient Station Number of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 4 ea Ea P077 R W 0 to 100 00 Limit 01 Unlimited ER 5 160 0 1 s 5 160 1to5 P140 R W P141 R W P142 R W P143 R W P144 R W P145 R W 0000h to FFFFh P146 R W 0000h to FFFFh P147 R W P148 R W 0000h to FFFFh P149 R W 0000h to FFFFh P150 R W SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULIL I 1 to 247 0000h to FFFFh 0000h to FFFFh 1 to 247 6 22 1 to 247 1 to 247 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name i No No parameters resolution Recipient Register of All 1699h Stations in Co inverter P151 R W 0000h to FFFFh Communication 4 Sender Register of All 169Ah Stations in Co inverter P152 R W 0000h to FFFFh Communication 4 Recipient Station 469Bh Number of All Stations in P153 R W 1 to 247 Co inverter Communication 5 Recip
49. D s ou O 5 gt ech O N zech gt Frequency adjustment B CH 0 VR Start Selection gt ech O On 0 D 01 0 Hz SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Default Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range j setting Trip 0 Hz restart Frequency matching restart Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 04 Frequency pull in restart Retry Selection Allowable Momentary Power 0 3 to 25 0 1 0 Interruption Time Restart Standby Time 0 3 to 100 0 Momentary power interruption Trip restart SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Page 5 96 5 96 5 100 5 103 4 16 1SI7 1 J WLILed Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Momentary Power Interruption b004 Undervoltage Trip During Stop Selection Restart During Momentary b005 Power Interruption Count Selection Frequency Matching Lower b007 Limit Frequency Setting Overvoltage Overcurrent SES Restart Selection Overvoltage Overcurrent SEI Restart Count Selection Overvoltage Overcurrent ae Restart Standby Time Electronic D014 Thermal Level 1 Electronic pele Thermal Level 2 Electronic Thermal SE Characteristics Selection 1 Electronic Thermal SE Characteristics Selection 2 Momentary power interruption Trip restart Electronic Thermal 4 17 Function name
50. Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity Se eee eee DD Q DD DD mH 5 145 DD el A DD ele kgm DD yes yes Time 5 83 5 160 E Le 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Deran Page setting Operation TH P001 Selection on l H no yes l Continue operation Option Error 2 Frequency setting oO Pulse Train Input een O P Feedback pulse enabled 5 82 P003 Terminal RP no no l only when motor 1 control 5 160 Selection i is selected Do not set Single phase pulse train Feedback Pulse Dual phase pulse train 1 P004 Train Input Type Dual phase pulse train 2 no no Selection Single phase pulse train direction a pori ee 32 to 1024 512 no no Pulse Encoder Pulses O S re S Simple Position 00 Simple position control be disabled P012 Control ee Se no no 5 160 D 02 Simple position control O Selection a enabled Q Creep Speed Starting frequency to 10 0 P015 Setting 100 0 5 00 no yes Hz Overspeed Error A 0 Speed Deviation GU 0 00 to 99 99 P027 Error Detection 100 0 to 120 0 10 00 no yes Hz D Level a o Acceleration RE s poat Deceleration _ 0 Digital Operator no no 5 24 r 03 Do not set Geht O Time Input Type o 00 Terminal FV pore 01 Terminal E P033 Reference Input Se no no Selection 03 Digital Operator 06 Optional board 5 156 Torque
51. External DC injection braking 5 135 5 136 External frequency startend 5 40 Extemal WD EE 5 120 F SE 5 56 FAW NOs EE 5 122 Fatal fault sonal 5 131 SIS elle 5 11 Fault monttor ee ceecseeeseeenees 5 11 5 176 PON ear aera rie PR er tee ee rere oe eee eee 5 78 Feedback selechon 5 76 E poh AEEA ATER EAT eee 2 71 5 37 Be 9 132 Fin temperature monitor 5 8 Forced operator function ccccceeeeeeee 5 85 Forced terminal block function 210210110122 5 85 eege 9 128 Free setting eee ee esceesessesseeesseessseesseeeaes 5 112 Free V f eettng ccc cceceseceseceseeseeeessenes 5 47 Free run Stop function cece 5 103 SE 9 133 Frequency addition Tunchon 5 71 Frequency arrival sigma 5 122 Frequency command source 5 133 Frequency conversion Coefficient 5 4 Frequency jump function assasssnaenisnaenaenaa 5 61 Frequency Im 5 60 Frequency matching restart 5 94 Frequency operation Tunchon 5 70 Frequency Dull mresiart eee 5 94 Frequency reference selechon 5 15 lee 5 103 Ee 2 SE scete sa A ech sac cer hes a Pace heehee tate Leh aah 5 85 ee 2 7 5 37 EE eelerer eegener 9 132 Ee 5 22 Websteed 5 130 G E EE 2 8 E a A E ET E E E E E E E 2 8 H Heavy load light load selechon 5 13 High frequency mode esseseseeneennennennennnn 5 179 Initial screen automatic switching function 5 87 Initial screen selechon ccc eeeeceeetees 5 86 Initialization Setting 5 174 Input power m
52. Frequency 6 V f Frequency 7 SS Free V f b111 Voltage 6 0 0 to 800 0 Free V f Free V f Frequency 6 to 400 Ne Frequency 7 1000 Free V f b113 Voltage 7 0 0 to 800 0 4 23 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Current current Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range pera Page setting Brake Control 00 Disabled b120 Function 01 Enabled Selection Brake Release Acceleration b122 Wait Time 0 00 to 5 00 b123 Stop Wait Time 0 00 to 5 00 Brake Wait 5 143 b124 Time for 0 00 to 5 00 S Confirmation Brake Release 0 00 to 99 99 b126 rated A Brake Release 0 00 to 2 00 x Inverter rated verte D current zs Break ON 0 00 to 99 99 alc Frequency 100 0 to 400 0 y Ge 00 Disabled ppr 01 Enabled DC voltage kept Function election constant no yes Durin 02 Enabled Acceleration g enabled 200V class 330 to 395 380 Gei es v Level During 400V class 660 to 790 760 y Deceleration Overvoltage 5 117 b132 Suppression 0 10 to 30 00 1 00 no yes S Parameter Overvoltage Suppression Proportional 0 00 to 5 00 0 20 yes yes Gain Setting Overvoltage Suppression Integral Time 0 0 to 150 0 1 0 yes yes S Setting Deceleration GS Input 00 Not tripped cut off by b145 Operation hardware Selection 01 Tripped Main Panel 001 to 060 corresponding to b150 Display d001 to d060 00 yes yes 5 87 Selection d050 Monitor 001 to 030
53. Frequency selected in b030 Motor rotation speed 6003 After an elapse of the time set in Restart Standby Time b003 output is started from the value set in Starting Frequency at Frequency Pull in Restart 6030 Thereafter The Inverter decelerates according to Frequency Pull in Restart Parameter b029 while keeping the output current at the value set in Frequency Pull in Restart Level b028 When the frequency matches the voltage the Inverter accelerates again to reach to the original frequency level If an overcurrent trip occurs under this method reduce the b028 setting SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 104 suoinoun Functions 5 8 Restart Functions Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function USP 9 105 This function trips the Inverter if the power is supplied when a RUN command is input to the Inverter In this case E13 is displayed To reset a trip perform the reset operation or turn off the RUN command Example 1 If a trip is reset with the RUN command is kept on the Inverter will restart operation immediately after the trip is reset Example 2 If the RUN command is turned ON after the power is turned on the Inverter operates normally Example 3 Allocate 13 USP to any Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 Parameter Default Function name 2 Unit No setting C001 to C007 Multi function 13 USP USP function E Input Selection The operations under the
54. Is the thermistor damaged Check the thermistor SAY Is there any noise interfusion in the thermistor signal Separate the wiring 1 If an error occurs the reset operation using the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power once If an error is issued when the power is turned on again the memory may be faulty or parameters may not be stored correctly Perform parameter initialization and set the parameters again SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 7 4 suoljeiadoO sdueUDdjUIeI x 7 1 Error Display and Remedial Actions Name Brake error Emergency shutoff Overload protection ina low speed range Poor Digital Operator connection Modbus communication Modbus RTU error Internal data error Option error Option timeout Maintenance Operations 7 5 code page A trip will occur if brake ON OFF cannot E36 U Is the brake ON OFF function be confirmed within the Brake working Confirmation Wait Time b124 after the Check the brake Inverter has issued a brake release Is the set time for b124 too output provided that the Brake Control short 5 142 function is enabled b120 01 Increase b124 Has the brake confirmation signal been input Check the wiring If an overload occurs in the extremely E38 0 Is the load too large low speed range of 0 2 Hz or below it Decrease the load rate will be detected by the built i
55. Output Noise Filter 2G328xs NEO 9 26 AC Reactor SGSAK ALIOKX EE 9 28 Digital Operator 3G3AX OP01 cece eeccceeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 9 31 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Specifications 9 1 Standard Specification List 9 1 Standard Specification List Data of standard motors are shown Take note that the actual torque characteristics vary depending on the motor used Three phase 200 V Class CT Heavy load VT Light load Function name 3 phase 200 V Gees A2001 A2002 A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 Applicable kW T 0 1 2 2 37 55 7 5 my peos n pro es n ee FOCAIL RS muje ipe s a preo ea as favor oF as oo o ar oe wo fee Ha ww aay __ F 04 08 12 20 33 at o7 703 yea ves m9 wal faov er os os 12 20 33 as 72 vos vor 08 aes wr oa o7 14 2a a 40 ai 14 vee m2 ose Rated input a 3 phase 200 V 15 to 240 V 10 50 60 5 kaeda or 10 18 99 60 90 127 2s a08 306 574 om H vrf 42 49 98 72 108 99 290 970 ees Rated output 3 phase 200 to 240 V The output cannot exceed the incoming voltage voltage lg RAR AN BCE od CUNEN LA DER 40 0 E 0 69 0 Short time deceleration braking torque Discharge Resistor not connected Regenerative braking Braking Resistor Min circuit connectable resistance DI weenie 40 40 11 12 46
56. Overload warning 2 to any Multi function Output Terminal Selections C021 to C022 or Multi function Relay Output Function Selection C026 Two types of overload warning signals can be output Parameter d Default S Function name Unit No setting op Overload Warning 00 Enabled in acceleration deceleration e C040 Signal Output and constant speed operation 01 _ 2 Mode Selection 94 Enabled in constant speed operation 0 0 The Inverter does not operate Rated Overload Warning current A x 1 15 C041 C241 0 0 to 2 0 x Rated current Outputs an OL signal when the Level 1 2 overload warning level is reached 0 0 The Inverter does not operate Rated Overload 1 _ Warning Level 3 9 0 to 2 0 x Rated current current A Outputs an OL2 signal when the x 1 15 overload warning level is reached Multi function Output 03 OL Overload warning Terminal Selection Multifunction 26 OL2 Overload warning 2 Relay Output Function Selection C021 to C022 C026 Overload limit level b022 b025 Aa E EEEE E WE Overload warning level nny EE gm C041 C111 Output current OL OL2 output l 5 115 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Overcurrent Suppression Function This function suppresses the overcurrent caused by a steep current rise increase in an impact load etc Acceleration is stopped temporarily
57. R W 00 Do not change R W 1 to 9999 0 01 5 4 00 Enabled 01 Disabled Only resetting enabled O Hz restart Frequency matching restart b087 R W 5 84 135Bh Free run Stop Selection b088 R W 5 103 Frequency pull in restart Disabled Enabled depends on b089 R W current Enabled depends on the fin temperature Automatic Carrier 135Ch 5 52 Reduction SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 6 50 uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 51 Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name No No parameters resolution 36Dhi ee b090 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 5 141 Regenerative Braking 135Eh Stop Selection b091 EE 5 24 01 Free run stop 00 Always b092 0 D Q D 01 Only during operation including 5 minutes after power on stop 02 Depends on the fin temperature 135Fh Cooling Fan Operation 5 127 00 Operation time count 01 Clear Return to 00 after clear 00 All data 01 All data other than R W Cooling Fan Total TOON Operation Time Clear b093 terminals communication 02 U registration function only 03 Other than U registration function Initialization Target em Selection b094 5 174 00 Disabled 01 Enable Disable during stop 02 Enable Enable during stop 63nd b096 R W 330 to 380 660 to 760 1 V ON Level 1364h to
58. Soft lock is effective Disable Soft Lock Selection b031 5 84 Motor turns in The phase order of motor Reverse two of U T1 V T2 and W T3 or reverse wiring is incorrect The adjust the motor phases to the correct specification of motor order 26 phase order is such that U T1 V T2 W T3 does not indicate forward rotation The forward reverse logic Check the 22 F R 3 wire forward ie E l 5 29 is incorrect when the 3 wire reverse logic of the applicable multi Dese ec 5 56 input function is used function input terminal The motor turns in RUN Direction Selection Change the setting of RUN Direction reverse when F004 is incorrect Selection F004 ae 5 23 operation is started with the RUN key An Overcurrent The acceleration time is Extend the Acceleration Time F002 F202 5 24 Trip E03 occurs too short A092 A292 5 66 eum operation Change the operation pattern to one in which acceleration is temporarily stopped 5 62 using the acceleration hold function The load is excessive Reduce the load Perform tuning using the torque boost 5 49 function Set Control Method A044 A244 to 02 546 D Free V f setting and perform tuning Overload Limit Selection Enable Overload Limit Selection b021 b021 b024 is set to 00 b024 5 114 Disabled An overcurrent trip occurs during operation even when the overload limit is enabled Overload Limit Level Lower the Overload Limit Leve
59. Torque Boost Selection2 A241 Ryw D Manual torque boost 01 Automatic torque boost EES A242 R W 0 to 200 0 1 5 49 Voltage 2 e ee ane eee A243 R W 0 to 500 0 1 Frequency 2 00 Constant torque characteristics 01 Reduced torque 5 AG 223Eh Control Method 2 A244 R W characteristics 5 144 02 Free V f setting 03 Sensorless vector control heavy load only 223Fh Output Voltage Gain 2 A245 20 to 100 1 11 5 72 Automatic Torque Boost 2240h Voltage Compensation A246 R W 0 to 255 1 Gain 2 GE A247 R W 0 to 255 1 EDE Slip Compensation Gain 2 2242h to Reserved 224Eh d i 224Fh d i RW Rw fo Frequency Upper Limit 2 NE Frequency Lower Limit 2 to 0 01 Hz Maximum Frequency 2 2250h LOW R W A262 ES 2251h HIGH R W 9 Frequency Lower Limit 2 KE Starting frequency to 0 01 Hz Frequency Upper Limit 2 2253h to Reserved 2268h 00 Always ON 2269h AVR Selection 2 A281 R W 01 Always OFF 5 27 02 OFF during deceleration 200V class 00 200 Motor Incoming Voltage 5 26 SSC Selection 2 ae a SE 400V class 05 380 06 400 07 415 226Bh to Reserved 226Eh SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 70 uoljOUNY UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 71 Register i Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page No No parameters resolution A292 226Fh HIGH 2nd Acceleration Time 2 1 t
60. and B Multi function Use this SPDT contact terminal block for relay outputs contact terminal block Main circuit Use this terminal block to connect an output to the motor and Braking Resistor etc terminal block Also use this terminal block to connect the inverter to the main power supply CHARGE This LED indicator is lit if the DC voltage of the main circuit between terminals P indicator Charge 2 and N remains approx 45 V or above after the power has been cut off Before indicator LED wiring etc confirm that the Charge LED indicator is turned OFF Note Refer to Chapter 3 Operation for the display and operating controls 2 5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 2 Wiring Connection Diagram ELB Single phase 3 phase_ __ MC power a A supply ac ai E A If any source logic external output devices or external power supply is used refer to Connection to Programmable Controller PLC on page 2 22 Thermistor Multi function inputs 7 contact inputs Power 1 4 W min Resistance 2 kQ min 7 mA Max Pulse input 5 to 24 VDC 32 kHz Max Analog voltage output 0 to 10 V 10 bits Pulse output 0 to 10 VDC 32 kHz Max 1 Connect to terminals L1 and N on a single phase 200 V Inverter 3G3MX2 AB 2 Optional SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Shorting d P24 bar LJ PsC 10 VDC power supply i Analog voltage input Ot
61. and for 5 minutes after the Inverter stops 02 02 Depends on the fin temperature on the fin temperature e Total operation time count 01 Clear total operation time After this function is executed 01 is reset to 00 Note 1 If a momentary power interruption occurs or the power is cut off while the cooling fan is operating the cooling fan stops temporarily and will resume operation automatically once the power recovers Note 2 Do not clear the total operation time except when the cooling fan is replaced because doing so will disable the correct Life Assessment Monitor of the cooling fan d022 Cooling Fan Life Signal WAF Set the ambient temperature in the environment where the Inverter is used in b075 Estimate the life of the cooling from the total operation time and set ambient temperature and have a signal output when the replacement timing arrives It is recommended that the cooling fan be checked for clogging etc or replaced when this signal is output Life Assessment Monitor d022 shows the status of this signal Parameter No b075 C021 to C022 C026 5 127 Ambient Temperature Multi function Output Terminal Selection Multi function Relay Output setting 10 to 50 Set the ambient temperature in the use 40 C environment 40 WAF Cooling fan life warning signal Function Selection Related functions b092 d022 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 A
62. b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at Operation normal operation example 2 incoming voltage recovery If operation of this function results in deceleration stop the Inverter is forced to stop even if the FW forward command is ON To restart the Inverter make sure that the incoming voltage has recovered and input the FW forward command again Example 1 Main circuit PN PN voltage Vpn V Ee b052 ee 7 Main circuit DC Voltage oe at incoming voltage recovery 2 DC voltage kept constant Time Output frequency Hz SEET GEN Soe b050 02 03 deceleration stop A Time Incoming voltage recovery The main circuit DC voltage level while this function is activated may fall below the b052 set value depending on the proportional gain and integral time settings SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 108 suoljoun 5 8 Restart Functions Example 2 Main circuit DC voltage Main circuit PN PN voltage at incoming voltage recovery Vpn V DC voltage kept constant Output frequency Hz ebe E b050 03 operation b050 02 deceleration stop A Time Incoming voltage recovery Functions 5 109 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals 9 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals The following explains the pro
63. ccccccccccscccssceseeeseeeteeesens 5 26 BASIC GISDIAY EE 5 90 BEP EE 5 143 Binary operation 5 64 BIE ODS Kall OM ee eae ede 5 65 Sie 5 143 Brake control Tunchon eee eeecee ener 5 142 Si 5 143 Capacitor life wammg 5 126 Carrier frequency oeoeoseeneennennennennernnensennnne 5 51 CT Fils a EE 5 63 Lo Commercial Switch ccccccccsccseesseeeseeeees 5 79 Communication disconnection detection SIQUVA ss iictacadsthiena tea catinaiatend aN 9 128 Constant torque characteristics 5 46 5 111 Control circuit terminals c cece eeeeees 2 7 Control Metod BEE 5 46 INDEX 2 Controlled deceleration on power loss 5 106 Cooling fan life sonal 5 127 Cooling fan operation cceccccccecteeees 5 127 Cooling fin overheat warning level 9 129 CPWUGCPZ CPO EE 5 164 deet 5 79 Current position monttor ccc cece eee 5 9 D Data comparison display 5 89 KSE 9 135 DC voltage monitor 0 0 cece ccc cee ceteeeteeees 5 12 Digital operator E 3 1 3 7 Disconnection detection FVdc Fldc 9 132 RI 5 91 Ae Ve DEE 5 91 Display selechon ccc ccsecceeeesteeeteeeenees 5 88 IN WEE 5 71 E eegen 2 9 EDON oa We ertanee er re eTeer 2 9 5 171 EDM function selector switch 2 5 5 170 Electronic thermal funchon 5 110 Electronic thermal load rate monitor 5 12 Encoder cConnechon 5 158 EMG MW COUCICY E 5 40 00g E 5 40 Steiger ele 1 2 e EE 5 120
64. circuit terminal and ground terminal Check that any parts which may need tightening are secure Check that no part has indications of overheating Inspection ves Measurement Criteria method device The ambient Thermometer temperature shall Hygrometer be 10 to 50 C Recorder non freezing and the ambient humidity shall be 90 or below non condensing Visual or acoustic No faults inspection Measure the Must be within Tester voltage between allowable digital the Inverter main fluctuation of AC multimeter Refer to Installation on page 2 1 circuit terminals R voltage L1 S L2 and T L3 Remove the I O 5 MQ min 500 V wirings of the class DC Inverter s main megger circuit terminal block remove the control terminal block board and remove the Inverter s built in filter function switching shorting bar and then use a megger to measure between the shorted part of each terminal R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 P 2 1 N or RB and the ground terminal Tighten securely No faults Visual inspection No faults SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Inspection part Main circuit Control circuit Protection circuit Inspection item Connection conductor and wire Inverter unit Converter unit including the resistor Smoothing capacitor Operation check Inspection point Check that ther
65. detection 33 LOG1 Logic operation output 1 Logic Operation Function 28 34 LOGz2 Logic operation output 2 5 125 35 LOG3 Logic operation output 3 39 WAC Capacitor life warning Capacitor Life Warning Signal 5 126 40 WAF Cooling fan life warning signal WAF Cooling Fan Life Warning Signal 5 127 42 OHF Fin overheat warning Cooling Fin Overheat Warning 5 129 43 LOC Low current signal Low Current Signal 5 129 44 45 Reserved 46 41 FR Starting contact signal Starting Contact Signal 5 128 50 IRDY Operation ready Operation Ready Signal 5 130 51 FWR During forward operation Signal During Forward Operation 5 130 52 RVR During reverse operation Signal During Reverse Operation 5 131 53 MJA Fatal fault signal Fatal Fault Signal 5 131 Window Comparator Function Functions 54 WCFV Window comparator FV 55 WCFI Window comparator FI FREF Frequency command source Frequency Reference Selection Status 58 Signal 5 133 59 REF RUN command source RUN Command Status Signal 5 133 60 SETM Motor 2 selection Motor 2 Control Selected Signal 5 134 62 EDM Safety device monitor Safety Function 5 170 63 OPO Optional board 5 132 5 33 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 3 Input Output Terminals Multi function Output Terminal Contact Selection Whether to apply the NO or NC contact output specification can be set individually for each of multi function output terminals P1 EDM P2 and mu
66. on page 5 60 and PID Variable Range Limit A078 Parameter A Default Function name S Unit No setting 00 Disabled A071 PID Selection 01 Enabled 02 Reverse output enabled A072 PID P Gain ee ee 1 00 Proportional gain A073 PID Gain GE 1 0 Integral gain A074 PID D Gain RE Differential gain up 0 01 to 99 99 E A075 PID Scale For unit conversion of PID Feedback 1 00 O Value Monitor d004 pmr 00 FI current 4 to 20 mA Li 01 FV voltage geg PID Feedback Ee Selection 02 Modbus communication Modbus RTU 03 Pulse train frequency 10 Operation function output 00 Disabled PID Deviation A077 Reverse Output 01 Enabled reversing of deviation S polarity l 0 0 to 100 0 A078 ES a Range Variable range with reference to the target value 00 Disabled 01 FV voltage A079 PID Feedforward 0 to 10V 8 Selection 02 FI current 2 4 to 20 mA 0 0 to 400 0 1000 A156 ie Sep DEEN Operation stops once the PID output Hz Operation Level drops to below the operation level 5 73 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operation Functions Gieres Default Function name Unit setting 0 0 to 25 5 Set the delay time until sleep operation S is started C044 PID Deviation 0 0 to 100 0 7 Excessive Level OD signal output judgment level i Feedback Comparison 0 0 to 100 0 E SES Signal Off Level FBV signal output judgment level ee 4 C053 Feedback Comparison 0 0 t
67. or PE terminal for bigger models Shielded cable Metal plate earth 2 e Cable clamp Both earth portions of the shielded cable must be connected to the earth point by cable clamps Input choke or equipment to reduce harmonic current is necessary for CE marking IEC 61000 3 2 and IEC61000 3 4 from the harmonic current point of view even conducted emission and radiated emission passed without the input choke SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACILILID Appendix 12 Appendix 4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL cUL Standards EMC Recommendations Use the following checklist to ensure the inverter is within proper operating ranges and conditions 1 The power supply to 3G3MX2 inverters must meet these specifications Voltage fluctuation 10 or less Voltage imbalance 3 or less Frequency variation 4 or less Voltage distortion THD 10 or less 2 Installation measure Use a filter designed for 3G3MX2 inverter Refer to the instruction of the applicable external EMC filter 3 Wiring Shielded wire screened cable is required for motor wiring and the length must be 20 meter or less If the motor cable length exceeds the value shown above use output choke to avoid unexpected problem due to the leakage current from the motor cable The carrier frequency setting must be 2 kHz to satisfy EMC requirements Separate the power input and motor wiring from the signal process circuit
68. output 1265h PID Deviation Reverse R W 00 Disabled 0 1 5 5 5 5 73 73 27 27 19 6 43 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page No No parameters resolution 1st Acceleration Time 2 1 to 360000 0 01 s 1st Deceleration Time 2 1 to 360000 0 01 s 00 Switched via 2CH terminal 1278h 2 step Acceleration 01 Switched by setting 566 Deceleration Selection 1 02 Enabled only when switching forward reverse step Acceleration 0 01 Hz E Frequency 1 LOW step Deceleration 0 01 Hz Frequency 1 127Ch Linear l S shape EEN ee UO shape Inverted U shape EL S shape 5 68 Line l S shape 1427Eh Deceleration Pattern U shape curve Selection l Inverted U shape curve EL S shape 127Fh Reserved 1281h Geck R W FI Start Frequency O to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz 1282h a R W LOW 1283h e R W Fl End Frequency O to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz 5 40 1284h ae R W LOW 1285h FI Start Ratio A103 0 to 100 1 1286h FI End Ratio A104 0 to 100 1 1287h FI Start Selection A105 ew or eee as Reserved mer 12 Acceleration Curve wm ne lee 01 small curve to 10 Parameter curve 12A6h Deceleration Curve A132 01 small curve to 10 Parameter curve SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 44 uoljOUNY
69. to 255 100 yes yes Compensation Gain 1 O O 72 Output Voltage S Gain 2 20 to 100 100 yes Yo Wal 2 D O d D 2 an gt Automatic gt Torque Boost A246 Voltage 0 to 255 100 yes yes Compensation Gain 2 5 49 yes yes Automatic Torque Boost A047 Slip 0 to 255 100 Compensation Gain 1 Automatic Torque Boost A247 Slip 0 to 255 100 Compensation Gain 2 yes yes SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 8 S17 JoJOWIeIeY Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range pera Page setting 00 Disabled HEITZ DC Ton Enabled A051 SF 02 Enabled Braking Operates only on set Selection i frequencies Internal DC Ag52 nection 0 00 to 60 00 0 50 no yes Hz Braking Frequency DC Injection A053 Braking Delay 0 0 to 5 0 no yes s Time 5 135 ne yes External DC injection braking DC Injection 00 Edge operation DOG TAKINI cde 01 Level operation Level Selection Startup DC A057 Injection SEN 00 70 heavy load light Braking Power Startup Internal A058 DC Injection 0 0 to 60 0 Braking Time DC Injection 2 0 to 15 0 10 0 A059 Braking Carrier heavy load light load or high Frequency frequency External DC injection braking SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range D
70. 0009h 000Bh 000Dh Multi function input terminals S7 EB Query Example No Field name Hex 1 Slave address 01 3 Coil start address MSB 2 00 Coil address Coil number 1 4 Coil start address LSB 06 5 Number of coils MSB 00 6 Number of coils LSB 07 7 Number of bytes 02 8 Change data MSB 17 9 Change data LSB 00 17h 0001 0111 10 CRC 16 MSB 06 Input terminal S1 CRC 16 LSB 98 Input terminal S7 EB SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULIL Fr 6 14 uoljoUNy UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No 6 15 Response Field name sri Slave address 01 Parameter No OF Coil start address MSB 2 00 Coil start address LSB 2 06 Number of coils MSB 00 Number of coils LSB 07 CRC 16 MSB F4 CRC 16 LSB 08 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Since the change data comprises both MSB and LSB as a set make the byte to be an even number by adding 1 even if the byte which actually needs to be changed is an odd number 3 Note that the coil start address is 0006 which is smaller by 1 than the coil number 0007 The coil number less 1 corresponds to the coil address A multi function input is recognized as ON when the status of either the terminal block input or communication setting becomes ON As for Multi function Input Monitor d005 only the terminal block input is monitored Refer to Excep
71. 10 0 5 0 2 0 kHz 0 00 to 60 00 Internal DC When internal DC injection braking is A052 Injection Braking enabled DC injection braking starts if the 0 50 Hz Frequency frequency drops to below the set level while the Inverter is stopped DC Injection oe oy EEN Delay time after the DC injection braking e A053 Braking Delay ote S E Time time is reached or DB terminal turns ON ke until DC injection braking is started e 50 gt LL Frequency C001 to C007 Multi function 07 DB External DC injection braking Input Selection 5 135 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 10 Brake Settings i DC Injection Braking Carrier Frequency This function can be set using DC Injection Braking Carrier Frequency A059 Note that setting a 5 kHz or higher frequency automatically reduces the braking power Refer to the DC injection braking power limiter shown below Maximum 60 braking 50 force 40 occ e reece ccccsccceseescmecscces 0 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 DC injection braking carrier frequency KHz DC injection braking power limiter i External DC Injection Braking Allocate 07 DB External DC injection braking to any Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 DC injection braking is applied when the DB terminal is turned ON OFF regardless of Internal DC Injection Braking Selection A051 Set a braking power level in DC Injection Braking Power A054 If DC Injection Braking D
72. 141Eh Multi function Output 141Fh Terminal P1 EDM Contact Selection Multi function Output SR ulti function Outpu l 1420h Terminal P2 Contact C032 a NC NC contact Selection 1421h to Reserved 1423h Multi function Relay l 1424h Output MA MB Contact C036 SNO AO Contae 5 34 j NC NC contact Selection ee ee E 00 During acceleration coun Gurren Signal deceleration constant wagon Output Mode ee wee Speers P 01 Only during constant 5 129 speed 1427h eee Detection C039 0 to 20000 0 01 00 During acceleration e deceleration constant 1428h Overload Warning Signal C040 Speed Output Mode Selection 01 Only during constant 5 115 speed 1429h See Waming Level coa Rw 0 to 20000 0 01 Kard 142Ah jp Se woen RAW pe ee deere aera 0 to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz ape Acceleration C042 ar LOW 5 122 142Ch Nr Se See R W ee 0 to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz en Deceleration C043 a LOW 142Eh ee Excessive C44 0 to 1000 0 1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 58 uoljOUN UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name S Page No No parameters resolution 142Fh Arrival Frequency During Acceleration 2 0 to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz 1430h 5 122 1431h l Arrival Frequency During Deceleration 2 O to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz sch
73. 16kHz Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A4110 Heavy load rating 24 0 A 40 C Side by side 50 C Normal installation 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 kHz Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A2150 Heavy load rating 60 0 A 50 C Normal installation 40 oC Side SH side 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 kHz Carrier frequency Appendix 5 Light load rating 56 0 A 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier frequency 14kHz Light load rating 31 0 50 C Normal installation VA 40 C ue by side 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kHz Carrier frequency Light load rating 69 0 A 50 C Normal installation o S GT by side 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kHz Carrier frequency SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Appendix 1 Derating Table 3G3MX2 A4150 Heavy load rating 31 0 A Light load rating 38 0 A 40 40 50 C Normal 35 l installation A A 40 C Side by side 35 30 25 20 HAHH HHHH a ETC EEE 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 kHz 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kHz 10 Carrier frequency Carrier frequency SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI Appendix 6 Appendix 2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve Appendix 2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve Power supplied 24 hours Ambient temperature C a day load factor 80 50 Power supplied 24 hours a day load factor 100 40 l 30 SE e a a E eeh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Capacitor life year Note 1 Ambient temperature refers to the temperature measu
74. 2524h 2525h 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data E Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page parameters resolution ccessible Ina 00 Standard motor parameter Auto tuning data Not used H202 i R R R Motor Parameter 2 Motor Capacity 2 5 145 Motor Pole Number 2 H204 Speed Response 2 H205 LOW H206 W W W W W H205 HIGH 5 81 Stabilization Parameter 2 Motor 2 Parameter J Reserved H220 R W CS H221 RW Ee H222 CS H223 R W H224 HIGH SE R W H224 LOW Motor 2 Parameter R1 0 001 Q 5 145 Reserved Motor 2 Parameter R2 0 001 Q 5 145 Reserved Motor 2 Parameter L 0 01 mH 5 145 Reserved Motor 2 Parameter lo 0 01 A 5 145 O 0 001 om 9 145 Reserved Motor 2 Parameter R1 Auto tuning Data H230 R W 0 001 Q 5 145 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 72 uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 73 a Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name No wt resolution 2526h Reseved o 2527h E er AAMC ETRA H231 R W 1 to 65530 0 001 Q 5 145 Auto a Data 2529h Ge ee H232 R W 1 to 65530 0 01 mH 5 145 Auto tuning Data 252Ah Reseved o 252Bh Motor 2 Ge 9 H233 R W 1 to 65530 0 01 A 5 145 Auto tuning Data H234 HIGH Motor 2 Parameter J 1 to 99
75. 3 Installation Removal Method of the Terminal Block Cover 2 4 Names of Parts Inside the Terminal Block Cover 2 5 SE NAINO EE 2 6 Connection DAG FAN EE 2 6 Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals 00nnannaannnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 2 10 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals cccccccsecceeeeceeseeeeeeeeeaeeeees 2 18 Connection to Programmable Controller DICH 2 22 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 1 Installation 2 1 Installation Precautions for Safe Use i Installation and Storage Do not store or use the product in the following places Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to exposure to combustibles Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals Locations subject to shock or vibration f Transportation Installation and Wiring Do not drop or apply any strong impact to the Inverter to avoid damage to the parts and or the Inverter When transporting the Inverter hold the fin not the front cover or terminal block cover Do not connect an AC power supply to the control I O termi
76. 3G3AX OP01 Al Frequency Reference is set to Control circuit terminal block A001 01 and PID Selection A071 is enabled PID is given priority and the analog input specified by A076 is allocated for PID feedback Regardless of A005 or the FV FI terminal status the analog input not selected by A076 is allocated to Frequency Reference 3 Even when the specified analog input is overlapping with the target value or feedback value the setting of A079 is applied as is 4 Only the analog voltage 10 V 200 of the torque limit value The FV FI terminal is not allocated 5 37 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 4 Analog Signal If an analog input is used for the frequency reference current voltage switch is performed as follows Parameter Default d Function name 3 Unit No setting 00 Use the FV FI terminal to switch between FV voltage and FI current FV FI terminal ON Current FV FI terminal OFF Voltage 02 Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Use the FV FI terminal to switch between A005 FV FI Selection FV voltage and volume FV FI terminal ON Volume FV FI terminal OFF Voltage 03 Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used Use the FV FI terminal to switch between FI current and volume FV FI terminal ON Volume FV FI terminal OFF Current C001 to C007 Multi function 16 FV FI Analog input switch p Input Selection Note For details refer to Frequency Reference Selection and
77. 4 42 1SI7 JoJOWIeIeY Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode 4 43 Parameter No Inverter to Inverter communication Recipient Register of All P145 Stations in Co inverter Communication 2 Sender Register of All Stations in P146 Co inverter Communication 2 Recipient Station Number P147 of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 3 Recipient Register of All P148 Stations in Co inverter Communication 3 Sender Register of All Stations in P149 Co inverter Communication 3 Recipient Station Number P150 of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 4 Recipient Register of All P151 Stations in Co inverter Communication 4 Sender Register of All Stations in P152 Co inverter Communication 4 Function name Monitor or data range Seel Set data Page setting 0000 to FFFF Hex 0000 E yes yes i 0000 to FFFF Hex 0000 B yes yes g 1 to 247 Di yes yes f 0000 to FFFF Hex 0000 yes yes 6 22 0000 to FFFF Hex 0000 B yes yes 7 1 to 247 DI yes yes E 0000 to FFFF Hex 0000 E yes yes E 0000 to FFFF Hex 0000 B yes yes p SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Deran setting Recipient Station Number of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 5 Recipient Register of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 5 P153 1 to 247 P154 0000 to FFFF Hex Co inverter communication
78. 400 V class 8 V max Error is found in the sequence Measurement device Analog tester Capacity meter Digital multimeter Rectifier Voltmeter ueu zuleN pue UO DedSuU Inspection and Maintenance 8 1 Inspection and Maintenance Inspection period Inspection Inspection part item Cooling Cooling Check that there system fan are no abnormal vibrations or sounds Check that the connection parts are secure Check that the LED indicators Fault Fault display display are lit properly Cleaning Clean with a waste cloth Meter Check that the indicated value is normal Motor General Check that there are no abnormal vibrations or sounds Check that there are no abnormal odors Insulation Megger check resistance Between the collective motor terminals and ground terminal Inspection point Inspection EE Measurement Criteria method device Rotate manually Rotation shall be when the power is smooth and free off from error Reference of the replacement period Visual inspection 10 years ZA Cooling Check that there d Visual inspection No clogging Fin is no clogging dr Visual inspection Check that the LED indicators are lit Check the indicated The specified or Voltage values on the panel control values Ammeter meters must be satisfied etc Acoustic feeling No faults and or visual inspection Check
79. 5 Input Terminal 6 Input Terminal 7 Multi step C169 EEN 0 to 200 x 10 ms no yes ms 5 63 Determination Time 00 Disabled H001 Auto tuning 01 Enabled motor does not Se ger 5 146 Selection rotate 02 Enabled motor rotates Motor Parameter parameter H202 eel Parameter 01 Auto tuning parameter nl fefe Default HOOS Motor Capacity 1 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 setting no no kW 2 2 3 0 3 7 4 0 5 5 7 5 11 0 BE H203 Motor Capacity 2 15 0 18 5 Sie no no kW setting 5 145 Hood ort rele 4 no no Number 1 7 Ze 2 4 6 8 10 E SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Monitor or data range Deran D Page setting i Stabilization s 0 to 255 5 81 abilization Depends H020 Motor on the no no Parameter R1 capacity Depends H220 EE on the no no Parameter R1 0 001 to 9 999 capacity o 10 00 to 65 53 Depends geet Morr on the no no Parameter R2 capacity z Motor 2 peels o H221 on the no no D Parameter R2 z capacity D o Depends 2 luaaa Motor 1 on the no no O Parameter L 0 01 to 99 99 capacity S Ul tO 33 mH 5 145 100 0 to 655 3 Depends O p Motor 2 H222 on the no no Parameter L capacity Depends AM H023 Motor on the no no ae Parameter lo Q 0 01 to 99 99 capacity A 100 0 to 655 3 di Motor 2 See D H223 on the no no OD Parameter lo capacity Depend epends T Motor 1 P H024 parameter J 0 001 to 9 999 on the A ne 10 00 to
80. 50 to 69 ee d seet 3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data iii Holding Register Number List Monitor Ge Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name No parameters resolution 1001h H HIG EES 0 to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz 5 1 Monitor cow 1002h cow 1003h Output Current Monitor d002 R Oto 65530 0 01 A 5 1 l EN 0 Stop ee d003 H 1 Forward 5 2 Monitor 2 Reverse 1005h ici PID Feedback Value 0 to 1000000 5 9 Monitor ow 1006h ow Multi function Input 20 Terminal S1 to l l o Terminal P1 EDM ebe DEET lone to 21 Terminal P2 Bit 5 3 Monitor 6 2 Relay output terminal Da 1009h Output Frequency Da Monitor after conversion ows en Real Frequency Monitor gh 100000 to 100000 gp Oe Rererenge d009 200 to 200 dei 5 5 Monitor 100Eh Torque Bias Monitor d010 ES 200 to 200 5 6 amy Rene o 1010h Output Torque Monitor d012 R 200 to 200 1 5 6 1011h Output Voltage Monitor d013 LS 0 to 6000 0 1 V 5 6 1012h Input Power Monitor do14 R 0 to 9999 0 1 kW 5 7 d015 1013h HIGH Integrated Power Monitor La O to 9999000 5 7 1014h aom d016 1015h HIGH Total RUN Time Monitor 8 0 to 999000 1 h 5 8 1016h ow d017 1017h HIGH Power ON Time Monitor oe 0 to 999000 1 h 5 8 1018h com 1019h Fin Temperature Monitor og Ip 200 to 1500 0 1 C 5 8 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3
81. 6 To Save the Change to the Holding Register Enter Command Example Issue an Enter command storage of set value to the Inverter whose slave address is 8 Query Field name SE Slave address 08 Parameter No 06 Register address MSB 2 08 Registeraddiess CoB EF Register address Register number 1 Written data MSB 00 Written data LSB 01 CRC 16 MSB TA CRC 16 LSB C3 Field name Salon Slave address 08 Parameter No 06 Coil address MSB 2 08 Coil address LSB 2 FF Written data MSB 00 Written data LSB 01 CRC 16 MSB TA CRC 16 LSB C3 EEPROM Write Mode If the holding register write command 06h etc is used to write 1 into the holding register for EEPROM write mode 0902h the EEPROM the EEPROM write mode will become active If data is changed using the holding register write command 06h after switching to the EEPROM write mode the new data is written into both the volatile memory for operation RAM and nonvolatile memory for storage EEPROM At the same time the EEPROM write mode is cancelled If any command other than the holding register write command 06h is received after switching to the EEPROM write mode the EEPROM write mode is cancelled SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 20 uoljoUN 4 UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ 6 6 To Save the Change to the Holding Register Enter Command Difference Between Enter Command and EEPROM Write Mode Enter command EEPROM
82. 99 99 capacity ae Sage 100 0 to 999 9 Depends H224 otor 1000 to 9999 on the no no Parameter J capacity SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 36 Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Control parameter 4 37 H050 H051 Function name Motor 1 Parameter R1 Auto tuning Data Motor 2 Parameter R1 Auto tuning Data Motor 1 Parameter R2 Auto tuning Data Motor 2 Parameter R2 Auto tuning Data Motor 1 Parameter L Auto tuning Data Motor 2 Parameter L Auto tuning Data Motor 1 Parameter lo Auto tuning Data Motor 2 Parameter lo Auto tuning Data Motor 1 Parameter J Auto tuning Data Motor 2 Parameter J Auto tuning Data V f Control with Speed Feedback Slip Compensation Proportional Gain V f Control with Speed Feedback Slip Compensation Integral Gain Monitor or data range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 0 00 to 10 0 0 0 to 100 0 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Default setting Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity
83. A292 2nd Acceleration 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 10 00 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 15 00 Time 2 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 5 180 5 14 Other Functions Normal Mode with a Heavy Load Parameter Rating CT No Function name Setting range Default Setting range Default A093 1st Deceleration 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 10 00 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 15 00 Time 2 A293 2nd Deceleration 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 10 00 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 15 00 Time 2 A095 2 step Acceleration 0 00 to 400 00 Hz 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 Frequency 1 A295 2 step Acceleration 0 00 to 400 00 Hz 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 Frequency 2 0 00 A096 2 step 0 00 to 400 00 Hz 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz Deceleration High frequency Mode Frequency 1 A296 2 step 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Deceleration Frequency 2 A101 FI Start Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 Hz A102 FI End Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 Hz A145 Frequency Addition 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Amount Setting A154 Deceleration Stop 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Frequency 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 A156 PID Sleep Function 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Operation Level A161 VR Start 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Frequency A162 VR End Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 Hz b007 Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Matching Lower Limit Frequency Setting Functions b019 Free electronic Free electronic Thermal Fre
84. DC injection braking 08 SET Motor 2 control 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration FRS Free run stop EXT External trip USP USP function CS Commercial switch SFT Soft lock FV FI Analog input switch RS Reset TH PTC thermistor thermal protection STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop F R 3 wire forward reverse PID PID disabled PIDC PID integral reset UP UP DWN function accelerated 28 DWN UP DWN function decelerated 29 UDC UP DWN function data clear OPE Forced operator SF1 Multi step speed bit 1 GEZ Multi step speed bit 2 SF3 Multi step speed bit 3 SF3 SF4 Multi step speed bit 4 SF5 Multi step speed bit 5 SF6 Multi step speed bit 6 SF7 Multi step speed bit 7 OLR Overload limit switching 5 29 TL Torque limit enabled disabled TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 BOK Brake confirmation LAC LAD cancel PCLR Position deviation clear p ADD Frequency addition F TM Forced terminal block ATR Torque reference input permission KHC Integrated power clear Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 65 AHD Analog command held 66 CP1 Position command selection 1 67 CP2 Position command selection 2 68 CP3 Position command selection 3 ORL Zero return limit signal ORG Zero r
85. Error Display and Remedial Actions Warning display condition Output Frequency Setting F001 Multi Jump Frequency step Speed Reference 0 A220 A063 A065 A067 A064 A066 A068 Free V f Frequency 7 eee AC 12 icicle A ES Frequency Upper Limit 2 A261 Free V f GER ee 7 b112 E Lower Limit 2 A262 Free Kg Frequency 7 b112 KEE Frequency Setting F001 Multi step Speed 2 Reference 0 A220 1 A warning will occur if the frequency set in any one of F001 A020 A220 and A021 to A035 is within the frequency range set by the jump frequency SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 7 8 suoljei9doO sduUeUDjUIeI x Maintenance Operations 7 1 Error Display and Remedial Actions Other Displays Name Reset Undervoltage standby Restart during momentary power interruption restart during trip RUN command is limited Setting initialization Fault monitor being initialized No data Communications error Auto tuning OK Auto tuning NG This warning appears if the input terminal set to Reset RS is ON or a trip has been reset using the STOP RESET key Appears in undervoltage standby condition or with the power shut off Restart function is in operation Appears if the limited RUN command is received from the control terminal while the RUN direction is limited with b035 Appears while the set values are being initialized 00 Setting for Japan Appears while the fault monitor i
86. Function 5 71 ES F TM Forced terminal block Forced Terminal Block Function Terminal Block Function 5 85 ATR Torque reference input Torque Control 5 156 permission KHC Integrated power clear Integrated Power Monitor f 8 AHD Analog command held Analog Command Hold Function 5 39 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 30 suoljoun Functions 5 3 Input Output Terminals ac CP1 oe command selection CP2 command selection H CP3 oo command selection Simple Position Control Mode 5 158 KA ORL Zero return limit signal ORG Zero return startup signal 73 SPD Speed position switching GS1 GS1 input C003 only aus Se afety Function 3 C001 to C007 GS2 GS2 input C004 only 485 Start co inverter Inverter to Inverter communication Communication 82 Reserved E Retain output ge a Hold Function EECH RUN Permission Signal command EB Rotation direction detection e C007 only Simple Position Control Function 5 158 ER DISP Display fixed Fixed Display 5 91 Multi function Input Operation Selection NO or NC contact can be selected individually for each of multi function input terminals S1 to S7 EB A terminal with reset RS setting functions as NO contact only Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting Multi function Input 00 00 NO NO contact NO contact C011 to C017 Terminal Operation E Selection 01 Rees NC contact Input signal s
87. Function name Peet Unit No setting Common b003 Restart Standby 0 3 to 100 0 10 S Time Time until restart ee 0 00 to 400 0 1000 Frequency q y If the frequency drops to b007 Matching Lower matching b007 imit Preduenc or below during the motor free Hz restart q y run the Inverter restarts at 0 Setting Hz D Pali 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x Inverter b028 q y Rated current rated A Restart Level current Frequency Pull in 0 10 to 30 00 en ele gie Restart Parameter Frequency reduction time pull in restart Starting 00 Frequency at interruption b030 eg lee ar 01 Maximum frequency Frequency Pull in Restart Selection 02 Set frequency FW input forward Power supply Decelerates according to b029 Output current i Inverter output frequency Frequency selected in b030 Motor rotation speed SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 8 Restart Functions Restart Upon Momentary Power Interruption Undervoltage Overvoltage Overcurrent Whether to trip or restart the Inverter upon momentary power interruption undervoltage or overvoltage overcurrent can be selected i Restart upon Momentary Power Interruption Undervoltage Overvoltage Overcurrent When a restart function is selected under Retry Selection b001 the Inverter restarts repeatedly for the number of times set in b005 in the case of momentary power interruption undervoltage or in b010 in the c
88. However the Inverter will not restart if RUN Command Selection is set to Digital Operator A002 02 To restart the Inverter input the RUN command As the Inverter output method at restart 0 Hz restart frequency matching restart or frequency pull in restart can be selected by Free run Stop Selection b088 Examples 1 2 3 When Frequency Matching Lower Limit Frequency Setting b007 is set the Inverter will restart at O Hz if a frequency below the frequency set here is detected at the time of frequency matching restart The setting of this function will be applied to the FRS terminal and also when the Inverter is reset from free run status EE Function name Description SE Unit No setting 0 0 Hz restart example 1 Free run Stop 01 Frequency matching restart b088 i example 2 Selection Frequency pull in restart 02 example 3 b003 Restart Standby o 31 gt 100 0 Time until restart s Time Frequency Matching Lower 0 00 to 400 0 Setting of frequency matching b007 S Hz Limit Frequency Setting 0 20 x Rated Frequency Pull in current to Current limit level at frequenc a b028 Wear quency rated A Restart Level 2 00 x Rated pull in restart current Frequency Pull in b029 Restart 0 1 to 3000 0 50 Parameter Starting D Frequency at interruption D current b030 Preguency at Maximum frequency Frequency Pull in Restart Selection Set frequency 2 C001 to C007 Multi function 14 FRS Free
89. Inverter when a temperature error occurs The inverter will trip when the input from S5 TH External thermistor input also used as multi function input terminal higher Since this input is also used as the multi function input terminal setting of C005 is required For details refer to Thermistor Trip Function on page 5 120 Multi function analog output voltage Specified signals can be output using voltage signals of O to 10 VDC This is a common terminal used by the internal power supply digital input and analog input output terminals Input signal common Power supply terminal for input signal 24 VDC power supply for contact input signal This is used as a common terminal if the source logic is input Power supply terminal for input terminal Sink logic input Shorted with P24 Source logic input Shorted with SC To drive the contact input using an external power supply remove the shorting bar For details refer to Connection to Programmable Controller PLC on page 2 22 Select 7 functions from among 59 and allocate them to terminals S1 through S7 EB Both sink and source logics are Multi function input terminal supported For details refer to Connection to Programmable Controller PLC on page 2 22 Safety input Enabled when the safety S4 GS2 function selector switch is 3 GS1 to Safety Function on page 5 170 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX
90. Je 3 3G3MX2 DL4220 g A4150 1 Only the CT rating is supported OQO O OO CO Wu x11 oO OD O O N NO 105 124 7x11 M5 suoljeoijineds ech IN O ech NO O 124 7X11 M6 N co i gt gt N N E E E oo Ge LD oO N LO O O O oO LD LO O O amp 3 5 3 GE N z 151 7X11 zech N zech N du d CH N N N N ech Ex On SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 18 Specifications 9 3 Options i Operating environment E 10 to 50 C temperature Humidity 20 to 90 RH with no condensation a 15 kW max 5 9 m s max 0 6 G 10 to 55 Hz Vibration l 2 22 kW min 2 0 m s max 0 2 G 10 to 55 Hz l At a maximum altitude of 1 000 m indoors without Location corrosive gases or dust Radio Noise Filter i Dimensional Drawing 3G3AX ZCL1 3G3AZ ZCL2 3 M4 9 19 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Specifications 3G3AX ZCL1 200 V class Applicable Inverter ESA No of No of filters 0 4 0 75 1 5 N A 2 2 3 0 I i Note N A means Not applied 3G3AX ZCL2 No of No of filters penetrations N A N gt 200 V class Applicable Inverter capacity NKAN No of No of filters 3 0 4 0 N A 5 5 Note N A means Not applied SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL No of No of filters pe
91. Lt From power supply To motors u ES Ground terminal Se M4 x 2 3G3MX2 AB001 to AB004 c T D A From power supply To motors SR Ground terminal M4 x 2 Connect to L1 and N for 1 phase 3G3MX2 A2015 A2022 3G3MX2 A4004 to A4030 St HEEL oral SE pp W D D demm Bediz B e SIS EISE Ga A Ground terminal M4 x 2 3G3MX2 AB00 7 AB015 AB022 i ees keetersgses __ may Ja Je SS eg e From power supply To motors Ground terminal M4 x 2 Connect to L1 and N for 1 phase 2 13 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 2 Wiring Applicable model Terminal arrangement 3G3MX2 A2037 3G3MX2 A4040 3G3MX2 A2055 A2075 3G3MX2 A4055 A4075 From power supply To motors a wg D I K lo Cl hiss eS ae pt 3G3MX2 A2110 3G3MX2 A4110 to A4150 QD QD From power supply To motors 3G3MX2 A2150 From power supply To motors SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 14 2 2 Wiring Recommended Cable Size Wiring Device and Crimp Terminal Terminal Fuse size Earth Inverter model Power block screw Meade Magnetic class J cable size terminal ge contactor Rated mm block width MC 600VAIC mm 200kA war 5 e e ee war a e me wea is oe Ba oe
92. MA MB Contact Selection Input power Electronic thermal load rate LAD frequency Cooling fin temperature Output torque signed heavy load only Optional board 0 20 x rated current to 2 00 x rated current current value at digital current monitor output 1 440 Hz 00 NO contact at P1 P2 MA NC contact at MB 01 NC contact at P1 P2 MA NO contact at MB Default Page setting g i d l l Rated om a 8 el lu 8 HN i SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Default setting Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range 00 Enabled during Low Current acceleration deceleration C038 Signal Output and constant speed Mode Selection 01 Enabled only during constant speed gosg LOW Current WEE three Dae Detection Level current 00 Enabled during Overload l Warnina Sidhal acceleration deceleration C040 9 gt 19 and constant speed Output Mode l l 01 Enabled only during Selection constant speed Overload SEH Warning Level 1 Geck 0 0 to 2 00 x Rated current Overload aad Warning Level 2 current Arrival C042 Frequency 0 00 to 99 99 4 During 100 0 to 400 0 1000 Acceleration Arrival C043 Frequency 0 00 to 99 99 During 100 0 to 400 0 1000 Deceleration Gogy EN oooi 3 0 no yes 5 73 Excessive Level Arrival Frequency 0 00 to 99 99 uring 100 0 to 400 0 1000 ne Acceleration 2 5 122 Arri
93. MM ee a a 5 24 deene oie retainer 5 56 T FESUR UN WEE 3 10 LR BEE 2 8 5 120 Thermal warning cccccccccsccseesseecnseeseeeaes 5 113 Thermistor trip function cece cece 5 120 Torque bias function aeaennenenesieeineeeennenn 5 156 Torque bias monitor eee cece ceee ects eeseeeeees 5 6 Reie ee nae n 5 49 elef CONTON EE 5 156 Torque LADSTOP funchon 5 155 Torque limit function 20 0 e ce eeeeees 5 153 Torque monitor Tupnchon cece 5 151 Torque reference monitor 5 5 Total RUN Ome ae 5 8 EE EE 3 12 7 1 Eege 5 154 U Ib OE ee AAAA AET AEE E 5 71 Undertorque ue 5 152 RE 5 71 User parameter automatic setting MUN WOM BE 5 177 User parameter manual setting function 5 177 User selection monitor 5 10 Wee 5 105 IN a 5 97 INDEX V V f control with speed feedback 5 83 W A LEE 5 126 WA e E a eect ca 5 127 KA en Un KE 1 1 Warning monitor 5 11 Ae ee eee ee Ree eRe ine Ure Ween oer ee nee E 9 132 WOE N arenes Sere er ree rer eee eee nt oe we rece tee ees 9 132 Window Comparaior ccc ceeceseeeteeeeees 5 132 Wiring the main circuit terminals 2 10 Z Zero return FUNCTION ccc ccc eeteeeeeeees 5 168 TA PAINE AAAI VEE AAAI EE TE TEE E N 5 125 INDEX 5 Terms and Conditions of Sale OMRON 5 7 10 11 12 13 Offer Acceptance These terms and conditions these Terms are deemed part of all quotes agreements purchase orders acknowledgments price lists cata
94. Master Inverter 2 The Management Inverter sends a master switching command and the Master Inverter changes 3 The next Master Inverter sends data to each slave inverter in the same manner as in 1 4 2 and 3 are repeated Note Since the Inverter communication is performed in the form of broadcasting station number 00 all communication data are sent to all stations Accordingly while a slave not specified as the recipient of the Master also receives data if the data is not addressed to that slave the data will be discarded in the slave SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 7 Co Inverter Communication g Example of Inverter Inverter Communication Sequence Shown below is a communication sequence involving a total of four Inverters from station numbers 01 to 04 where the Master Inverter is one of 01 to 03 Station register data Sent data from the master Up to five recipients Received data in the slave can be specified VA Master switching command Management Inverter 01 Inverter 02 Inverter 03 Inverter 04 _Send All slaves receive data from the master t1 Silent interval Communication Wait Time C078 but they will discard the data t2 Silent interval Communication Wait Time C078 if the data is not addressed to themselves t3 Communication Timeout Time C077 For the Management Inverter be sure to set a value other than 0 1 s or more is recommended in C
95. No 14 Safety functions are supported The 3G3MX2 series Inverters meet requirements for IEC 60204 1 Stop Category 0 operation and ISO 13849 1 Performance Level PLd of the Machinery Directive For details refer to 5 13 Safety Function on page 5 170 Read and Understand this Manual Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is
96. OFF Output RY ON 4 2 Function Mode Data canbe changed SN during RUN Default Monitor or data range A setting Page RUN 0 0 to 100 0 Same as the options for C021 33 LOG1 34 LOG2 35 LOG3 62 EDM 63 OPO and no cannot be selected i i 8 i i 8 i i 8 Same as the options for C021 33 LOG1 34 LOG2 35 LOG3 62 EDM 63 OPO and no cannot be selected LOG3 62 EDM 63 OPO and no cannot be selected 1SI7 JoJOWIeIeY Same as the options for C021 33 LOG1 34 LOG2 35 LOG3 62 EDM 63 OPO and no cannot be selected 9 125 Same as the options for C021 33 LOG1 34 LOG2 35 LOG3 62 EDM 63 OPO and no cannot be selected Same as the options for C021 33 LOG1 34 LOG2 35 LOG3 62 EDM 63 OPO and no cannot be selected Same as the options for C021 33 LOG1 34 LOG2 35 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 34 Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode 4 35 Parameter No Function name I O terminal function Control parameter Data can Data can be changed during RUN during RUN Default setting be set Monitor or data range Page Input Terminal 1 Number 2 Speed Response 1 1 to 1000 Speed Response 2 H e Kiel 7 Input Terminal 2 Input Terminal 3 Gigs CEET d iere eerst 1 no yes ms 5 32 Response Time Input Terminal
97. Overvoltage Overcurrent restart esch Restart Selection 0099 RON 03 Trip after frequency Ge matching deceleration stop 04 Frequency pull in restart wonfReeed Cd SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 46 uoljoUNy UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page No No parameters resolution Overvoltage Overcurrent ye Restart Count Selection GE WE EE Se Overvoltage Overcurrent 130Ch Restart Standby Time b011 R W 3 to 1000 0 1 s 130Dh Electronic Thermal Level 1 b012 R W 200 to 1000 0 1 00 Reduced torque characteristics 5 110 130Eh Be VOSITA b013 R W 01 Constant torque Characteristics Selection 1 characteristics 02 Free setting 130Fh Reserved oo 1310h Lie aS electric Thermal b015 0 to Free electric Thermal 1 Hz Frequency 1 Frequency 2 ia rome Inema b016 R W 0 to Rated current 0 01 Current 1 Free electric Thermal EE EE 1312h b017 R W Frequency 1 to Free electric 1 Hz Frequency 2 Thermal Frequency 3 5 112 enh ema b018 R W 0 to Rated current 0 01 Current 2 Free electric Thermal Free electric Thermal E Frequency 3 ee Frequency 2 to 400 1000 ve e ee oe cima b020 1 RIW oto Rated curent to Rated current 0 01 Current 3 ne Disabled 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation 1316h Overload Limit 1 b021 02 En
98. RIW 0 to 500 0 01 s Confirmation de ase es b125 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Frequency 1381h Brake Release Current b126 0 to 20000 0 01 1382h Break ON Frequency b127 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 1383h Reserved 1384h Ee 00 Disabled Su ec F nction 01 Enabled DC voltage 1385h Pee b130 R W kept constant Selection During l i 02 Enabled Acceleration Deceleration enabled Overvoltage 200 V class 330 to 390 1386h Suppression Level b131 R W 400 V class 660 to 780 1 V During Deceleration 1387h Overvoltage b132 R W 10 to 3000 0 01 s Suppression Parameter Overvoltage 1388h Suppression b133 R W 0 to 500 0 01 Proportional Gain Setting Overvoltage 1389h Suppression Integral b134 R W 0 to 1500 0 1 s Time Setting 138Ah to Reserved 1393h GS Input Operation ee Do not trip 1395h to Reserved 1398h 1399h Reserved o 139Ah to Reserved 13A2h 13A3h Reserved E EE EE 13A5h Reserved bio Frequency 00 Disabled ieee Setting Mode Selection Ge e lee 01 Enabled Ts Page 5 143 5 143 5 117 Le Initial Screen Automatic 00 Disabled e Switching Function SE ew 01 Enabled a SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 52 uoljOUNY UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 53 Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name S Page No No parameters resolution 00 Trip 01 Tri
99. Reference Input Selection Forward Power Running SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 14 suoljoun Functions 5 2 Basic Functions Parameter Parameter No Function name No Function name C056 Overtorque Level Reverse Regeneration P034 Torque Reference Setting Overtorque Level Reverse Power Running C058 NERONAHG EVE i P037 Torque Bias Value Forward Regeneration C057 P036 Torque Bias Mode Overtorque Undertorque Signal e C059 Output Mode Selection P038 Torque Bias Polarity Selection H001 Auto tuning Selection P039 Speed Limit Value in Torque Control forward H002 H202 Motor Parameter 1 2 P040 Speed Limit Value in Torque Control reverse Take note that the following multi function input terminals cannot be selected in the light load mode Multi function input terminals Multi function output relay terminals 40 TL Overtorque undertorque 41 TRQ1 During torque limit Frequency Reference Selection and Output Frequency Setting 5 15 Select the method of the frequency reference Since multi step speed operation in which a combination pattern of input terminals is used to specify the speed is given priority over Frequency Reference Selection A001 A001 need not be set Only when all multi step speed inputs are OFF and therefore Oth is specified the frequency conforms to the setting of A001 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 2 Basic Functions tage Defa
100. S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 14 Other Functions Initialization Method Complete Initialization of Fault Monitor Data Step 3 When the initialization display disappears the initialization Step 1 Set b084 to 03 and Step 2 Set b180 to 01 and press the Enter key press the Enter key Sos sg rege l Initialization VIN N A Initialization completed Step 1 5 To perform partial initialization set b094 cP j How to Clear Fault Monitor Step 1 Set b084 to 01 and press the Enter key See AA D Step 2 Set b180 to 01 and press the Enter key AA D Step 3 When the display showing the clearing process in progress disappears the clearing is complete om completed suoljoun j Note 1 To prevent inadvertent initialization b084 and b180 will return to 00 even if changed once the initialization is complete and when the power is reconnected Set these parameters every time the initialization is performed Note 2 Even if initialization is performed the parameters for Initialization related Functions b085 b094 Heavy Light Load Selection b049 FV FI Adjustment C081 C082 and Thermistor Adjustment C085 are not initialized Note 3 Once initialized the current settings can no longer be restored SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 176 Functions 5 14 Other Functions User P
101. SET is allocated Output voltage 100 wan Output frequency A043 A243 Base frequency 100 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method g Automatic Torque Boost If Automatic torque boost is selected for Torque Boost Selection 041 A241 01 the output frequency and output voltage are adjusted automatically according to the load level The output voltage due to automatic torque boost is added to the manual torque boost voltage If the desired characteristics cannot be achieved adjust the Manual Torque Boost Parameters A042 A242 A043 A243 by referring to the table below Set Motor Capacity H003 H203 and Motor Pole Number H004 H204 accurately according to the motor used To avoid a overcurrent trip during deceleration set the AVR Selection to Always ON A081 00 If the desired characteristics cannot be achieved using automatic torque boost adjust each item by referring to the table below Phenomenon Adjusting method SE item 1 Gradually increase the Manual Torque Boost A042 A242 Voltage Setting Insufficient torque at low 2 Gradually increase the Automatic Torque Boost Slip speed Compensation Gain RUNES Motor does not rotate at low speed 3 Gradually increase the Automatic Torque Boost A046 A246 Voltage Compensation Gain 4 Reduce the set value of the Carrier Frequency b083 Rotation speed lowers when Gradually increase the Automatic Torque B
102. SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 A D000 5 2 Basic Functions j Switching between Analog Current and VR via the FV FI Terminal Ale L222 ee OOOO Parameter Default Function name j Unit No setting A001 Frequency Reference 01 Control circuit terminal block Selection 1 A005 FV FI Selection 03 Switch between voltage VR 0 e l 16 FV FI Analog input switch Multi function ON Volume C001 to C007 Input Selection OFF Current 1 Volume Volume on the external Digital Operator 3G3AX OP01 i Either Analog Voltage or Analog Current is Used To minimize the effect of noise allocate the FV FI terminal even when either analog voltage or current is used and select either current or voltage by turning ON OFF the terminal If the FV Fl terminal cannot be allocated be sure to short the unused analog input terminal as shown below PAI PA Parameter i Default Function name Unit No setting A001 Frequency ote eee i gd Gonirolaircuitterminalblock 02 z Selection 1 Multi function SES Input Selection FV FI not allocated E Wirin Voltage FV terminal is used FLSC shorted J Current FI terminal is used FV SC shorted i Specified by a Sum of Analog Voltage and Analog Current V Da PS Parameter Default Function name S Unit No setting A001 PER Reference 01 Control circuit terminal block 02 Selection 1 Multi function EES Input Selection Need not be allocated WS SYSDRI
103. SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 1 Monitor Mode User Selection Monitor 2 Types d050 Desired two monitor items can be set and monitored by switching the item using the Increment Decrement keys Set the parameter numbers to be monitored in b160 and b161 Example To monitor d001 set 001 in b160 b161 Parameter f Default Function name Unit setting No User Selection Monitor The two items set in b160 and b161 d050 2 Types are monitored b160 d050 Monitor Target 1 001 to 030 b161 d050 Monitor Target 2 Corresponding to d001 to d030 1 _ E 1 Fault Monitor parameters d081 to d086 are excluded J Data of monitor t t 1 set in b160 arget 1 set in MA A Data of monitor target 2 set in b161 When d001 d007 Frequency Setting Mode Selection b163 is set to 01 Enabled the output frequencies in d001 and d007 can be changed using the Increment Decrement keys during operation It cannot be changed if d001 and d007 are monitored using d050 Inverter Mode Monitor d060 Displays the current Inverter mode The Inverter mode is changed using b171 For details refer to Inverter Mode Selection on page 5 178 Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting e induction motor heavy load mode l V IM induction motor light load mode H I IM induction motor high frequency mode Inverter Mode d060 Monitor SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G
104. SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Function name Output Frequency Setting Acceleration Time Setting 1 Acceleration Time Setting 2 Deceleration Time Setting 1 Deceleration Time Setting 2 Monitor or data range 0 0 Starting frequency to maximum frequency 1 2 0 0 to 100 0 PID function enabled 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 Default setting 4 2 Function Mode OI n Page 9 15 9 24 RUN Direction 00 Forward 5 93 Selection 01 Reverse 1SI7 JoJOWIeIeY 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Page Datacan Datacan be perau Set data be set changed setting during during RUN RUN Frequency Digital Operator volume Reference Control circuit terminal Selection 1 block Digital Operator F001 Modbus communication Frequency Modbus RTU Reference Optional board Selection 2 Pulse train frequency Do not set Operation function output Ee 01 Control circuit terminal Selection 1 block D 02 Digital Operator 2 RUN Command 93 Modbus communication E A202 Selection 2 Modbus RTU 04 Optional board Base 30 0 to Maximum Frequency Frequency 1 1 A004 Base 30 0 to Maximum Frequency SC Frequency 2 2 A204 A004 Maximum Base Frequency 1 A
105. Sat DL BAL e Read manual before installing e Wait 10 minutes for capacitor discharge after disconnecting power supply SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 Checking Before Unpacking Checking Before Unpacking Checking the Product On delivery be sure to check that the delivered product is the Inverter 3G3MX2 model that you ordered Should you find any problems with the product immediately contact your nearest local sales representative or OMRON sales office Checking the Nameplate Inverter model OMRON INVERTER 3G3MX2 A2055 INPUT 50Hz 60Hz V 1Ph A INPUT 50Hz 60Hz 200 240V 3Ph _ 37 0 30 8A OUTPUT 0 1 1000Hz 200 240V 3Ph 30 0 25 0A LOT NO gt gt Ver NTA kkk kkk kkk kkk kk NE kkk kK OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN Input specifications _ _ Output specifications gt Checking the Model 3G3MX2 A2055 EG Maximum applicable motor capacity CT rating 001 0 1 kW 007 0 75 kW 2 2 kW 0 0 0 0 5 22 37 3 7 kW 055 5 5 kW 11 kW 150 15 kW Voltage class B 1 phase 200 V AC 200 V class 2 3 phase 200 V AC 200 V class 3 phase 400 V AC 400 V class Enclosure rating A Panel mounting IP 10 min or closed wall mounting models Checking the Accessories Note that Instruction manual is the only accessory included with the 3G3MX2 model Mounting screws and other necessar
106. This function resets an Inverter trip To reset an Inverter trip press the STOP RESET key on the Digital Operator or turn ON the reset RS terminal When using the reset terminal allocate 18 RS to a multi function input terminal The restart method to be applied after the reset operation can be selected by Reset Restart Selection C103 Take note however that the Inverter will restart at O Hz if Reset Selection C102 is set to 03 Trip reset only regardless of the setting of C103 If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching extend the Restart Standby Time b003 A trip reset time can be selected by Reset Selection C102 In addition the reset signal can be applied only to trip reset due to an error For the Reset RS terminal only the NO contact setting is effective Do not use the reset terminal to stop the Inverter output The reset operation will clear various data such as electronic thermal function and usage rate counter for regenerative braking thereby causing damage to the Inverter Parameter Function name Description peau Unit No setting b003 mesial SES EN h Time from reset to restart 1 0 S Time 100 0 Frequency Matching Lower If the frequency drops to the set b007 he frequency or below during the motor free Hz Limit Frequency run the Inverter restarts at 0 Hz Setting 0 20 x Rated Frequency Pull currentto Current limit level at frequency pull in venter b028 ere ER rated A in Resta
107. U U U U U me Ou HD OO O O NI II O A NO Sender Register of All Stations in Co inverter 0000 to FFFF Hex Communication 5 P160 P161 P163 P172 Reserved P155 U U U o NI O O CO O N N CA Ui U U Uu U a a wesch SI di oN Al N Co N ol E U Ur U U Vi U CO N O OO NM gt O CO SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 44 1SI7 JoJOWIeIeY 4 2 Function Mode Data can BEE 1e aa changed Page uring RUN Default Parameter No Function name j setting Monitor or data range i during i RUN U001 U002 U003 U004 U005 User 1 Selection el O eS es lt User 2 Selection J O es es User 3 Selection J O eS es User 4 Selection O es es User 5 Selection J O es es User 6 Selection no es es User 7 Selection 008 User 8 Selection 009 User 9 Selection User 10 Selection User 11 Selection User 12 Selection User 13 Selection User 14 Selection no User i5 d001 to P186 Selection User 16 Selection User 17 Selection User 18 Selection User 19 Selection User 20 Selection User 21 Selection User 22 Selection User 23 Selection User 24 Selection J O es es CIC O O Oj O NI O C O NO J J J J J J 3 2 ajalajal alaj alajal e ajal a a l alallala SS an s C es es
108. UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register 2 Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page No No parameters resolution 12A7h to Reserved 12AEh Digital Operator Volume FV voltage input 12AFh Operation Frequency A141 R W FI current input l Selection 1 Modbus communication Modbus RTU Optional board Pulse train frequency Digital Operator Volume FV voltage input 5 70 42B0h Operation Frequency A142 R W Fl current input Selection 2 Modbus communication Modbus RTU Optional board Pulse train frequency Addition A141 A142 Operation Function Sa oO SS Operator Selection SE S H Multiplication A141 x een F Additi requency ition Amount Setting evan 12B4h 5 71 00 Frequency reference Frequency Addition Sign A145 12B5h l Selection 01 Frequency reference A145 12B6h to Reserved e 12B8h el gt Snap Cran Aso RW 01050 1 Curve Ratio 1 EE ee Acceleraton Aas RAW 0 1080 1 Curve Ratio 2 Se 12BBh ELS Shape Deceleration Aus Raw lot 50 1 Curve Ratio 1 pohl gt Snape eS RAW ot50 1 Curve Ratio 2 Beet Deceleration St HIGH EE R W 0 to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz T Frequency A154 5 62 LOW 12BFh Deceleration Stop Time A155 0 to 600 0 1 s area PID Sleep Functi HIGH EE R W 0 to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz Operation Level A156 12C ih LOW 5 73 OCA eo ee
109. USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 AO0000 5 112 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Thermal Warning This function outputs an alarm signal before electronic thermal overload protection is activated The warning level can be set in C061 Allocate 13 THM to any Multi function Output Terminal Selections C021 to C022 or Multi function Relay Output Function Selection C026 Parameter Default 9 Function name g Unit No setting O Electronic The Inverter does not operate C061 Thermal Warning 4 to 100 1 Level Set a thermal warning signal output level Multi function Output Terminal C021 to C022 Selection C026 Multi function Relay Output Function Selection 13 THM Thermal warning 1 Set a percentage relative to the electronic thermal multiplication value When the value reaches 100 Overload Trip E05 occurs Functions 5 113 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Overload Limit Overload Warning i Overload Limit The Inverter monitors the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation and lowers output frequency automatically when the motor current reaches to the overload limit level This function prevents an overcurrent trip caused by excessive moment of inertia during acceleration or caused by sporadic load fluctuations during constant speed operation You c
110. Unit No setting Geer Logic Output Signal C145 GREEN C148 election 00 to 63 Except 33 to 35 62 63 and C143 i no Logic Output Signal l a Selection 22 p C149 G t 02 XOR 33 LOG1 Logic operation Multi function Output EIER C021 to C022 Terminal Selection 34 LOG2 Logic operation C026 Multi function Relay output 2 Output Function Selection G ss Logic Output Signal Lin C147 oe ee OR Operator Selection 35 LOG3 Logic operation output 3 1 Select operand 1 2 5elect operand 2 Capacitor Life Warning WAC This function estimates service life of the capacitor on the PCB based on the Inverter s internal temperature and ON time Life assessment monitor d022 shows the status of this signal Parameter Default S Function name Unit No setting C021 to C022 Multi function Output Terminal Selection 39 WAC Capacitor life C026 Output Function Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 AO0000 5 126 suoljoun Functions 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Cooling Fan Operation You can set whether to operate the Inverter s cooling fan constantly or only during Inverter operation Function name Detam Unit setting Parameter No b092 b093 Cooling Fan Operation Cooling Fan Total Operation Time Clear 00 Always 01 Only during operation However the cooling fan operates for 5 a minutes after power on
111. VDC Ki O Multi function 2 points P1 EDM P2 selectable from 43 functions h output e D S Relay output 1 point 1c contact MC MA MB selectable from 43 functions E S O Analog output 1 point AM terminal Voltage 10 bits 0 to 10 V Frequency current selectable 5 Frequency di O monitor Pulse output 1 point MP terminal 32 KHz max 0 to 10 V 2 RS 422 RJ45 connector for Digital Operator S S RS 485 Control circuit terminal block Modbus communication Modbus RTU E USB USB1 1 mini B connector Q O SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 9 4 9 1 Standard Specification List Function name Specifications AVR function V f characteristics switching upper lower limit 16 step speeds starting frequency adjustment jogging operation carrier frequency adjustment PID control frequency jump analog gain bias adjustment S shape acceleration deceleration electronic thermal characteristics level adjustment restart function torque boost function fault monitor soft lock function frequency conversion display USP function motor 2 control function UP DWN Overcurrent suppression etc Other functions Ambient 10 to 50 C However derating is required temperature Ambient storage 20 C to 65 C short time temperature during transport temperature Humidity 20 to 90 RH with no condensation Vibration 5 9 m s 0 6G 10 to 55 Hz Location At a maximum altitude of 1 000 m indoors
112. VP 1 7th power or free V F setting calculate the total motor capacity and select the closest data in Motor capacity When automatic torque boost is used improper setting of this parameter may result in torque reduction or motor hunting The motor parameters can be set by one of the following three methods 1 Use the motor parameters of a standard motor When the Standard Motor Parameters are selected H002 H202 00 the motor parameter values set in HO20 220 to H024 224 are applied The parameters of a standard motor are set in HO20 220 to H024 224 by default 2 Measure automatically via offline auto tuning gt When the auto tuning parameters are selected in Motor Parameter H0O02 H202 02 after offline auto tuning the motor parameters automatically measured by offline auto tuning H030 230 to H034 234 are applied Refer to Offline Auto Tuning Function on page 5 146 3 Set desired parameters gt In either 1 or 2 above the motor parameters can be changed to desired values Change the values of H020 220 to H024 224 or H030 230 to H034 234 according to the value of H002 202 The parameters of a standard motor are set in H030 230 to H034 234 by default ec Default Function name setting 00 Standard motor parameter Application of HO20 220 to H024 224 as motor parameters H002 H202 Motor Parameter 1 2 02 Auto tuning parameter Application of H030 230 to H034 234 as motor parameters H003 H20
113. according to the motor specifications This function is disabled if the control method is Free V f Setting A044 A244 02 Refer to Free V f Setting on page 5 47 Take note that if a base frequency below 50 Hz is set the motor may burn out If a motor voltage exceeding the motor specification is selected the motor may burn out Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting A003 A203 Base Frequency 1 2 30 0 to Maximum Frequency 1 2 Hz Been Hz 200V class 200 215 220 230 240 200 Motor Incoming A082 A282 Voltage Selection 1 2 400V class 380 400 415 440 460 400 S 480 Related functions A081 A082 Output voltage Motor incoming voltage selection Output frequency Hz Base frequency SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 26 suoljoun j Functions 5 2 Basic Functions AVR Function This function outputs voltage to the motor correctly even if the incoming voltage to the Inverter fluctuates The output voltage to the motor is based on the voltage selected by motor incoming voltage selection Note however that a voltage exceeding the incoming voltage cannot be output AVR Filter Time Parameter Voltage Gain During Deceleration During deceleration the motor functions as a generator and the generated energy is returned to the Inverter As a result the Inverter s DC voltage rises and if it exceeds the overvoltage level an overvoltage OV trip occurs Setting a h
114. addresses 01 to 09 251 FBh Broadcast it to slave addresses 10 to 19 252 FCh Broadcast it to slave addresses 20 to 29 253 FDh Broadcast it to slave addresses 30 to 39 254 FEh Broadcast it to slave addresses 40 to 247 Parameter No Use a Parameter No to specify the function to be executed by the Inverter Supported Parameter Nos are shown below Parameter No Maximum number Maximum data number in Parameter No of data bytes 1 message in 1 message 01h Read the status of a coil 32 coils in bit 03h Read the content of a holding register O5h Write into a coil 1 coil in bit 32 O6h Write into a holding register 1 register in byte 16 registers in byte O8h Loop back test OFh Write into multiple coils 4 32 coils in bit 10h Write into multiple registers ECH 16 registers in byte 47h Read from or write into multiple 39 32 16 16 registers in byte holding resisters f Data Send data relating to a Parameter No The data transmission format varies depending on the Parameter No The 3G3MX2 Series supports the data types specified below among the types used in Modbus communication Modbus RTU Data name Description Coil Binary data 1 bit that can be read or written Holding register 16 bit data that can be read or written SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 4 Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Protocol g Error Check CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check is used f
115. asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR 2 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Read and Understand this Manual Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems a
116. correct voltage is output e For the analog current input disconnect the wiring and measure the source F terminal current using a tester etc to check if the correct current is supplied Disable the function or raise the operation level Change the setting Shorten the acceleration time FO02 F202 A092 A292 Turn OFF the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated Turn OFF the multi step speed setting If the multi step speed setting terminal is turned ON multi step speed operation becomes effective Accordingly operation is performed according to the frequency set in Multi step Speed Reference 1 to 15 A021 to A035 Set Frequency Reference Selection A001 to 02 Digital Operator Turn OFF the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated Set Display Selection b037 to 00 Complete display Turn OFF the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated Turn OFF the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated Reference Page 2 6 5 37 5 114 5 28 5 60 5 24 5 59 5 64 5 85 5 88 5 91 5 91 7 12 suoljeiadoO sdUueUDjUIeI x 7 2 Troubleshooting Parameters cannot The Inverter is running Stop the Inverter and wait for the motor to be changed decelerate to a stop and then set again When the mode is set to Data can be changed during RUN b031 10 some parameters can be changed even during operation
117. display is given higher priority After removing the cause of the trip set H001 to 01 and then perform the auto tuning again If the offline auto tuning is performed with free V f setting selected as the control method the Inverter displays the abort message and stops processing During auto tuning the deceleration stop tends to slow under certain conditions such as when the incoming voltage is high In this case press the STOP key and adjust the parameters so that the value of Over voltage Suppression Integral Time Setting 6134 will decrease and the value of Overvoltage Suppression Level During Deceleration b131 will increase SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 148 suoljoun 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control If an overcurrent trip occurs during acceleration while auto tuning is in progress adjust the parameters so that the acceleration time will increase and the overload limit level will decrease If an overcurrent trip occurs during deceleration adjust the parameters so that the value of Overvoltage Suppression Integral Time Setting b134 will increase and the value of Overvoltage Suppression Level During Deceleration b131 will decrease Functions 5 149 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control Operating Procedure Motor rotates H001 02 Step 1 Set the motor Step 2 Set the base Step 3 Set Auto tuning capacity and numbe
118. equipment sensors etc Apply this noise filter to reduce the noise generating on the output side of the Inverter both the input side and output side 2 17 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 2 Wiring Wiring Control Circuit Terminals Wiring and Arranging a Control Circuit Terminal Block Terminals SC and PC are common terminals for input output signals They are isolated each other Do not short circuit or ground these common terminals Do not ground these common terminals via external equipment and check the external equipment ground conditions Connect diodes when wiring input output signals for multiple inverters because sneak circuit paths are created For wiring of each control circuit terminal use a twisted pair shielded cable and connect the shielded cable to each common terminal The control circuit terminal connection cable should be 20 m or shorter Separate the control circuit terminal connection cables from the main circuit cable power cable and the relay control circuit cable If the two cables must be crossed with each other make sure they bisect at right angles Otherwise the Inverters may malfunction g D CU Q 5 For connection of the thermistor input terminal connect the twisted wires to terminal SC individually and separate them from other SC common cables Since a weak current flows through the thermistor the thermistor connection cable must be separated from the main c
119. following 1 Position command 2 Speed reference frequency reference 3 Acceleration time deceleration time DC injection braking must be set DC injection braking DB will remain effective until the RUN command is turned OFF In absolute position control the frequency reference and acceleration deceleration reference conform to the currently selected parameters The exact target position may not be achieved depending on the DC injection braking force or creep speed setting Adjust the strength of the DC injection brake to minimize rotational fluctuations when the DC injection brake is applied and in a range that will not cause the electronic thermal to trip If the creep speed setting is small displacement will tend to be smaller 5 163 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 12 Simple Position Control Function The trigger for starting deceleration according to the speed reference is as follows Number of pulses required for the number of rotations equivalent to the triangle for deceleration from the current frequency at the applicable deceleration time 1 25 rotations lt Position deviation lf movement decelerates to the creep speed before the following stopping condition is met movement continues at the creep speed Movement stops using DC injection braking when the position deviation becomes less than 50 pulses calculated at x4 If the position command is set to a low value the Inverter may conduct decele
120. frequency mode the values are fixed and thus parameters b049 A097 A098 and b089 are not displayed EL S shape curve 04 EL S shape curve Disabled 00 Disabled Enabled depends on 01 Enabled depends current on current Enabled depends on 02 Enabled depends fin temperature on fin temperature Automatic Carrier Reduction b089 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 14 Other Functions The following table gives the differences in the setting ranges and default settings for parameters in Normal Mode with a Heavy Load Rating CT and High frequency Mode Normal Mode with a Heavy Load Parameter Rating CT No Function name Setting range Default Setting range Default F002 Acceleration Time 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 10 00 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 30 00 Setting 1 F202 Acceleration Time 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 10 00 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 30 00 Setting 2 F003 Deceleration Time 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 10 00 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 30 00 Setting 1 F203 Deceleration Time 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 10 00 0 01 to 3 600 00 s 30 00 Setting 2 A003 Base Frequency 1 SE to Maximum Frequency SEN Maximum Frequency 1000 0 1 A004 Hz 1 A004 Hz A203 Base Frequency 2 0 to Maximum Frequency s 0 to Maximum Frequency 1000 0 2 A204 Hz 2 A204 Hz A004 Maximum Base Frequency 1 A003 to Base Frequency 1 A003 to 1000 0 Frequency 1 400 0 Hz 1 000 0 Hz A204 Maximum Base Frequency 2 A203 to Base Frequency 2
121. from the H024 H224 Low frequency Rotation is not constant set parameter H034 H234 operation l Raise the speed response H005 H205 Note To use a motor with a capacity lower than that of the Inverter set Torque Limit 0041 to b044 by making sure the value a calculated with the following formula does not exceed 200 Otherwise the motor may burn out oz Torque limit value x Inverter capacity Motor capacity Example From the above formula the torque limit value to achieve a 200 with a 0 75 kW Inverter and 0 4 kW motor is calculated as follows Torque Limit b041 to b044 a x Motor capacity Inverter capacity 200 x 0 4 kW 0 75 kW 106 Monitor Function This function monitors the estimate output torque of the motor This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method A044 A244 03 Take note that if constant torque characteristics VC reduced torque characteristics VP 1 7th power or free V f setting is selected for Control Method A044 A244 this function is disabled and the output signals for display or through the control terminal block become indeterminable To perform monitoring via the Digital Operator select Display Parameter d012 To perform monitoring using signals from the control terminal block refer to MP Terminal Pulse PWM Output on page 5 42 or AM Terminal Analog Output on page 5 44 The torque monitor value under this function assumes that
122. functions Initialization Setting The set values can be initialized to the factory defaults The fault monitor data can also be cleared To prevent inadvertent initialization initialization cannot be performed unless multiple parameters are set Total RUN Time d016 and Power ON Time Monitor d017 cannot be cleared If Display Selection b037 or Soft Lock Selection b031 is set initialization cannot be performed because the following parameters used in initialization cannot be accessed Cancel the fixed display or soft lock and then perform initialization If you forget the password there is no other means for recovery Exercise due caution when setting a password Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting 00 Initialization disabled 01 Fault monitor clear Initialization b084 02 Initializes data Selection 03 Fault monitor clear Data initialization 04 Do not set 00 All data Complete initialization 01 Initialize all data other than input output terminal basic communication settings S Initialization b094 Target Selection 92 Initialize only EES functions U001 to U032 7 03 Initialize all data other than user set registered functions U001 to U032 and Display Selection b037 Initialization Data SES Selection 00 Do not change Perform 00 Initialization disabled Initialization disabled b180 a SSS Selection 01 01 Perform initialization mode selection initi
123. i Monitor Display Only b037 05 Displays the Monitor Display 6037 for d SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 90 suoljoun Functions 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Functions Display Fixed DISP When 86 DISP is allocated to a multi function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON the Digital Operator switches to the display selected by Initial Screen Selection b038 and other parameters can no longer be displayed Parameter S Default Function name Unit No setting C001 to C007 Multi function 86 DISP Display fixed 8 Input Selection Related functions b038 Password Function A password can be set for Display Selection b037 and Soft Lock Selection b031 to prevent displaying and changing of parameters If you forget the set password no other method is available to cancel the password lock Exercise due caution when setting a password because our factory or service station cannot check the password eae Function Default Description Unit name setting 0000 Password Password function disabled disabled b190 Peo haan 0000 Setting 0001 to FEFF Leet password A for Oo Selection Oo Password A This parameter is used to authenticate 0000 Password Password function disabled disabled Password B 0000 b192 Setting 0001 to FFFF Smets EE password B for Soft Lock Selection b031 b193 Password B 0000 to FFFF This parameter is used to authenticate 0000 8 A
124. i WM LAD frequency PWM PWM PWM Parameter EE No Description pulse Full scale value 00 Output frequency 0 to maximum frequency Hz Output current 0 to 200 Output torque 2 0 to 200 Digital output frequency 0 to maximum frequency Hz Output voltage 0 to 133 04 PWM Example 7 5 V at 200 V for a 200 V class Input power 0 to 200 0 C027 06 Electronic thermal load rate P O to 100 0 to maximum frequency Hz 5 7 10 12 15 16 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 42 suoljoun Functions 5 4 Analog Signal i MP Gain Setting The output gain can be set using C105 only when the PWM output target is selected by C027 The output pulse can be set to C030 only when the digital current monitor is selected by C027 C030 value 1 440 Hz The output pulse can be set to C047 only when the pulse train input monitor is selected by C027 Output Input x C047 Parameter h Default S Function name i Unit No setting 50 to 200 S SES BE SE Set a gain for the MP monitor i Digital Current 0 2 x Rated current to 2 0 x Rated current C030 Monitor Reference Set a current value at 1440 Hz output ae A current Value l 0 01 to 99 99 C047 Puse Traini ute Output pulse frequency Input pulse 1 00 Coefficient frequency x C047 Example 1 PWM output Example 2 Pulse output T T l lt lt gt Cycle T Constant 6 4 ms Cycle T Variable 4 Duty t T Variable Duty t T Fixed to
125. input voltage at the time of ae 0 1 V a tripping Tine ct S Monitor 5 RUN Time Tine ct S Total RUN time at the time of 1 Ih Telam n Monitor 5 RUN tripping Time Telam n Fault Monitor 5 Taea S Time Taea S Power ON time at the time of 1 m Fault Monitor 5 Telam tripping Time Telam aa _ Monitor 4 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALI_ILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register Parameter Function name No No 0044h Fault Monitor 6 Cause Fault Monitor 6 ERGch Inverter Status Fault Monitor 6 meen Frequency HIGH Fault Monitor 6 SES Frequency LOW 0048h Fault Monitor 6 Current d086 0049h Fault Monitor 6 Voltage Fault Monitor 6 RUN SIRAN Time HIGH Fault Monitor 6 RUN SEA Time LOW Fault Monitor 6 ON Orr Time HIGH Fault Monitor 6 ON EFSER Time LOW 004Eh Warning Monitor d090 004Fh to Not used O8FFh 0900h EEPROM Write D Monitor and setting Data parameters resolution Refer to Inverter Fault Factor List on page 6 35 Refer to Inverter Fault Factor 8 List on page 6 35 O to 100000 0 01 Hz Output current value at the 0 01 A time of tripping DC input voltage at the time of 0 1 V tripping Total RUN time at the time of 1 hI tripping Power ON time at the time of 1 hl tripping Inaccessible 0 Motor parameter recalculation 1 Set value storage in EEPROM Other Motor parameter recalculation and set valu
126. jogging stop 01 Disabled during operation deceleration stop on jogging stop Functions injection braking on jogging stop Jogging Stop 02 Disabled during operation DC A039 03 Enabled operation free run on jogging Selection 04 Enabled DE ege operation deceleration on DE ege jogging stop 05 Enabled Ee operation DC injection Ee on jogging stop C001 to C007 Multi function 06 JG Jogging Input Selection TI Jogging Stop Selection A039 is set to 02 or 05 DC injection braking data must be set Refer to DC Injection Braking DB on page 5 135 1 Note To perform the jogging operation turn on the JG terminal before the FW or RV terminal Even when the RUN command source is the Digital Operator issue a RUN command after turning ON the JG terminal Also note that the frequency reference can be changed by F001 even during jogging operation 5 59 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operation Functions Example 1 Jogging Operation is Not Performed JG input nun EL Set frequency oe d Jogging frequency Output frequency When A039 00 01 or 02 jogging operation is not performed if the FW signal is turned ON first Example 2 Jogging Operation is Performed JG input FW input During deceleration Normal operation Jogging operation 2 gd Jogging frequency Output frequency Free run Accelerates according to the
127. machine may be damaged as a result Accordingly select 01 Enabled Motor does not rotate in H001 6 No load current lo can also be checked by the current monitor function as the current during no load 50 Hz operation at V f setting Also the setting obtained by auto tuning with the motor rotating can be rewritten HO23 H223 to the monitored value It can be rewritten to the monitored value after executing auto tuning with the motor rotating Even when H001 01 Motor does not rotate the motor may still rotate slightly To perform auto tuning for a motor with the subsequent lower capacity enable Overload Limit Selection b021 b221b024 and set Overload Limit Level b022 b222 to 1 5 times larger than the rated current of the motor If the value of Overvoltage Suppression Integral Time b134 is small an Overvoltage Trip E07 may occur at an auto tuning In this case increase b134 and then perform auto tuning again 5 147 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control eae Default Function name Unit setting 00 Disabled Disabled 01 Enabled Ee does not rotate 02 Enabled Motor rotates H001 Auto tuning Selection 00 Standard motor parameter H002 H202 Motor Parameter 1 2 02 Auto 02 Auto tuning parameter parameter H003 H203 Motor Capacity 1 2 0 1 to 18 5 Default setting H004 H204 Motor Pole Number 1 2 2 4 6 8 10 pole Motor 1 2 Parameter R1 0 001
128. minimum 0 or greater The output frequencies of A013 A103 A163 are 0 Hz A014 100 Analog input A104 FV FI A164 10 V 20 mA VR maximum SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 4 Analog Signal MP Terminal Pulse PWM Output The MP terminal is a 10 VDC pulse output or PWM output The output frequency and output current can be monitored using the MP terminal on the control circuit terminal block i MP Selection Select a signal to output from the following table If pulse output 03 08 or 15 is selected use the digital frequency counter For other output signals use the analog meter Digital current monitor Refer to MP Gain Setting on page 5 Pulse 43 Cooling fin temperature Pulse train input monitor Refer to MP Gain Setting on page 5 Pulse 43 Optional board 1 07 LAD frequency is the frequency reference issued by the Inverter and corresponds to Output Frequency Monitor d001 00 Output frequency is the value that is calculated reflecting vector control compensation and stabilization control under sensorless vector control etc 2 This setting is effective only when the control method is Sensorless Vector Control A044 A244 03 3 If Frequency Conversion Coefficient b086 is set a gain converted value is output for the digital output frequency Refer to Output Frequency Monitor d001 on page 5 1 O to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower PWM
129. name Motor 2 Parameter L Motor 1 Parameter lo Motor 2 Parameter lo Motor 1 Parameter J Motor 2 Parameter J Motor 1 Parameter R1 Auto tuning Data Motor 2 Parameter R1 Auto tuning Data Motor 1 Parameter R2 Auto tuning Data Motor 2 Parameter R2 Auto tuning Data Motor 1 Parameter L Auto tuning Data Motor 2 Parameter L Auto tuning Data Motor 1 Parameter lo Auto tuning Data Motor 2 Parameter lo Auto tuning Data Motor 1 Parameter J Auto tuning Data Motor 2 Parameter J Auto tuning Data Torque Reference Input Selection Torque Reference Setting Torque Bias Mode Torque Bias Value Torque Bias Polarity Selection Speed Limit Value in Torque Control Forward Speed Limit Value in Torque Control Reverse Speed Torque Control Switching Time Multi function Input Selections C001 C002 C003 C004 C005 C006 and C007 In High speed Mode functions cannot be selected for the multi function input terminals listed in the following table Setting 40 TL 41 TRQ1 42 TRQ2 52 ATR Function name Torque limit enabled disabled Torque limit switching 1 Torque limit switching 2 Torque reference input permission Multi function Output and Multi function Relay Output Function Selections C021 C022 and C026 In High speed Mode functions cannot be selected for the multi function output and relay output terminals listed in the following table Setting 7 OTQ 10 TRQ Function name Overtorque undertorqu
130. of Each Parameter No Writing Into the Holding Register 06h Writes data into the specified holding register Example Write 50 00 Hz into Output Frequency Setting F001 A020 of the Inverter whose slave address is 1 Since the holding register for output frequency setting has a data resolution of 0 01 Hz the data to be written should be 5000 1388h when setting 50 00 Hz Query Example Field name Hex Slave address 01 Parameter No 06 Register address MSB 2 00 Register address LSB 2 01 Register address Register number 1 Written data MSB 13 CRC 16 MSB D5 CRC 16 LSB 5C Example Field name Hex Slave address 01 Parameter No 06 Register address MSB 2 00 Register address LSB 2 01 Written data MSB 13 Written data LSB 88 CRC 16 MSB D5 CRC 16 LSB 5C 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Although the Frequency Reference F001 normally uses two registers 0001h and 0002h 50 00 Hz 5000 is covered by the range of the LSB register therefore the data is written to only one register in the above sample When setting a frequency exceeding 655 35 Hz write it into two registers simultaneously using a multiple holding register write command 10h 3 Note that the holding register start address in F001 LOW is 0001h which is smaller by 1 than the register number 0002h The register number less 1 corresponds to the register address Note that if any parameter ot
131. on how to reset the trip refer to Method for Resetting Trip on page 7 1 PROGRAM LED Lit green when the displayed data set value can be indicator changed Ps Blinks if the set value is invalid Refer to Warning Display on page 7 7 RUN during Lit green when the Inverter is running Lit when there is RUN LED either a valid RUN command or inverter output RUN indicator Accordingly it is also lit when a RUN command is issued at z a set frequency of 0 Hz or while the motor is decelerating after the RUN command is turned OFF D Monitor LED Lit green when the displayed data is frequency indicator Hz A Monitor S Lit green when the displayed data is current S indicator A RUN Command Lit green when the RUN command is set to the Digital enabled LED Operator indicator The RUN key on the Digital Operator is enabled Display Various parameters frequency set value and other data are displayed red RUN key Runs the Inverter Take note that this key is enabled only RUN when the RUN command destination is the Digital Operator STOP RESET This key decelerates the Inverter to a stop Although the key STOP RESET key is enabled even when a RUN command is issued to a destination other than the Digital Operator factory default it can be disabled by a Setting b087 lf the Inverter is already tripped the trip will be reset return from the tripping mem Ae gt p Gs lt gt
132. power loss function disabled 01 Controlled deceleration on power loss enabled deceleration stop Controlled b050 Deceleration on 92 Controlled deceleration on power loss Power Loss enabled DC voltage kept constant without recovery 03 Controlled deceleration on power loss enabled DC voltage kept constant with recovery Ctrl Decel 2 starts to decelerate as the difference from the output frequency DC Bus Voltage 0 0 to to 1000 b051 Trigger Level of Operation starts when the DC voltage 220 0 440 0 V Ctrl Decel drops to below b051 EE Eege starts to decelerate when the b052 Level of Ctrl l 360 0 720 0 V Decel 2 3 overvoltage due to regeneration exceeds b052 after the start of operation 0 01 to 3600 00 b053 Deceleration Time Set the deceleration time under the 10 z of Ctrl Decel controlled deceleration on power loss l function 0 00 to 10 00 100 00 b054 Freq Drop to start Set the frequency at which the Inverter Hz 1 When b050 02 or 03 PI control is performed to keep the internal DC voltage constant Though quicker response is expected when the setting of Proportional Gain b133 is increased if the setting is too large a trip will occur easily With a smaller proportional gain setting on the other hand an undervoltage trip will occur due to a drop in voltage immediately after this function starts operating Response also becomes quicker when the setting of Integral Time b134 is decrease
133. power recovery restart prevention function are explained below Example 1 Turn ON the power when a RUN Example 2 Turn ON the power when a RUN command is input command is input Reset when the RUN command is Reset by Reset RS turned OFF Power supply Power supply W irou i input gt _ gt forward SR FW input ON OFF forward ew USP input ON USP input ON RS input D RS input reset reset AL output i AL output T TL alarm signal alarmi signal Output frequency m S Output frequency Example 3 Turn ON the power and then turn ON the RUN command normal operation Power supply FW input forward USP input ON RS input reset 2 AL output OFF alarm signal Output frequency Of SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 8 Restart Functions Deceleration Stop at Power off Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss Function After the power is shut off during operation this function decelerates the Inverter to a stop while keeping the voltage below the overvoltage level You can select from 3 modes in momentary power interruption non stop selection b050 This function will not be reset until the operation stops completely To run the Inverter after power recovery while this function is active input a STOP command after turning OFF the RUN command and then input a RUN command again E Function name persue Unit No setting 00 Controlled deceleration on
134. ratings If the situation 5 26 does not improve slightly lower the setting 5 46 of Output Voltage Gain A045 A245 Or 5 72 set Control Method A044 A244 to 02 Free V f setting and perform tuning An Overload Trip The electronic thermal Set Electronic Thermal Level b012 b013 5 110 E05 occurs level is not appropriate correctly An Overvoltage The deceleration time is short Extend the Deceleration Time Setting F003 5 24 Trip E07 occurs F203 A093 A293 5 66 Cie che Overvoltage Suppression Enable Overvoltage Suppression Function Function During During Deceleration b130 Note that Deceleration b130 is set when this function is enabled the actual to 00 Disabled deceleration time may become longerthan 5 117 the set value For details refer to Overvoltage Suppression Function During Deceleration on page 5 117 An Overvoltage Trip E07 occurs during deceleration even though Overvoltage Suppression Function During Deceleration b130 is enabled The value of Overvoltage Change each set value For details refer to Suppression Proportional Overvoltage Suppression Function During Gain Setting During Deceleration on page 5 117 Deceleration b133 or 5 117 Overvoltage Suppression Integral Time Setting b134 is not appropriate The value of Overvoltage Lower the value of Overvoltage Suppression Level During Suppression Level During Deceleration Deceleration b131 is b131 Note however that
135. regenerative braking circuit exceeds Increase the overload the b090 set value deceleration time 5 24 protection Is the operation cycle too short 5 141 Increase the operation cycle Overvoltage Extremely high DC voltage between P E07 U Is there any rapid deceleration protection 2 and NI may result in failure Increase the Accordingly a trip will occur if the DC deceleration time voltage between P 2 and N reaches Is there any ground fault approx 400 VDC 200V class or 800 Check the output VDC 400V class or above due to wiring and motor increase in the regenerative energy Has the motor been rotated from the motor or in the incoming from the load side voltage Reduce regenerative E energy Has incoming voltage increased Lower the incoming voltage sustain the power supply fluctuation apply the AC reactor to input SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALI_ILIL 7 2 suoi el do sdueUDdjUIeI x 7 1 Error Display and Remedial Actions 1 The reset command will not be accepted until approximately 10 seconds pass since the trip occurs protection function works code page EEPROM error A trip will occur if the built in EEPROM E08 D Is there any large noise E generates an error due to external source around noise abnormal rise in temperature Countermeasures etc It may become a CPU error against noise depending on the case Has the cooling efficiency been reduced Check th
136. required or the built in braking circuit is not sufficient N connection terminal Ground terminal This is a ground terminal Connect this terminal to the ground Provide Class D grounding for 200 V class models and class C grounding for 400 V class models On 200 V class models of 3 7 kW or below and 400 V class models of 4 0 kW or below the ground terminal is located on the cooling fin Control Circuit Terminals Terminal Terminal name Description Specifications Power Input signal This is a common terminal supply common used by the internal power supply digital input and analog input output terminals Frequency 10 VDC power supply for Allowable max current reference the FV terminal 7 MA power supply Frequency FV Frequency Use this terminal if the Input impedance setting reference input frequency reference is Approx 10 kQ input terminal analog provided by 0 to 10 VDC Allowable input voltage voltage input voltage input range 0 3 to 12 VDC Analog FI Frequency Use this terminal if the Input impedance reference frequency reference is 100 Q terminal analog provided by 4 to 20 mA Allowable input range current input current input 0 to 24 mA 2 7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Analog Digital Sensor input Output Power supply Input Contact Terminal Terminal name Description symbol Connect an external thermistor between the SCs to trip the
137. run stop Input Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 8 Restart Functions Example 1 0 Hz restart b088 00 FW input forward FRS input Free run Motor rotation speed 0 0 Hz restart The Inverter restarts running at 0 Hz regardless of the motor rotation speed At 0 Hz restart the restart standby time is ignored If the Inverter restarts running at 0 Hz with the motor rotation speed high an overcurrent trip may occur Example 2 Frequency matching restart b088 01 FW input forward FRS input _ Sll 2 2 Free run Motor rotation 2 a speed LMI i e Frequency matching restart When the FRS terminal is turned OFF and the restart standby time elapses the motor frequency is detected and a frequency pull in restart is performed without stopping the motor If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching restart extend the setting of restart standby time Note however that O Hz restart may be applied even when frequency matching restart is selected in the following cases The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base frequency The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates Frequency Matching Lower Limit Frequency Setting b007 is set and a frequency below the set frequency is detected Example 3 Frequency pull in restart b088 02 forward FRS input Decelerates according to b029 Output current Inverter output frequency
138. setting or a frequency reference is issued but not a RUN command RUN Command Frequency Reference Input f Command Reference Input From the Digital Operator Operates the Inverter via the key operation of the standard Digital Operator or optional Remote Operator parameter Function name Setani Note No value Frequency 02 Digital Operator A001 Reference 02 p Selection 1 Q SE O A002 RUN Command 02 Digital Operator 02 The RUN command enabled LED O Selection 1 indicator is lit Output 0 0 to Max F001 Frequency frequency Setting F004 RUN Direction 00 Forward Parameters cannot be changed Selection 01 Reverse while the Inverter is operating Change the following parameters if necessary Parameter Default No value F002 Acceleration 0 01 to 99 99 s 100 0 to 999 9s 10 00s Time Setting 1 1 000 to 3 600 s 30 00 s F003 Deceleration 0 01 to 3 600 s 100 0 to 999 9 10 00 s Time Setting 1 1 000 to 3 600 s 30 00 s Lit when the RUN key is Lit when the frequency pressed to start operation data is displayed Function name omron SYSDRIVE E WR 3G3MX2 INVERTER em JALM LTITI O CH PRG The RUN key is enabled O aa O and the RUN command enabled LED indicator is lit when A002 is set to 02 Operation Refer to Test Run on page 3 10 3 7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 3 2 Operatio
139. setting Pala f Function name Resolutio Number No parameters a 0006h R R W 0 to 10000 0 01 Selection Note You can read and write data However you can read data only when Modbus RTU is selected for the PID feedback Data cannot be read under other settings If 03 Pulse train input is set for PID Feedback Selection A076 the Inverter obtains a percent conversion result 100 at maximum frequency of the input pulse train frequency Hz as a feedback value For details on pulse train input frequency refer to Pulse Train Frequency Input on page 5 82 i Feedforward Selection Select a terminal used for feedforward signals in PID Feedforward Selection A079 The A079 setting is enabled even if the terminal selected in A079 is duplicated with the terminal selected for target value or feedback value input If A079 is set to disabled feedforward control is disabled SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 76 suoljoun Functions 5 6 Operation Functions i PID Deviation Reverse Output Depending on the sensor characteristics etc the polarity of deviation between the target value feedback values may not match the Inverter s command In this case the deviation polarity can be reversed by using the PID Deviation Reverse Output A077 01 Example Controlling a refrigerator compressor The temperature sensor specification is 0 to 100 C 0 to 10 V and the target value is 5 C If the current t
140. setting of b088 For details refer to Free run Stop Function FRS on page 5 103 When A039 03 04 or 05 jogging operation is performed even when the FW signal is turned ON first However if the JG signal is turned OFF first the motor performs a free run stop Frequency Limit Both the upper and lower limits can be set for the output frequency If a frequency reference beyond the upper lower limits is input the frequency is limited by the upper or lower limit Set the upper limiter first Make sure the upper limit A061 A261 is higher than the lower limit A062 A262 Make sure the upper and lower limit settings do not exceed the Maximum Frequency A004 A204 Make sure the Output Frequency F001 and Multi step Speed References 1 to 15 A021 to A035 are not lower than the lower limit and not higher than the upper limit Neither limit would work if is set to upper and lower limits Parameter Default f Function name Unit No setting A061 A261 Frequency Upper 0 00 frequency lower limit 1 2 to Hz Limit 1 2 maximum frequency A062 A262 Frequency Lower 0 00 starting frequency to 1 2 frequency Hz Limit 1 2 upper limit SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 60 suoljoun j Functions 5 6 Operation Functions Use of Analog Voltage Input FV SC and Analog Current Input FI SC Output frequency Hz Maximum frequency res si A004 A204 a ROG sees A062 i Frequency OV
141. t stable Lower P Gain A072 The target and the PID feedback values wouldn t match smoothly Lower Gain A073 The PID feedback value fluctuates unstably Raise Gain A073 Response is slow even with P gain raised Raise D Gain A074 With P gain raised the PID feedback value fluctuates and isn t stable Lower D Gain A074 i PID Excessive Deviation OD You can set PID excessive deviation level C044 during PID control A signal can be output to a multi function output terminal when the PID deviation reaches the level set in C044 or above Allocate 04 OD to any Multi function Output Terminal Selections C021 to C022 or Relay Output Function Selection C026 C044 can be set from 0 to 100 The setting corresponds to the range of 0 to the maximum target value g Feedback Comparison Signal A signal can be output to a multi function output terminal when the PID feedback is out of the specified range Allocate 31 FBV to any Multi function Output Terminal Selections C021 to C022 or Relay Output Function Selection C026 PID feedback vz TN C052 OFF level Ee de Let nn C053 ON level Time ON OFF FBV output Se i PID Feedback Value Monitor d004 You can monitor the PID feedback value The monitor value is displayed as the product of PID Scale A075 d004 display Feedback value x PID Scale A075 j PID Integral Reset PIDC Clears the integral value of
142. the data is corrected For details on the Warning display refer to Warning Display on page 7 7 5 11 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACICILIZ 5 1 Monitor Mode DC Voltage Monitor d102 The Inverter P N DC voltage DC voltage between the Inverter terminals P 2 and N is displayed During operation the monitor value changes depending on the actual DC voltage of the Inverter Parameter Default s Function name Unit No setting d102 DC Voltage 0 0 to 999 9 1000 V Monitor Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor d103 Displays a regenerative braking load rate When the displayed value exceeds the value set in Usage Rate of Regenerative Braking b090 the Inverter trips because of E06 Braking resistor overload protection Parameter Default Function name i Unit No setting Regenerative Braking 0 0 to 100 0 r Related functions b090 Electronic Thermal Load Rate Monitor d104 Displays an electronic thermal load rate When the displayed value exceeds 100 the Inverter trips because of E05 Overload protection When the power is shut off the displayed value changes to 0 Also when totaling does not occur for 10 minutes the displayed value changes to 0 Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting d104 Electronic Thermal Load 0 0 to 100 0 o Rate Monitor SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL suoljoun Functions 5 2 Basic Functions 5 2 Ba
143. the motor slip decreases during acceleration deceleration when the moment of inertia of the loaded machine is large Also use this function if an overcurrent overvoltage trip occurs during acceleration deceleration This function is not affected by the setting of Acceleration Pattern Selection A097 It is available in all acceleration patterns The following two methods can be used for a stop during acceleration deceleration and the two methods can be combined 1 Automatic stopping at a desired frequency stopping time 2 Stopping with a multi function input terminal Take note that the acceleration declaration time set in F001 F202 or FO03 F203 will not be enabled Parameter Default Function name f Unit No setting o Acceleration Stop 0 00 to 400 0 1000 ER D Frequency A070 Acceleration Stop 0 0 to 60 0 w S Time Sage Deceleration Stop 0 00 to 400 0 1000 ER 7 Frequency A155 Deceleration Stop 0 0 to 60 0 o S Time C001 to C007 Multi function Input 83 HLD Retain output frequency 8 Selection 1 Automatic Stopping at a Desired Frequency Stopping Time Output frequency Time 2 Stopping with a Multi function Input Terminal Output frequency Time HLD input SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 62 suoljoun j Functions 5 6 Operation Functions RUN Permission Signal A RUN command is accepted only while the RUN permission signal is ON To use this function al
144. turn ON the EDM function selector switch The EDM output is allocated to multi function output terminal P11 EDM automatically Safety function selector switch EDM function selector switch normal EDM omron YSDRIVE RUN PWR 3G3MX2_INYERTER e Hz ALM A PRG e e CB RUN IC bd mmm lee ololololololelolololo olololelelolololololo O ei Take note that when the safety function selector switch or EDM function selector switch is turned ON and then OFF the input output terminals previously allocated to the GS1 GS2 inputs and EDM output are reset to no meaning no allocation and the I O contact selection remains NC contact SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 170 suoljoun Functions 5 13 Safety Function How to Wire for Use Safety Function 5 171 Observe the above safety standard and follow the wiring example Be sure to use both the GS1 input and GS2 input to design a system where both GS1 input and GS2 input are turned OFF upon actuation of the safety function Upon detecting an OFF state of the GS1 input or GS2 input the Inverter actuates the safety function and stops the output EN Reference The safety monitor 62 EDM turns ON when the output is cut off upon detection of an OFF state of both the GS1 input and GS2 input signals If the output stopped due to the
145. when the output current reaches approx 180 of the rated current ER Function name Defan Unit No setting Overcurrent 00 Disabled Disabled b027 Suppression Selection beten Enabled If the Inverter is used with an elevating machine etc disable this function The system may slip and fall due to loss of torque If the acceleration time is too short an overcurrent trip may occur because the current increases quickly Output current 180 of the rated current Time Output frequency Time 5 116 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL suol uny Functions 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Overvoltage Suppression Function During Deceleration 5 117 This function helps avoid an overvoltage trip due to regenerative energy from the motor during deceleration Whether to enable or disable this function can be selected by Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection During Deceleration b130 If 01 Enabled DC voltage kept constant is selected the Inverter decelerates automatically in order to keep the voltage rise in the main circuit DC unit at the start of deceleration to the value of Overvoltage Suppression Level During Deceleration b131 If 02 Enabled Acceleration enabled is selected the Inverter will accelerate according to the setting of Overvoltage Suppression Parameter b132 when the voltage of the main circuit DC unit ri
146. wiring 4 Environmental conditions when using a filter follow these guidelines Ambient temperature 10 to 50 C Derating is required when the ambient temperature exceeds 40 C Humidity 20 to 90 RH non condensing Vibration 5 9 m sec2 0 6 G 10 55Hz Location 1000 meters or less altitude indoors no corrosive gas or dust i Note on Low voltage Directive Ensure correct installation and wiring by following the instructions provided in Chapter 2 Design of this User s Manual Appendix 1 3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Appendix 4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL cUL Standards Notes on UL cUL Standards i UL Cautions The warnings and instructions in this section summarizes the procedures necessary to ensure an inverter installation complies with Underwriters Laboratories guidelines Use 60 75 C Cu wire only For models 3G3MX2 A2001 A2002 A2004 A2007 AB015 ABO22 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 and A4030 Use 75 C Cu wire only For models 3G3MX2 AB001 AB002 AB004 AB007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 A4040 A4055 A4075 A4110 and A4150 Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 240 or 480 Volts Maximum When Protected by CC G J or R Class Fuses or when Protected By A Circuit Breaker Having An Interrupting Rating Not Less Than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amper
147. without corrosive gases or dust General specifications DC reactor AC reactor radio noise filter input noise filter output noise filter Options regenerative braking unit Braking Resistor EMC noise filter etc 1 Protection method complies with JEM 1030 2 To operate the motor at over 50 60 Hz contact the motor manufacturer to find out the maximum allowable speed of revolution 3 For the stable control of the motor the output frequency may exceed the maximum frequency set in A004 A204 by 2 Hz max Note 1 The applicable motor is a 3 phase standard motor For using any other type be sure that the rated current does not exceed that of the Inverter Note 2 Output voltage decreases according to the level of the power supply voltage Note 3 The braking torque at the time of capacitor feedback is an average deceleration torque at the shortest deceleration when it stops from 50 Hz It is not a continuous regeneration torque Also the average deceleration torque varies depending on the motor loss The value is reduced in operation over 50 Hz Specifications 9 5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 2 External Dimensions el F 9 2 External Dimensions supply 1 phase oe AB001 200 V 3G3MX2 AB002 3G3MX2 AB004 AB004 3 phase e A2001 200 V ES A2002 3G3MX2 A2004 A2004 a A2007 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL ES Ei 9 6 suoljeoijin
148. write mode Master 3G3MX2 Master 3G3MX2 EEPROM write mode Write into RAM enabled 902h 1 Parameter change Parameter change Parameter change Parameter change Write into RAM Write into RAM and Write into RAM EEPROM changed data only Enter command 900h 1 Write all data into EEPROM Parameter change a Write into RAM The EEPROM write mode remains effective only for one parameter change Communication Function 6 21 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACICILIZ 6 7 Co Inverter Communication 6 7 Co Inverter Communication The 3G3MX2 provides the Co inverter communication function to allow for communication among multiple 3G3MX2 Inverters without using a PC PLC or other master equipment in addition to performing normal Modbus communication Modbus RTVU slave In Co inverter communication each Inverter plays the role of Management Inverter Master Inverter or Slave Inverter For the Management Inverter the Master Inverter as set by the user is specified All other Inverters become slave Inverters Although the Management Inverter is always fixed the Master Inverter changes sequentially Accordingly the Management Inverter may be the Master Inverter or Slave Inverter Other conditions are specified below One Management Inverter is required within the network Up to eight Inverters can be selected that function as the Master Inverter Up to 247 Inverters or 32 Inverters
149. 0 Free V f Frequency 1 0 to Free V f frequency 2 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Free V f frequency 3 to b106 Free V f Frequency 4 f free V f frequency 5 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method ea as Default Function name Description setting b113 Free V f Voltage 7 V7 b111 Free V f Voltage 6 Free Vif Voltage 6 V6 b109 Free V f Voltage 5 anal Set output b107 Free REH Free Vif Voltage 4 V4 0 0 to 800 0 EE each break b105 Free V f Voltage 3 Su point b103 Free Be le Voltage 2 Free Vif Voltage 2 V2 b101 Free ao Voltage 1 Free Vif Voltage 1 V1 1 Even Ee a voltage greater than the Inverter input voltage is set in any one of Free V f Voltages 1 to 7 the Inverter cannot output such voltage Use thorough caution to verify that the output characteristic setting is proper An improper setting causes overcurrent during acceleration or deceleration or vibration of the motor and or machine Output voltage V v7 Selection of voltage or motor voltage that can be output 0 f6 f7 Output frequency Hz Example Output voltage V7 V6 V5 V4 V1 V2 V3 Output frequency Hz 0 f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 D f7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 48 suoljoun j Functions 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method Torque Boost Compensates for the voltage drop caused by the resistance in the 1st resistance of the motor or by wiring to sup
150. 0 to 999000 0 0 to 9999 Power ON Time 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 Total RUN Time Fin Temperature 20 0 Monitor to 150 0 Life gt lt gt gt EH 1 Capacitor on main Assessment H H H H circuit board 2 1 Monitor 2 Cooling fan _ Hirt Position Command Monitor 268435455 to 268435455 Displays MSB A digits including Current Position Monitor 268435455 to 268435455 Displays MSB A digits including User Selection Monitor 2 types Monitor data selected by b160 b161 is displayed The currently set mode is displayed Inverter Mode I C IM motor heavy load Monitor l V IM motor light load H I IM motor high frequency Fault Counter d 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65530 Fault Monitor 1 Latest Cause Frequency Hz Current A Voltage between PNs V SRUN time n Power ON time h USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 AlI_ILIL iii 8 In i 4 2 1SI7 JeJOWIeIe 4 1 Monitor Mode Data can be Function name Monitor or data range changed during Warning DC Voltage 0 0 to 999 9 SES Monitor 1000 Regenerative d103 Braking Load 0 0 to 100 0 Rate Monitor Electronic d104 Thermal Load 0 0 to 100 0 Rate Monitor Parameter No Parameter List 4 3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No F001 F002 F202 F003 F203 F004
151. 002Fh SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Data Fault Monitor 1 ON Time HIGH 4081 Power ON time at the time of md Fault Monitor 1 Sim tripping Time Sim Fault Monitor 2 Faut Montor 2 Cause MEAG Inverter Fault Factor 8 List on page 6 35 a Monitor 2 Refer to Inverter Fault Factor 8 Inverter Status List on page 6 35 SE Monitor 2 SE HIGH O to 100000 0 01 Hz SE Monitor 2 SE LOW Monitor 2 Output current value at the Eed 0 01 A time of tripping d082 STT Monitor 2 DC input voltage at the time of ie 0 1 V STT tripping ime it Monitor 2 RUN Time ime it Total RUN time at the time of 1 Ih Tela n Monitor 2 RUN tripping Time Tela n Fault Monitor 2 Taea S Time Taea S Power ON time at the time of 1 m Fault Monitor 2 Fine wow O tripping Time Fine wow ON Fault Monitor 3 Faut Montor 3 Cause EE Inverter Fault Factor 8 List on page 6 35 Ge Monitor 3 Refer to Inverter Fault Factor 8 Inverter oo List on page 6 35 Fault Monitor 3 Frequency HIGH O to 100000 0 01 Hz SE Monitor 3 SE LOW Monitor 3 Output current value at the ale 0 01 A time of tripping d083 Monitor 3 DC input voltage at the time of Ee 0 1 V tripping Fine ch n Monitor 3 RUN Time Fine ch n Total RUN time at the time of 1 ih Telam n Monitor 3 RUN tripping Time Telam n Fault Monitor 3 Fine ich O Time F
152. 003 to 60 0 Se Frequency 1 400 0 1000 1000 0 soc oO No O gt gt gt gt N O N O O O O O oe N y A204 Maximum Base Frequency 2 A203 to 60 0 Frequency 2 400 0 1000 1000 0 00 Switch between FV voltage FI current 02 Switch between FV gt OH TI 1 O D D O O mD voltage volume d Parameter List 03 Switch between FI 4 current volume A011 FV Start 0 00 to 99 99 Frequency 100 0 to 400 0 1000 yes FV End 0 00 to 99 99 Ss Frequency 100 0 to 400 0 1000 y FV Start Ratio 0 to FV end ratio FV End Ratio FV start ratio to 100 FV Start 00 Start Frequency A011 Ge Selection 01 0 Hz y Analog Input 1 to 30 na 31 with 500 ms filter 0 1 Hz no SE hysteresis eat Tam SI 1 Enabled when the Digital Operator with Volume 3G3AX OP01 is connected Qi A SS input others gt gt S gt Sj 8 S N O N N N N N N Qi d CO 4 5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Data can SC Data can be Default changed setting Set data Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range RR during RUN RUN yes yes yes yes Multi step 00 Binary 16 step selection A019 Speed with 4 terminals SS Gre 01 Bit 8 step selection with 7 Selection terminals Multi step 0 00 A020 Speed 1 Starting frequency to Reference 0 Maximum Frequency 1 Multi step 0 00 A220 Speed 2 St
153. 004Fh 0050h 0051h 0052h 0053h 0054h 0055h 0056h 0057h 0058h 0059h to 005Ah 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data WCEFI window comparator FI e Reserved FREF Frequency Reference Operator REF RUN Command Operator e GE TM Motor 2 Selected Reserved 1 O ERR o WCFV window comparator FV e D A O Description Error No error 2 ON OFF ON 1 Digital Operator 0 1 0 1 por fy Other than Digital Operator Digital Operator Other than Digital Operator Motor 2 control selected Motor 1 control selected Not used a Inaccessible 1 The input terminal can be turned ON OFF via Modbus communication Modbus RTU The Inverter recognizes an ON status if the input terminal is ON due to communication or the input signal at the control circuit terminal block is ON 2 The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input Can be reset during operation SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 30 uoljOUNY UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 31 0000h 0001h 0002h 0003h 0004h 0005h 0011h 0012h 0013h 0014h 0015h 0016h 0017h 0018h 0019h ii Holding Register Number List Frequency Reference and Fault Monitor Gees ten Function name Monitor and setting Data parameters resolution ewe a F001 HIGH Output Frequ
154. 007 AB015 AB022 tie SESCH S e DREES E E see SCHARES mn eneen mM a Tiens Rated input voltage 1 phase 200 V 15 to 240 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 20 Rated output 3 phase 200 to 240 V The output cannot exceed the incoming voltage voltage H eieiei Short time deceleration braking torque Discharge Resistor not connected Kei Built in Braking Resistor circuit separate Discharge Resistor Braking Resistor Min circuit connectable 40o 100 100 50 50 35 resistance DI negt E Dimensions width 68 x 128 108 x 128 x height mm Dimensions depth 109 122 5 170 5 mm 1 The BRD usage is 10 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 1 Standard Specification List Common Specifications Function name Specifications Enclosure ratings Open type IP20 Control method Phase to phase sinusoidal modulation PWM Output frequency 0 10 to 400 Hz or 1 000 Hz in the high frequency mode restrictions apply d range Frequency Digital command 0 01 of the max frequency Analog command 0 2 of precision the max frequency 25 C 10 C Frequency setting Digital setting 0 01 Hz Analog setting One thousandth of the maximum resolution frequency Voltage Frequency V f characteristics constant reduced torque characteristics Sensorless vector control V f control with speed feedback Overload current Heavy load rating CT 150 60 s rating Light load rating VT
155. 01 C102 C103 C105 O Q O Function name UP DWN Storage Selection Reset Selection Reset Restart Selection UP DWN Clear Terminal Mode MP Gain Setting 50 to 200 to 200 AM Gain Adjustment C109 AM Bias Setting 0 to 100 Overload 1 Warning Level 2 00 Do not store frequency Store frequency data Trip reset at power on Trip reset at power off Enabled only during trip Trip reset only 0 Hz restart Frequency matching restart Frequency pull in restart 0 Hz EEPROM data at power 50 to 200 0 00 to 2 00 x Rated current Default Monitor or data range setting Page 5 71 Hl ak elei data Reset when the power is ON on 5 45 yes SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Parameter No Function name C130 C131 SS Delay Time Giaa Delay Time Sieg Delay Time C141 Output RY OFF Delay Time Logic Output C142 Signal 1 Selection 1 Logic Output C143 Signal 1 Selection 2 Logic Output Signal 1 One Operator Selection Logic Output C145 Signal 2 Selection 1 Logic Output C146 Signal 2 Selection 2 Logic Output Signal 2 eng Operator Selection Logic Output C148 Signal 3 Selection 1 Logic Output C149 Signal 3 Selection 2 Logic Output Signal 3 mee Operator Selection I O terminal function Output P1 EDM ON Delay Time Output P1 EDM OFF Delay Time Output P2 ON Output P2
156. 1 four 132Bh quadrant mode forward b041 R W 0 to 200 255 no 1 power running Torque Limit 2 four 5 153 132Ch quadrant mode reverse b042 R W 0 to 200 255 no 1 regeneration Torque Limit 3 four 132Dh quadrant mode reverse b043 R W 0 to 200 255 no 1 power running Torque Limit 4 four 132Eh quadrant mode forward b044 R W 0 to 200 255 no 1 regeneration Torque LADSTOP 00 Disabled Reverse Rotation 00 Disabled 13300 Brevention Selection SES 01 Enabled Ge a 1331h Reserved 1332h Heavy Load Light Load 00 Heavy load mode 3 al Selection ee 01 Light load mode ER SC 00 Disabled 01 Deceleration stop 1334h Controlled Deceleration b050 R W 02 Constant voltage on Power Loss without recovery 03 Constant voltage with recovery 1335h PC Bus Voltage Trigger 4954 R w 0 to 10000 0 1 V Level of Ctrl Decel 5 106 1336h Peceleration Hold Level bos R w 0 to 10000 0 1 V of Ctrl Decel Deceleration Time of HIGH eceleration Time o 1 to 360000 0 01 s Ctrl Decel b053 RAN LOW EEN ee a b054 R W 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz Decel 133Ah to Reserved 133Eh Window Comparator FV 0 to 100 lower limit b061 A IEN Upper Limit Level oe b062 x 2 SES 0 to 100 5 132 Window Comparator FV toei RAW upper limit boen boe2 Ru Lower Limit Level 2 6 49 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Registe
157. 1 Start Frequency Set a start frequency A012 A102 FV FI VR 0 00 to 400 0 1000 Hz A162 End Frequency Set an end frequency A013 A103 FV FI VR Start 2 tO FV FIVR end ratio Set a start ratio relative to an external A163 Ratio frequency reference of 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA A014 A104 FVIFI VR End FV FI VR start ratio to 100 Set an end ratio relative to an external 100 A164 Ratio 1 frequency reference of 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 00 Start Frequency A011 A101 A161 For the output frequencies from 0 to A013 A103 A163 the values of A011 A101 A165 Selection 01 0 Hz For the output frequencies from 0 to A013 A103 A163 0 Hz is output Note 1 To input current between 4 and 20 mA set A103 to 20 Default value 20 20 mA x 20 4 mA Note 2 To input voltage between 0 and 5 V set A014 to 50 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 40 suoljoun Functions 5 4 Analog Signal 5 41 Example 1 A015 A105 00 External Start Frequency Maximum frequency A012 A102 A162 A011 A101 A161 0 A013 A103 A163 0 V 0 mA VR minimum 0 or greater The output frequencies of A013 A103 A163 correspond to A011 A101 A161 100 Analog input A014 A104 FV FI A164 10 V 20 mA VR maximum Example 2 A015 A105 01 0 Hz Maximum frequency A012 A102 A162 A011 A101 A161 O A013 A103 A163 0 V 0 mA VR
158. 1 rg Auto tuning Data 152Ch eet RAN 5 145 HIGH Motor 1 Parameter J eer 0 001 Auto tuning Data H034 kgm 152Dh LOW 152Eh to Reserved 153Ch V f Control With Speed espa ee H050 R W 0 to 1000 0 01 Compensation Proportional Gain 5 83 V f Control With Speed 5 160 Scent Hip H051 R W 0 to 1000 1 s Compensation Integral Gain 153Fh to Not used Inaccessible 1600h Operation Selection on 00 Trip ee Option Error PON 01 Continue operation mn p 1602h Reserved 00 Frequency setting including PID Pulse Train Input 01 Feedback pulse enabled CS Terminal RP Selection eee PS only when motor 1 control is selected 02 Do not set 1 phase pulse input Dual phase pulse 1 eid EN P004 R W 02 Dual phase pulse 2 5 160 Input Type Selection l 1 phase pulse train direction 5 82 5 160 1605h to Reserved 160Ah 160Bh Number of Encoder P011 R W 32 to 1024 Pulses 00 Simple position control disabled 5 160 Simple Position Control 160Ch P012 Selection 02 Simple position control enabled SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 64 uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 65 Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page No No parameters resolution 160Dh to Reserved 160Eh 160Fh Creep Speed Setting P015 Kill frequency to 1000 4 94 THz 5 160
159. 10 If the existing electronic thermal value is lower than the derating value the above setting is not required If the above maximum rated carrier frequency and the derating value at 15 kHz are exceeded the Inverter may be damaged and or the service life may be shortened Raising the carrier frequency reduces the DC braking force For details refer to DC Injection Braking DB on page 5 135 Carrier frequency and Extent of impact Carrier frequency Low High Motor noise Large Small Noise leak current Small Large Torque Large Small Carrier frequency Low Carrier frequency High wn MO SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method Automatic Carrier Frequency Reduction Function This function automatically reduces carrier frequency according to an increase in output current This function is enabled when Automatic Carrier Reduction b089 is set to 01 Enabled acl Default Function name Unit setting 00 Disabled Disabled Automatic Carrier 01 ERN on current b089 Related functions Reduction 02 ae on fin temperature b083 When the output current exceeds 60 72 84 or 96 of the rated current the carrier frequency is reduced to 12 9 6 or 3 kHz respectively When the output current falls below 5 of each level this function will be reset Starting level of carrier frequency reduction Recovery level Reduced carrier frequency kHz
160. 10 V reference 4mA 20 mA T A013 0 T A014 100 A103 20 A104 100 Once the lower limit is set the Inverter outputs the frequency set for the Frequency Lower Limit A062 if O V 4 mA is input to the frequency reference Frequency Jump Function Use this function to avoid resonant points of loaded machines during operation If a jump frequency is set an output frequency cannot be set within the jump frequency range in order to avoid steady state operation within the jump frequency range The output frequency fluctuates continuously according to the acceleration deceleration time during both acceleration and deceleration A jump frequency can be set at 3 points Parameter Default S Function name S Unit No setting 0 00 to 400 0 1000 A063 A065 A067 Jump Frequency 1 2 3 Set the center of the frequencies at Hz which to execute a jump 0 00 to 10 00 100 0 Set one half of the frequency width in l Hz which to execute a jump A064 A066 Jump Frequency Width A068 1 If O Hz is set this function is disabled Output frequency I 7A A068 ds 068 Se A066 Frequency reference SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operation Functions Acceleration Deceleration Stop Function This function temporarily stops acceleration deceleration to perform constant speed operation at the applicable frequency This function can be used to make the Inverter wait until
161. 100 1 1211h FV Start Selection A015 EES 01 0 Hz Analog Input Filter 1 to 30 31 with 500 ms Mey TANAN FV FI Sampling ane 0 1 Hz hysteresis 1213h Reserved 1214h l 00 Binary 4 terminals 16 1215h GEN SES A019 steps 01 Bit 7 terminals 8 steps 1216h ery RW Rw o SR Multi step Speed 1 ery l Starting frequency to 0 01 Hz Reference 0 A020 1217h R w Maximum Frequency 1 LOW 1 After changing the RUN Command Selection 1 provide an interval of at least 40 ms before the RUN command is actually executed Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name S Page No No parameters resolution 1218h l ne RW Multi step Speed HIGH Starting frequency to nth 0 01 Hz Reference 1 A021 1219h R W maximum frequency LOW ae Multi step Speed HIGH pe oie aa Starting frequency to nth 0 01 Hz Reference 2 A022 121Bh LOW R W maximum frequency saad Multi step Speed HIGH ew pear si Starting frequency to nth 0 01 Hz 5 63 121Dh ee A023 R W maximum frequency LOW 121Eh l ns RW 19 Multi step Speed HIGH Starting frequency to nth 0 01 Hz Reference 4 A024 Rw 121Fh R W maximum frequency LOW 1220h l es RW o Multi step Speed HIGH Starting frequency to nth 0 01 Hz 1221h ROISTON A025 R W maximum frequency LOW 6 39 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULILI Register No 1222h 1223h 1224h 1225h 1226h 1227h 1228h
162. 120 60 s Control Instantaneous 200 of the value of heavy load rating CT overcurrent protection Acceleration 0 01 to 3600 s linear curve selection acceleration deceleration 2 setting Deceleration time available Carrier frequency 2 to 15 kHz with derating adjustment range Starting torque 200 0 5 Hz sensorless vector control External DC Starts at a frequency lower than that in deceleration via the STOP command at a value injection braking set lower than that during operation or via an external input Level and time settable Overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage electronic thermal temperature error ground fault overcurrent at power on status rush current prevention circuit Protective functions overload limit incoming overvoltage external trip memory error CPU error USP error communication error overvoltage suppression during deceleration protection upon momentary power outage emergency cutoff etc Frequency Digital Operator settings External analog input signal Variable resistance 0 to 10 VDC 4 to 20 mA Modbus communication Modbus RTU RUN STOP Digital Operator S command External digital input signal 3 wire input supported Modbus communication O Modbus RTU Multi function input 7 points Selectable from 59 functions Analog input 2 points Voltage FV terminal 10 besi to 10 V Current FI terminal 10 bits 4 to 20 mA Cp Pulse input 1 point RP terminal 32 KHz max 5 to 24
163. 129 Eeer 5 115 OLA 5 115 RE EE 5 114 IR EE 5 124 EE 5 85 Operation method 3 7 Operation ready ccc cccccseccseesseesseeeseeees 5 130 OTO EE 5 152 Output Current monitor 5 1 Output frequency monitol cece 5 1 Output frequency monitor after Copversion ENEE 5 4 Output frequency setting 0 eee 5 15 Output signal delay hold function 5 36 Output signal logic operation 00 00 00100 0 5 125 Output torque monitor 5 6 Output voltage gan 5 72 Output voltage monitor cece cece 5 6 INDEX 3 INDEX Overcurrent suppression function 5 116 BU el LEE 5 114 Overload warning oseeeeseeneenneneeineinereseesen 5 115 En ele LEE 5 152 Overvoltage suppression function during Oeceleraton ee 5 117 Overvoltage overcurrent restart 5 96 P PZA EEN 2 8 Password funchon cc ccccccceeseeeseeeeeeenees 5 91 PID feedback value montor 5 2 PID TUN CUON EE 5 73 EE 5 78 Position command Monitor aaaenaenaaneaaaaaaennae 5 9 rPOWer ONIME conse ee 5 8 Power ON time over 5 124 Power recovery restart prevention 122 aC Oe a E Re ne or 5 105 EE 2 8 Pulse train frequency input ce 5 82 R Real frequency monitor 5 5 Reduced torque characteristics 5 47 5 111 Reduced voltage startup selection 5 58 RE ea aie a Sih Ee 5 133 Regenerative braking function 2 22 2 5 141 Regenerative braking load rate monitor
164. 138 8 4 16 5 10 0 3G3MX2 A2110 Ab 3G3MX2 A2110 180 113 85 230 138 8 4 22 0 125 11 0 3G3MX2 A2150 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Inverter model Motor it Model Inverter model nave 3G3MX2 A4015 3G3AX 3G3MX2 A4022 AL4055 3G3MX2 A4030 3G3MX2 A4040 il 3G3AX AL4110 3G3MxX2 A4055 1 DK 3G3MX2 A4055 ay 3G3AX 3G3MX2 A4075 AL4220 3G3MX2 A4110 1 Only the CT rating is supported SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Be Dimensions mm kg VT CT C J X Y 3G3MX2 A4004 RN 3G3AX 130 82 40 AL4025 3G3MX2 A4007 WW 3G3MX2 A4110 3G3AX Ve 123 85 AL4330 3G3MX2 A4150 W LO NO 0 Q1 Q1 5 e 9 3 Options eight D Nie i Wett i 8 R PS D 9 30 suoljeoijineds 9 3 Options Digital Operator 83G3AX OP01 omron SYSDRIVE POWER 3G3AX OP01 ALARM O Data display RUN command LED O RUN indicator MIN MAX RUN STOP Oppe L RESET Vf Frequency reference Operation key 15 3 16 5 Panel cut dimensions External Dimensions Height 55 mm x Width 70 mm x Depth 10 mm Specifications 9 31 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Appendix Describes the derating chart capacitor life curve and compliance with EC directives and UL cUL standards Appendix 1 Derating Table ek ERERR ENER ERR R EEN Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve
165. 2 5 43 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 4 Analog Signal AM Terminal Analog Output The AM terminal provides 0 to 10 VDC analog output The output frequency and output current can be monitored using the AM terminal on the control circuit terminal block g AM Selection Select a signal to output from the following Parameter Function eee Description Full scale value No name Output frequency 0 to maximum frequency Hz 7 01 Output current 0 to 200 Output torque 0 to 200 Output voltage 0 to 133 Example 7 5 V at 200 V for a 200V class 05 Inputpower Input power 0 to 200 AM S C028 lecion Electronic thermal load rate 0 to 100 97 LAD LAD frequency 0 to maximum frequency Hz ee AA fin temperature O to 200 C 0 C output at 0 C or lower 11 Output torque signed torque signed 0 to 200 Optional board 1 07 LAD frequency is the frequency reference issued by the Inverter and corresponds to Output Frequency Monitor d001 00 Output frequency is the value that is calculated reflecting vector control compensation and stabilization control under sensorless vector control etc 2 During Simple Position Control P003 01 the real frequency detected frequency is displayed 3 This setting is effective only when the control method is Sensorless Vector Control A044 A244 03 4 Below are the specifications of the output torque signed AM outpu
166. 2 ALILILIL thermistor is approx 3 kQ or turned ON For details refer 2 2 Wiring Specifications PTC type Allowable max current 100 mA Voltage between each input and PSC ON voltage 18 V min OFF voltage 3 V max Allowable max voltage 27 VDC Load current 5 mA at 24 V 2 8 g D CU Q 5 c T Q A 2 2 Wiring Digital Input Output Serial communication Terminal TO Terminal name Description symbol A pulse input for frequency setting Take note that the internal circuit is different from input terminals S7 EB Pulse input A Pulse input B S7 EB Multi function output terminal P1 EDM P2 Safety monitor P1 EDM MA Relay output MB terminal Relay output common MC Pulse output MP Modbus port RS 485 A pulse input for frequency setting Take note that the internal circuit is different from input terminal RP Select 2 functions from among 43 and allocate them to terminals P1 through P2 Both sink and source logics are supported For details refer to Connection to Programmable Controller PLC on page 2 22 Enabled when the EDM function selector switch is ON For details refer to Safety Function on page 5 170 Select the desired functions from among 43 functions and allocate them to these terminals SPDT contact The factory default of Relay Output MA MB Contact Selection C036 is NC contact between MA MC
167. 294 Acceleration Switching via 2 step acceleration deceleration 8 Deceleration frequency example 2 Selection 02 Enabled only when switching between forward reverse example 3 2 step 0 00 to 400 0 1000 A095 A295 Acceleration Enabled when 2 step Acceleration Deceleration Hz Frequency Selection A094 A294 is 01 example 2 2 step 0 00 to 400 0 1000 A096 A296 Deceleration Enabled when 2 step Acceleration Deceleration Hz Frequency Selection A094 A294 is 01 example 2 C001 to C007 Multi function 09 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration Input Selection Related functions FO02 F202 FO03 F203 Example 1 Switching via Input Terminal A094 A294 00 FW input 2CH input Output frequency Acceleration E Deceleration Deceleration time 1 time 2 o time 2 me 1 FOO2 A092 ER F003 F202 A292 A293 F203 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 66 suoljoun 5 6 Operation Functions Example 2 Switching via Frequency A094 A294 01 FW input f N AO96 A296 Acceleration Deceleration time2 time2 Acceleration 3 time 1 Output frequency Deceleration time 1 F002 A092 A093 F003 F202 A292 A293 F203 Example 3 Forward Reverse Switching A094 A294 02 FW input RV input Acceleration Deceleration time2 time 1 iz gt A092 F003 A292 F203 Output frequency Acceleration Deceleration T timet tim 2 F002 A093 F202 A293 Fu
168. 3 Motor Capacity 0 1 to 18 5 Default Selection 1 2 setting Motor Pole Number 2 4 6 8 10 1 to 1000 HOOS H205 Speed Response 1 2 Reduce the value if the motor hunts Standard motor parameters H020 H220 Motor 1 2 Parameter 0 001 to 65 53 Depends on R1 Primary resistance the capacity Motor 1 2 Parameter 0 001 to 65 53 Depends on ee Secondary resistance the capacity H022 H222 Motor 1 2 Parameter L 9 01 to 659 3 vependscn Leakage inductance the capacity H023 H223 Motor 1 2 Parameter lo SOOD EE e No load current the capacity H024 H224 Motor 1 2 Parameter J 9 007 to 9999 Pepe HOS ONI eg Moment of inertia the capacity Auto tuning parameters H030 H230 Motor 1 2 Parameter R1 0 001 to 65 53 Depends on auto tuning data Primary resistance the capacity SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control Parameter Default S Function name Unit No setting H031 H231 Motor 1 2 Parameter R2 0 001 to 65 53 Depends on o auto tuning data Secondary resistance the capacity Motor 1 2 Parameter L 0 01 to 655 3 Depends on POSARE auto tuning data Leakage inductance the capacity le Motor 1 2 Parameter lo 0 01 to 655 3 Depends on pore auto tuning data No load current the capacity A Motor 1 2 Parameter J 0 001 to 9999 Depends on 2 Re auto tuning data Moment of inertia the capacity Kam Motor cable length Motor Cable Length 5 to 20 1 These parameters are used t
169. 3AX OP01 to the 3G3MX2 the operations associated with the Mode key and Enter key vary from that of the conventional key operation system To switch to the parameter display to data display use the Enter key instead of the Mode key Take note that pressing the FUNC key while a parameter is displayed means moving the function group Key Operation System When the Conventional Digital Operator Model 3G3AX OP01 is Connected to the 3G3MX2 Move to data display a Return without saving the changes Conventional model 3G3AX OP01 Move the function group Reference Key Operation System of the 3G3MX2 Digital Operator Move to data display Le Return without saving the changes 3G3MX2 Digital Operator NEE Move the function Ia Y Return after saving the changes Reference Key Operation System When the Conventional Digital Operator Model 3G3AX OP01 is Connected to the Conventional Model Move to data display a Return without saving Conventional model 3G3AX OP01 the changes No applicable function SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 3 6 uoljeiado D 3 2 Operation Method 3 2 Operation Method To operate the Inverter two commands are required including a RUN command and frequency reference Take note that the Inverter does not operate if only one of these commands is issued such as when a RUN command is issued but not a frequency reference 0 Hz
170. 3MX2 A4055 3G3MX2 A4075 3G3MX2 A4110 3G3MX2 A4150 FS24830 6 07 FS24830 29 07 FS24830 48 07 3G3MX2 A2110 and A4150 needs to be installed in a metal cabinet and add ferrite core at the input cable to meet category C1 Unless otherwise category C2 Important notes 1 Input choke or other equipment is required if necessary to comply with EMC directive from the harmonic distortion point of view IEC 61000 3 2 and 4 2 If the motor cable length exceeds 20m use output choke to avoid unexpected problem due to the leakage current from the motor cable such as malfunction of the thermal relay vibration of the motor etc 3 AS user you must ensure that the HF high frequency impedance between adjustable frequency inverter filter and ground is as small as possible Ensure that the connections are metallic and have the largest possible contact areas zinc plated mounting plates 4 Avoid conductor loops that act like antennas especially loops that encompass large areas Avoid unnecessary conductor loops Avoid parallel arrangement of low level signal wiring and power carrying or noise prone conductors 5 Use shielded wiring for the motor cable and all analog and digital control lines Allow the effective shield area of these lines to remain as large as possible i e do not strip away the shield screen further away from the cable end than absolutely necessary With integrated systems for example when the adjust
171. 3MX2 ALILILIL 5 1 Monitor Mode Total RUN Time d016 Displays the total RUN time of the Inverter This parameter is saved in the EEPROM when the power is shut off Parameter Default Function name name i Unit No setting cc 0 to 9 999 ee in increments a 1 ee 1 000 to 9 999 Displays in increments of h d016 Total RUN Time 10 hours a to 999 Displayed in increments of 1 a hours Note Initialization will not clear the setting Power ON Time d017 Displays the total power ON time of the Inverter This parameter is saved in the EEPROM when the power is shut off Parameter A Default Function name f Unit No setting 0 0 to 9 999 Displays in increments of 1 hour 1 000 to 9 999 e in increments of h d017 Power ON Time e egemgeggeetengg hours ama to 999 Displayed in increments of 1 ama hours Note Initialization will not clear the setting Fin Temperature Monitor d018 Displays the temperature of the cooling fin inside the Inverter Parameter Default 3 Function name Unit No d018 Fin Temperature Monitor 20 0 to 150 0 C SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 8 suoljoun Functions 5 1 Monitor Mode Life Assessment Monitor d022 The LED lighting position indicates the status of life assessment signal The following two items can be monitored 1 Main circuit board capacitor service life 2 Cooling fan life l
172. 3MX2 ALILILIL 5 10 suoljoun Functions 5 1 Monitor Mode Fault Counter d080 Displays the number of times the Inverter has tripped This number is saved in the EEPROM when the power is turned off Parameter Default g Function name fi Unit No setting 0 to 9999 d080 Fault Counter 1 000 to 6 553 Displayed in increments Time of 10 Fault Monitors 1 to 6 d081 to 086 Displays the records of the last 6 errors Error records are saved in the EEPROM when the power is turned off The record of the latest error is displayed under Fault Monitor 1 d081 Display 1 Cause of trip One of E01 to E83 is displayed Refer to Inverter Fault Factor List on page 6 35 2 Output frequency Hz at the time of tripping 3 Output current A at the time of tripping If the Inverter is currently stopped E 1 the monitor value may become zero 4 P N DC voltage V in the main circuit at the time of tripping If tripping occurs due to ground fault at power on the monitor value may become zero 5 Total Inverter RUN time h before the trip 6 Total Inverter power ON time h before the trip 1 Trip factor Gei e 3 Current Se DC E 5 Total 6 Total RUN time ON time 08 Ir Soa EE Loo EE is shown if no trip has occurred Warning Monitor d090 If the set data is inconsistent with other data a warning is displayed While a warning is present the Program LED PRG indicator remains lit until
173. 4 Operate in the reverse direction at the zero return mode 1 frequency speed 5 Apply DC injection braking DB the moment the ORL signal turns OFF SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 13 Safety Function 5 13 Safety Function Overview of Safety Function The safety function is designed so that the safety stop function of category O uncontrolled stop specified in IEC 60204 1 is used to meet the safety standard of Stop PLd under ISO 13849 1 The safety input function allows inverter output when current is flowing to both the GS1 and GS2 terminals When the safety input function actuates the Inverter s output transistor operation is stopped while ensuring the level of safety conforming to the above standard and the electric power to the motor stops the motor executes a free run stop It takes less than 10 ms after the safety input is received until the output is stopped An Emergency Shutoff E37 message is displayed and a trip occurs In the case of a competitive External Trip E12 setting the Emergency Shutoff E37 setting is given priority unless at power on Note If the EDM function is not used PLc under IS013849 1 applies Safety Function Setting Turn ON the safety function selector switch while the Inverter power is turned OFF The GS1 input and GS2 input are allocated to multi function input terminals S3 GS1 and S4 GS2 automatically If the EDM output safety monitor output is used
174. 5 Rated Motor Voltage is established The motor parameters can be determined for motors with the maximum applicable capacity or subsequent lower capacity For motors with other capacities the Inverter may not correctly determine the motor parameters In some cases auto tuning may not be completed In this case pressing the STOP RESET key displays an abort message Set Internal DC Injection Braking Selection A051 and Simple Position Control Selection P012 to 00 Disabled If they are set to 01 Enabled measurement is not performed correctly Turn OFF the Torque reference input permission 52 ATR If it is ON measurement is not performed correctly When performing auto tuning while the motor is rotating take note of the following items 1 There will be no problem even if the motor accelerates up to near 80 of the base frequency 2 The motor is not driven by external equipment 3 The brake is released 4 The torque is not sufficient during auto tuning In the case of a lift etc the system may slip and fall Accordingly remove the motor from the loaded machine and perform auto tuning for the motor alone Here moment of inertia J applies to the motor alone Accordingly add the motor shaft converted value of the moment of inertia of the loaded machine 5 In the case of a machine whose motor shaft rotations are limited lift ball screw etc the motor may rotate exceeding the allowable rotation and the
175. 55 e 7 28 E a NI oH 7 el lt Rated E Dimensions mm Weight e Penson e e ema ueo new r eme a fa a a or e fw res SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 14 suoljeoijinads 9 3 Options 3G3AX RBC4001 150 fa EE Ech e HE poo a E 2 3 GER DEEN DECHE EEEE E a SES t i 100 3G3AX RBC6001 150 DWV ADD ADD EWEN EWEN ENEE ENEE EHNEN EN ENEE EN EH EH EH JYJY YYYY FG YY YG YY YY YG BY YY YG GUY YU VY YS IJ NO DDD EWEN EWEN ENEE EEN ENNEN EHNEN EEN ENEE EH EH EH COEWEWENENENEN ENEE ENEE ECH DOIG YY Y KEE KEE YY OD DADADADADDDADD D OLY 06 100 70
176. 99000 Zon 5 145 Auto tuning Data H234 kgm LOW 252Eh to Not used Inaccessible 3102h SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Maintenance Operations ee Describes the error diagnosis based on error display remedial actions to be taken and items to check upon occurrence of a problem 7 4 Error Display and Remedial Actions cccsseeeeeeeeeees 7 1 ETOL IS DIA EE IEN Emor Code D mreiu ienna a ee nea slatueas wearin toeee 1 2 NA ANIMA DIS DAY EEN 1 1 lte BEE EE 7 9 7 2 Troubleshooting SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 7 1 Error Display and Remedial Actions 7 1 Error Display and Remedial Actions Error Display Upon detecting an error the Inverter cuts off trips the output the ALARM LED indicator is lit and an error code is displayed By pressing the Increment key while the error code is displayed the output frequency current DC voltage and other detailed information at the time of occurrence of the alarm can be checked Before resetting the alarm check each signal such as the RUN command Also before resetting the alarm identify the cause of the trip based on the displayed error code and remove the cause This Chapter explains how to handle problems that may occur after operation of the Inverter is started i Method for Resetting Trip A trip can be reset by one of the following two methods Press the STOP RESET Key Allocate Reset 18 RS to a m
177. Analog input mode In this mode the torque limits are set based on the voltage applied to the FV terminal analog voltage on the control terminal block O to 10 V correspond to torque limit values of 0 to 200 Selected torque limit values are enabled for all operation modes Option mode This mode is valid when an optional board is used Refer to the manual for the optional board If the Torque limit enabled function 40 TL is set to a multi function input terminal the torque limit function set in b040 is enabled only when TL is turned ON When TL is off the torque limit setting is disabled and the maximum value is defined as the torque limit value If the Torque limit enabled function 40 TL is not set to a multi function input terminal the torque limit function set in Torque Limit Selection b040 is always enabled The torque limit value under this function assumes that the torque corresponding to the Inverter s rated current is 100 Accordingly the absolute value of torque varies depending on the motor to be combined When the Torque limit 10 TRQ is selected in the multi function output selection the torque limit signal turns on when the above torque limit function is activated SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control Parameter Default S Function name Unit No setting 00 Four quadrant separate setting b040 Torque Limit 01 Terminal switching Selection 02 Analog voltage
178. Comparator FI Lower Limit Level Window b065 Comparator FI Hysteresis Width Analog Operation Level b070 at EV Disconnection Analog b071 Operation Level at FI Disconnection Window comparator Window comparator DC Bus Voltage 9 9 to 999 9 220 0 b051 Trigger Level of 1000 440 0 Ctrl Decel 0 0 to 999 9 360 0 1000 720 0 0 01 to 3600 00 Freq Drop to b054 Start Ctrl Decel 0 00 to 10 00 100 0 Default Monitor or data range setting Page 00 Controlled deceleration on power loss disabled 01 Controlled deceleration on power loss enabled deceleration stop 02 Controlled deceleration on power loss constant voltage without recovery 03 Controlled deceleration on power loss constant voltage with recovery 5 106 5 106 Set an upper limit level Setting range 0 to 100 Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a lower limit level Setting range 0 to 100 Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower limit levels Setting range 0 to 10 Upper limit Upper limit level Lower limit level 2 Set an upper limit level Setting range 0 to 100 Lower limit Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 9 132 Set a lower limit level Setting range 0 to 100 Upper limit Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower limit levels
179. D WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions 4 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Safety Precautions Safety Precautions Indications and Meanings of Safety Information In this user s manual the following precautions and signal words are used to provide information to ensure the safe use of the 3G3MX2 Inverter The information provided here is vital to safety Strictly observe the precautions provided Meanings of Signal Words Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided will WA R N f N G result in minor or moderate injury or may result in serious injury or death Additionally there may be significant property damage CAU TI O N Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate inju
180. E Refer to 5 103 page Both the frequency matching restart and frequency pull in restart functions are provided to allow for restart without stopping the motor running freely The Digital Operator displays until restart after output is shut off Frequency matching restart Frequency pull in restart This method restarts the Inverter by The Inverter starts output at the frequency set detecting frequency based on the motor s in Starting Frequency b030 and searches residual voltage for a point where the frequency and voltage are balanced while holding the current at the setting of Restart Current Level b028 to restart itself If the Inverter trips with this method reduce the b028 set value suoljoun Function The Inverter can be restarted smoothly The Inverter can be restarted regardless of Advantages whether or not there is residual voltage The Inverter cannot be restarted if the Shock may occur upon restart residual voltage is at a certain level or The current may surge If an overcurrent trip below in which case the Inverter restarts occurs also use Overcurrent Suppression at 0 Hz Function b027 Disadvantages SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 94 Functions 5 8 Restart Functions 9 95 The major parameters relating to frequency matching restart and frequency pull in restart are listed below For details refer to the section on each function Classification WEEK
181. E MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Unit S S S S 5 36 suoljoun Functions 5 4 Analog Signal 5 4 Analog Signal The following explains the Inverter s analog input output signals Analog Input FV FI The Inverter has 2 types of external analog input terminals FV SC terminal 0 to 10 V Variable Resistor volumes inputs are also recognized as voltage inputs in the context of Inverter signals FI SC terminal 0 to 20 mA If the current is 4 to 20 mA set A103 to 20 The following functions can be allocated to analog input signals The required settings are as follows ER Setting item Function name reticle Unit No setting SE Frequency 01 Control circuit terminal A001 q y Reference Selection block 02 Reference 1 01 Enabled A071 PID Selection 02 Reverse output Selection 2 A076 S PID Feedback 00 Current EI Selection 01 Voltage FV 01 Enabled A071 PID Selection 02 Reverse output PID Feedforward enabled Selection A079 PID Feedforward 01 FV voltage Selection 02 FI current Torque Limit Torque Limit 02 Analog voltage input b040 4 l Selection Selection 00 Terminal FV 10 V 200 P033 Torque Reference Input Selection 01 Terminal E Torque Control 20 mA 200 C001 to Multi function Input GC SE EE 8 C007 Selection q p permission 1 Switch among the volume current and voltage using FV FI Selection A005 Volume VR on the external Digital Operator
182. Function CP1 CP2 CP3 Selection of multi step positions 0 to 7 becomes possible when 66 CP1 to 68 CP3 are allocated to Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 Set position commands in Multi step Position Commands 0 to 7 P060 to P067 The unit is based on poool setting This is not dependent on whether a single phase or dual phase encoder input is used and no need consider for x4 operation If no position command is allocated to the terminals Multi step Position Command 0 P060 is defined as the position command SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 164 suoljoun j 5 12 Simple Position Control Function Parameter Default Function name i Unit No setting Multi step Position Multi step Position Multi step Position Position Range Setting Reverse Side P063 Multi step Position P073 S Command 3 to Multi step Position Position Range Setting Forward Side P064 P072 Command 4 Multi step Position Multi step Position Multi step Position 66 CP1 Position command selection 1 C001 to coo7 Multifunction 67 CP2 Position command selection 2 e Input Selection 68 CP3 Position command selection 3 C169 Multi step Speed Position O to 200 x 10 ms S Determination Time Wait time until determination of terminal input 1 Only when PO75 is set to 01 the position corresponding to one rotation in the rotary coordinate system should be set in Multi step Position Command 0 P060
183. G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 36 0 to 4000000 10000000 0 01 5 4 0 01 Hz 5 5 uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 37 SH Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name ge No parameters resolution KE Reserved ic 2 Capacitor on main circuit d022 board Bit 5 9 21 Cooling fan bie Reserved ic 1026h DC DC Voltage Monitor Monitor d102 R 0 to 10000 O 1 V 5 12 bee Braking 1027h Load ale Monitor d103 H O to 1000 0 1 5 12 1028h Co a EES d em 0 to 1000 0 1 5 12 Co a Monitor 1029h to Reserved 1035h Hem Position Command Hem Monitor d029 LOW d030 HIGH aom aom 103Ah to Reserved 1056h 0 I C IM load heavy 1057h Inverter Mode Monitor d060 1 l V i load light 5 10 2 H I IM power supply harmonics 1058h to Not used Inaccessible 1102h 101Dh Life Assessment Monitor GE to 268435455 1 5 9 Current Position Monitor DUR to 268435455 1 5 9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data iv Holding Register Number List Group F Se Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page No parameters resolution 1103h A8 Acceleration Time d i 1 to 360000 0 01 s Setting 1 F002 1104h LOW 1105h o Deceleration Time d i 1 to 360000 0 01 s Setting 1 F003 1106h LOW 1107h RUN Direction RUN Direction Sele
184. Input Power 0 0 to 100 0 KW Monitor Integrated Power Monitor d015 Displays the integrated power electric energy of the Inverter The conversion of displayed data is performed with Integrated Power Display Scale b079 d015 display Actual integrated power kWh Integrated Power Display Scale b079 Example If b079 100 and the displayed value is 1 000 the actual integrated power is 100 000 kWh The integrated power value can be cleared by setting Integrated Power Clear b078 to 01 The integrated power value can also be cleared via terminal input if 53 KHC Integrated power clear is allocated to any of the multi function inputs When Integrated Power Display Scale b079 is set to 1000 up to 999 000 000 kWh can be displayed This parameter is saved in the EEPROM when the power is shut off Parameter i Default Function name Unit No setting 0 0 to 9999 Displayed in increments of the setting unit 1 kW x b079 1000 to 9999 Displayed in increments of the setting unit 10 kW x b079 100 to 999 Displayed in increments of the setting unit 1 000 kW x b079 e Integrated Power OUT Monitor 00 Normal Integrated Power b078 Clear 01 Perform integrated power clear 01 is reset to 00 after the clear b079 Integrated Power 1 to 1000 4 8 Display Scale C001 to C007 Multi function Input 53 KHC Integrated power clear 8 Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G
185. Inverter receives the query Frame 1 not output independently The silent interval corresponds to 3 5 characters Below is each frame format command Message Structure A command message sent from the master to a slave is called Query while a response message sent from the slave is called Response The query and response transmission formats are specified below Query Response Slave address Slave address for confirmation Parameter No Parameter No for confirmation Query data Response data Error check CRC 16 Error check CRC 16 i Slave address Pre set numbers ranging from 1 to 247 in each Inverter slave Only the Inverter having the same slave address as the query will take the corresponding query Broadcasting can be performed by setting the slave address to zero A broadcast message is received by all slaves but the slaves do not return a response SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 4 uoljoUNy UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 4 Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Protocol 6 5 Data read or loop back cannot be performed while broadcasting Although slave addresses 1 to 247 are used under the Modbus specification the master can use any of slave addresses 250 to 254 to broadcast to each group The slaves do not return a response Note that this function is effective only with write commands 05h O6h OFh and 10h Slave address Recipient 250 FAh Broadcast it to slave
186. L1 and N on a single phase 200 V Inverter 3G3MX2 ABLILIL Procedure for Test Run i Command Reference Input From the Digital Operator 1 Check if the wires are connected correctly Turn on the power of the Inverter Set Frequency Reference Selection A001 to 02 Digital Operator Set RUN Command Selection A002 to 02 Digital Operator oa fF O N 10 Hz first to ensure safety Set RUN Direction Selection F004 7 Display Output Frequency Monitor d001 and press the Enter key Confirm that 0 00 Hz is displayed O Set Output Frequency Setting F001 It is recommended to set a low speed of approx 8 Press the RUN key The RUN during RUN LED indicator is lit and the motor starts to turn 9 Confirm the output frequency and motor rotation direction displayed on the Digital Operator and check if the Invertor is free from errors For the motor rotation direction refer to Rotation Direction Monitor d003 10 If no problem is found gradually increase the output frequency using Output Frequency Setting F001 11 After checking the operation press the STOP RESET key The motor starts to decelerate and once it stops the RUN during RUN LED indicator turns OFF i Command Reference Input From the Control Circuit Terminal Block 1 Check if the wires are connected correctly 2 Turn on the power to the Inverter 3 Set Frequency Reference Selection A001 to 01 Control circuit termi
187. LILILIL 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Communication Disconnection Detection Signal NDc Enabled only when Modbus communication Modbus RTU is selected for RS485 communication If a reception timeout error occurs this signal is output until reception of the next data Set a time before reception timeout in Communication Error Timeout Time C077 For details refer to Chapter 6 Communication Function External controller Inverter Monitor timer Communication Error Timeout C077 Communication error NDc output Parameter S Default Function name 3 Unit No setting Communications 0 00 to 99 99 C077 Error Timeout Set a time before reception timeout S Time Multi function C021 to C022 Output Terminal Selection 32 NDc Communication disconnection detection Multi function C026 Relay Output Function Selection suol uny Starting Contact Signal FR While the Inverter is receiving the RUN command a starting contact signal is output This signal is output regardless of the setting of RUN Command Selection A002 If inputs FW and RV are simultaneously turned on the Inverter stops Parameter Default Function name 8 Unit No setting Multi function C021 to C022 Output Terminal Selection 41 FR Starting contact signal Multi function C026 Relay Output Function Selection Forward command FW Reverse command R
188. Ld safety requirement only when combined with PLd compliant equipment SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 172 suoljoun j 5 13 Safety Function Periodic Inspection If the current stops flowing to either the GS1 or GS2 terminal while the safety function is operating the Inverter cuts off output Accordingly absence of defect in GS1 and GS2 wirings must be inspected periodically Be sure to conduct a periodic inspection once a year The wiring inspection method for GS1 GS2 EDM is shown below Terminal Status EDM OFF OFF OFF Inverter output Output available i Precautions To make sure the safety function operates normally evaluate the overall safety system against all risk factors The safety function does not mean the input is cut off or output is electrically insulated Before installation or maintenance work turn off the Inverter input power supply The wires used for the safety function must be 30 m or shorter If common GS1 and GS2 are used for two or more Inverters be sure to install a diode according to Note on Use of Multiple Inverters on page 2 24 GS1 and GS2 may turn ON thus causing the Inverter to produce output even in the safety mode Functions 5 173 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 14 Other Functions 5 14 Other Functions LH The following explains the functions other than those relating to operation settings such as initialization setting
189. Lists can be changed C001 to Multi function C007 Input Selection ERE TRON IROK be 7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 84 suoljoun Al c O prar L LL 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Functions Forced Operator Function OPE This function forcibly enables operation via the Digital Operator by turning ON OFF the applicable multi function input terminal if the selected frequency reference RUN command sources are not the Digital Operator When 31 OPE is allocated to a multi function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON the frequency reference and RUN command from the Digital Operator are applied forcibly When the terminal is OFF the settings of A001 and A002 are applied If this function is switched during operation the RUN command is cancelled to stop the Inverter output Before resuming operation stop the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again If the forced Digital Operator function and Forced terminal block 51 F TM are turned ON simultaneously the forced Digital Operator function is given priority Parameter Default Function name S Unit No setting C001 to C007 Multi function 31 OPE Forced operator 7 Input Selection Related functions A001 A002 Forced Terminal Block Function F TM 9 85 This function forcibly enables operation via the control circuit terminal block by turning ON OFF the applicable multi func
190. Monitor or data range Page setting 00 Disabled 01 Enabled 02 Disabled during stop and deceleration stop 5 96 00 16 times 01 Unlimited 5 97 5 100 5 103 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 1000 SR N oon l gt fela eee 00 Trip 01 0 Hz restart 02 Frequency matching restart 03 Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 04 Frequency pull in restart 5 97 Time 0 3 to 100 0 Inverter rated 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x current Rated current Inverter rated current 5 110 00 Reduced torque characteristics 01 Constant torque characteristics 02 Free setting SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Default Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range setting Frequency 1 Free electronic Thermal Current 1 0 00 to Rated current um Free electronic Thermal Frequency 1 to Free Free electronic 4 to Free electronic Thermal b015 Thermal Frequency 2 b Free electronic b017 Thermal Frequency 2 electronic Thermal Current 3 sbb Lal Tele EE Free electronic Thermal f epee Frequency 2 to 400 1000 Frequency 3 5 112 Free electronic b020 Thermal 0 00 to Rated current no yes A Current 3 b021 Overload Limit 1 00 Disabled Selection 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation 02 Enabled in constant speed operation 5294 Overload Limit 2 03 Enabled during Selection acceleratio
191. NING Do not change wiring slide switches or optional devices while power is being supplied Always turn off the power supply to the Inverter before changing wiring changing the slide switches or replacing options Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a burn A N Caution Do not dismantle repair or modify this product Doing so may result in an injury Precautions for Safe Use Maintenance and Inspection Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance inspection or parts replacement The life of the capacitor depends on ambient temperatures Refer to the diagram of product life specified in the manual When the capacitor stops operating at the end of the product s life the a Inverter must be replaced Precautions for Correct Use Operation Stop Command Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals the motor may start abruptly Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal Maintenance a
192. NT RUN fime ove Output Terminal C021 to C022 Selection C026 Multi function Relay Output 12 ONT Power ON time over Function Selection Related functions d016 d017 RUN Time Over RNT Allocate 11 RNT RUN time over to any Multi function Output Terminal Selections C021 to C022 or Multi function Relay Output Function Selection C026 Set Power ON Time Level b034 TI O O N Power ON Time Over ONT Allocate 12 ONT Power ON time over to any Multi function Output Terminal Selections C021 to C022 or Multi function Relay Output Function Selection C026 Set Power ON Time Level b034 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 124 Functions 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals 0 Hz ZS This function outputs a detection signal when the Inverter output frequency drops to below the level set by 0 Hz Detection Level C063 This function is enabled when 21 ZS 0 Hz is allocated to any Multi function Output Terminal Selections C021 to C022 or Multi function Relay Output Function Selection C026 Although this function normally operates according to the Inverter output frequency during simple position control it operates according to the motor frequency Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting l 0 00 to 100 0 SES pia EERON EENE Set a frequency to be detected as 0 Hz 0 00 nz Se el Terminal Selection 21 ZS 0 H
193. Note If communication is unstable install on both ends of the communication cable a Terminal Resistor matching the characteristic impedance of the cable The built in Terminal Resistor inside the Inverter is 200 Q 3G3MX2 No 1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 2 uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 3 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Parameters 6 3 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Parameters Si Set the following parameters according to the communication specifications As for C071 C074 and C075 modified data are not reflected until the power is reconnected or a reset is performed To perform a reset turn the reset terminal 18 RS OFF ON and then 6 3 OFF again Parameter No A001 A002 C071 C072 C074 C075 C076 C077 C078 Frequency Reference Selection 1 RUN Command Selection 1 Communication Speed Selection Communication Station No Selection Communication Parity Selection Communication Stop Bit Selection Operation Selection on Communication Error Communications Error Timeout Time Communication Wait Time Default setting mau 03 Modbus communication Modbus RTU CH NO 03 Modbus communication Modbus RTU 03 2 400 bps 04 4 800 bps 05 9 600 bps 06 19 2 kbps 07 38 4 kbps 08 57 6 kbps 09 76 8 kbps 10 115 2 kbps 1 to 247 CH NO l O Gu 00 No parity 01 Even
194. O oS Multi step speed jogging gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Sei No oO Nh N E P E P E P E CA iN oo oo N N Torque Boost 00 Manual torque boost Selection 2 01 Automatic torque boost Manual Torque 0 0 to 20 0 Percentage of 10 Se Selz Boost Voltage 1 motor voltage A082 l y y 0 Manual Torque 0 0 to 20 0 Percentage of y 549 Boost Voltage 2 motor voltage A282 yes Manual Torque Boost Frequency 1 Page Torque Boost 00 Manual torque boost Selection 1 01 Automatic torque boost 0 0 to 50 0 Ratio to base frequency A003 Manual Torque Boost Frequency 2 0 0 to 50 0 Ratio to base frequency A203 V f characteristics 00 Constant torque characteristics VC 01 Reduced torque Control Method characteristics VP 1 7th 1 power lt VC if low speed gt 02 Free V f setting 03 Sensorless vector control heavy load only 4 7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Page 01 Reduced torque characteristics VP 1 7th power lt VC if low speed gt 02 Free V f setting See Data canbe Default Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range i changed setting during during RUN RUN 03 Sensorless vector control 00 Constant torque A244 Control Method 2 heavy load only t characteristics VC A045 Output Voltage 59 to 100 Gain 1 A245 5 46 5 144 D Automatic Torque Boost A046 Voltage 0
195. OW 125Bh Jump Frequency Width 3 A068 0 to 1000 10000 0 01 Hz oe Acceleration St HIGH SE 0 to 40000 10000 0 01 Hz 125ph TESCH ABOS EAN LOW 125Eh Acceleration Stop Time A070 0 to 600 0 1 s SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 42 uoljoUuNn 4 UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name S Page No No parameters resolution 00 Disabled 125Fh PID Selection A071 R W 01 Enabled 02 Reverse output enabled Output 01 Enabled 1266h PID Variable Range Limit A078 0 to 1000 00 Disabled iail EEN A079 R W 01 FV voltage Selection l 02 FI current c a a 00 Always ON 1269h AVR Selection 1 A081 R W 01 Always OFF 02 OFF during deceleration 200V class 00 200 Motor Incoming Voltage 5 26 TZOAN Selection 1 CES ES 5 148 400V class 05 380 06 400 07 415 126Bh AVR Filter Time A083 IB 0 to 1000 0 01 s Parameter 126Ch AVR Deceleration A084 RW 50 to 200 1 Voltage Gain 00 Normal operation 126Dh RUN Mode Selection A085 R W 01 Energy saving operation 5 Energy saving 126Eh Response Accuracy A086 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 Adjustment 126Fh to Reserved 1273h 00 FI current 01 FV voltage 02 Modbus communication 1264h PID Feedback Selection A076 R W Modbus RTU 03 Pulse train frequency 10 Operation function
196. Output Frequency Setting on page 5 15 Analog Input Filter FV FI Sampling Helps remove noise in the frequency setting circuit If the frequency reference is specified using an external analog signal a sampling time can be set for voltage input or current input Set a larger data value if stable operation cannot be secured because of noise The larger the data value is the slower the response time This parameter specifies a filter time constant for a set value of 1 to 30 x 2 ms When data 31 is selected a filter time parameter of 500 ms and a hysteresis of 0 1 Hz are set Parameter i Default Function name i Unit No setting 1 to 30 Set value x 2 ms filter Analog Input Filter A016 FV FI Sampling 31 Fixed to 500 ms filter With 0 1 Hz hysteresis SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 38 suoljoun Functions 5 4 Analog Signal Analog Command Held Function AHD 9 39 While the AHD terminal is turned on the Inverter keeps external analog input results on hold While the AHD terminal is turned ON the UP DWN function can be used based on the reference value of the analog signal kept on hold by this function If UP DWN Storage Selection C101 is set to 01 the Inverter can store an UP DWN result If the power is turned on with the AHD terminal turned on or if the Reset 18 RS terminal is turned on and then off the Inverter employs the data kept on hold immediately before
197. P Selection 00 1 phase pulse train 01 Dual phase pulse train with 90 phase difference 1 Feedback Pulse Train P004 Input Type Selection 02 Dual phase pulse train with 90 phase difference 2 03 1 phase pulse train direction P011 Number of Encoder Pulses 32 to 1024 512 Pulse Simple Position Control 00 Simple position control disabled P012 z Selection 4 P026 EE Error Detection 0 0 to 150 0 115 0 o V C ee P027 Speed Deviation Error 0 00 to 120 00 10 00 Hz z Detection Level P077 Encoder Disconnection 0 0 to 10 0 10 S TE Detection Time V f Control with Speed 0 00 to 10 00 Hosa WEE l 0 20 Time Compensation Proportional Gain V f Control with Speed O to 1000 H051 Feedback Slip 2 S Compensation Integral Gain 1 Set the percentage of the Maximum Frequency A004 5 83 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Functions 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Functions The following explains the functions relating to Digital Operators and operations STOP Key Selection When the RUN command selection is not set to Digital Operator A002 A202 02 the function of the Digital Operator s STOP key can be set When the RUN command is set to Digital Operator the STOP command and error reset operation are enabled regardless of this setting Parameter S Default f Function name Unit No setting 00 Both the STOP command and err
198. PID operation Allocate 24 PIDC to any Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 Clears the integral value every time the PIDC terminal is turned on Do not turn on the PIDC terminal during PID operation to avoid a possible overcurrent trip Turn ON the PIDC terminal after turning OFF PID operation FW input SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 5 78 suol uny Functions 5 6 Operation Functions f PID Sleep Function When the PID output drops to below the setting of PID Sleep Function Operation Level A156 output will stop after the period set in PID Sleep Operation Delay Time A157 The stop method deceleration stop free run conforms to Stop Selection b091 The PID sleep function does not actuate if recovery occurs within the PID sleep operation delay time Even when the PID function is disabled output will still stop after the period of A157 when the frequency reference value drops to below the setting of A156 The stop method conforms to the setting of b091 Automatic Energy saving Operation Function This function automatically adjusts the Inverter output power during constant speed operation in order to minimize it This function is suitable for load with reduced torque characteristics e g fan pump When operation is performed using this function set RUN Mode Selection A085 to 01 Energy saving operation Response and accuracy can be adjusted using Energy saving Response Accuracy Adjustme
199. Press the Mode Key to move the function group 6 Press the Enter key to move to the data display ed When the display first appears EE all data digits are lit Cd SE i l 5 Press the Increment key to gt increment the parameter by 1 RUN Command Selection 7 Press the Decrement key to 9 Pressing and holding the Enter key decrement the data by 1 for 1 second or more jumps to the output frequency monitor display ah ee If data is changed all digits will blink The new data is not yet reflected 8 Press the Enter key to while its digits are still blinking confirm and store the value Since F parameters other than F004 are reflected in real time the moment they are changed the display does not blink when any of these parameters is changed Eege Key name Function code is displayed Data is displayed RUN ES pea Mode key Move to the next function group Value is cancelled and Ei Al return to the parameter display Enter key Proceed to the data display Value is confirmed stored and return to the parameter display Increment key Parameter is incremented by 1 Data is incremented by 1 Decrement key Parameter is decremented by 1 Data is decremented by 1 Increment Decrement are Move to the individual input Move to the individual input pressed simultaneously mode mode EN Reference Regardless of the Digital Operator display pressing and holding the Mode key for 1 second or mo
200. RP and EB terminals Since the EB terminal is also used as multi function input terminal S7 EB use all multi function inputs including the EB terminal based on the source logic voltage output encoder or PNP open collector encoder Also make sure the input voltage is within the rated range for the multi function input terminal 18 to 24 V Allocate EB to multi function input terminal S7 EB Forward 90 Vec advanced P24 3G3MX2 f l RP a 5100 a O C i Ok 39ko A 51v 62ka Encoder S7 EB Mit O Le sc O GND Voltage output or PNP open collector type encoder Connect the Inverter output terminals U V and W and the motor input terminals U V and W in the correct phase order In this case the motor turns forward when a forward command is applied to the Inverter Forward is the direction in which the motor shaft turns counterclockwise when viewed from the load Reverse is the direction in which the motor shaft turns clockwise For the dual phase pulse on terminals RP and EB forward is detected when the pulse on the RP terminal is 90 advanced from the EB terminal and reverse is detected when the pulse on the RP terminal is 90 delayed from the EB terminal Input the encoder signals so that the RP terminal is 90 advanced from the EB terminal when the motor is turning forward SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 158 suoljoun j Functions 5 12 Simple Position Control Function 1 pulse Direction S
201. Reserved 1366h 1367h Free V f Frequency 1 b100 0 to Free V f frequency 2 1 Hz 1368h Free V f Voltage 1 b101 0 to 8000 0 1 V Free V f Frequency 1 to 1369h Free V f Frequency 2 b102 Free Vif frequency 3 1 Hz W 136Ah Free V f Voltage 2 b103 0 to 8000 0 1 V W Free V f Frequency 2 to 136Bh Free V f Frequency 3 b104 Free V f frequency 4 1 Hz R Regenerative Braking Selection 1362h b095 5 141 136Ch Free V f Voltage 3 b105 0 to 8000 0 1 V 136Dh Free V f Frequency 4 pioa eewer 1 Hz Free V f frequency 5 See 136Eh Free V f Voltage 4 b107 0 to 8000 0 1 V Free V f Frequency 4 to 136Fh Free V f Frequency 5 b108 Free Vit frequency 6 1 Hz 1370h Free V f Voltage 5 b109 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V Free V f Frequency 5 to 1371h Free V f Frequency 6 b110 Free Vif frequency 7 1 Hz 1372h Free V f Voltage 6 b111 0 to 8000 0 1 V Free V f Frequency 6 to 400 1373h Free V f Frequency 7 b112 R W 1000 Hz 1 Hz 1374h Free V f Voltage 7 b113 R W 0 to 8000 0 1 V d DEE to Reserved SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALI_ILIL 137Ah 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data ee ous Monitor and setting Data Function name parameters resolution Brake Control Function E Disabled 137Ch ah eeh b121 R W 0 to 500 0 01 s 137Dh Acceleration Wait Time b122 0 to 500 0 01 s 137Eh Stop Wait Time Wait Time 6123 0 to 500 0 01 s er aan b124
202. S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 16 g D if Q 5 c T D A 2 2 Wiring j Main Circuit Connection Diagram Name Power supply 1 2 3 4 AC reactor 5 Input noise filter 6 Radio noise filter 7 DC reactor 8 Braking Resistor 9 Regenerative braking unit 10 Output noise filter 11 Radio noise filter Function Refer to Recommended Cable Size Wiring Device and Crimp Terminal on page 2 15 Apply this reactor as a harmonic suppression measure or when the imbalance ratio of power supply voltage is 3 or more power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more or power supply voltage changes suddenly It also helps improve the power factor This noise filter reduces the conducted noise generated by the Inverter and traveling through the wires Connect it to the primary input side of the Inverter When the Inverter is used noise may generate in a nearby radio etc through the power wiring etc Use this noise filter to reduce such noise reduce radiated noise This reactor suppresses the harmonics generated by the Inverter Use this Unit to increase the braking torque of the Inverter to permit frequent ON OFF switchings or decelerate a load whose inertial moment is large This noise filter is installed between the Inverter and motor to reduce the radiated noise emitted from the wires Use it to reduce radio interference in radios and TVs or prevent malfunctioning of measuring
203. SER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 130 suoljoun 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Signal During Reverse Operation RVR This signal is output while the Inverter is running in reverse While the Inverter is running forward or when stopped this signal is turned off Parameter S Default Function name Unit No setting Multi function Output Terminal Selection C021 to C022 Multi function Relay 52 RVR During reverse operation C026 Output Function Selection Forward Output frequency Hz Reverse During forward operation FWR output During reverse operation RVR output Fatal Fault Signal MJA In addition to an Alarm output 05 AL this signal is output separately if any of the following trips occurs This signal applies to a trip caused by the hardware Functions No Description 1 EEPROM error 2 Current detector error 3 CPU error 4 Grounding protection 5 CPU communication error 6 Main circuit error Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting C021 to C022 Multi function Output Terminal Selection Multi function Relay 53 MJA Fatal fault signal C026 Output Function Selection 5 131 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Window Comparator WCFV WCFI Disconnection Detection FVdc Fldc The Inverter acti
204. This function is intended to prevent this problem by allowing the regenerative energy to be consumed using an external Resistor It is effective if you want to quickly decelerate the motor or when the load inertia is large All 3G3MX2 models have a built in regenerative braking circuit so install only a Braking Resistor externally to the Inverter To use the Regenerative Braking Unit set Regenerative Braking Selection b095 to 00 Disabled b090 and b096 will be ignored To use the regenerative braking function set the following conditions Gier Function Default name setting Ge braking does not operate 0 1 to 100 0 The usage rate of regenerative braking can be set in increments of 0 1 Usage Rate A trip occurs if the set usage rate is exceeded of R di Regenerative an sns 2 Ns LL Regenerative 100 sec braking operation sage rate 100 sec 00 Disabled 01 Regenerative While operating dE braking Bes SrAKng While stopped Disabled Regenerative braking does Selection not operate 02 Enabled while operating and stopped Regenerative braking operates Regenerative 330 to 330 to 380 200 V class 200 V class SE lene E a V class Level 1 The regenerative braking ON level conforms to the output voltage setting for the Inverter s internal converter DC unit The regenerative braking circuit turns ON when the set voltage is exceeded When the Resistor consumes the energy and the voltage drops to bel
205. ULILI 5 1 Monitor Mode Torque Bias Monitor d010 During sensorless vector control the currently set torque bias amount is displayed Parameter Default i Function name 3 Unit No setting d010 Torque Bias Monitor 200 to 200 L Related functions A044 P036 P037 P038 Output Torque Monitor d012 Displays an estimated value of the Inverter s output torque Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting do12 Output Torque 200 to 200 oi Monitor Related functions A044 A244 Note The power running direction is positive and regeneration direction is negative during forward rotation while the power running direction is negative and regeneration direction is positive during reverse rotation This display is shown only when the sensorless vector control is selected If any other control mode is selected the correct value is not displayed suoljoun Output Voltage Monitor d013 Displays the output voltage of the Inverter Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting BS Output Voltage 0 0 to 600 0 e Monitor Set Motor Incoming Voltage Selection A082 A282 correctly The correct value may not be displayed SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Functions 5 1 Monitor Mode Input Power Monitor d014 Displays the input power instantaneous value of the Inverter Parameter 3 Default S Function name 8 Unit No setting do14
206. UN command RS input Example 4 Reset disabled when normal C102 02 03 Reset is disabled during operation Output frequency RUN command RS input SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 8 Restart Functions Example 5 When 01 Frequency matching restart is selected by Reset Restart Selection C103 frequency matching restart can be applied also when the power is reconnected If C103 is set to 00 0 Hz restart Restart Standby Time b003 is ignored Note however that O Hz restart may be applied even when frequency matching restart is selected in the following cases The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base frequency The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates Frequency Matching Lower Limit Frequency Setting b007 is set and a frequency below the set frequency is detected Power supply ON OFF ON FW input ON forward Frequency matching Free run Motor rotation speed EN Reference The counters used for the Inverter s internal protection will be cleared during reset To shut off the Inverter s output via a multi function input use the free run terminal FRS Example 6 Frequency pull in restart forward RS input Decelerates according to b029 Output current Inverter output frequency Frequency selected in b030 Alarm occurred Motor rotation speed b003 lt gt After an elapse of the time
207. V Starting contact FR output SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 128 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Fin Overheat Warning OHF This function monitors the Inverter s internal cooling fin temperature and outputs a signal when the temperature exceeds the Cooling Fin Overheat Warning Level C064 Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting Cooling Fin to 110 C064 Overheat Warning Set a temperature to output the Level overheat warning signal Multi function C021 to C022 Output Terminal Selection 42 OHF Fin overheat warning Multi function C026 Relay Output Function Selection Low Current Signal LOC 5 This signal is output when output current falls below the Low Current Detection Level C039 Whether this signal is always output during operation or only in constant speed operation can be selected by Low Current Signal Output Mode Selection C038 a aaa Default Function name Unit setting l 00 Enabled ee a Low Current Signal deceleration and constant ee C038 Output Mode Selection 01 Enabled during constant Low Current Detection 0 0 to 2 0 x Rated current Rated C039 Level Set a low current signal output level current C021 to C022 Multi function Output Terminal Selection Multi function Relay 43 LOC Low current signal Functions C026 Output Function Selection When 01 control circuit terminal bl
208. VE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 18 suoljoun 5 2 Basic Functions i Specified by Multi step Speed When a multi step speed is allocated to a multi function input and the input is turned ON multi step speed operation is started regardless of the setting of A001 The frequency conforms to the applicable value set in A021 to A035 Only when all multi step speed inputs are turned OFF or specifically in the case of Oth the frequency conforms to the setting of A001 Communication etc aaa Default Function name Unit setting Frequency A001 Reference Selection 1 1 Binary 15 Speed CF1 to CF4 i i Data is selected by A019 C001 to C007 Multi function Input Selection 39 to 38 Bit 7 Speed SF1 to SF7 Data is selected by A019 Multi step Speed Random A020 to A220 1 2 Hz Reference 0 A021 to A035 Multi step Speed Random Hz Reference 1 to 15 1 Only when the speed is Oth the frequency reference conforms to the setting of A001 Functions 5 19 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 2 Basic Functions Forced Digital Operator Function Forced Terminal Block Function is Used Besides using Frequency Reference Selection A001 the RUN command and frequency reference can be changed forcibly using an input terminal An overview is given below For details refer to Forced Operator Function OPE on page 5 85 and Forced T
209. When the SPD terminal is turned OFF during operation position control operation is started the moment the terminal is turned OFF speed position switching At this time if the position command is 0 the Inverter immediately stops Hunting may occur depending on the DC injection braking force EN Reference While the SPD terminal is ON the Inverter runs in the direction specified by the run command Accordingly set P004 to 02 90 dual phase pulse 2 when using this function When using speed position switching SPD set P075 Positioning Mode Selection to 00 limit Output frequency Position count start Speed control Position control Target position Parameter S Default Function name Unit No setting C001 to C007 Multi function 73 SPD Speed position switching 8 Input Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 12 Simple Position Control Function Zero Return Function This function performs two types of zero return operations according to Zero Return Mode P068 Zero return starts when the Zero return start signal 70 ORG turns ON When zero return is complete the current position is cleared 0 Select the zero return direction in Zero Return Direction Selection P069 If zero return is not performed the Inverter performs position control with the position at power on defined as the origin force EN Reference When using the zero return f
210. X2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page No No parameters resolution 00 Disabled Internal DC Injection 01 Enabled lee Braking Selection ADD KS 02 Enabled Operates only on set frequencies AGH ee ecton A052 RW 0 to 6000 0 01 Hz Braking Frequency izn ee nerton Braking A053 R W pre ep 0 1 s Delay Time DC Injection Brakin Se 1248h A054 R W 0 to 100 1 Power jaaar 2S RE A055 0 to 600 0 1 s Time DC Injection Braking 00 Edge operation SSC Edge Level Selection Ge 01 Level operation EE Oe inlection A057 RIW 0 to 100 1 Braking Power nem R W EE A058 RIW 0to 600 0 1 s Injection Braking Time SA ee EE A059 20 to 150 100 0 1 kHz Carrier Frequency oe SES 124Fh aca 0 Frequency Upper Limit 1 Frequency Lower Limit 1 to 0 01 Hz 5 60 1250h A061 Maximum Frequency 1 LOW ven A062 Tw g Frequency Lower Limit 1 NIS Starting Frequency to 0 01 Hz 5 60 Frequency Upper Limit 1 1252h LOW q y Upp 1253h a Jump Frequency 1 O to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz 1254h AQDS R W LOW 1255h Jump Frequency Width 1 A064 O to 1000 10000 0 01 Hz 1256h Wee R W Jump Frequency 2 O to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz 1257h A065 Ryw ech LOW 1258h Jump Frequency Width 2 A066 0 to 1000 10000 0 01 Hz 1259h ico R W Jump Frequency 3 O to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz 125Ah ADOC Jee L
211. a 2 LSB 88 8 CRC 16 MSB F4 9 CRC 16 LSB 71 1 Note that the holding register start address is smaller by 1 than the register number The register number less 1 corresponds to the register address Refer to Exceptional Response on page 6 18 if writing into or reading from multiple registers cannot be performed normally 6 17 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 AOO00 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No Exceptional Response The master requests the response for a query other than broadcast or broadcast to each group Though the Inverter should return a response corresponding with the query it returns an exceptional response if the query has an error The exceptional response has the field configuration shown in the following table Field Configuration Slave address Parameter No Exceptional code Error check The detailed field configuration is shown in the table below The Parameter No of the exceptional response will be the value of the query Parameter No to which 80h is added The exceptional code shows the cause of exceptional response Parameter No Query Exceptional response 01h 81h 03h 83h Oh 85h O6h 86h OFh 8Fh 10h 90h 17h 97h SES Description code Oth Specified an unsupported function 02h Specified address does not exist 03h Specified data has an unacceptable format 21h Data is out of setting range for writing into the holding register The Inverter does not allow this function Has a
212. a burn SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULLI 5 Safety Precautions CAUTION Do not connect resistors to the terminals 1 P 2 N directly Doing so might result in a small scale fire heat generation or damage to the unit Install a stop motion device to ensure safety Not doing so might result in a minor injury A holding brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor regenerative braking unit In case of a braking resistor install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor Not doing so might result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which if short circuited might cause damage to itself or other property Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded case circuit breaker MCCB that matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side Not doing so might result in damage to property due to the short circuit of the load Do not dismantle repair or modify this product Doing so may result in an inj
213. a capacity larger than the Inverter s rated capacity reduce the set value Other than this function the following methods are suggested to reduce hunting Lower the Carrier Frequency b083 Refer to Carrier Frequency on page 5 51 Lower the Output Voltage Gain A045 A245 Refer to Output Voltage Gain on page 5 72 Parameter s Default Function name i Unit No setting 0 to 255 H006 H206 Stabilization Parameter 1 2 Increase decrease the value if the motor hunts l 20 to 100 100 A045 A245 Output Voltage Gain 1 2 If hunting occurs reduce the set value 2 0 to 15 0 2 0 to 10 0 or 2 0 to 10 0 heavy load light load or high 10 0 2 0 b083 Carrier Frequency frequency 5 0 kHz If hunting occurs reduce the set l value SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Pulse Train Frequency Input 5 6 Operation Functions This function uses the pulse train 1 phase input to the RP terminal as the frequency reference or PID feedback value in each control mode Set the input frequency at the maximum frequency in Pulse Train Frequency Scale P055 The analog input start end function cannot be used To limit the input frequency use Pulse Train Bias Amount P057 and Pulse Train Limit P058 P003 Pulse Train Input Terminal 00 Frequency setting or PID RP Selection feedback value 1 0 to 32 0 P055 A004 0 01 to 2 00 Pulse Train Frequency POSG Filter Time Parameter
214. able frequency inverter is communicating with some type of supervisory controller or host computer in the same control cabinet and they are connected at the same ground PE potential connect the shields of the control lines to ground PE protective earth at both ends With distributed systems for example the communicating supervisory controller or host computer is not in the same control cabinet and there is a distance between the systems we recommend connecting the shield of the control lines only at the end connecting to the adjustable frequency inverter If possible route the other end of the control lines directly to the cable entry section of the supervisory controller or host computer The shield conductor of the motor cables always must connected to ground PE at both ends To achieve a large area contact between shield and ground PE potential use a PG screw with a metallic shell or use a metallic mounting clip Use only cable with braided tinned copper mesh shield type CY with 85 coverage The shielding continuity should not be broken at any point in the cable If the use of reactors contactors terminals or safety switches in the motor output is necessary the unshielded section should be kept as short as possible Some motors have a rubber gasket between terminal box and motor housing Very often the terminal boxes and particularly the threads for the metal PG screw connections are painted Make sure there
215. abled in constant Selection speed operation 03 Enabled during acceleration constant speed accelerated during regeneration 1317h Overload Limit 1 Level Limit 1 Level b022 200 to 2000 to 2000 0 01 ze Limit 1 1318h b023 1 to 4130000 0 1 s 5 144 _ Disabled 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation aves 03 Enabled during acceleration constant speed accelerated during regeneration 1319h Overload Limit 1 Selection 2 R 131Ah Overload Limit 1 Level 2 b025 R W 200 to 2000 0 01 R iah Resp b026 W 1 to 30000 0 1 s Parameter 2 Overcurrent Suppression a Disabled 5 116 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data ee Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page No parameters resolution b028 Frequency Pull in SEN Restart Level Frequency Pull in Eden Restart Parameter Starting Frequency at 131Fh Frequency Pull in Restart Selection b029 00 b030 01 02 1320h Soft Lock Selection b031 02 03 10 Se 1 to 30000 0 1 s 5 100 Frequency at interruption Max frequency Set frequency Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON Data other than b031 and set frequency cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON Data other than b031 cannot be changed Data other than b031 and the set frequency cannot be changed Data can be chang
216. acity mount the optional braking resistor to this terminal Do not mount a resistor whose resistance is lower than the specified value Doing so may damage the regenerative braking circuit The cable length should be 5 m or shorter Twist the two wires Do not connect any device other than the optional Regenerative Braking Unit or Braking Resistor to this terminal Ground Terminal To prevent electric shock be sure to ground the Inverter and the motor The 200 V class should be connected to the ground terminal under Class D grounding conditions conventional Class 3 grounding conditions 100 Q or less ground resistance The 400 V class should be connected to the ground terminal under Class C grounding conditions conventional special Class 3 grounding conditions 10 Q or less ground resistance g D LA Q 5 For the ground cable use the compatible cable or a cable with a larger diameter Make the cable length as short as possible When several Inverters are connected the ground cable must not be connected across several Inverters and must not be looped Otherwise the Inverter and surrounding control machines may malfunction Your ground bolt SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 12 2 2 Wiring i Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminal Block Open the terminal block cover and wire the main circuit terminal blocks Applicable model Terminal arrangement 3G3MX2 A2001 to A2007 r
217. ads 9 2 External Dimensions _ 108 2 4 5 WA Sa Ho o Se o V 5 e Power supply 1 phase 3G3MX2 AB007 200 V 3G3MX2 AB015 3G3MX2 AB022 3 phase 3G3MX2 A2015 200 V 3G3MX2 A2022 108 128 3 phase 3G3MX2 A4004 143 5 SES 3G3MX2 A4007 3G3MX2 A4015 3G3MX2 A4022 170 5 3G3MX2 A4030 Specifications 9 7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 4 5 3 phase 3G3MX2 A2037 200 V 3G3MX2 A4040 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL COC 9 2 External Dimensions suoljeoijinads Specifications 9 2 External Dimensions 140 Aa Le RA 248 le m NS Power supply 3 phase 3G3MX2 A2055 200 V 3G3MX2 A2075 3 phase 3G3MX2 A4055 400 V 3G3MX2 A4075 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 2 External Dimensions 180 Ge 296 ISS di imt WE C z Power supply 3 phase 3G3MX2 A2110 200 V 3 phase 3G3MX2 A4110 400 V 3G3MX2 A4150 LD D 2i gt O A ct O 5 Oo SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 10 Specifications 9 2 External Dimensions 9 11 Power supply 3 phase 200 V Z Le l be hil id
218. agram for reference and make sure that the devices are used within their operating ratings To All Customers August 2010 OMRON Corporation Automation Systems HQ SYSDRIVE MX2 Series User s Manual Notification of Additional Information No eurin Thank you for supporting OMRON and OMRON products The SYSDRIVE MX2 Series Multi function Compact Inverters have been certified for additional international safety Standards Please mark your manuals so that the corrections are noted on the pages concerned and then securely add any required pages from this Notification to the rear of the manual E Applicable Manual e This Notification applies to the SYSDRIVE MX2 Series Multi function Compact Inverter User s Manual that was issued in March 2010 Cat No 1570 E 1 02 1 Relevant location Page 1 2 International Standards E Additional Information International Standards EC Directives and UL cUL Standards The 3G3MX2 Inverter meets the EC Directives and UL cUL standard requirements for worldwide use Classification Applicable standard EC Directives EMC directive EN61800 3 2004 Low voltage directive EN61800 5 1 2003 International Standards The 3G3MX2 series Inverters meet the following international standards Classification Applicable standard EC Directives Machinery Directive 2006 94 EC EN 1S013849 1 2008 P Ld EN 61800 5 2 EN 60204 1 Low voltage directive EN 61800 5 1 EMC directive EN 61800 3 UL508C CSA C22 2
219. al voltage between terminals P 2 and N with a circuit tester to ensure safety i Main power supply input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Use an earth leakage breaker for circuit wiring protection between the power supply and the main power supply terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 An earth leakage breaker may malfunction at high frequency Use an earth leakage breaker with a large high frequency sensitive current rating g D CU Q 5 As a guide for leakage current if a CV wire is used and routed through a metal pipe the leakage current is 30 mA km Due to the higher specific inductive capacity of the H IV wire the leakage current increases about eight times Use a wire with a sensitivity current one level higher The leakage current mentioned here is the effective value of the fundamental wave and high frequency currents are excluded Inverter motor distance Sensitivity current of earth leakage breaker 100 m max 30 mA 300 m max 100 mA 800 m max 200 mA When the Inverter protective function is activated your system may fail or an accident may occur Connect a magnetic contactor to turn off the Inverter power supply Do not start or stop the Inverter by switching ON OFF the magnetic contactor provided in the Inverter power supply input primary circuit and output secondary circuit To start or stop the Inverter via an external signal use the operation command terminals FW RV on the control circuit terminal block Do
220. alization mode selection 1 Refer to the next page for the details of See terminal basic communication settings when Initialization Target Selection is set b094 01 2 Only the data of user registered parameters are initialized and the user registered parameters themselves remain 3 Exercise caution because when 01 is selected for Perform Initialization Mode Selection b180 and the Enter key is pressed initialization starts immediately and the process cannot be undone SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 174 suoljoun Functions 5 14 Other Functions Details of input output terminals basic communication settings when Initialization Target Selection is set b094 01 Parameter No Description Input output terminal data C001 to C007 C011 to C017 C021 to C022 C026 C031 to C032 C036 Multi function input selection Multi function input terminal operation selection Multi function output terminal selection Multi function relay output function selection Multi function output terminal contact selection Multi function relay output contact selection Basic communication setting data C071 C072 C074 C075 C076 C077 C078 5 175 Communication speed selection Communication station No selection Communication parity selection Communication stop bit selection Operation selection on communication error Communications error timeout time Communication wait time SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER
221. an set 2 types of overload limit functions in b021 b022 b023 and b024 b025 b026 To switch between b021 b022 b023 and b024 b025 b026 allocate 39 OLR to a multi function input terminal and then turn it ON OFF The overload limit level sets a current value for this function to work The overload limit parameter sets a time of deceleration from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz When this function operates while the Inverter is accelerating the acceleration time becomes longer than the set time When the selected control method is sensorless vector control and 03 Enabled during acceleration constant speed accelerated during regeneration is selected for b021 b024 the frequency will increase if current exceeding the overload limit level flows during regeneration operation If the setting of Overload Limit Parameter b023 b026 is too small an overvoltage trip may occur because of regenerative energy from the motor even during acceleration This is due to automatic deceleration under this function Make the following adjustments if this function operates during acceleration and the frequency doesn t reach the target level Increase the acceleration time refer to Acceleration Deceleration Time on page 5 24 Increase the overload limit level b022 b025 oars Default Function name setting 00 Disabled Disabled Overload Limit 1 01 Enabled in o Selection speed operation eee Overload Limit 1 02 Enabled in constant speed b221 Sel
222. ange from 0 Hz to 10 of the base frequency Example If the base frequency is 60 Hz the Inverter provides constant torque characteristics within a range from 0 to 6 Hz Period b Provides reduced torque characteristics within a range from 10 of the base frequency to the base frequency The Inverter outputs voltage based on a curve of the 1 7th power of the frequency Period c Provides constant voltage characteristics within a range from the base frequency to the maximum frequency i Free V f Setting Under the free V f setting function desired V f characteristics can be set by setting seven points of voltage and frequency b100 to b113 The set frequency should always be 1 lt 2 lt 3 lt 4 lt 5 lt 6 lt All default data is 0 Hz so set free V f frequency 7 first Operation is disabled by factory default If the free V f setting is enabled the functions of Torque Boost Selection A041 A241 Base Frequency A003 A203 and Maximum Frequency A004 A204 are disabled Free V f frequency 7 is handled as the maximum frequency Parameter Default ee Function name Description No setting b112 Free V f Frequency 7 f7 i oo ER b110 Free V f Frequency 6 f Re D Free V f frequency 4 to b108 Free V f Frequency 5 f free Vit frequency 6 Set frequencies for each break point Free V f frequency 2 to b104 Free Vif Frequency 3 f3 ee v f frequency 4 Free V f frequency 1 to b102 Free V f Frequency 2 f free V f frequency 3 b10
223. applications for which particular attention must be given i Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this document ii Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities iii Energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equip ment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations iv Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or prop erty Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Prod uct NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON S PRODUCT IS PROP ERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM Programmable Products Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable Product or any consequence thereof Performance Data Data presented in Omron Company websites catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitabil ity and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of Omron s test conditions and the user must correlate it to actual application require ments Actual performance i
224. arameter Manual Setting Function U parameters are user parameters and up to 32 parameters can be registered as desired When user parameters are set and then Display Selection b037 is set to 02 User setting only the functions registered under U001 to U032 d001 F001 and b037 will be displayed thereafter Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting no Not no Not registered U001 to User Selection to P186 S U032 Register a desired function code b037 Display Selection 02 User setting b037 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function 5 177 When User Parameter Automatic Setting Function b039 is set to 01 Enabled the parameters subjected to a data change are automatically stored in sequence under U001 to U032 This data can be used as modification records The screen information parameters is stored when the Enter key is pressed The monitor screens d are also stored in the same manner U001 is the latest parameter while U032 is the oldest parameter The same parameter is not duplicated If the number of parameters stored exceeds 32 the oldest parameters are erased from U032 Parameter Default S Function name Unit No setting b039 User Parameter Automatic Setting 00 Disabled 7 Function 01 Enabled Related functions U001 to U032 Note Take note that all parameters that are currently registered in User Parameters U001 to U032 when b039 is changed from 00 to 01 will be ini
225. arting frequency to Reference 0 Maximum Frequency 2 Multi step A021 Speed Reference 1 Multi step A022 Speed Reference 2 Multi step A023 Speed Reference 3 Multi step A024 Speed Reference 4 Multi step A025 Speed Reference 5 Multi step A026 Speed Reference 6 Multi step 0 00 A027 Speed Starting frequency to Reference 7 Maximum Frequency Multi step A028 Speed Reference 8 Multi step A029 Speed Reference 9 Multi step A030 Speed Reference 10 Multi step A031 Speed Reference11 Multi step A032 Speed Reference 12 Multi step A033 Speed Reference 13 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 6 5 63 Multi step speed jogging yes yes Hz 1SI7 JoJOWeIe Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode Default Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range i setting Multi step A034 Speed Reference 14 0 00 Starting frequency to Multi step Maximum Frequency A035 Speed Reference 15 A038 Jogging Starting frequency to 9 99 om Frequency 00 Free run on jogging stop Disabled during operation 01 Deceleration stop on jogging stop Disabled during operation 02 DC injection braking on jogging stop Disabled in Jogging Stop operation Selection 03 Free run on jogging stop Enabled in operation 04 Deceleration stop on jogging stop Enabled in operation 05 DC injection braking on jogging stop Enabled in operation lt Wa lt Wa SR N Ei
226. artup Selection Slowly increases voltage during motor startup Increase the value of b036 if you want to prevent a current surge at the start or when an overcurrent trip occurs at the start A smaller value increases the starting torque As a result an overcurrent trip occurs more easily k Default Function name Unit setting 0 Reduced voltage startup disabled boze Reduced Voltage Geesen E Short to 255 Long Startup Selection Related functions FW input Starting frequency b082 0 Output frequency Output voltage db b036 00 Reduced voltage startup disabled SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL b082 FW input Starting frequency b082 Output frequency Output voltage Small lt b036 Large Reduced voltage startup enabled 9 58 suoljoun j 5 6 Operation Functions Jogging Operation JG set 06 JG to a multi function input terminal When a RUN command is issued with the JG terminal turned ON operation starts at the jogging frequency set by A038 During jogging operation the Inverter trips easily because it starts at full voltage Adjust the set value of Jogging Frequency A038 to prevent the Inverter from tripping Turn ON the JG input first ee RV input Output frequency A038 tieren SEET Function name Unit setting A038 Jogging Starting frequency to 9 99 Frequency 00 Disabled during operation free run on
227. ase of overvoltage overcurrent and then trips at the next restart The Inverter does not trip when unlimited restart is set Unlimited restart can be set only for Momentary Power Interruption Undervoltage Restart b005 b004 can be used to select whether the Inverter trips or not when a momentary power interruption or undervoltage occurs while stopped When selecting a restart function set the following restart conditions according to the system A desired function can be selected from 0 Hz restart frequency matching restart frequency matching deceleration trip and frequency pull in restart Even when the Inverter is restarting an E09 undervoltage trip occurs if an undervoltage condition continues for 40 seconds Description Default H setting Function name No 0 Hz restart Frequency meng restart example 1 b001 Retry PO PLPN 8 Trip after regueney matening deceleration stop Frequency pus in restart example 1 Allowable b002 Momentary Power 0 3 to 25 0 Interruption Time b003 ee e 0346 1000 a until restart Disabled hada tripping during stop Momentary Power Interruption b004 Undervoltage Trip During Stop Selection Enabled Tripping also during stop Disabled while the operation is stopped or during a deceleration NO stop due to turning OFF of the RUN command nne times Restart During Momentary Power Interruption Count Selection b005 m O ae Restarts if t
228. ass 380 to 480 V voltage L3 Es gt commutating 50 60Hz EIN Between T L3 and R voltmeter L1 ET Power Current of R L1 S L2 All When the input current is supply T L3 Moving iron effective not balanced current IR Is IT ammeter values lin IR Is ItT 3 Im Between R L1 and S All Three wattmeter method Input electric L2 Wit effective Wi1 Wiz Wis power Between S L2 and T Tea Electrodynamic values Win L3 Wiz wattmeter Between T L3 and R L1 Wis Power factor Calculated from the measured values of power supply voltage of power Ein power supply current lin and input electric power Win supply WIN G Pfin AEn k 100 Between U T1 and V Fundam Output T2 Eu Refer to the figure ental voltage Between V T2 and W on the next page wave B Four T3 Ev gt or commutating Effective Between W T3 and U voltmeter value T1 Ew Output current Current of U T1 V T2 ionini All Ge WITZ Ge WON effective lu Iv Iw ammeter values Between U T1 and V All Two wattmeter method Output power T2 Wo1 Electrodynamic effective or three wattmeter Wout Between V T2 and W wattmeter values method T3 Wo2 Wo1 Wo2 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 8 8 GOOUEUSIUISIW pue UOI DedSuU Inspection and Maintenance 8 1 Inspection and Maintenance Measurement i Measurement value Measurement point Measurement device item reference Calculated fr
229. at there is no clogging in the cooling fan and clean it Replace the cooling fan Undervoltage The output is shut off if the incoming Has the power supply voltage drops to the specified value or voltage decreased below because the control circuit no Check the power longer functions properly if the supply incoming voltage to the Inverter drops Is the power supply A trip will also occur when the DC capacity insufficient 5 72 Current detector error CPU error External trip USP error Grou nding protection 1 Maintenance Operations Check the power supply Has the thyristor been broken E09 U Check the thyristor A trip will occur if the current detector E10 0 The Inverter has a failure generates an error Repair A trip will occur if the built in CPU E11 D Is there any large noise experiences a malfunction or error source around Countermeasures E12 0 E13 0 against noise E14 0 The Inverter has a failure SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 AULULI voltage between P 2 and N drops to approx 173 VDC 200V class or 345 VDC 400V class or below Repair Faulty external equipment Check the external equipment A trip will occur if the multi function input terminal set for External trip 12 EXT turns ON 5 120 A trip will occur if the power is turned on while a RUN signal is still input to the Inverter Available only when the USP funct
230. ation with the Enter command Method for the Enter Command Use a Holding Register Write command 06h to write into the holding register for Enter command 0900h At this time the value to be written into the holding register 0900h is as follows Set value Description 0000 Motor parameter recalculation 0001 Set value storage 0002 to FFFF Motor parameter recalculation and set value storage Note If any of the following parameters is changed the motor parameters must be recalculated In this case the motor parameters can be recalculated by writing 0000h or 0002h into the Enter command holding register Parameter List Requiring Motor Parameter Recalculation 6 19 Parameter No Function name A003 A203 Motor Capacity A004 A204 Motor Pole Number A044 A244 Speed Response A082 A282 Motor Incoming Voltage H020 H220 to H024 H224 Motor Parameters Selection b112 Free V f Frequency 7 H030 H230 to H034 H234 Motor Parameters Auto tuning H002 H202 Motor Parameter WE Note 1 The Inverter returns a response to the host when it receives an Enter command and then executes EEPROM memory write You can check whether the data is being written by monitoring the data writing signal coil number 0049h Note 2 Since the Inverter s EEPROM memory has a limit for the number of rewrites approx 100 000 times the Inverter life may be shortened if Enter commands are frequently used SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6
231. ation Deceleration Stop Fupnchon eens 5 62 RUN Permission Signal EE 5 63 Multi step Speed Operation Function CF1 to CF4 SF1 to SF7 5 63 2 step Acceleration Deceleration Function GCH 5 66 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern cccccccseceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeens 5 68 Frequency Operation Function cccccececeeeseeeceeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeaees 5 70 d Frequency Addition FUNCTION simeso aana 5 71 o Remote Operation Function UP DN 5 71 Output Voltage Gan 5 72 oO PI REENEN 5 73 Automatic Energy saving Operation Function c ccccseeeees 5 79 LL ei eer EE rer RL EE 5 79 Stabilization Parameter 0anannannnannannnnennennnrnrennenrenrrrnrrnrrnnennene 5 81 Pulse Train Frequency Input 5 82 V f Control with Speed Feedback n nnannnnnnnnennennnnnnnennnnnnrernsnnnne 5 83 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Functions Sek RS ENK 5 84 STOP Key Selectia EE 5 84 SOM LOCK FUNCIONA SF E EE 5 84 Forced Operator Function OPE 5 85 Forced Terminal Block Function F TM ccccsseeesseeeseeeeeeeeens 5 85 Selection of Operation upon Digital Operator Disconnection 5 86 Initial Screen Selection Screen at Power ON cccseeeeeeees 5 86 Initial Screen Automatic Switching Function ees 5 87 Main Panel Display Selection ccccccccceecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 5 87 Ree 5 88 Display Fixed UI 5 91 PassWord FUNCION WEE 5 91 5 8 Restart Functions
232. be as follows Reading the Holding Register Content 03h Reads the specified number of consecutive holding register contents from the specified holding register addresses Example Read the latest trip information 0012h to 0017h from the Inverter whose slave address is 1 Query Field name See Slave address 01 Parameter No 03 Register start address MSB 00 Register start address LSB T Register address Register number 1 Number of holding registers LSB 06 6 registers CRC 16 MSB 95 CRC 16 LSB CD Number of holding registers MSB 00 6 9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULIL 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No Response Hex 5 03 0003h 03d E03 Cause Overcurrent 04 0004h 4 Inverter status Accelerating 9 Register data 3 LSB 00 10 Register data 4 MSB 04 aayi CS ees 11 Register data 4 LSB D2 12 Register data 5 MSB 00 13 Register data 5 LSB 1E 001Eh 30d 3 0 A Current 14 Register data 6 MSB 01 15 Register data 6 LSB 1C 011Ch 284d 284 V DC 16 CRC 16 MSB 77 d Decimal 17 CRC 16 LSB 3D h Hexadecimal 1 Broadcasting cannot be performed 2 Data is transferred by the number of data bytes In this example 12 OCh bytes are used since 6 pieces of holding register data are returned 3 Note that the holding register start add
233. between the backing plate and unnecessary portions with nippers or a wire cutter when running cables Unnecessary portions Connection points 2 3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 1 Installation Installation Removal Method of the Terminal Block Cover 1 Removal method Loosen the screw s 1 or 2 While pressing the bottom of the locations securing the terminal block cover in the direction terminal block cover of the arrow pull the terminal block cover downward to remove TILA YL Wy Ao A d A ANAN NO V D N Q While pressing here in the direction N of the arrow pull the terminal block cover downward to remove The terminal block cover is secured with one screw at the bottom right for 3 0 kW and smaller models or with two screws on both sides for 3 7 kW and larger models The optional board cover is affixed with screws onto the terminal block cover but it is not affixed onto the main unit Accordingly the terminal block cover can be removed without removing the optional board cover yc o Optional board cover ae 3G3MX2 INVERTER mron SYSDRIVE RUN PWR 3G3MX2 INVERTER De LAUN op el o y AjPRG v ejo Terminal block
234. ble DC injection braking when stopping During Digital Operator operation A002 2 DC injection braking does not function DC injection braking functions when A002 is 03 and A002 is 04 For information on DC injection braking DB refer to Brake Settings on page 5 135 DC Injection Braking Power A054 must be set Set A051 to 00 Even with these settings DC injection braking will function for simple position control when external DC injection braking is selected For position control external DC injection braking takes priority so do not set A051 to 01 or 02 Fl Function name pel Unit No setting Pulse Train Input Terminal 01 Feedback pulse P003 z RP Selection 00 1 phase pulse train 01 Dual phase pulse train with 90 phase difference 11 gt 2 02 Dual phase pulse train with 90 phase difference 2 1 03 1 phase pulse train direction 1 Feedback Pulse Train Input P004 Type Selection 32 to 1024 Set the calculated number of pulses per motor rotation for each P011 Number of Encoder Pulses connected encoder phase This setting is used for speed detection and position control by calculating pulse to stop P012 Simple Position Control 00 Simple position control disabled Selection 02 Simple position control enabled u P015 Creep Speed Setting Starting frequency to 10 00 100 0 5 00 H 0 0 to 150 0 The Inverter will be tripped if the motor speed detected by the encoder exceeds the
235. bled when Initial Screen Automatic Switching Function is set to 01 Enabled If the Digital Operator is not operated for 10 minutes the display automatically switches to the initial screen set by b038 Parameter Default E Function name Unit No setting Initial Screen 00 Disabled Not switching b164 Aut matic GE Switching Function 014 Enabled 01 Enabled Switching automatically automatically Main Panel Display Selection Once the Remote Operator is connected the keys on the main unit become disabled Set the parameter number to be displayed on the main display at this time Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting 001 to 060 Corresponding to d001 to d060 in the monitor mode Main Panel Display Selection b150 5 87 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Display Selection 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Functions The items displayed on the Digital Operator can be partially hidden This function can also be password protected Refer to Password Function on page 5 91 Parameter Function No name b037 Display Selection U001 to U032 User Selection Unit Default setting 00 a display 01 Individual display of functions 02 User setting b037 03 Data comparison display 04 Basic display 05 Monitor d display only no No allocation d001 to P183 Select the parameter you want to display All parameters can be displayed Individual Displa
236. circuit terminal block Decrease the Carrier Frequency b083 Increase the sensitivity current of the earth leakage breaker Or replace the earth The earth leakage The Inverter leak current breaker trips when is large the Inverter is operated DC injection The DC injection braking Set DC Injection Braking Power A054 braking does not power is not set 7 2 Troubleshooting Set RUN Command Selection A002 A202 to 03 Modbus communication Modbus RTU Set Frequency Reference Selection A001 A201 to 03 Modbus communication Modbus RTU Set the correct station number in Communication Station No Selection C072 Set the correct communication parity in Communication Parity Selection C074 Set the correct stop bit in Communication Stop Bit Selection C075 leakage breaker with one of higher sensitivity current MOI The DC injection braking Set DC Injection Braking Time A055 time is not set An Undervoltage The voltage drops due to Trip E09 occurs insufficient power supply capacity Noise enters in the Irradiated noise from the TV or radio located Inverter near the Inverter An optional board The optional board error E60 to E68 detected and error and occurred notified the Inverter Inverter failure The optional board connector is not operating properly An optional board Communications became error E69 impossible after detecting occurred t
237. corresponding to pi Target E ml ves yes 5 10 d050 Monitor 001 to 030 corresponding to 002 S ee Target 2 d001 to d030 yes y d001 d007 Frequency 00 Disabled 5 1 Setting Mode 01 Enabled JSS ASS 5 4 Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 24 b130 Overvoltage b131 Suppression Others b133 b134 oO o ES ech ech O O CA be 1SI7 Je1suIgIgd 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Deau m Page setting Initial Screen Automatic Disabled di Switching Enabled re Function Selection of 1p i Trip after deceleration stop Operation on l b165 A Ignored 5 86 Si Digital Operator S Free run stop Q Disconnection Deceleration stop Selection disabled Inverter Mode Induction motor DI7T Selection High frequency induction ode motor Perform Initialization disabled b180 Initialization Perform initialization 5 174 Mode Selection mode selection 0000 Password function Password A b190 Settin disabled 4 g 0001 to FFFF Password p pioi Password A Qgg0 to FFFF 0000 S Authentication Seen 2 P 0000 Password function A b192 Settin disabled 0000 H 0001 to FFFF Password giga SEH 0000 to FFFF 0000 Authentication Parameter List 4 25 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Parameter No Function name Multi function input terminal Multi function Input 1 Sele
238. cover BB E UI UI T T Terminal block cover screw 1 location for 3 0 kW and smaller models Terminal block cover screw 2 locations for 3 7 kW and larger models 2 Installation method Follow the removal procedure in reverse Set the top side of the terminal block cover onto the main unit and push in the cover until you hear a click sound SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 4 2 1 Installation Names of Parts Inside the Terminal Block Cover Modbus RTU Termination resistor selector switch Safety function selector switch OFF ON Disable Enable Factory default Factory default O USB t ini B Cl connector mini B omron s KOPRIVE ih ie Connector for optional board Hz ALM Connector for Digital Operator RJ45 A PRG ec SES STOP oS AS reser yf wmm EDM function selector switch olly Aller Multi function contact terminal block SE P1 terminal EDM output ex mn Fac
239. ction Multi function Input 2 Selection Multi function Input 3 Selection Multi function Input 4 Selection 1 Multi function Input 5 Selection Multi function Input 6 Selection Multi function Input 7 Selection 4 2 Function Mode Default Monitor or data range i setting Page 00 FW Forward 01 RV Reverse 02 CF1 Multi step speed 1 03 CF2 Multi step speed 2 04 CF3 Multi step speed 3 05 CF4 Multi step speed 4 06 JG Jogging 07 DB External DC injection braking 08 SET Motor 2 control 09 2CH 2 step acceleration deceleration 11 FRS Free run stop 12 EXT External trip 13 USP USP function 14 CS Commercial switch 15 SFT Soft lock 16 FV FI Analog input switch 18 RS Reset 19 TH PTC thermistor thermal protection 20 STA 3 wire start 21 STP 3 wire stop 22 F R 3 wire forward reverse 23 PID PID disabled 24 PIDC PID integral reset 27 UP UP DWN function accelerated 28 DWN UP DWN function decelerated 29 UDC UP DWN function data clear 31 OPE Forced operator 32 SF1 Multi step speed bit 1 33 SF2 Multi step speed bit 2 34 SF3 Multi step speed bit 3 35 SF4 Multi step speed bit 4 36 SF5 Multi step speed bit 5 37 SF6 Multi step speed bit 6 38 SF7 Multi step speed bit 7 39 OLR Overload limit switching 40 TL Torque limit enabled disabled 41 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 42 TRQ2 Tor
240. ction F004 POr OTAG 1 Reverse Not used Inaccessible Sec v Holding Register Number List Groups A b C H and P Rei Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name No parameters resolution 00 Volume 01 Control circuit terminal block 02 Digital Operator Frequency Reference 03 Modbus communication 1201h Selection 1 A001 R W Modbus RTU 5 15 04 Optional board 06 Pulse train frequency 07 Do not set 10 Operation function output 01 Control circuit terminal block RUN Command 02 Digital Operator E Selection 1 1 es deel 03 Modbus communication vee Modbus RTU 04 Optional board 1203h Base Frequency 1 A003 300 to Maximum Frequency 1 0 1 Hz 5 26 Base Frequency 1 to S 1204h Maximum Frequency 1 A004 4000 10000 0 1 Hz 5 28 00 Switch between FV FI 02 Switch between FV A005 R W volume 5 38 03 Switch between EI volume e Reserved 1 n SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 6 38 1205h FV FI Selection uoljoUNny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Se Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name No parameters resolution A011 120Bh HIGH FV Start Frequency R W 0 to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz tow 120Ch tow A012 120Dh HIGH FV End Frequency R W 0 to 40000 100000 0 01 HZ 5 40 120Eh Gs Gs 120Fh FV Start Ratio A013 0 to 100 1 1210h FV End Ratio zm 0 to
241. d but if the setting is too small a trip will occur easily as well 2 Make sure that the set values of b051 and b052 are larger than the undervoltage level 210 V for 200 V class 410V for 400V class If undervoltage occurs this function is disabled Make sure that b051 is smaller than b052 If the difference between the settings of 0051 and b052 is large and setting too large a value for proportional Gain b133 may cause sudden acceleration immediately after this function starts operating and overcurrent may flow SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 106 suoljoun 5 8 Restart Functions 3 When the Deceleration Hold Level of Ctrl Decel b052 lt the DC Bus Voltage Trigger Level of Ctrl Decel b051 the Inverter performs this function by increasing the Deceleration Hold Level of Ctrl Decel b052 to the DC Bus Voltage Trigger Level of Ctrl Decel b051 Take note that the set values are not changed If b052 is smaller than the equivalent incoming voltage equivalent DC voltage after rectification incoming voltage x42 this function does not operate and the Inverter cannot decelerate when the power supply is cut off during the operation The Inverter will accept neither a STOP command nor frequency reference change until the operation is completed Make sure that the b052 setting is higher than the normal incoming voltage or equivalent 4 If the Freq Drop to Start Ctrl Decel b054 is too large an overc
242. d terminal of the adjustable frequency inverter An HF ground connection via metal contact between the housings of the filter and the adjustable frequency inverter or solely via cable shield is not permitted as a protective conductor connection The filter must be solidly and permanently connected with the ground potential so as to preclude the danger of electric shock upon touching the filter if a fault occurs To achieve a protective ground connection for the filter Appendix 11 Ground the filter with a conductor of at least 10 mm2 cross sectional area Connect a second grounding conductor using a separate grounding terminal parallel to the protective conductor The cross section of each single protective conductor terminal must be sized for the required nominal load SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Appendix 4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL cUL Standards Installation for 3G3MX2 series example of ABxxx models Model A2xxx 3 phase 200 V class and A4xxx 3 phase 400 V class are the same concept for the installation Power supply 1 ph 200 V Metal plate earth The filter is a footprint type so it is located between the inverter and the metal plate Remove the insulation material coating of the earth contact portions so to obtain good grounding condition GG EMC filter Foot print L1 N U V W Cable clamp Earth line is connected to the heatsink of the inverter
243. deceleration high may be disabled if this value is set too low As a guide the set value should be at least Incoming voltage x y2 x 110 5 117 A Thermistor Error 19 TH PTC thermistor Cancel the TH allocation Trip E35 occurs thermal protection is allocated to the multi 5 120 function input terminal S5 TH and 24 VDC is input SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 7 14 suoi el do vueu zuIeN x Maintenance Operations 7 2 Troubleshooting Various parameters are not appropriate 7 15 Remedial actions The output frequency becomes unstable Shift the output frequency slightly away from the power supply frequency Change the value of Stabilization Parameter HO06 H206 The load fluctuates Increase the motor Inverter capacity significantly The power supply voltage Suppress the fluctuation fluctuates Increase the value of Manual Torque Boost Voltage A042 A242 or Manual Torque Boost Frequency A043 A243 Set Torque Boost Selection A041 A241 to 01 Automatic torque boost Sufficient torque does not generate Various parameters are not appropriate Acceleration constant speed operation Decrease the Carrier Frequency b083 Set Control Method A044 A244 to 03 Sensorless vector control SLV Extend the Deceleration Time F003 F203 A093 A293 Turn OFF the AVR Selection A081 A281 Various parameters are not appropriate
244. ding Register Enter Command 6 19 Issuing Method for the Enter Commande 6 19 EEPROM Write MOG EE 6 20 6 7 Co Inverter COMMUNICATION ccsceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneees 6 22 Co inverter Communication Zetting 6 25 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 27 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Communication Function 6 1 Communication Specifications 6 1 Communication Specifications The 3G3MX2 Series Inverter comes standard with a RS 485 Modbus communication Modbus RTU port to enable communication with external network control equipment The communication specifications are specified below The Modbus communications function of the Inverter cannot be used if an optional board that provides communications functions is 6 1 mounted Function name Protocol Transfer Speed Synchronous System Transfer Code Transmission Mode Complying Interface Data Bit Length Parity Stop Bit Length Startup Method Wait Time Connection Error Check Communication length Description Modbus communication Modbus RTU Slave 2400 4800 9600 19 2 k 38 4 k 57 6 k 76 8 k 115 2 kbps Asynchronous system Binary LSB first Sent sequentially from the least significant bit RS 485 8 bits No parity Even Odd 1 bit or 2 bits One side start using host command Silent interval O to 1 000 ms 1 N N Max 247 Up to 32 units can be connected without repeat
245. e During torque limit SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 184 suoljoun Communication Function ce Describes the connection and setting methods for implementing Modbus communication with external network control equipment as well as each function required in this communication The method of Co inverter communication is also described 6 1 Communication Specifications ccccccceeeeeeeeeneeeneeenees 6 1 6 2 RS 485 Port Specifications and Connection KKK 6 2 6 3 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Parameters 6 3 6 4 Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Protocol 6 4 Message Structure n nnannannennennennnnnnnrnnrrrrnrrorrrnrrnrrnererrnrrsrrnneenee 6 4 Total Communication Time cc cece eecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeesaeeeaes 6 6 Keis Le NEE 6 6 Abnormal Response EE 6 7 lege eier 6 7 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No ccseesseeeeeeeeeees 6 8 CoitStatus Read OU ET 6 8 Reading the Holding Register Content 03h cc ceeeeeeeeeees 6 9 Writing Into the Coil IO bl 6 10 Writing Into the Holding Register 06h ccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeees 6 12 Loop back Test 08h EE 6 13 Writing Into Multiple Coils OFA annnnnnannnnnannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannn 6 14 Writing Into Multiple Holding Register TO 6 16 Multiple Holding Register Read or Write Ich 6 17 EXCEPlIONal RESPONSE ssaa e 6 18 6 6 To Save the Change to the Hol
246. e Relay Output Function Selection 1 Even when Retry Selection b001 is set to any restart function 01 to 03 and Momentary Power Interruption Undervoltage Trip during Stop Selection b004 is disabled 00 or 02 a trip still occurs if the momentary power interruption time exceeds the allowable momentary power interruption undervoltage time Example 2 2 Even if a restart function is selected the Inverter trips when undervoltage remains for 40 seconds or longer 3 0 Hz restart may occur in the following cases e The output frequency is one half the base frequency or below e The induced voltage of the motor attenuates quickly Al an overvoltage overcurrent trip occurs during declaration Undervoltage Error E09 is displayed and the motor goes into free run status In this case increase the deceleration time 5 Even when a restart operation upon trip is selected the Inverter continues to trip if the cause of the trip is not yet removed after Restart Standby Time b003 elapses In this case increase the restart standby time SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 8 Restart Functions A timing chart of Frequency Matching Restart b001 02 is shown below t0 Momentary power interruption time t1 Allowable Momentary Power Interruption Time b002 t2 Restart Standby Time b003 Example 1 When t0 lt t1 Power supply Inverter output Motor rotation speed Example 2 When t0 gt t1 Power su
247. e benzene toluene or alcohol for cleaning Doing so may cause the Inverter surface to dissolve or its coating to come off In particular do not use detergent or alcohol on the display of the Digital Operator Periodic Inspection Check the parts that cannot be checked without stopping operation as well as those that require periodic inspection Contact OMRON Corporation for periodic inspections Any abnormality in the cooling system Clean the air filter etc Tightening check and secure tightening Screws bolts and other tightened parts may become loose due to the effects of vibration temperature change etc Thorough check the applicable locations and tighten them securely Check that there is no corrosion or damage to the conductors and or insulators Measurement of insulation resistance Check and replace the cooling fan smoothing capacitor and relay SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 8 2 ueu zuileN pue UO I DedSuU Inspection and Maintenance 8 1 Inspection and Maintenance Daily Inspection and Periodic Inspection 8 3 Inspection part General Main circuit Inspection item Ambient environment Power supply voltage General Inspection point Check ambient temperature as well as humidity and dust levels Check that there are no abnormal vibrations or sounds Check that the main circuit voltage is normal Megger check between main
248. e is no distortion with the conductor Check that there is no tearing in the wire coverings Check the resistance between the terminals Check that there is no liquid leakage Check that the safety valve has not come out and that there are no Check that there is no abnormal sound during operation Check that there is no rough surface on the contact Check the balance of output voltage levels between phases in single Inverter run Check that there are no errors in protection and display circuits through sequence protection operation Inspection period SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 8 1 Inspection and Maintenance Inspection method Visual inspection Remove the wirings of the Inverter s main circuit terminal block and measure L1 S L2 T L3 and terminals P 2 N and between terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 and terminal P 2 N in the x1Q range Visual inspection Acoustic inspection Visual inspection Measure the voltage between Inverter main circuit terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Short circuit or open the Inverter protection circuit output under simulated conditions between terminal R page 8 6 Criteria No faults Refer to Checking the Inverter and Converter on Inverter unit replacement reference Start stop 10 cycles No faults No faults No faults Phase to phase voltage balance 200 V class 4 V max
249. e parameter using the parameter using the parameter using the parameter using the Increment or Decrement Increment or Decrement Increment or Decrement Increment or Decrement key key e key key Data display Ki If the specified parameter does not exist the data display is s not shown and the blinking digit returns to the one at the far left x ZE Pressed simultaneously l ve d d B At LEE ee Eeer E E E aJa seis sis Faja A A A A The 10 s digit blinks so The 1 s digit blinks so The 0 1 s digit blinks so The 0 01 s digit blinks so increase decrease the increase decrease the increase decrease the increase decrease the parameter using the value using the Increment value using the Increment value using the Increment Increment or Decrement key or Decrement key or Decrement key or Decrement key Note 1 Pressing the Mode Key while the cursor blinking digit is at the far left moves the cursor to the far right Note 2 Pressing the Increment and Decrement keys together in the individual input mode restores the normal input mode Note 3 While the displayed data is blinking the change has not yet reflected even when the function group is F 3 5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 3 1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator p Operation Example When the Digital Operator is Connected to the Conventional Model Although operations can be performed by connecting the conventional Digital Operator model 3G
250. e s time s 0 8 7212 16 Al 0 7 0 96 12 8 A 109 150 200 87 2 120 160 Motor current A Motor current A 5 111 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Free Setting Desired electronic thermal characteristics reduction multiple characteristics can be set according to the load for the purpose of protecting the motor The setting range is shown below Parameter i Default Function name 8 Unit No setting Free electronic b015 Thermal 0 to Free electronic Thermal Frequency 2 Frequency 1 Free electronic b017 Thermal Frequency 2 Free electronic Thermal Frequency 1 to Hz Free electronic Thermal Frequency 3 b019 B Free electronic Thermal Frequency 2 to 400 1000 Frequency 3 Free electronic 0 0 to Rated current Thermal Current Set current values for each break point A 1 2 3 b016 b018 b020 EN Reference If the rated current value is set to b016 6018 and b020 the reduction multiple becomes x 1 0 P Reduction E multiple Output current x 1 0 l value A O x 0 8 I b020 b018 b016 0 b015 b017 b019 A004 A204 Inverter output frequency Hz Maximum frequency Hz Example 3 phase 200 V 1 5 kW CT rating 8 A b012 8 A b015 30 Hz b016 8 A Since the reduction multiple is 8 8 1 0 the trip characteristic at 30 Hz is 60 s at 12 A SYSDRIVE MX2 Series
251. e Operation A157 RW 0 to 255 0 1 s Delay Time 6 45 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Monitor and setting Data Register HE Parameter No No parameters resolution 12C3h to Reserved 12C5h A161 R W VR Start Frequency O to 40000 100000 A161 R W LOW A162 R W VR End Frequency O to 40000 100000 A162 R W LOW 12CAh VR Start Ratio A163 0 to VR End Ratio 1 12CBh VR End Ratio A164 VR Start Ratio to 100 1 12CCh VR Start Selection Ates Ninny HERE 01 0 Hz 12CDh to Not used Inaccessible 1300h 00 Trip 01 0 Hz restart 02 Frequency matching restart 1301h Retry Selection b001 R W 03 Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 04 Frequency pull in restart e EE b002 R W 3 to 250 0 1 s Power Interruption Time 5 96 1303h Restart Standby Time b003 R W 3 to 1000 0 1 s 5 100 5 103 Momentary Power 00 Disabled Interruption 01 Enabled SEH undervoltage Trip During een SES 02 Disabled during stop Stop Selection deceleration stop 0 D Q D 0 01 Hz 0 01 Hz 5 40 5 96 l 5 96 Restart During Momentary Power 00 16 times Sen Interruption Count SE Ee 01 Unlimited Selection feoen Reseved EENEG 1307h Frequency Matching SC R W 5 97 Lower Limit Frequency O to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz 5 100 5 103 Settin b007 1308h g Low R W 00 Trip 01 0 Hz restart 02 Frequency matching
252. e ee C047 R W 0001 to 9999 5 43 Coefficient 1434h to Reserved 1437h senile Comparison C052 RW 0 to 1000 0 1 Signal Off Level ee 1439h Feedback Comparison cogs 1 Ryw 0 to 1000 0 1 Signal On Level 143Ah Overtorque Undertorque C054 R W ue Overtorque Selection 01 Undertorque Overtorque Undertorque 9 152 143Bh Level Forward Power C055 R W 0 to 200 1 Running Overtorque Undertorque 143Ch Level Reverse C056 R W 0 to 200 1 Regeneration Overtorque Undertorque 143Dh Level Reverse power C057 R W 0 to 200 1 running Overtorque Undertorque 5 152 143Eh Level Forward C058 R W 0 to 200 1 Regeneration 00 During acceleration Overtorque Undertorque deceleration constant 143Fh Signal Output Mode C059 speed Selection 01 Only during constant speed ER E iaaah oe oe Therma co61 R W 0 to 100 11 5 113 Warning Level 1443h 0 Hz Detection Level C063 R W 0 to 10000 0 01 Hz 5 125 Cooling Fin Overheat 1444h C064 R W 0 to 110 1 C 5 129 Warning Level 1445h to Reserved 144Ah 6 59 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data ae Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name No parameters resolution 03 2 400 bps 04 4 800 bps 05 9 600 bps 06 19 2 kbps 07 08 09 0 57 6 kbps 76 8 kbps 144Bh Communication Speed C071 Selection 115 2 kbps 144Ch Communication S
253. e electronic Thermal Thermal Frequency 2 to 400 Hz Frequency 2 to 1 000 Hz Frequency 3 b054 Freq Drop to Start 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 0 00 to 100 00 Hz 0 00 Ctrl Decel b082 Starting Frequency 0 10 to 9 99 Hz 0 50 0 10 to 100 00 Hz 0 50 b083 Carrier Frequency 2 0 to 15 0 kHz 10 0 2 0 to 10 0 kHz 5 0 b112 Free V f Frequency Free V f Frequency 6 to 400 Free V f Frequency 6 to 0 HZ 1 000 Hz 07 C027 MP Selection 00 Output frequency 00 Output frequency Output current 01 Output current Output torque 03 Digital output frequency Digital output frequency 04 Output voltage Output voltage 05 Input power Input power 06 Electronic thermal load Electronic thermal load rate 07 LAD frequency 07 rate 07 LAD frequency 08 Digital current monitor 10 Cooling fin temperature 12 Do not use this setting 15 Pulse train input monitor 16 Optional board 08 Digital current monitor 10 Cooling fin temperature 12 Do not use this setting 15 Pulse train input monitor 16 Optional board d 5 181 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 14 Other Functions Parameter No C028 C042 C043 C045 C046 P015 P070 Setting range Normal Mode with a Heavy Load Function name Rating CT AM Selection 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque 04 Output voltage 05 Input power 06 Electronic thermal load rate 07 LAD freq
254. e em ee ee ee ee ee ee ei 7 1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Error Code List 7 1 Error Display and Remedial Actions code page Overcurrent If the motor is restrained or Constant E01 L Is there any rapid load protection rapidly accelerated or speed fluctuation decelerated a large current Eliminate load will flow through the Inverter fluctuations which will result in breakage Is there any output short circuit Accordingly the protection Check the output wiring circuit operates at Is there any ground fault approximately 200 of the Check the output Inverter rated output current wiring and motor eae During E02 0 Is there any rapid deceleration 5 24 deceleration Increase the 5 66 deceleration time Acceleration E03 U Is there any rapid acceleration Increase the acceleration time Has the motor been locked Check the motor and wiring Is the torque boost too high Lower the torque boost Others E04 0 Is the DC injection braking too high 5 135 gt Decrease the braking force Overload The Inverter output current is monitored E05 D Is the load too large protection and if a motor overload is detected by Decrease the load rate the built in electronic thermal a trip Is the thermal level correct 5 110 occurs Adjust the thermal level to an appropriate level Braking A trip will occur if the usage rate of E06 U Is there any rapid deceleration resistor
255. e function is allocated multi function input terminal and the terminal is turned 5 85 ON even though the control circuit terminal block mode is selected The Inverter has tripped Press the STOP RESET key to reset the 3 12 The ALARM LED trip identify and remove the cause of the 5 119 indicator is lit and Exxx trip based on the error code and then 7 1 to is shown restart the operation 7 6 The safety function If the safety function is used turn both the selector switch is turned safety inputs GS1 and GS2 ON If the ON and the multi function safety function is not used turn OFF the 5 170 input terminal S3 GS1 or selector switch S4 GS2 is turned OFF 18 RS Reset 14 CS Turn OFF the terminal to which the Commercial switch or applicable function is allocated g oe 5 79 11 FRS free run stop is 5 100 allocated to a multi SE 5 103 function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON 84 ROK Permission of Turn ON the terminal to which the RUN command is applicable function is allocated allocated to a multi 5 63 function input terminal and the terminal is turned OFF The wiring from the Check the wiring Inverter to the motor or ee l to wiring inside the motor is 214 The load is excessive Reduce the load The motor is locked Unlock the motor SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULILI Condition Remedial actions The motor rotation Contact failure of the speed does not a
256. e storage in EEPROM 0901h Not used Inaccessible 0 Write disabled 1 Write enabled EEPROM Write Mode coe Selection 0903h to Not used 1000h Inaccessible uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 34 Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 35 Inverter Fault Factor List Trip factor high order factor Name No trip factor Overcurrent protection during constant speed Overcurrent protection during deceleration Overcurrent protection during acceleration Overcurrent protection during stop Overload protection Braking resistor overload protection Overvoltage protection EEPROM error Undervoltage protection Current detector error CPU error External trip USP error Grounding protection Incoming overvoltage protection Abnormal temperature Main circuit error Driver error Thermistor error Brake error Emergency shutoff Overload protection in a low speed range Poor Digital Operator connection Modbus communication Modbus RTU error Internal data error Encoder disconnection Excess speed Position control range trip Trip factor low order Inverter status 0 Duringreset reset 0 Fach During deceleration 2 e At a constant speed 3 GE During acceleration 4 Operates at frequency 0 5 CH During startup 6 7 DB active DC injection braking 7 active O sf During overload limit 8 43 to 45
257. easure and check the temperature approx 5 cm from the bottom center of the Inverter body Provide sufficient space around the Inverter because it can become very hot up to 150 C or so Keep the Inverter away from heating elements such as a Braking Resistor reactor etc Although side by side installation is possible The ambient temperature of the installation site must not exceed 40 C and the carrier frequency and output current must be derated if side by side installation is used TAM AAA 100 mm or more Provide sufficient space so that the top and bottom wiring ducts etc will not obstruct the flows of cooling air Air flow gt SE ney ere mm or more MXM OQ zx ng 1a d Do not install the Inverter in hot humid sites or other sites subject to frequent bedewing Make sure that the humidity in the installation site is within the allowable operating range 20 to 90 RH as defined in the standard specifications SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 2 2 1 Installation In particular make sure that the installation site is free from condensation If condensed water adheres to the Inverter s internal parts the electronic components may short circui
258. ection 2 operation Overload Limit 2 Selection 03 Enabled during acceleration constant speed accelerated during regeneration Current value at which the overload Heavy limit actuates load Rated oer Heavy load b049 00 current x b022 b025 Overload Limit 1 Level 9 20 x Rated current to 2 0 x Rated 1 50 Overload Limit 1 Level 2 A b222 Overload Limit 2 Level current Light load Light load b049 01 Rated 0 20 x Rated current to 1 5 x Rated current x current 1 20 Overload Limit 1 Parameter 0 1 to 3000 EE ER Overload Limit 1 Parameter 2 Deceleration time at which the 1 0 S Overload 2 Limit Parameter overload limit actuates C001 to C007 Multi function Input 39 OLR Overload limit switching 7 Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 114 suoljoun 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Overload warning bevel ZS b022 b025 b222 Deceleration set by the Output current overload limit parameter Maximum frequency A004 A204 y S Target frequency F001 Inverter output frequency b023 b026 b223 _ Overload Warning If the applied load is large the Inverter can output an overload warning signal before an overload trip occurs This helps prevent mechanical damage due to an overload in the carrier machine or an operation line stop due to overload protection of the Inverter Allocate 03 OL Overload warning or 26 OL2
259. ection Limit Selection Limits motor rotation directions Enabled in either control circuit terminal block or Digital Operator control mode When a limited RUN command is input from the control circuit terminal block the Digital Operator displays i Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting 00 No direction limit No direction limit Rotation Direcion 01 hei Forward is enabled b035 We No Reverse Limit Selection 02 Only Reverse is enabled No Forward SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 2 Basic Functions Stop Selection It is possible to select deceleration stop or free run stop according to the set deceleration time when a stop command is issued If operation is resumed during free run operation the Inverter will restart according to the method set in Free run Stop Selection 6088 For details refer to Deceleration Stop at Power off Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss Function on page 5 106 Parameter Default f Function name Unit No setting 00 Deceleration stop b091 Stop Selection 01 Free run stop Acceleration Deceleration Time Set an acceleration deceleration time for the motor The set time indicates the acceleration deceleration time from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency When the LAD acceleration deceleration cancel LAC function is selected for a multi function input selection and the signal is turned ON the acceleration deceleration time chang
260. ed during RUN 1322p Motor Cable Length b033 RIW 5to zen Code Selection b034 1323h RUN Time Power ON HIGH Time Level bys 1325h Rotation Direction Limit b035 Selection 1326h Reduced Voltage Startup b036 Selection 1327h Display Selection 1328h Initial Screen Selection b038 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 0 to 65535 00 No direction limit 01 Only Forward is enabled Reverse is limited 02 Only Reverse is enabled Forward is limited 0 Reduced voltage startup time small to 255 Reduced voltage startup time large 00 Complete display 01 02 User setting b037 oe 03 Data comparison 04 Basic display 05 Monitor display only Individual display of functions display 00 Screen on which the Enter key was last pressed 001 to 060 d001 to d060 201 F001 202 Do not use this setting R W 200 to 2000 0 01 5 97 5 103 10 h 5 124 5 23 5 58 5 88 5 86 6 48 uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Register 2 Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page No No parameters resolution User Parameter SN 1329h Automatic Setting bosd RAVI ee 5 177 i 01 Enabled Function 00 Four quadrant separate setting 132Ah Torque Limit Selection b040 R W 01 Terminal switching 02 Analog voltage input 03 Optional board Torque Limit
261. ed on DC injection braking starts when both frequency reference and current frequency become lower than A052 Example 1 a When the reference frequency becomes 2 Hz higher than the A052 set value DC injection braking is released and the output returns to normal Example 1 a If the reference frequency is zero when the operation starts with analog input operation is started with DC injection breaking because both the reference and current frequencies are zero Example 1 b If the RUN command is turned on with the determined frequency reference a value larger than the A052 setting is input operation is started with normal output Example 1 a Example 1 b FW input FW input A052 A052 Frequency dino reference Output Output frequency frequency The operation to return to normal varies depending on the setting of DC Injection Braking Edge Level Selection A056 a Edge Operation A056 00 b Level Operation A056 01 FW input FW input A052 A052 Frequency Frequency reference E reference freque frequency EXX GE A0 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 140 suoljoun j Functions 5 10 Brake Settings Regenerative Braking Function During deceleration the motor functions as a generator and the generated energy is returned to the Inverter As a result the Inverter s DC voltage rises and if the overvoltage level is exceeded an overvoltage OV trip occurs
262. ed value of deviations As the current value becomes closer to the target value the deviation decreases and thus the effect of P operation is reduced and consequently the time needed to achieve the target value increases operation compensates for this condition e Target value 3 Small Small 1 S A073 Vv Manipulated value Large 3 D operation Operation where the maniplated value is proportional to the ratio of change in deviation Although use of PI operations alone require a response time D operation has the effect of compensating for the response Target value Large S x SCH A074 P NY Manipulated value Small SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operation Functions i PID scale When PID Scale A075 is set the following parameters undergo scale conversion Value after conversion Value before conversion x A075 g Feedback Selection Select a terminal used for the feedback signal in PID feedback selection A076 The target value depends on the terminal selected in frequency reference A001 other than that in A076 Also note that when A001 is set to 01 Control circuit terminal block the setting of FV FI Selection A005 is disabled To specify 02 Modbus communication Modbus RTU for PID Feedback Selection A076 transfer the data as follows Write the data in holding register address 0006h based on 100 representing 10 000 Register Parameter Monitor and
263. eferences 0 to 15 becomes possible when CF1 to CF4 02 to 05 are allocated to any four of Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 Use Multi step Speed References 1 to 15 A021 to A035 to set the frequencies for speed references 1 to 15 Multi step speed operation is given priority over Frequency Reference Selection A001 However the frequency reference 0 conforms to the setting of Frequency Reference Selection A001 Speed reference 11 Multi ste P CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1 Speed reference 10 speed Speed reference 12 Speed reference 9 Speed reference 13 Sieg OFF OFF OFF OFF _ peed reference 14 reference 0 Speed reference 4 Speed reference 15 SE Speed rence 5 _ Speed reference 0 peed OFF OFF OFF ON an Geht reference 1 ASpef rer Speed reference 1f LU The frequency Speed 2 soreness lt at speed reference reference 2 one Gol ER A EE 0 conforms to the l l k setting of A001 Speed ofr OFF ON ON reference 3 Se OFF ON OFF OFF reference 4 P OFF ON OFF ON reference 5 Speed OFF ON ON OFF reference 6 GES OFF ON ON ON reference 7 Speed ON OFF OFF OFF reference 8 Speed on OFF OFF ON reference 9 Speed on OFF ON OFF reference 10 speed on OFF ON ON reference 11 Speed on ON OFF OFF reference 12 Speed on on OFF ON reference 13 Speed on ON ON OFF reference 14 Speed on on ON
264. elay Time A053 is set the Inverter output is shut off during the set time period and the motor goes into free run status After the set time elapses DC injection braking starts Set the DC Injection Braking Time A055 via the Digital Operator or the DB terminal while taking into account motor heat generation Perform each setting according to your system after selecting the setting of DC Injection Braking Edge Level Selection A056 a Edge Operation A056 00 b Level Operation A056 01 Example 1 a Example 1 b FW input FW input DB input C DB input Ir Output Output frequency o frequency A055 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 136 suoljoun j Functions 5 10 Brake Settings 9 137 a Edge Operation A056 00 Example 2 a FW input DB input Output frequency lt A055 Example 3 a FW input DB input Output Free run frequency LE A053 A055 Gals Pana b Level Operation A056 01 Example 2 b FW input DB input C Output frequency Example 3 b FW input DB input Free run Output frequency A053 lt gt Note The output frequency becomes zero during free run and DB operation SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 10 Brake Settings g Internal DC Injection Braking A051 01 DC injection braking can be applied without terminal operation at start stop of the Inver
265. emperature is 10 C Feedback value gt Target value is satisfied and therefore the Inverter frequency drops under normal PID control Set A077 to 01 so that the Inverter increases the frequency value PID operation PID feedback i PID Variable Range Limit This function limits PID output within a variable range relative to the target value To use this function set PID Variable Range Limit A078 The output frequency is limited within a range of target value A078 with the maximum frequency defined as 100 With A078 set to 0 0 this function is disabled PID output PID output range PID target value Time s i PID Reverse Output If the PID operation result is a negative value under normal PID control the frequency reference given to the Inverter is limited by 0 Hz When PID Selection A071 is set to 02 Reverse output enabled a reverse output can be output to the Inverter even when the PID operation result is a negative value If A071 02 Reverse output enabled PID Variable Range Limit A078 explained above is disabled SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operation Functions i PID Gain Adjustment If a stable response cannot be obtained in PID function operation adjust each gain as follows according to the situation The feedback value changes slowly when the target value is changed Raise P Gain A072 The PID feedback value changes fast but isn
266. ence 5 x x ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Speed reference 6 x ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Speed reference 7 OFF Speed reference e The frequency at speed reference 0 conforms to nce 5 the setting of A001 Functions Speed reference 4 g Speed reference Af Speed reference 2f Speed reference 1f eed refe eene Zeenen EEN SFI SF2 SF3 SF4 SFS SF6 SF7 a When several terminals are simultaneously turned on priority is given to the terminal with the smallest number The x mark in the above table means that speed is selected regardless of ON OFF status 5 65 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operation Functions 2 step Acceleration Deceleration Function 2CH The acceleration deceleration time can be changed during acceleration deceleration Select an acceleration deceleration time switching method from the following 3 1 Switching using a multi function input terminal 2 Automatic switching at a desired frequency 3 Automatic switching together with forward reverse switching only To switch via a multi function input terminal allocate 09 2CH to any of C001 to C007 Parameter Function Default No name setting 1st 2nd 0 01 to 3600 10 00 A092 A292 Acceleration Example 1 2 l S Time 2 SH 1st 2nd 0 01 to 3600 10 00 A093 A293 Deceleration Example 1 2 l S Time 2 1195 90 00 Switched via 2CH terminal example 1 2 step 01 A094 A
267. ency 0 to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Setting Enabled when A001 03 Initial status Stop RUN Free run stop Jogging DC injection braking Restart Trips During UV Inverter Status A During stop During RUN During trip Inverter Status B Stop Deceleration Constant speed Acceleration Forward Reverse Forward to reverse Reverse to forward Forward run start 10 Reverse run start PID Feedback se RW O 0 to 10000 0 01 Fault Counter d080 O R 0 to 65530 1 time Fault Monitor 1 Faut Montor 1 Cause Reter to Inverter Fault Factor 8 List on page 6 35 Ge Monitor 1 Refer to Inverter Fault Factor 8 Inverter e 7 List on page 6 35 SE Monitor 1 SE HIGH O to 100000 0 01 Hz SE Monitor 1 SE LOW d081 aa Monitor 1 Output current value at the as 0 01 A aa time of tripping STT Monitor 1 DC input voltage at the time of a 0 1 V STT tripping Time it S Monitor 1 RUN Time Time it S Total RUN time at the time of 1 Ih Fault Monitor 1 RUN tripping Time LOW SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Inverter Status C O PO Ol ae UN ee ee oe a SS Greng Parameter Monitor and setting Function name No parameters resolution 001Ah 001Bh 001Ch 001Dh 001Eh 001Fh 0020h 0021h 0022h 0023h 0024h 0025h 0026h 0027h 0028h 0029h 002Ah 002Bh 002Ch 002Dh 002Eh
268. ency Command Source FREF This signal is output when Frequency Reference is set to Digital Operator A001 02 The signal is turned OFF when Frequency Reference is not set to Digital Operator Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting Multi function C021 to C022 Output Terminal Selection 58 FREF Frequency command E Multi function source C026 Relay Output Function Selection RUN Command Source REF This signal is output when RUN Command is set to Digital Operator A002 02 The signal is turned OFF when RUN Command is not set to Digital Operator Parameter S Default 8 Function name i Unit No setting C021 to Co22 Multi function Output Terminal Selection Multi function 99 REF RUN command source E C026 Relay Output Function Selection 5 133 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Functions 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Motor 2 Selection SETM This signal is output when the multi functional input SET terminal is turned ON and Motor 2 control Motor 2 is selected Parameter s Default g Function name i Unit No setting Multi function C021 to C022 Output Terminal Selection 60 SETM Motor 2 selection Multi function C026 Relay Output Function Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 134 suoljoun 5 10 Brake Settings 5 10 Brake Settings The following explains the functions relat
269. equency reference A145 ae eden Frequency reference A145 7 Sign Selection C001 to C007 Multi function 50 ADD Frequency addition Input Selection Note 1 If the sign of the frequency reference is changed as a result of operation the rotation direction will be reversed Note 2 When the PID function is used this function is also enabled for a PID target value Note that A145 is displayed in in increments of 0 01 Remote Operation Function UP DWN This function changes the Inverter output frequency using UP and DWN terminals of the multi function input terminal Allocate 27 UP and 28 DWN to Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 While the UP DWN terminal is turned ON the acceleration deceleration time conforms to F002 FO03 F202 and F203 Switch between Controls 1 and 2 using the SET terminal which is a multi function input terminal to which 08 SET is allocated Also note that if 01 Store frequency data is selected for C101 the set frequency value after UP DWN adjustment can be stored when the power is shut off setting Function name No Soen UP DWN Storage 90 Do not store frequency data E Selection 01 Store frequency data 00 0 Hz UP DWN Clear Terminal Mode 01 EEPROM data at power on sa value stored in the EEPROM 27 UP UP DWN function accelerated Multi function Input 28 DWN UP DWN function Selection decelerated 29 UDC UP DWN function da
270. er Overrun Framing CRC 16 Horizontal parity 500 m Note Selected set by a parameter Selected set by a parameter Selected set by a parameter Selected set by a parameter Selected set by a parameter SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 2 RS 485 Port Specifications and Connection 6 2 RS 485 Port Specifications and Connection Ee Each communication connector pin is shown below The USB port is O designed exclusively for ij communication with a QIRON RYSDRIVE RUN PYR zaw D f PC The RS 422 RJ45 io modular connector port aun AX S is designed exclusively Ollila for communication with ees the Digital Operator hess fesses se st se scra mg cries IDN Modbus RTU Terminal Resistor selector switch P Se RS 485 terminal US rhe OO Es External equipment master Sb L Yu Y yu yi 3G3MX2 No 2 3G3MX2 No 3 3G3MX2 No n
271. eran i Page setting g Frequenc ee A061 Ge Frequency Lower Limit 1 to Hz Upper Limit 1 l Maximum Frequency 1 Frequenc uae A261 er Frequency Lower Limit 2 to Hz Upper Limit 2 Maximum Frequency 2 5 60 Frequenc one A062 oe Starting Frequency to Hz Lower Limit 1 SR Frequency Upper Limit 1 Frequenc Ge A262 P Starting Frequency to no yes Hz Lower Limit 2 E Frequency Upper Limit 2 Jump 0 00 to 99 99 5 063 Frequency 3 100 0 to 400 0 1000 nei no e Jump A064 Frequency 0 00 to 10 00 100 0 l Hz Width 1 Jump 0 00 to 99 99 Jump 5 61 A066 Frequency 0 00 to 10 00 100 0 i Hz Width 2 Jump 0 00 to 99 99 Jump A068 Frequency 0 00 to 10 00 100 0 Hz Width 3 A069 Acceleration 0 00 to 99 99 ae se se Stop Frequency 100 0 to 400 0 1000 y DE Acceleration Others gt SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 10 ett JoJOWeIe 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Monitor or data range EE um Page 00 Disabled A071 PID Selection 01 Enabled 02 Reverse output enabled A072 PID P Gain 0 00 to 25 00 ms 0 0 to 999 9 0 00 to 99 99 A075 PID Scale 0 01 to 99 99 0 a ta 00 FI current S 01 a voltage 5 73 Q PID Feedback 02 Modbus communication H Selection Modbus RTU 03 Pulse train frequency 10 Operation function output A077 PID Deviation 00 Disabled 4 Reverse Output 01 Enabled ao78 EIP Variable 0 0 to 100 0 Range Limit PID 00 Disabled dy A079
272. eration Function Binary Jogging Operation External DC Injection Braking Motor 2 Control Function 2 step Acceleration deceleration E D O Free run Stop External Trip Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function Commercial Switching Analog Input Thermistor Trip Function 5 3 Input Output Terminals Ea STA 3 wire start STP 3 wire stop 3 wire Input Function 5 56 22 F R 3 wire forward reverse ER PID PID disabled PID Function 5 73 ee PIDC PID integral reset UP UP DWN function 2 accelerated DWN UP DWN function Remote Operation Function 5 71 decelerated EF UDC UP DWN function data clear cs OPE Forced operator Forced Digital Operator Function 5 85 GEI Multi step speed bit 1 33 SF2 Multi step speed bit 2 ER SF3 Multi step speed bit 3 Multi step Speed Operation i E SF4 Multi step speed bit 4 Function Bit 5 65 SF5 Multi step speed bit 5 37 SF6 Multi step speed bit 6 SF7 Multi step speed bit 7 OLR Overload limit switching Overload Limit Overload 5114 Warning 20 TL TL Torque limit enabled disabled limit enabled disabled 28 C001 to C007 E Nies Torque limit switching 1 Torque Limit Function 5 153 TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 EA BOK Brake confirmation Brake Brake Control Function Function 5 142 LAC LAD cancel a Function PCLR Position deviation clear Simple Position Control Function 5 158 ADD Frequency addition Frequency Addition
273. erminal Block Function F TM on page 5 85 Switching between the Digital Operator and Other Analog Input Communication etc When the forced Digital Operator function 31 OPE is allocated to a multi function input and the input is turned ON the command and reference from a Digital Operator become effective regardless of the setting of A001 Take note that not only the frequency reference but also the RUN command conforms to the Digital Operator Communication etc Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting l 31 OPE Forced operator OAU Ee ON Digital Operator 5 Ka Input Selection p OFF According to A001 Switching between Analog Input and Other Digital Operator Communication etc When the Forced terminal block 51 F TM is allocated to a multi function input and the input is turned ON the command and reference from the control circuit terminal block analog input become effective regardless the setting of A001 Take note that not only the frequency reference but also the RUN command conforms to the control circuit terminal block In the terminal block mode the analog current voltage selection conforms to A005 and the FV FI terminal status When the Volume VR mode is selected A005 02 03 and the FV FI terminal turned ON however the input command reference effective when the FV FI terminal is OFF are used
274. erter Supporting Wide ranging Applications i Powerful Torque Ideal for a Variety of Applications High starting torque With the sensorless vector control and auto tuning functions this Unit ensures high starting torque of 200 at 0 5 Hz Note The frame may have to be raised depending on the condition Overload limit Overcurrent Suppression function 1 The Inverter monitors the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation in order to lower output frequency automatically 2 This function suppresses significant change in current caused by rapid acceleration etc Acceleration will be suppressed temporarily if the output current reaches approx 180 of the rated current during acceleration i Various Applications Safety Function Conforming to stop category 0 under IEC60204 1 and the 15013849 1 2006 PLd standard certification pending Simple Position Control Function 1 Comes standard with the pulse input functions 2 Supporting simple positioning to a maximum of 8 points by setting the position command speed reference and acceleration deceleration time to parameters Comes Standard with RS 485 Modbus RTU 1 Comes standard with the Modbus RTU communication function to communicate with and also read write various parameters from to the host equipment Broadcasting from the host equipment is also supported 2 Transfer Speed Supporting speeds up to 115 2 kbps 3 Co inverter communication is also s
275. es 240 or 480 Volts Maximum Install device in pollution degree 2 environment Maximum surrounding air temperature rating of 50 C Solid State motor overload protection reacts with max 150 of FLA Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electric Code and any additional local codes Fuse Size The Inverter shall be connected with a UL Listed Cartridge Nonrenewable fuse rated 600Vac with the current ratings as shown in the table below Model No Rating 3G3MX2 AB001 3G3MX2 AB002 3G3MX2 AB004 Class J 10 A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 AB007 15A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 AB015 20A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 AB022 30A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 A2002 3G3MX2 A2004 10 A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A2007 3G3MX2 A2015 15A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A2022 20A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A2037 3G3MX2 A2055 30A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A2075 40A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A2110 60A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A2150 80A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A4004 3G3MX2 A4007 3G3MX2 A4015 3G3MX2 A4022 10 A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A4030 3G3MX2 A4040 3G3MX2 A4055 15A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A4075 20A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A4110 30A AIC 200 kA 3G3MX2 A4150 40A AIC 200 kA SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACILILID Appendix 14 Appendix 4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL cUL Standards Terminal Symbols and Screw Size Required Torque Nem AWG10 5 3mm2 Model No W
276. es to the minimum acceleration deceleration time 0 01 s and the output frequency instantaneously follows the set frequency You can also divide the acceleration deceleration in two steps For details refer to 2 step Acceleration Deceleration Function 2CH on page 5 66 Parameter e Default a Function name Unit No setting i 0 01 to 3600 F002 F202 b Setting Set the acceleration time from O to the A maximum frequency 00 i 0 01 to 3600 Deceleration Time l 10 00 F003 F203 Setting 1 2 Set the deceleration time from the 30 00 maximum frequency to 0 P031 Acceleration Deceleration 00 Digital Operator Time Input Type 03 Do not set C001 to C007 Multi function Input 46 LAC LAD cancel Selection Related functions A004 A204 P031 C001 to C007 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 24 suoljoun 5 2 Basic Functions Take note that as shown in the figure the actual acceleration deceleration time becomes shorter than the set acceleration deceleration time depending on the set values of maximum frequency output frequency and starting frequency Output frequency EEN le o T VW ee dn er cp EE EE S Frequency Output Frequency d A004 A204 When the LAC input is turned ON Setting F001 the acceleration deceleration time becomes 0 01 s Output Starting frequency Frequency b082 oi dE D FWinput_ Real Wei er i l acce
277. escription Offline Auto Tuning The motor parameters required in sensorless vector control are automatically measured in a dedicated operation pattern different from that of normal operation to increase the accuracy of vector control Motor does not rotate The motor parameters are measured without rotating the motor Use this setting if motor rotation must be prevented Since the motor does not rotate motor parameter lo no load current and motor parameter J moment of inertia cannot be measured The previously set values are held for motor parameter lo and motor parameter J Motor rotates The motor parameters are measured by actually rotating the motor Use this setting if motor rotation does not cause problems Related functions b046 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 146 suoljoun Functions 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control When vector control is performed using a motor whose motor parameters are unknown perform offline auto tuning to measure the motor parameters The motor parameters correspond to data on one phase of Y connection at 50 Hz Adjust the settings of Base Frequency A003 A203 and Motor Incoming Voltage Selection A082 A282 to the specifications of the motor to be measured If the applicable motor voltage is not available among the options for Motor Incoming Voltage Selection set the output voltage gain so that Motor Incoming Voltage A082 A282 x Output Voltage Gain A045 A24
278. esponse is returned whose slave address and Parameter No are the same as the query and to which data has been added Refer to the format for each query specified below SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 6 Communication Function 6 4 Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Protocol Abnormal Response Response Slave address Parameter No Exceptional code Error check CRC 16 If an error aside from a communication error is found in the query content the Inverter returns exceptional responses without performing any operation To determine the cause of an error check the Parameter No of the response The Parameter No of the exceptional response will be the value of the query Parameter No to which 80h is added Check the details of the error with the exceptional code Exceptional code Code O1h 02h O3h 21h 22h 23h Description Specified an unsupported function Specified address does not exist Specified data has an unacceptable format Data is out of the Inverter s range for writing but for the holding register The Inverter does not allow this function Has attempted to change the register that cannot be changed during operation Has issued the enter command during operation UV Has written into the register during trip UV Has written into a soft locked register Has attempted to change an I O terminal that cannot be changed Has attempted to change the contac
279. essive deviation 05 AL Alarm output 06 FA3 Set frequency only 07 OTQ Overtorque Undertorque 09 UV Signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ During torque limit 11 RNT RUN time over Multi function Output 12 ONT Power on time over 1415h Terminal P1 EDM C021 THM Thermal warning BRK Brake release SEELEN BER Brake error ZS OHz 22 DSE Excessive speed deviation 23 POK Position ready 24 FA4 Set frequency min reached 2 25 FA5 Set frequency only 2 26 OL2 Overload warning 2 27 FVdc Analog FV disconnection detection 28 Fldc Analog FI disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output 32 NDc Communication disconnection detection 33 LOG1 Logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 Logic operation output 2 35 LOG3 Logic operation output 3 39 WAC Capacitor life warning 40 WAF Cooling fan life warning signal 41 FR Starting contact signal 42 OHF Fin overheat warning 43 LOC Low current signal 44 Reserved C022 R W 45 Reserved 46 Reserved 50 IRDY Operation ready 51 FWR During forward operation 52 RVR During reverse operation 53 MJA Fatal fault signal 54 WCFV Window comparator FV 55 WCFI Window comparator FI 58 FREF Frequency command source 59 REF RUN command source 60 SETM Motor 2 selection 62 EDM Safety device monitor 63 OPO Optional board no NO Not assigned 9 32 1416h Multi function Output Terminal P2 Selection
280. etting Frequency Pull pus E in Restart 0 1 to 999 9 5 100 O 1000 to 3000 5 103 g Parameter D Starting O Frequency at Frequency at interruption b030 Frequency Pull Maximum frequency in Restart Set frequency 4 Selection Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON ve Data other than b031 and Ku set frequency cannot be changed when terminal x Soft Lock SFT is ON ZS 5037 Selection Data other than b031 en cannot be changed 03 Data other than b031 and set frequency cannot be Ce changed 10 Data can be changed during RUN Motor Cable b033 Length Code 5 145 Selection 0 to 9999 0 to 99990 o A 1000 to 6553 100000 to 5 124 E 655350 O 00 No direction limit Rotation 01 Only Forward is enabled b035 Direction Limit Reverse is limited no 5 23 Selection 02 Only Reverse is enabled Forward is limited 4 19 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Parameter No Reduced b036 Voltage Startup Selection Display Ser Selection b038 Initial Screen Selection User Parameter Automatic SE Setting Function b040 Torque Limit Selection Torque Limit 1 Four quadrant b041 Mode Forward Power Running Torque Limit 2 Four quadrant diii Mode Reverse Regeneration Torque Limit 3 Four quadrant b043 Mode Reverse Power Running Torque Limit 4 Four quadrant ee Mode Forward Regeneration Torque b045 LADSTOP Selection Reverse b046 R
281. eturn startup signal uoi puny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ SPD Speed position switching GS1 GS1 input C003 only GS2 GS2 input C004 only 485 Start co inverter communication Reserved HLD Retain output frequency 84 ROK Permission of RUN command 85 EB Rotation direction detection C007 only 86 DISP Display fixed no NO Not assigned 6 54 Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 55 Register No 1408h to 140Ah 140Bh 140Ch 140Dh 140Eh 140Fh 1410h 1411h 1412h to 1414h 8 Parameter Function name No ene La bk Monitor and setting parameters Data resolution Multi function Input Terminal 1 Operation Selection mm H le a Multi function Input Terminal 2 Operation Selection Multi function Input Terminal 3 Operation Selection Multi function Input Terminal 4 Operation Selection Multi function Input Terminal 5 Operation Selection C015 C016 C017 Multi function Input Terminal 6 Operation Selection Multi function Input Terminal 7 Operation Selection Reserved Page 5 31 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data ae Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name No parameters resolution e RUN During RUN FA1 Constant speed reached FA2 Set frequency min SE 03 OL Overload warning 04 OD PID exc
282. ext master switching command after an elapse of the silent interval Communication Wait Time C078 If the data sent from the Master Inverter could not be received within the Communication Error Timeout SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 22 uoljOUNy UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 7 Co Inverter Communication 6 23 Time C077 a communication timeout occurs At this time the action to be performed conforms to the Operation Selection on Communication Error C076 A Be sure to set the communication timeout for the Management Inverter so that this setting is enabled C077 0 01 to 99 99 When this setting is disabled C077 0 Co inverter communication will stop if the data sent from the Master Inverter cannot be received In this case reconnect the Management Inverter or perform a reset by turning the RS terminal ON and then turning if OFF Default Setting Function name Neue setting destination Parameter No cns Communication Station 1 to 247 8 i aa No Selection Operation Selection on Communication Error co76 4 C077 Communications Error Timeout Time 03 Free run stop 04 Deceleration stop 0 00 Timeout disabled S ALL 0 01 to 99 99 00 Trip 01 Trip after deceleration stop 02 Ignore 02 ALL C078 Communication Wait O to 1000 E ALL Time C096 2 C098 2 C099 2 C100 P140 P141 P142 P143 Communication Selection Co inverter Commun
283. flected to the Output Frequency Setting F001 Pressing the Enter key stores the setting in the EEPROM Since F001 is rewritten while d001 is still displayed there may be a time gap between the key operation and display change depending on the acceleration deceleration time Functions While the PID function is activated or being stopped the output frequency cannot be changed The frequency cannot be changed in the individual input mode by pressing the Increment Decrement keys simultaneously Output Current Monitor d002 Displays the output current value of the Inverter During stop 0 0 is displayed The monitor LED indicator A is lit while the d002 setting is displayed Parameter Default 8 Function name i Unit No setting 0 0 to 655 3 The minimum unit varies depending on A the capacity Output Current Monitor d002 5 1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULILI 5 1 Monitor Mode Rotation Direction Monitor d003 Displays the rotation direction of the Inverter The RUN LED indicator is lit during forward reverse rotation Parameter Default Function name 5 Unit No setting SS Rotation Direction Monitor a po Stop d003 r Reverse In general the forward direction of the motor is the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the axial direction FO Forward PID Feedback Value Monitor d004 When 01 Enabled or 02 Reverse output enabled is selec
284. frequency If Frequency Change is enabled b163 01 during monitoring the frequency can be changed by pressing the Up Down keys on the d001 or d007 monitor display 5 21 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACICILIZ 5 2 Basic Functions RUN Command Selection Select the method for using the RUN STOP command To issue a RUN command from the Control Circuit Terminal Block AQ002 A202 01 allocate the FW and RV terminals or STA STP and F R terminals 3 wire input to multi function input terminals To switch the NO NC contact logic of each terminal set the corresponding terminal using C011 to C017 Parameter Default Function name S Unit No setting 01 Run stop from the control circuit terminal block RUN Command 02 Run stop from the Digital Operator A002 Selection 1 or Remote Operator 02 a A202 RUN Command Selection 2 03 Run stop via Modbus communication Modbus RTU 04 Run stop from optional board 00 FW Forward 01 RV Reverse C001 to coo7 Multifunction 5 era 3 wire start Input Selection 3 wi 21 STP 3 wire stop 22 F R 3 wire forward reverse Note If the Forced operator 31 OPE or Forced terminal block 51 F TM is allocated to a multi function input turning ON the terminal disables the settings of A001 and A002 and the frequency reference RUN command source specified by each terminal becomes effective The table below lists the forward reverse stop methods corresponding to differe
285. g analog current voltage switching based on frequency reference specification via analog input A001 A201 01 and the Digital Operator with volume 3G3AX OP01 allocate the FV FI terminal 16 FV FI to a multi function input The detailed setting method is explained below A005 FV FI Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 16 suoljoun 5 2 Basic Functions i Specified by the Digital Operator Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting A001 Frequency Reference 02 Specified by the Digital Operator 02 8 Selection 1 Set by F001 i Switching between Analog Voltage and Analog Current via the FV Fl Terminal V Pao pA No setting Frequency A001 Reference 01 Control circuit terminal block 02 Selection 1 A005 FV FI Selection 00 Switch between voltage current D 16 FV FI Analog input switch SE leen ON Current S OFF Voltage i Switching between Analog Voltage and Volume via the FV FI Terminal vV k Balo OOOO No setting Frequency A001 Reference Selection 1 A005 FV FI Selection 02 Switch SEKR FV voltage Volume 16 FV FI Analog input switch ON Volume Functions Input Selection 01 Control circuit terminal block 02 C001 to C007 Multi function Input Selection OFF Voltage 1 Volume Volume on the external Digital Operator 3G3AX OP01 5 17
286. g these parameters based on the Inverter s output voltage and current as well as the motor parameter settings High starting torque can be generated to enable high accuracy operation even in a low frequency range 0 5 Hz When this function is used set Control Method A044 A244 to 03 Sensorless vector control When this function is used make sure to refer to Motor Parameter Selection on page 5 145 and that the settings are optimum for the motor used Parameter Default Function name 2 Unit No setting A044 A244 Ee een 03 Sensorless vector control SLV EN Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than the maximum applicable motor The speed may increase at low frequencies several hertz When the Inverter incoming voltage is higher than the rated voltage of the drive motor current may increase and normal operation may not be performed if 01 Always OFF or 02 OFF during deceleration is selected for AVR Selection A081 A281 In this case change AVR Selection to 00 Always ON SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 144 suoljoun Functions 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control Motor Parameter Selection 9 145 When sensorless vector control is performed set the motor parameters according to the motor used If multiple motors are used with one Inverter using constant torque characteristics VC reduced torque characteristics
287. gital Soe volume Enabled only when the 3G3AX OP01 is connected eee 02 FV voltage input Operation Frequency 03 FI current input Selection 2 A141 A142 02 03 04 Modbus communication Modbus RTU 07 Pulse train 07 Pulse train frequency 00 Addition eg A142 A143 Operation Function I 94 Subtraction 01 Subtraction A141 A142 Operator Selection Keeser 02 Multiplication A141 x A142 A141 x A142 Frequency Reference 10 Lenin i A function output A001 Selection A076 PID Feedback Selection 10 Operation function output Note 1 The remote operation function cannot be used when this function is enabled Also frequency cannot be changed through key operations of Output Frequency Monitor d001 Output Frequency Monitor After Conversion d007 or Output Frequency Setting F001 Note 2 The same setting is available in A141 A142 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 70 suoljoun Functions 5 6 Operation Functions Frequency Addition Function The value set in Frequency Addition Amount Setting A145 can be added to or subtracted from the selected frequency reference value To use this function allocate 50 ADD to any of the multi function inputs A145 is added or subtracted with the ADD terminal is turned on ee Default Function name Unit setting Frequency 0 00 to 400 0 1000 A145 Addition Amount Hz Setting Frequency 00 Fr
288. gnal 41 FR Starting contact signal 42 OHF Fin overheat warning 43 LOC Low current signal 44 Reserved 45 Reserved 46 Reserved 50 IRDY Operation ready 51 FWR During forward operation 52 RVR During reverse operation 53 MJA Fatal fault signal 54 WCFV Window comparator FV 55 WCFI Window comparator FI 58 FREF Frequency command source 59 REF RUN command source 60 SETM Motor 2 selection 62 EDM Safety device monitor 63 OPO Optional board no NO Not assigned 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque heavy load only 03 Digital output frequency 04 Output voltage 05 Input power 9 32 06 Electronic thermal load rate 07 LAD frequency 08 Digital current monitor 10 Cooling fin temperature 12 Do not set 15 Pulse train input monitor 16 Optional board 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data ae Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name No parameters resolution 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 02 Output torque heavy load only 04 Output voltage 05 Input power 06 Electronic thermal load rate 5 44 07 LAD frequency 10 Cooling fin temperature 11 Output torque signed heavy load only 13 Do not set 16 a board 141Ch AM Selection C028 141Dh Reserved Digital Current Monitor Reference Value C030 2000 to 20000 0 01 5 43 NO NO contact SES S NC NC contact
289. hase 200 V 0 75 kW models and 3 phase 400 V 0 4 kW 0 75 kW models do not come with a cooling fan SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts 3 phase 200 V 3 7 kW 3 phase 400V 4 0 kW Ki d Ga G d N V d y j Un ch ULUN UIQ E ION NI N d Omm Al M9IAIBAQ 3 phase 200 V 5 5 7 5 kW 3 phase 400 V 5 5 7 5 kW SQ J O WNW Rea MUI Wy GF KEEN D o D 55 O O SE o bai 83 D o OD E CC O g ESS o 20 LO Om Got SI 5 ee C C cw A BG 5 OD DO EEGs GK O OO D OO OO Sees SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts 3 phase 200 V 11 kW 3 phase 400 V 11 15 kW CG WMG Overview 3 phase 200 V 15 kW UM iN 5 Terminal block cover 6 Optional board cover 7 Backing plate Cooling fan Cooling fin Main housing 1 Cooling fan cover 2 3 4 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Design Pp Describes the name and function of each part installation method wiring method 2 etc 2T Jet 2 1 Precautions for Safe WSC EEN 2 1 Krecoaptteons TorCorrectileg t sst ege EAR EE RE dE 2 2 Installation Environment 2 2 BACKING EE 2
290. he RUN command is turned ON during DC injection braking the period set in A055 is ignored and the Inverter returns to normal operation Examples 2 a 3 b a Edge Operation A056 00 Example 1 a When starting eS FW input Output frequency A057 lt A058 gt Example 2 a When stopping LI FW input Output frequency Free run A052 a A055 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL b Level Operation A056 01 Example 1 b When starting GE ee Output frequency A057 A058 7 Example 2 b When stopping FW input Output frequency Free run A053 A055 A052 lt lt 9 138 suoljoun j 5 10 Brake Settings a Edge Operation A056 00 b Level Operation A056 01 Example 3 a When stopping Example 3 b When stopping FW input FW input Output frequency i 2 Output frequency A055 A055 _ A052 S A052 S Note The output frequency becomes zero during free run and DB operation Functions 5 139 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 10 Brake Settings g Internal DC Injection Braking Operation Only Based on Set Frequency A051 02 DC injection braking can be applied when the output frequency becomes lower than the setting of Internal DC Injection Braking Frequency A052 Neither external nor internal DC injection braking is available while this function is selected Operates only when the RUN command is turn
291. he Remote Operator is connected the keys on the main unit become disabled In this case use b150 to set the item to be displayed uoljeiado D 3 1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator Key Operation System The following describes the key operation system of the Digital Operator When parameter is displayed Function group d i MOVED Gaie pay Because the function group d is Parameter display Data display a monitor mode data cannot be changed d001 Output Frequency Monitor i When parameter is displayed lt Increases decreases parameters by Increment Decrement keys Pressing the Increment key at the end returns to the SC beginning of the same function group When parameter is displayed Move to the next function group l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l ms em em em em em em em em em em em em em em em em em em em Function group F Parameter display Data display F001 Output Frequency Setting When data is displayed F001 to F 03 Since changed are reflected the moment they are changed the display does not blink when any of these parameters is changed ee eee eee a Store the value in the EEPROM and return to the parameter display Return to the parameter display without storing the value in the EEPROM Parameter display Data display 2 Operation HE
292. he momentary power interruption is within the set time example 1 S Trips if the momentary power interruption is beyond the set time example 2 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 96 suoljoun Functions 5 8 Restart Functions 5 97 Parameter Function name Description nerau Unit No setting Frequency If the frequency drops to b007 or l 0 00 to l Matching Lower below while the motor is running b007 Ne 400 0 Hz Limit Frequency 1000 freely the Inverter restarts at 0 Setting l Hz examples 3 4 Overvoltage b008 OYEC Frequency matching restart 8 Restart Selection 03 Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop Frequency pull in restart Overvoltage Number of retries for restart upon 5 b010 Overcurrent 1to3 overvoltage overcurrent 3 Time Restart Count Selection Overvoltage Overcurrent ae b011 Restart Standby 0 3 to 100 Wait time until restart 1 0 S Time 0 20 x Rated na Inverter b028 Frequency Pull in current to Current limit level at frequency aiad A Restart Level 2 00 x Rated pull in restart current current S b029 Frequency Pull in 0 1 to 3000 Frequency reduction time at Restart Parameter frequency pull in restart Starting 0 Frequency at interruption b030 Frequency at Maximum frequency Frequency Pull in Restart Selection Set frequency Multi function Output Terminal C021 to Selection or l C022 C026 Multi function UV Signal during undervoltag
293. he option The optional board is partly disconnected SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Increase the power supply capacity Extend as much as possible the wiring distance from the TV or radio to the Inverter Refer to the manual for the optional board If the problem cannot be fixed in the optional board the Inverter may have failed The mating of the option connector may be bad Check of dirty contacts and other possible causes If the problem cannot be solved replace the Inverter Check for bad option connector mating dirty terminal contacts etc Check to see if the terminal block cover on the Inverter and the cover on the optional board are mated properly and the screws are properly tightened Reference Page 6 3 9 22 9 15 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 2 5 51 2 17 5 135 5 135 7 16 suoi el do vueu zuIeN x Inspection and Maintenance Po Describes the daily inspection and periodic inspection 8 1 Inspection and Maintenance TE 8 1 BR AltEeere TEE 8 2 CNG AMIN EE 8 2 Steel Lego Ee ee EE 8 2 Daily Inspection and Periodic Inspection cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 3 Megger OSE EE 8 6 Withstand Voltage TOSE EE 8 6 Checking the Inverter and Converter 8 6 Measurement Methods of I O Voltage Current and Electric Power8 8 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 8 1 Inspection and Maintenance 8 1 Inspection and Maintenance A N WAR
294. hen start the Management Inverter at the end Do not set O8FFh EEPROM write or 0901h EEPROM write mode selection in the recipient register If any one of C096 to C100 is changed the change will not be reflected until the power is reconnected or a reset is performed by turning the RS terminal ON and then turning it OFF SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 26 uoljOUNy UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data R W in the list shows whether the coil or holding register accepts reading and or writing R Read only R W Can be read and or written i Coil Number List 1 RUN 0001h RUN Command R W 0 Stop Enabled when A002 A202 03 1 Reverse 0002h Rotation Direction Command R W 0 Forward Enabled when A002 A202 03 0003h External Trip EXT 1 Trips 0004h Trip Reset RS R W 1 Reset 0005h Reserved 0006h 1 ON 0007h Multi function Input 1 0 OFF 0008h Multi function Input 2 R W CON j 0 OFF 0009h Multi function Input 3 R W aes d 0 OFF 000Ah Multi function Input 4 R W ue p 0 OFF 000Bh Multi function Input 5 Rw EON P 0 OFF 000Ch Multi function Input 6 R W as d 0 OFF 000Dh Multi function Input 7 R W CoN P 0 OFF 1 RUN GE GE e 0 Stop Interlocked with d003 1 Reverse EE EEN e 0 Forward Interlocked with d003 1 Ready 0011h Inver
295. her than F001 is rewritten while the data is displayed the displayed data does not change in real time Return to the parameter display and show the data gain and the value reflecting the change will be displayed Refer to Exceptional Response on page 6 18 if the writing into the holding register cannot be performed normally SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 12 uoljOUNy UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No Loop back Test 08h Used to check the communications between master and slave A random value can be used for test data Example Loopback test to the Inverter whose slave address is 1 Query Hex 3 Test sub code MSB 00 4 Test sub code LSB 00 5 Data MSB Random 6 Data LSB Random 7 CRC 16 MSB CRC 8 CRC 16 LSB CRC Response Hex 8 CRC 16 LSB CRC 1 Broadcasting cannot be performed As for test sub code only those relating to echo back of query data 00h OOh are supported Other commands are not supported 6 13 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No Writing Into Multiple Coils OFh Rewrites consecutive multiple coils Example Change the statuses of multi function input terminals S1 to S7 EB of the Inverter with the slave address 1 Change multi function input terminals S1 to S7 EB to the statuses shown in the table below Function name Data Coil No
296. hile keeping the main circuit DC voltage at the value set in Deceleration Hold Level of Ctrl Decel b052 This function will be started when the following conditions are all satisfied b050 02 or 03 The Inverter is operating This function is disabled during trip undervoltage stop The control power supply is momentarily interrupted or the main circuit DC voltage falls below the setting of DC Bus Voltage Trigger Level of Ctrl Decel b051 If the time of momentary power interruption is short the Inverter can continue to run without shutting off the output However if undervoltage occurs because of momentary power interruption the Inverter immediately shuts off the output and stops operating this function The subsequent power recovery depends on the Retry Selection b001 With b050 03 the Inverter can be restored to normal operation if a momentary power interruption occurs and incoming voltage recovers before the output is shut off Note that the Inverter may decelerate to a stop depending on the b051 setting Below are the details b052 gt Main Circuit DC Voltage at Deceleration stop DC voltage constant 02 without Incoming voltage recovery control example 1 recovery b052 lt Main circuit DC voltage at Deceleration stop normal operation incoming voltage recovery example 2 b052 gt Main circuit DC voltage at Deceleration stop DC voltage constant incoming voltage recovery control example 1 03 with recovery
297. iately reflected SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 6 24 uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 7 Co Inverter Communication A Set 01 C072 01 as the station number of the Management Inverter A If the Communication Error Selection of the Management Inverter is set to other than Ignore C076 02 Co inverter communication will stop once the management Inverter experiences a communication timeout In this case reconnect or perform a reset by turning the RS terminal ON and then turning if OFF 5 If input terminal start is selected for the Co inverter Communication Start Selection C100 00 allocate 81 to one of multi function inputs S1 to S7 EB 485 Start Co inverter Communication 6 If constant communication is selected for the Co inverter Communication Start Selection C100 01 the Management Inverter starts sending data the moment the power is input If starting of the Inverter to switch the master to is delayed and thus receiving of the master switching command fails the Master Inverter cannot send data and consequently the Management Inverter experiences a receive timeout If C100 01 is selected confirm starting of all other Inverters and then start the Management Inverter 7 Although the station number of the recipient slave is set in master slave communication actually this communication is performed as broadcast communication station number 00 Accordingly data is sent to a
298. ication Starting Station Number Co inverter Communication Ending Station Number Co inverter Communication Start Selection Number of Sent Data of All Stations in Co inverter Communication Recipient Station Number of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 1 Recipient Register of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 1 Sender Register of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 1 00 Modbus communication Modbus RTU 01 Co inverter communication 02 Co inverter communication Management Inverter 1 to 8 Setting is required only for the Management Inverter 1 to 8 Setting is required only for the Management Inverter 00 Starting by an input terminal 01 Constant communication 1 to 247 7 0000 to FFFF Hex 0000 0000 to FFFF Hex 0000 gt gt SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 7 Co Inverter Communication Default setting Setting destination Parameter No Function name Recipient Station 1 to 247 Number of All Stations nit cn Inn eine e i z E in Co inverter RK Communication 2 Recipient Register of 0000 to FFFF Hex P145 All Stations in Co 0000 M inverter Communication 2 Sender Register of All 0000 to FFFF Hex P146 Stations in Co inverter Communication 2 Recipient Station 1 to 247 P147 Number of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 3 Recipient Register of 0000 to FFFF Hex A
299. ient Register of All 169Ch Stations in Co inverter P154 R W 0000h to FFFFh Communication 5 Sender Register of All 169Dh Stations in Co inverter P155 R W 0000h to FFFFh Communication 5 169Eh to Reserved 16BCh 16BDh to Not used Inaccessible 1E00h O l 4 2 Coil number 0010h to 1E01h Coil Data 1 215 Coil number 001Fh 1E02h Coil Data 2 0 D Q D 6 22 29 Coil number 0020h to 215 Coil number 002Fh 8 r 2 Coil number 0030h to TEOSh Coil Data 3 Fe 215 Coil number 003Fh 1E04h Coil Data 4 EE 1E05h Coil Datap BEA 215 Coil number 004Fh 2 Coil number 0050h to 28 Coil number 0058h Inaccessible R W 2 Coil number 0001h to 215 Coil number OOOFh 1FO2h to Reserved ae 1F1Dh 1F1Eh to Not used Inaccessible 2102h 1 Each of the above holding registers coil data 0 to 5 consists of 16 coil data Since coils are not supported in Co inverter communication only holding registers are supported use the above holding registers when accessing coils 2 Do not write into holding registers 1F02h to 1F1Dh 2 Coil number 0040h to 1E06h to Reserved 1E18h 1E19h to Not used 1FOOh 1F01h Coil Data 0 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 68 uoljOUNY UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data vi Holding Register Number List 2nd Setting Group F Register Parameter Monitor and setting Da
300. igher output voltage increases the motor loss and energy consumptions and consequently shortens the deceleration time However the motor load increases To shorten the deceleration time without causing an overvoltage trip select OFF for AVR selection during deceleration for or tune the voltage characteristics using the AVR filter time parameter and voltage gain during deceleration Parameter Default s Function name i Unit No setting A081 A281 AVR Selection 1 2 Motor Incoming Voltage A082 A282 Selection 1 2 400V class 380 400 415 440 460 V 480 A083 AVR Filter Time 0 000 to 10 00 0 300 S Parameter A084 AVR Deceleration 50 to 200 100 o Voltage Gain The deceleration time can be shortened by increasing the motor loss during deceleration and thereby reducing the regenerated energy returned to the Inverter If the location of AC incoming voltage is away from the location of motor incoming voltage however an overcurrent trip may occur during deceleration In this case make adjustment by for example selecting Always ON for AVR Selection 02 400 00 AVR Filter Time Parameter A083 0 Output voltage AC incoming voltage Output voltage AVR Deceleration Large Voltage Gain A084 Motor incoming Small voltage selection Motor incoming voltage selection A082 A282 Output voltage when the AVR selection is ON Time s Start deceleration Time s Example of setting the AVR Selecti
301. ignal Input the 1 phase pulse to the RP terminal and direction signal to the EB terminal The EB terminal can support both the sink logic and source logic by changing the shorting bar position Allocate EB to multi function input terminal S7 EB The EB terminal is OFF for forward and ON for reverse Ver P24 3G3MX2 O 7 RP O C C Es Hl CH SN Direction ISEB KS An Voltage output or PNP open collector type encoder Wee P24 3G3MX2 be Se RP Out LPL LS E S7 EB lso C A i a Sink transistor Voltage output or PNP open collector type encoder P24 3G3MX2 Vcc C ZER ik ae E Source transistor coder En Voltage output or PNP open collector type encoder SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 159 5 12 Simple Position Control Function Simple Position Control Mode When Pulse Train Input Terminal RP Selection P003 is set to 01 Feedback pulse the pulse train signals are used as feedback information from the encoder Enabled for Control 1 only The position reference is specified by the combination of multi function input terminals Up to eight position references can be specified The speed for a position command conforms to the Output Frequency Setting F001 For data with many digits such as position commands only the higher four digits are displayed A run command FW or RV is required separately as well as the position command Set A002 to 01 This is needed to ena
302. imum frequency 1238h Jogging Frequency A038 w frequency to 999 0 01 Hz 5 59 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 40 uoljouNny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 41 Geet Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name No parameters resolution 00 Free run on jogging stop Disabled in operation 01 Deceleration stop on jogging stop Disabled in operation 02 Injection braking on jogging stop Disabled in A039 RW operation 5 59 03 Free run on jogging stop Enabled in operation 04 Deceleration stop on jogging stop Enabled in operation 05 DC injection braking on jogging stop Enabled in operation 00 Manual torque boost 123Bh Torque Boost Selection 1 A041 3 01 Automatic torque boost an Manual Torque Boost 123Ch A042 R W 0 to 200 0 1 5 4 Voltage 1 Ee oe Orue eee A043 RW 0 to 500 0 1 Frequency 1 00 Constant torque characteristics 01 Reduced torque 5 AG A044 R W characteristics 5 144 02 Free V f setting 03 Sensorless vector control heavy load only 123Fh Output Voltage Gain 1 A045 20 to 100 1 5 72 Automatic Torque Boost 1240h Voltage Compensation A046 R W 0 to 255 1 Gain 1 5 49 EE Torque Boost agaz TRAVI Oto 255 1 Slip Compensation Gain 1 ee Reserved ee 1239h Jogging Stop Selection 123Eh Control Method 1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3M
303. ine ich Power ON time at the time of hl Fault Monitor 3 Time wow ON tripping Time Time wow ON 6 32 uoljoUNy UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Gg Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name No parameters resolution 6 33 0030h 0031h 0032h 0033h 0034h 0035h 0036h 0037h 0038h 0039h 003Ah 003Bh 003Ch 003Dh 003Eh 003Fh 0040h 0041h 0042h 0043h aa _ Fault Monitor 4 RUN Time HIGH Time ow n Monitor 4 RUN Time Time ow n Fault Monitor 4 Fine ty Time Fine ty EA Monod Cause o to Inverter Fault Factor List on o 6 35 WH Monitor 4 o a to Inverter Fault Factor 8 Inverter WH List on o a 6 35 d084 Eio T Monitor 4 Eio T HIGH O to 100000 0 01 Hz a Monitor 4 a LOW Fault Monitor 4 Fine ow n a Monitor 4 aaa current value at the 0 01 A time of aaa DC input voltage at the time of 0 1 V tripping BER Total RUN time at the time of 1 hI tripping Power ON time at the time of 1 hI tripping Time Fine ow n a Fault Monitor 5 Faut Montor 5 Cause eter Inverter Fault Factor 8 List on page 6 35 aan Monitor 5 Refer to Inverter Fault Factor 8 Inverter Status List on page 6 35 SE Monitor 5 SE HIGH O to 100000 0 01 Hz SE Monitor 5 SE LOW Monitor 5 Output current value at the SEN 0 01 A time of tripping d085 a Monitor 5 DC
304. ing Fan including 5 minutes after yes Operation power on stop 02 Depends on the fin 5 127 temperature Geh 00 Total operation time count b093 Total Operation p Site no l 01 Clear total operation time Time Clear SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 22 S17 1 J WLILed 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Deau m Page setting All data All data other than e eee terminals communication nazaten U registration function b094 Target g 5 174 Selection ony Other than U registration function and y Display Selection b037 ab 5 Disabled Regenerative Enabled Disabled while b095 Braking stopped Selection Enabled Enabled while operating and stopped 5 141 Regenerative 330 to 380 b096 Braking ON 660 to 760 V Level pio Tee vi 0 to Free V f Frequency 2 Hz Frequency 1 pote 0 0 to 800 0 V Voltage 1 b102 Free V f Free V f Frequency 1 to Free Hz Frequency 2 V f Frequency 3 _ T Ee 0 0 to 800 0 V Voltage 2 mg Free Vif Free V f F 2 to F ane ben ree ree requency 2 to Free Q TOR Frequency 3 V f Frequency 4 0 pis e 0 0 to 800 0 V E Voltage 3 e b106 Free V f Free V f Frequency 3 to Free Hz D D Frequency 4 V f Frequency 5 ab Arter al o 0 0 to 800 0 V S Voltage A a b108 Free V f Free V f Frequency 4 to Free Hz Frequency 5 V f Frequency 6 Free V f b109 Voltage 5 0 0 to 800 0 Free V f Free V f Frequency 5 to Free b110 Hz
305. ing to brake control DC Injection Braking DB DC injection braking can be applied to the motor depending on the load DC injection braking is performed in one of two methods external DC injection braking using a multi function input terminal and internal DC injection braking performed automatically when starting stopping Even if DC injection braking is used however the motor may not stop depending on the moment of inertia of the motor load Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting 00 Disabled Internal DC i A051 Injection Braking E Selection 02 Enabled Operates only at the set frequency A054 DC Injection Heavy load b049 00 0 to 100 Braking Power Light load b049 01 0 to 70 Startup DC Injection 0 Weak zero current to 100 Strong A057 rated current oi Braking Power 0 0 to 60 0 A055 DC Injection This function becomes effective for edge 05 Braking Time operation of external DC injection braking l or when internal DC injection braking is set 1 DC Injection 00 Edge operation Examples 1 a to 6 a A056 Braking Edge o Level Selection 01 Level operation Examples 1 b to 6 b 0 0 to 60 0 This function becomes effective when Sap intemal internal DC injection braking is A058 DC Injection J g s Braking Time EE g When the RUN command is turned ON DC injection braking is started DC Injection Heavy load b049 00 2 0 to 15 0 A059 Braking Carrier Light load b049 01 2 0 to
306. input 03 Optional board Torque Limit 1 0 to 200 no Disabled b041 Four quadrant Mode Forward power running under four Forward Power Running quadrant separate setting Torque Limit 2 0 to 200 no Disabled b042 Four quadrant Mode Reverse regeneration under four Reverse Regeneration quadrant separate setting Torque Limit 3 O to 200 no Disabled b043 Four quadrant Mode Reverse power running under four Reverse Power Running quadrant separate setting Torque Limit 4 0 to 200 no Disabled b044 Four quadrant Mode Forward regeneration under four Forward Regeneration quadrant separate setting l 40 TL Torque limit enabled disabled C001 to Multi function C007 Input Selection 41 TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 42 TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 eee penne pee 10 TRQ During Torque limit Output Function Selection When 00 Four quadrant separate setting is selected in Torque Limit Selection b040 5 Torque Limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 conform to the figure below Torque Tl C gt a Regeneration Power running direction b042 b041 Reverse Forward N RV FW Power running direction Regeneration b043 b044 When 01 Terminal switching is selected in Torque Limit Selection 0040 Torque Limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 which are switched by Torque Limit Switchings 1 2 allocated to multi function input terminals are set as follows Example Torque limi
307. ion C021 to C022 Terminal Selection 28 Fidc Analog FI disconnection Multi function Relay detection 2 C026 l Output Function Selection 54 WCFV Window comparator FV b065 Analog Operation b070 Level at FV 100 Disconnection no Analog Operation b071 Level at FI Disconnection 55 WCFI Window comparator FI Note The window comparator upper lower level settings have nothing to do with the external frequency start end settings Set the voltage limits as percentages corresponding to O to 10 V and current limits as percentages corresponding to 0 to 20 mA SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 132 suoljoun 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals FV FI input Max 100 Hysteresis Width b062 b065 SS Window Comparator Dech eege SE EE SE SE Upper Limit Level e b060 b063 Analog Operating Level on Disconnection b070 b07 1 Window Comparator LRA Aes E a BE SE e E vf e SE Lower Limit Level Analog Input value b061 b064 _ Analog value adopted Gr Min FV FI 0 WCFV WCFI output FVDc FIDc outpu EN Reference If this function is used to detect a disconnection set the disconnection detection level to the window comparator upper limit level Normally a bandwidth exceeding the upper limit value is used and once the upper limit value is breached a disconnection is detected Frequ
308. ion detection number of pulses x4 is performed using a 90 encoder phase difference For 1 8 kHz or higher where phase B is not valid the phase B signal is ignored and only phase A is used to detect the motor rotation phase number of pulses x1 Motor rotation direction which cannot be detected from the encoder is detected with a different method as shown in the following table 5 161 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULILI 5 12 Simple Position Control Function Determining the Command Rotation Direction and Detected Rotation Direction RV EB Phase ommani Detected rotation P004 i 8 g rotation terminal terminal difference direction direction Single phase negative reverse negative reverse 90 phase difference dual than 1 8 Positive Forward Detected from encoder phase pulse 1 ae negative reverse 90 phase difference Either ON Detected direction Positive Reverse maintained when EB or higher negative reverse terminal is less than 1 8 kHz 02 OFF OFF None 90 phase difference dual Either ON Positive Forward Detected from encoder phase pulse 2 negative reverse 90 phase difference OFF ON He AZ E PE Forward reverse or higher negative reverse OFF 1 8 kHz Positive Forward Pe or higher negative reverse ee Z ON None None 03 OFF OF None None suoljoun O ON None None EE i a Single phase GE Geer OFF Positive Forward Forward according to negative reverse EB te
309. ion is selected Is the power turned on while a RUN signal is still input Check the RUN signal UP Is there any ground fault Check the output wiring and motor Is there any error in the Inverter itself Disconnect the output wires to check Is there any error in the main circuit Check the main circuit Refer to Chapter 8 Inspection and Maintenance A trip will occur if a ground fault between the Inverter output unit and the motor is detected when turning on the power This function does not work when there is residual voltage in the motor 7 1 Error Display and Remedial Actions 1 If an error occurs the reset operation using the RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted Turn off the power once If an error is issued when the power is turned on again the memory may be faulty or parameters may not be stored correctly Perform parameter initialization and set the parameters again code page Incoming A trip will occur if the incoming voltage E15 0 Is the incoming voltage too overvoltage remains in an overvoltage state for 100 s high protection while the Inverter is stopped The Decrease the incoming overvoltage detection value is approx voltage 390 VDC for 200V class models or 780 VDC for 400V class models based on the DC voltage between P 2 and N Suppress the power supply fluctuation Apply the AC reactor to input Abnormal A trip will occur if the tem
310. ircuit cable power cable The thermistor connection cable should be 20 m or shorter When providing contacts for control circuit terminals multi function input terminals etc use a relay that will not cause contact failure even when the current or voltage is weak such as a relay with cross bar twin contacts To use a relay for a multi function output terminal connect a surge absorbing diode in parallel with the coil Do not short circuit the analog power supply terminals FS SC and or the interface power supply terminals P24 and SC Doing so could result in failure of the Inverter The control circuit terminal block has two rows of terminals at top and bottom Since wiring the top terminals first makes it difficult to wire the bottom terminals wire the bottom terminals first After the wiring gently pull the wires to confirm that they are securely connected SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 18 2 2 Wiring Wiring Example Sink Logic Shorting bar sink logic oes DOT WALD DT La fo E Variable Resistor Frequency reference 1 to 2 KO Signal during Frequency arrival RUN signal Frequency reading 27 VDC 50 mA max When connecting a relay to the multi function output terminal install a surge absorbing diode in parallel with the relay The output circuit can break down due to surge voltage when the relay is switched on off i Switching Method for Input Control Logics Multi function input ter
311. ire Range 3G3MX2 AB001 3G3MX2 AB002 3G3MX2 AB004 3G3MX2 AB007 3G3MX2 AB015 3G3MX2 AB022 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 A2002 3G3MX2 A2004 P 3G3MX2 A2007 AWG16 1 3mm 3G3MX2 A2015 ea AWG14 2 1mm 3G3MX2 A2022 AWG12 3 3mm 3G3MX2 A2037 AWG10 5 3mm AWG4 21mm2 AWG2 34mm AWG16 1 3mm AWG14 2 1mm 3G3MX2 A4040 M4 ta AWG12 3 3mm 3G3MX2 A4055 3G3MX2 A4075 CoR AWG10 5 3mm 3G3MX2 A4110 3G3MX2 A4150 M6 39t051 AWG6 13mm 3G3MX2 A2055 3G3MX2 A2075 3G3MX2 A2110 3G3MX2 A2150 3G3MX2 A4004 3G3MX2 A4007 3G3MX2 A4015 3G3MX2 A4022 3G3MX2 A4030 Appendix 15 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACICILIL INDEX SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL INDEX Numerics 010 E 5 125 2G ME 5 66 2 step acceleration deceleration function 5 66 3 wire input Tupnchon cece ects eeteeeteees 5 56 A Acceleration Deceleration pattern 5 68 Acceleration Deceleration time 0 00 00 2 5 24 ADD o E 5 71 APD see aes Ree og ee Te te UREN Pe ON NP 5 39 EE 5 119 PIAL Sigal senreaga 5 119 AN eat at a E a eres 2 8 5 44 ANIG MPU E 5 37 Analog input adiusiment eee 5 40 Analog input filter ccecseecteeeeeens 5 38 Analog command held function 5 39 Automatic carrier frequency reduction TUNG te 5 52 Automatic energy saving operation KEE eben 5 79 Automatic torque boost cceceeeeeee 5 50 AVR UNCION Ee 5 27 B Base frequency
312. ires Wire size Ferrules 0 25 24 alo2seve 125 08 20 s1 1 0 34 22 Al 0 34 8TQ 125 o8 f 20 0 5 20 Al 0 5 8WH EH 0 75 18 Al 0 75 8GY gt od Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Crimp tool CRIPMFOX UD 6 4 or CRIMPFOX ZA 3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 20 2 2 Wiring Wiring Method 1 Use a slotted screwdriver width 2 5 mm or less to push in the orange part of the control circuit terminal block The wire insertion part opens 2 With the slotted screwdriver pushed in insert the wire or ferrule in the wire insertion part round hole 3 Pull out the slotted screwdriver and the wire will be fixed gt Use a slotted screwdriver Insert the wire Pull out the slotted to push in the EE part screwdriver and the wire will be fixed c T D A Note When pulling out a wire do so by also pushing in the part denoted by E with a slotted screwdriver SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 21 2 2 Wiring Connection to Programmable Controller PLC Connection of Multi function Input Terminal and Programmable Controller When the Inverter s internal interface power When an external power supply is used supply is used Remove shorting bar on the control terminal block Sink logic Source logic No voltage switch Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 22 2 2 Wiring Connectio
313. is always a good metallic connection between the shielding of the motor cable the metal PG screw connection the terminal box and the motor housing If necessary carefully remove paint between conducting surfaces SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Appendix 1 0 Appendix 4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL cUL Standards 6 Take measures to minimize interference that is frequently coupled in through installation cables Separate interfering cables with 0 25m minimum from cables susceptible to interference A particularly critical point is laying parallel cables over longer distances If two cables intersect one crosses over the other the interference is smallest if they intersect at an angle of 90 Cables susceptible to interference should therefore only intersect motor cables intermediate circuit cables or the wiring of a rheostat at right angles and never be laid parallel to them over longer distances Minimize the distance between an interference source and an interference sink interference threatened device thereby decreasing the effect of the emitted interference on the interference sink You should use only interference free devices and maintain a minimum distance of 0 25 m from the adjustable frequency inverter 8 Follow safety measures in the filter installation If using external EMC filter ensure that the ground terminal PE of the filter is properly connected to the groun
314. ital Operator etc using P033 When analog setting is used the full scale value is 200 When voltage is used 10 V corresponds to 200 The torque control speed depends on the balance between torque and load To prevent the Inverter from running out of control set a speed limit value in PO39 forward or P040 reverse Increasing the speed torque control switching time reduces the switching shock The torque reference value under this function assumes that the torque corresponding to the Inverter s rated current is 100 Accordingly the absolute value of torque varies depending on the motor to be combined ees Default Function name setting 00 Input from the FV terminal 10V 200 Torque Reference Input 01 Input from the FI terminal SES Selection 20 mA 200 S 03 Input via the 03 Input via the Digital Operator Operator 06 Input a aan optional board P034 Torque Reference 0 to 200 S Setting Torque reference when P033 03 P039 Speed Limit Value in 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 120 0 P Torque Control forward P040 Speed Limit Value in 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 120 0 i Torque Control reverse P041 Speed Torque Control O to 1000 D Switching Time C001 to Multi function Input 52 ATR Torque reference input C008 Selection permission Torque Bias Function suoljoun This function is used to apply a bias to the torque reference generated by torque control This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Contr
315. itor life warning 40 WAF Cooling fan life warning signal 41 FR Starting contact signal 42 OHF Fin overheat warning 43 LOC Low current signal 44 Reserved 45 Reserved 46 Reserved 50 IRDY Operation ready 51 FWR During forward operation 52 RVR During reverse operation 53 MJA Fatal fault signal 54 WCFV Window comparator FV 55 WCFI Window comparator FI 58 FREF Frequency command source 59 REF RUN command source 60 SETM Motor 2 selection 62 EDM Safety device monitor 63 OPO Optional board no NO Not assigned 9 32 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 28 1SI7 JoJOWeIe Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode 4 29 Parameter No Function name Analog monitor Multi function output terminal Monitor or data range Output frequency Output current Output torque heavy load only Digital output frequency Output voltage Input power C027 MP Selection Electronic thermal load rate LAD frequency Digital current monitor Cooling fin temperature Do not set Pulse train input monitor Optional board Output frequency C028 AM Selection Output current Output torque heavy load only Output voltage Digital Current C030 Monitor Reference Value Multi function Output Terminal eve P1 EDM Contact Selection Multi function Output Terminal C98 P2 Contact Selection Multi function Relay Output C036
316. k input to the FV or FI terminal an analog voltage or current signal corresponding to the frequency Refer to Frequency Reference Selection and Output Frequency Setting on page 5 15 for details on 5 15 analog voltage current switching If Frequency Reference Selection A001 is set to 02 Digital Operator set the frequency in Output Frequency Setting F001 Enter the frequency according to the set value in Frequency Reference Selection A001 The entered frequency is displayed under F001 In the case of multi step speed operation set the frequency in Multi step Speed 5 63 Reference 0 to 15 A020 to A035 A220 suoi el do sdueUDdjUIeI x No multi function input If a multi function input terminal is used to terminal RUN command issue a RUN command allocate 00 FW or is allocated 01 RV to the applicable terminal 5 99 If a RUN command is issued using the 3 wire input method allocate 20 STA 21 STP or 22 F R One of multi step speed Turn OFF the multi step speed setting If settings 02 CF1 to 05 the multi step speed setting is turned ON CF4 is allocated to a multi step speed operation becomes multi function input effective Accordingly operation is not 5 63 terminal and the terminal performed if the applicable frequency set in is turned ON Multi step Speed Reference 1 to 15 A021 to A035 is 0 default value Both the forward input To use the forward or reverse input and reverse inpu
317. l b022 5 114 b022 b025 is high b025 Overload Limit Parameter Extend the Overload Limit Parameter 5 114 b023 b026 is short b023 b026 The STOP RESET The STOP RESET key is Set STOP Key Selection b087 correctly 5 84 key does not work disabled by setting Overvoltage Suppression Set Overvoltage Suppression Function Function During Deceleration During Deceleration b130 to 00 b130 is enabled Disabled or adjust the operation level of each function 5 117 Maintenance Operations Controlled Deceleration Set Controlled Deceleration on Power on Power Loss b050 is Loss b050 to 00 Disabled or adjust the 5 106 enabled operating level of each function 7 13 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 7 2 Troubleshooting The motor machine Carrier frequency is low Increase the Carrier Frequency b083 is loud However this may increase noise or leakage current from the Inverter Also 5 51 note that the output current must be A 1 derated depending on the model For details refer to Appendix 1 Derating Table The motor rotation Change the set frequency If resonance frequency and machine s occurs during acceleration deceleration 5 61 natural frequency are avoid the resonance frequency using resonating Frequency Jump Function A063 to A068 The motor is over excited Adjust Base Frequency A003 A203 and Motor Incoming Voltage Selection A082 A282 to the motor
318. l RP Selection is set to 01 Feedback pulse The display does not depend on the control method Parameter A Default S Function name Unit No setting 0 00 to 99 99 Forward Displayed in increments of 0 01 Hz 100 0 to 400 0 999 9 Forward Displayed in increments of 0 1 Hz 1000 Forward Displayed in increments of 1 Hz 9 99 to 0 00 Reverse Displayed in increments of Hz Real Frequency d008 Monitor 0 01 Hz 99 9 to 10 0 Reverse Displayed in increments of 0 1 Hz 400 999 to 100 Reverse Displayed in increments of 1 Hz 100 Reverse Displayed in increments of 10 Hz Related functions P011 H004 Note Data in indicates the value when the high frequency mode is selected Set Number of Encoder Pulse P011 and Motor Pole Number H004 H204 correctly For connections etc refer to Simple Position Control Function on page 5 158 Torque Reference Monitor d009 Displays the currently entered torque reference value when torque control is selected for sensorless vector control Torque control becomes active when 52 ATR is allocated to a multi function input terminal and the ATR terminal is turned ON For details refer to Torque Control on page 5 156 Parameter Default Function name S Unit No setting d009 Torque Reference 200 to 200 oi Monitor Related functions A044 C001 to C007 P033 P034 5 5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALI
319. lect an acceleration deceleration pattern with reference to the following table Curve Line A097 Acceleration Output frequency Output frequency gt gt O O Cc Cc b b Se el oO oO D D VM 4 od J Q Q gt gt O O A098 Deceleration Accelerates Helps prevent the Decelerates linearly collapse of cargo on before reaching the set the elevating output frequency value machine or conveyor Description SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 04 Inverted U shape EL S shape Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency Helps with tension control and roll break prevention for a winding machine etc Output frequency Output frequency Time N N Time Provides shockless start stop as with the S shape but the intermediate section is linear 5 68 suoljoun 5 6 Operation Functions i Pattern Curve Parameter Curve Factor Determine a curve factor with reference to the figures below Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz Target frequency Target frequency 100 gt 100 96 9 82 4 17 6 3 1 25 50 75 d Time 25 50 75 d Time Acceleration time until Acceleration time until reaching to the set value of reaching to the set value of output frequency 100 output frequency 100 Output frequency Hz Target frequency 100 gt WOO Of Wu 25 50 75 d Time Acceleration ti
320. leration time deceleration time i i O o eo _ LAC input F002 F202 _ F003 F203 _ e e meee zm em em we zm zm eM em em em em em eM em em em em em em em zm ee em em RUN command FW input No matter how shot the acceleration deceleration time is set the actual acceleration deceleration time cannot be shorter than the minimum acceleration deceleration time determined by the mechanical inertia J and the motor torque If you set a time shorter than the minimum acceleration deceleration time an overcurrent OC or overvoltage OV trip may occur The calculations of the minimum acceleration deceleration time are as follows Use as a reference Acceleration time Ts ts Ju Jm x Nu J Motor shaft converted load J kg m7 9 55 x Ts TL Jm Motor load J kg m Nm Motor rotation speed r min Ts Maximum acceleration torque based on inverter drive N m Functions Deceleration time Ts Ts Maximum deceleration torque based on inverter drive N m TL Required running torque N m JL Ju x Nm 9 55 x Teg T B 5 25 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 2 Basic Functions Base Frequency Adjust the base frequency to the motor specification If you apply a base frequency of over 60 Hz a special motor is required This may require the Inverter to increase its capacity to accommodate a different applicable motor Set the motor incoming voltage selection
321. ll Stations in Co inverter Communication 3 Sender Register of All 0000 to FFFF Hex P149 Stations in Co inverter Communication 3 Recipient Station 1 to 247 P150 Number of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 4 Recipient Register of 0000 to FFFF Hex All Stations in Co inverter Communication 4 Sender Register of All 0000 to FFFF Hex P152 Stations in Co inverter Communication 4 Recipient Station 1 to 247 P153 Number of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 5 Recipient Register of 0000 to FFFF Hex P154 All Stations Co inverter Communication 5 0000 P148 0000 0000 P151 0000 0000 0000 Sender Register of All 0000 to FFFF Hex P155 Stations in Co inverter Communication 5 0000 C001 to Multi function Input 81 485 inverter communication C007 Selection start 1 The details of the setting destination are as follows ALL Set for all connected Inverters A Set only for the Management Inverter Station No 01 B Set for Inverters other than the Management Inverter Station No 01 M Set for the Inverter whose station number is specified in C098 or C099 Master Inverter 2 Even when C072 and C096 to C100 of the Management Inverter are changed the changes will not be reflected until the power is reconnected or a reset is performed by turning the RS terminal ON and then turning it OFF Changes made to the same parameters of other Inverters are immed
322. ll stations The data received by a slave not specified as the recipient by the master will be discarded 8 If multiple Master Inverters are provided set consecutive station numbers for the Inverters Communication cannot be performed if the numbers are discontinuous 9 Make sure that C098 is equal to or smaller than C099 Co inverter Communication Setting 6 25 Set C072 a station number for each of the Inverters performing Co inverter communication by avoiding duplicate numbers Be sure to set station number 01 The Inverter of station number 01 becomes the Management Inverter For the Management Inverter set Communication Selection C096 to 02 Co inverter communication management For all other Inverters set Communication Selection C096 01 Co inverter communication Set the station number for Master Inverter in the Management Inverter C098 C099 Set the Inverter communication starting method in the Management Inverter C100 If 00 485 terminal is selected for Co inverter Communication Start Selection C100 allocate 81 485 Start Co inverter communication to one of multi function Inputs 1 to 7 Set in the Master Inverter the number of send data items recipient station number recipient register and sender register for which the Master Inverter writes into H Inverter Inverter Communication Operation 1 The Master Inverter sends data to each slave inverter according to the items set in the
323. locate 84 ROK to the multi function input terminal Parameter i Default Function name Unit No setting C001 to C007 Multi function 84 ROK Permission of RUN 8 Input Selection el ROK input RUN command FW RV input Multi step Speed Operation Function CF1 to CF4 SF1 to SF7 Multiple RUN speeds can be set in parameters and the applicable speed can be switched using the terminals For multi step speed operation either 4 terminal binary operation with maximum 16 steps o 7 terminal bit operation with maximum 8 steps can be selected aa Default Function name Unit setting e GT binary operation with up to Multi step Speed 16 variable steps ate Selection 01 7 terminal bit operation with up to 8 variable steps A020 Multi step Speed 1 0 00 starting frequency to maximum TE Reference 0 frequency A021 to A035 Multi step Speed 0 00 starting frequency to maximum ge References 1 to 15 frequency A220 Multi step Speed 2 0 00 starting frequency to maximum Ge Reference 0 frequency 02 to 05 Binary operation 16 steps CF1 to CF4 32 to 38 Bit operation 8 steps SF1 to SF7 Multi function Input C001 to C007 Selection Multi step Speed 0 to 200 x 10 ms C169 Position Wait time until determination of ms Determination Time terminal input 5 63 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operation Functions g Binary Operation Selection of multi step speed r
324. logs manuals brochures and other documents whether electronic or in writing relating to the sale of products or services collectively the Products by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies Omron Omron objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyers purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with or in addition to these Terms Prices Payment Terms All prices stated are current subject to change with out notice by Omron Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders Payments for Products are due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice Discounts Cash discounts if any will apply only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges taxes and duties and will be allowed only if i the invoice is paid according to Omron s payment terms and ii Buyer has no past due amounts Interest Omron at its option may charge Buyer 1 1 2 interest per month or the maximum legal rate whichever is less on any balance not paid within the stated terms Orders Omron will accept no order less than 200 net billing Governmental Approvals Buyer shall be responsible for and shall bear all costs involved in obtaining any government approvals required for the impor tation or sale of the Products Taxes All taxes duties and other governmental charges other than general real property and income taxes incl
325. lso outputs a signal during DC injection braking Below is the time chart The RUN signal will remain ON until the motor stops even when the RUN command is turned OFF Parameter Default g Function name Unit No setting Multi function Output Terminal C021 to C022 Selection 00 RUN During RUN Multi function C026 Relay Output Function Selection FW input forward Functions 5 121 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Frequency Arrival Signal FA1 to FA5 When the output frequency reaches the set level a frequency arrival signal is output Allocate 01 FA1 constant speed reached 02 FA2 set frequency min reached 06 FA3 set frequency only 24 FA4 set frequency min reached 2 or 25 FAS set frequency only 2 to any Multi function Output Terminal Selections C021 to C022 or Multi function Relay Output Function Selection C026 Below is the hysteresis of the frequency arrival signal ON Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set frequency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz If 06 FA3 or 25 FAS is set however operation during acceleration is ON Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set frequency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz During deceleration ON Set frequency 1 of the maximum frequency Hz OFF Set f
326. lti function relay output terminal MA MB Multi function output terminals P1 EDM P2 are open collector output while multi function relay output terminal MA MB are relay output Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting Multi function Output 00 NO NO contact at P1 P2 MA Terminal P1 EDM NC e contact at MB C031 Contact Selection C032 Multi function Output 94 NC NC contact at P1 P2 MA Terminal P2 Contact NO NO contact at MB Selection 00 NO NO ONG INE conc at at P1 P2 MA C036 Output MA MB 01 Contact Selection 01 NC NC fie hese ane at P1 P2 MA NO NO contact at MB C031 to C032 set ROWEL Inverter status Output signal status values supply Operating Error ON Conduction NC Se NO eel TT Error OFF No conduction Indeterminable Specifications of Multi function Output Terminals P1 EDM to P2 Below are the specifications of multi function output terminals P1 EDM and P2 sc Inverter interior 7 Electrical characteristics Between each terminal and PC Voltage drop 4 V max at power on Max allowable voltage 27 VDC Allowable max current 50 mA SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 34 suoljoun 5 3 Input Output Terminals Specification of Multi function Relay Output Terminals Multi function relay output terminals has a SPDT contact specification Below is the operation Inverter interior Example of use as an alarm Inverte
327. mand Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals the motor may start abruptly Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal Maintenance and Parts Replacement The Inverter consists of many parts and these parts must operate properly in order to make full use of the designed functions of the Inverter Among the electronic components there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life Product Disposal Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product 8 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Precautions for Correct Use Warning Labels Warning labels are located on the Inverter as shown in the following illustration Be sure to follow the instructions omron SYSDRIVE RUN PR 3G3MX2_INVERTER RE um MBOBENDSOKT A Risk of electric shock CRAFT BROMICIUMIMRHASeiR Eeer ew E E talling citor discharge after ds ecting Warning Description fe Pea um mont WARNING Risk of electric shock e IST BOR Cle SHES e Bad RAL A e EECH LEES OD MAIS TOY lt
328. maximum frequency Overspeed Error Detection times the Overspeed Error Detection P026 Lavel Level P026 during operation when 115 0 P003 is set to 01 encoder feedback and P026 is not set to 0 This does not depend on whether simple position control of V f control with FB is ON or OFF 512 Pulse 5 00 Z SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 160 suoljoun 5 12 Simple Position Control Function Parameter S Default Function name 8 Unit No setting 0 00 to 120 0 If this parameter is not set to 0 and DSE excessive speed deviation is assigned to the intelligent output terminal the DSE signal will turn ON Speed Deviation Error if the absolute value of the output P027 10 00 Hz Detection Level frequency minus the speed FB is equal to or greater than the setting of P027 The Inverter will not be tripped This does not depend on whether simple position control or V f control with FB is either ON or OFF Position Range Setting 0 to 268 435 455 26843545 P072 forward side 5 268 435 455 to 0 26843545 5 00 Limit P075 Positioning Mode Selection eg 01 Not limited P077 Encoder Disconnection 0 0 to 10 0 10 Detection Time d029 Position Command Monitor 268 435 455 to 268 435 455 Lo z d030 Current Position Monitor 2 268 435 455 to 268 435 455 O 03 Trip reset only Internal data current values are not P073 Position Range Setting reverse side
329. me until reaching to the set value of output frequency 100 Functions The S shape has an intermediate section where acceleration deceleration time is shortened If 46 LAC LAD cancel is selected for a multi function input and the input is turned ON the acceleration deceleration pattern is ignored and the output frequency instantaneously follows to the reference frequency i EL S shape Ratio When the EL S shape is used various Curve Ratios A150 to A153 can be set for acceleration deceleration If all settings are 50 the Inverter operates in the same manner as with the S shape Output frequency ratio 100 PE EE Ee EL S Shape Acceleration Curve Ratio 2 A151 SG ee ee E eee EL S Shape Deceleration Curve Ratio 1 A152 DS GA EL S Shape Deceleration Ratio 2 A153 EL S Shape Acceleration Time s Curve Ratio 1 A150 5 69 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operation Functions Frequency Operation Function Two sets of frequency reference operation results can be used for frequency reference or PID feedback values To use this function for frequency reference set Frequency Reference Selection A001 to 10 Operation function output To use this function for PID feedback set PID Feedback Selection A076 to 10 Operation function output Gelee Default Function name Unit setting 00 00 Digital Operator A020 A220 Operator A020 A220 01 Di
330. minals are set to sink logic at the factory To switch the input control logic to source logic remove the shorting bar between terminals P24 and PSC on the control circuit terminal block and connect it between terminals PSC and SC c T D A 1 Sink logic 2 Source logic Shorting bar Shorting bar Communication Logic common and RS 485 Logic input power supply SARAVANAN EB TH GS2 GS1 peme rs Fv Fi sc am rc r2 pi MC L IL LI II Communication Pulse Pulse Analog input and Analog Logic output l l l l l l l l l l l l a Ball Shortin Relay output S l l l l l l l l l l RS 485 output input power supply output l 2 19 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 2 Wiring Wire Sizes for Control Circuit Terminal Block and Relay Output Terminal Block Fa Control circuit terminal block Relay output terminal block d 8mm Stripping length for single stranded wires Approx 8 mm Applicable wire Single wire mm Stranded wire mm 2 AWG AWG Ferrules mm AWG Control Circuit Terminal 0 2 to 1 5 0 2 to 1 0 0 25 to 0 75 Block AWG 24 to 16 AWG 24 to 17 AWG 24 to 18 Relay output terminal 0 2 to 1 5 0 2 to 1 0 0 25 to 0 75 block AWG 24 to 16 AWG 24 to 17 AWG 24 to 18 Recommended Terminal u is q To improve the ease of wiring and reliability of connection use of ferrules of the following specifications is recommended for signal w
331. mode to 1 000 Hz Parameter S Default Function name i Unit No setting 00 Selection disabled Inverter Mode b171 01 Induction motor Induction motor Selection 02 Induction motor ee RSET frequency mode B Perform Initialization EE Initialization disabled Mode Selection 01 Perform initialization mode selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 178 suoljoun Functions 5 14 Other Functions 9 179 Major Differences between High frequency Mode and Normal Mode High frequency mode Heavy Load Light Load l l l Selection b049 Heavy load rating CT Heavy load rating CT Light load rating VT Maximum Frequency 400 Hz 0 10 to 100 0 Hz DO ie 0 10 to 9 99 Hz 2 0 to 10 0 kHz SE 2 0 to 10 0 kKHz 00 Constant torque characteristics 01 Reduced torque Function name Normal mode Starting Frequency b082 Carrier Frequency b083 Constant torque characteristics 00 Constant torque characteristics Control Method A044 Reduced torque characteristics 01 Reduced torque characteristics 02 Free V f setting characteristics Free V f setting 03 Sensorless vector 02 Free V f setting control Linear 00 Linear Acceleration Pattern S shape curve 01 S shape curve Selection A097 Deceleration Pattern Selection A098 U shape curve Reverse U shape curve 02 03 U shape curve Inverted U shape curve 00 Disabled Note In the high
332. mron com 54 11 4783 5300 OMRON EUROPE B V Wegalaan 67 69 NL 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel 31 0 23 5681300 Fax 31 0 23 56813 88 www industrial omron eu Cat No 1570 E1 02A 08 10 Note Specifications are subject to change 2010 Omron Electronics LLC
333. n Perform a reset after identifying and removing the cause of the error and checking the various signals such as RUN Command STOP RESET H RS terminal input ON gt OFF uoljeiado D 3 4 Tripping Alarm occurred RUN command FW RV Free run Motor rotation speed Ze RS reset input AL alarm output alarm signal Operation 3 13 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Parameter List l Describes the parameters used by this Unit 4 1 Monitor Mod use Aere NENNEN 4 1 A 2 FUNCTION de e TEE 4 4 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Parameter List 4 1 Monitor Mode 4 1 Monitor Mode 4 1 The description in d001 is always displayed in the default setting at power on To fix the optional display change the setting in b038 The displayed parameters are limited in the default setting To display all parameters set Display Selection b037 to 00 Complete display Setting Soft Lock Selection b031 to 10 permits data change during RUN Data ranges given in parentheses are for high frequency mode Refer to page 5 178 for details Data can Parameter be No Function name Monitor or data range changed Page j during Output 0 00 t0 99 99 00 to 99 99 d001 Frequency 100 0 to 1 000 a frequency 2 Monitor mode doo2 Output Curre
334. n electronic thermal of the Inverter and a E trip will occur However the error history may indicate a high frequency The Inverter is tripped when there is an E40 D Is there a communications error or broken line for communications error with an externally connected Operator Check the cable and 5 85 optional replace it if necessary 5 86 This error will not be detected if b165 is set to 02 ignore A trip will occur upon timeout if the E41 0 Is the communication speed communication error selection is set to correct tripping C076 00 Check the setting Is the wiring distance appropriate 6 3 Check the communication wiring Has disconnection occurred Check the wiring E43 Uto E E59 D This error is reported by an optional E60 Uto Refer to the manual for the 8 board E68 U optional board for details A timeout occurred in communications E69 U The optional board is between the Inverter and optional disconnected board and the Inverter was tripped Check to see if the case of the optional board is mating properly with the Inverter Tighten the mounting screws E The option board is malfunctioning If the optional board is mated properly it may have failed SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 7 1 Error Display and Remedial Actions code page The Inverter is tripped if the motor rotations detected by the motor are less than the Starting Frequenc
335. n Method g Command Reference Input From the Control Circuit Terminal Block Operates the Inverter by connecting the external signals frequency setting volume switch etc to the control circuit terminal block lt Setting the Forward Reverse Direction Using the FW RV Input Terminal and Setting the Frequency Using the Frequency Volume gt Setting Parameter Default Function name Note No value Frequency 01 Control circuit A001 Reference terminal block 02 Selection 1 RUN Command 01 Control circuit pave Selection 1 terminal block C001 Multi function 00 FW Forward OO FW If other input terminal is used the Input 1 Selection Change the following parameters if necessary Parameter Default Function name No value F002 Acceleration 0 01 to 99 99 s 100 0 to 999 9s 10 00s Time Setting 1 1 000 to 3 600 s 30 00 s F003 Deceleration 0 01 to 99 99 s 100 0 to 999 9s 10 00s Time Setting 1 1 000 to 3 600 s 30 00 s Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal Block F R STP STA setting setting setting a 10 VDC sch lt H rh rh A 24 VDC Frequency setting l 2 volume Reverse Forward input input 1 Allocate 16 FV FI Analog input switch to a multi function input to use as the voltage setting If terminal FV FI is not allocated the frequency reference becomes the sum of voltage input FV and current input Fl To use only one of voltage or current therefore short the other analog input t
336. n TH thermistor is allocated to the multi function input terminal S5 and a digital signal is input Multi function Output Monitor d006 The LED lighting position indicates the output status of the multi function output terminals The output status of the built in CPU is indicated This is not the status of the control circuit terminal This does not depend on the NO NC contact setting Example Multi function output terminals P2 P1 EDM ON Relay output terminal MA OFF B SS Display CH Cp CQ Oo Be Q9 UI Fy UH oer 0 Turned OFF b4 4 MA P2 P1 OFF ON ON SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 1 Monitor Mode Output Frequency Monitor After Conversion d007 Displays a conversion value based on the coefficient set in Frequency Conversion Coefficient b086 This monitor is used to change the unit of displayed data e g motor rpm Display of the Output Frequency Monitor d007 Output Frequency Monitor d001 x Frequency Conversion Coefficient b086 Example Displaying rom of 4 pole motor Motor rom N min 1 120 x f Hz P pole f Hz x 30 As such when b086 30 0 a motor rom of 1800 60 x 30 0 is displayed at 60 Hz E Default Function name Unit setting 0 00 to 99 99 Displayed in increments of 0 01 100 0 to 999 9 Displays in increments of Output Frequency E d007 Monitor after 1000 to 4000 9999 Displays in conversion increments of 1 1 000 to 9 999 Displa
337. n constant speed operation accelerated during regeneration Overload Limit 1 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x b022 Level rated current heavy load setting b222 Electronic Thermal current x 1 50 heavy or 1 20 light U A 3 9 3 D r S T P Overload Limit 2 0 20 x Rated current to 1 50 x rated current light load setting b023 Overload Limit 1 Parameter 0 1 to 999 9 imi 1000 to 3000 b223 Overload Limit 2 Parameter 00 Disabled 01 Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation 02 Enabled in constant speed b024 Overload Limit 1 operation Selection 2 03 Enabled during acceleration constant speed operation Overload limit Overcurrent Protection accelerated during regeneration 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x rated current heavy load current x b025 Overload Limit 1 setting 1 50 Level 2 0 20 x Rated current to 1 50 x heavy rated current light load or 1 20 setting light SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 18 4 2 Function Mode Default SE Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range i changed Page setting during during RUN RUN Overload Limit 1 0 1 to 999 9 Overcurrent e Z DEZ rn E Selection 0 20 x Rated current to 2 00 x rated current heavy load E Inverter IEN Frequency Pull setting ee A 3 in Restart Level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 50 x O current D rated current light load 6 s
338. n input terminal to which Motor 2 Control 08 SET is allocated Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting 00 Constant 00 Constant torque characteristics VC characteristics VC 01 Reduced torque characteristics EE 1 7th power Control Method A044 A244 1 2 02 Free V f setting 7 03 Sensorless vector control SLV For high starting torque high accuracy operation 1 1 This option cannot be selected in the Light Load Mode b049 01 or high frequency mode Constant Torque Characteristics VC Output voltage is proportional to output frequency While the output voltage is proportional from 0 Hz to base frequency the output voltage is constant from base to maximum frequency regardless of the frequency Output voltage 100 Output frequency Hz 0 Base frequency Maximum frequency SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 46 suoljoun Functions 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method 5 47 i Reduced Torque Characteristics VP 1 7th power Suitable for a fan or pump that does not require large torque in a low speed range It will provide high efficiency reduce noise and vibration owing to reduced output voltage in a low speed range V f characteristics are shown below Output voltage 100 Output frequency Hz 10 of base Base frequency Maximum frequency frequency Wy a b c Period a Provides constant torque characteristics within a r
339. n of Multi function Output Terminal and Programmable Controller Sink logic Inverter Input module c T D A Source logic Inverter Input module 2 23 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 2 Wiring Note on Use of Multiple Inverters If multiple Inverters are using a common input switch etc and the Inverters are turned on at different timings a sneak current path will be generated as shown below and the input may be recognized as ON when it is actually OFF In this case be sure to insert a diode rating 50 V 0 1 A in the location shown below or use external power supply circuits to prevent the sneak current path 1 For Sink Logic Power ON Power ON Add diodes Switch OFF Without this diode a sneak current path is generated and the input turns ON when the switch is OFF Switch OFF Install a diode instead of the shorting bar to prevent the sneak current path Power ON Change to an external power supply Switch OFF A sneak current path will not occur if the short bar is removed and an external power supply is used SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 24 2 2 Wiring 2 For Source Logic Power ON Power ON Add diodes c T D A Switch OFF Without this diode a sneak current path is generated and the input turns ON when the switch is OFF Switch OFF Install a diode instead of the shorting bar to prevent the sneak curren
340. n the setting of Integral Time b134 is decreased but if the setting is too small a trip will occur easily as well SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 AO0000 5 118 suoljoun j Functions 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Alarm Signal AL 9 119 Upon detecting an overcurrent overvoltage or other error the Inverter stops the output and outputs an alarm signal AL This is called a trip When the Inverter is reset the trip status is reset and the alarm signal also turns OFF A trip can be reset by pressing the STOP RESET key or turning the reset terminal ON and then OFF Some trips may not be reset using the reset terminal depending on their cause In this case the power must be reconnected Allocate 05 AL Alarm output to any Multi function Output Terminal Selections C021 to C022 or Multi function Relay Output Function Selection C026 This function is allocated to the relay in default setting The relay is based on SPDT contact For details refer to Multi function Output Terminal Contact Selection on page 5 34 Parameter A Default 3 Function name 8 Unit No setting Multi function C021 to C022 Output Terminal Selection 05 AL Alarm output Multi function C026 Relay Output Function Selection Alarm occurred RUN command FW w Free run Motor rotation speed xk DN RS reset input AL output alarm signal O
341. nal block 4 Set RUN Command Selection A002 to 01 Control circuit terminal block SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 3 10 uoljeiado D Operation 3 3 Test Run Display Output Frequency Monitor d001 and press the Enter key Confirm that 0 00 Hz is displayed After confirming that the analog voltage current value for frequency reference is 0 turn the RUN command ON The RUN during RUN LED indicator is lit Gradually increase the analog voltage current value for frequency reference The frequency reference can be set first before setting the RUN command in 6 The motor accelerates decelerates according to the acceleration deceleration time set in F002 F003 The motor starts to turn Confirm the output frequency and motor rotation direction displayed on the Digital Operator and check if the Inverter is free from errors After checking the operation turn the RUN command OFF turn the STP input ON in the case of 3 wire input The motor starts to decelerate and once it stops the RUN during RUN LED indicator turns OFF Check for tripping during acceleration deceleration and also check if the rotation speed and frequency readings are correct If an overcurrent or overvoltage tripping occurs during trial operation try to increase the acceleration deceleration time Confirm by Output Current Monitor d002 and DC Voltage Monitor d102 to confirm that the cur
342. nalog input for frequency rise reference or Variable Resistor The overload limit or overcurrent suppression function has actuated The setting of Maximum Frequency A004 or Frequency Upper Limit A061 A261 is low Acceleration time is long 06 JG jogging is allocated to a multi function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON One of multi step speed settings 02 CF1 to 05 CF4 is allocated to a multi function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON The load is excessive Reduce the load The motor is locked Unlock the motor The frequency Frequency Reference cannot be set in Selection A001 is not set Output Frequency to Digital Operator ee ee 51 F TM forced terminal g g block is allocated to a perator multi function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON Specified Display Selection b037 parameters are not is set to 01 Individual displayed display of functions 04 Basic display etc 86 DISP Display fixed is allocated to a multi function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON The Digital 86 DISP Display fixed Operator keys do is allocated to a multi not work function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 7 2 Troubleshooting Check the wiring e For the analog voltage or Variable Resistor input measure the FV SC terminal voltage using a tester etc to check if the
343. nals Doing so may cause damage to the Inverter Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely Perform the wiring after installing the Inverter Do not connect any load other than the 3 phase induction motor to the output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 of the Inverter c T Q A Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when using the Inverter in the following locations Not doing so may result in damage to the Inverter Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields Locations close to power supplies f Main Circuit Power Supply Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter matches the AC power supply voltage 2 1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 1 Installation Precautions for Correct Use i Installation Install the Inverter vertically on a wall Install the Inverter on a nonflammable wall surface material like metal LULU g D LA Q 5 Installation Environment Make sure the ambient temperature remains within the rated range 10 to 50 C Take note that if the ambient temperature reaches or exceeds 40 C the carrier frequency and output current must be derated If the Inverter is used in an environment exceeding the allowable operating temperature range the product life of the Inverter specifically the capacitor will be shortened M
344. nctions 5 67 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Acceleration Deceleration Pattern 5 6 Operation Functions Acceleration deceleration pattern can be set for each system Select a desired pattern using A097 or A098 A different pattern can be set for acceleration and deceleration respectively If the selected acceleration deceleration pattern is not Linear A097 A098 00 do not use this function with an Analog Input A001 01 because it increases the acceleration deceleration time Parameter Default Function name fi Unit No setting 00 Linear Acceleration Pattern 01 S shape Selection i A097 A098 Secaleration Palerm 02 U shape curve Selection 03 Reverse U shape 04 EL S shape Acceleration Curve 01 small curve to 10 large curve Parameter Enabled with other than EL S shape A097 ge Deceleration Curve A098 04 Parameter EL S Shape 0 to 50 A150 A151 Acceleration Specify the Curve Ratio 1 2 the EL S shape is used for acceleration EL S Shape 0 to 50 A152 A153 Deceleration Specify the ratio of the curved section when Curve Ratio 1 2 the EL S shape is used for deceleration ratio of the curved section when Note When the EL S shape is selected use multi step speed operation and do not change the frequency reference during acceleration deceleration Only line acceleration deceleration can be selected in the high frequency mode Pattern Selection Se
345. nd Parts Replacement The Inverter consists of many parts and these parts must operate properly in order to make full use of the designed functions of the Inverter Among the electronic components there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life oO a ul c a E ul L ul c O Ce Q Q UI f Product Disposal Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product 8 1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 8 1 Inspection and Maintenance Daily Inspection Check the following during operation The motor operates according to the settings There is no error in the installation environment There are no errors in the cooling system Check that there are no abnormal vibrations or sounds There are no abnormal overheat or discoloration Check that there are no abnormal odors Check the input voltage of the Inverter during operation using a tester or other equipment There is no frequent power supply voltage fluctuation The voltage level between the wires is balanced Cleaning Always keep the Inverter clean for operation Lightly remove any dirt with a soft cloth moistened with a neutral detergent Do not use such solutions as aceton
346. netrations 1 4 N A No of filters 400 V No of penetrations N A No of filters 400 V No of penetrations IA gt wesch A A Jl Z N 9 3 Options class O S mbe kel me No of No of filters penetrations A wesch A wesch Z N class 4 4 4 4 4 A BR A AJ gt Output No of No of filters penetrations A HR BR BR BY BY BY A 9 20 suoljeoijinads 9 3 Options Input Noise Filter 3G3AX NFIxxxx f Dimensional Drawing 3G3AX NF121 NFI22 Inverter side L ll CERI Power supply Je side Dimensions Unit mm D ee aleje verter side H 3G3AX NF123 10 L3 L2 L1 h v 3G3AX NF124 144 130 56 11 8 3G3AX NFI41 11 C ousted o 3G3AX NF142 11 TERN H 3G3AX NFI43 11 5 Li Li Kai Power supply 3G3AX NF144 11 side 74 Model A B 95 Specifications 9 21 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACICILIZ 9 3 Options 3G3AX NF125 NF1I26 NF145 NF146 3G3AX NF127 NF1I28 Power supply side Inverter side 2 2 M DU 2161
347. ng forward side Displays MSB 4 digits including 164Ah Multi step Position Command 6 PO66 164Bh LOW R W P067 R W Position range setting HIGH reverse side to position range setting forward side Displays MSB 4 digits including 00 Zero return mode 1 01 Zero return mode 2 00 Forward 01 Reverse 5 168 164Ch Multi step Position Command 7 DOE LOW 164Eh Zero Return Mode P068 164Fh Zero Return Direction Goen Selection eson EE P070 0 to 1000 10000 0 01 Hz Frequency EE P071 0 to 4000 0 01 Hz Frequency SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULLI 6 66 1 164Dh R W R W R W R W IW R uoljoUNy UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 67 Register No 1655h Position Range Setting forward side Position Range Setting reverse side Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name S Page No parameters resolution P072 5075 0 to 268435455 1 P073 STE 5075 268435455 to 0 1 1657h Positioning Mode Selection 1659h 165Ah to 168Dh 168Eh 168Fh 1690h 1691h 1692h 1693h 1694h 1695h 1696h 1697h 1698h Encoder Disconnection Detection Time pem 1 Number of Send Data of All Stations in Co inverter Communication Recipient Station Number of All Stations in Co inverter Communication 1 Recipient Register of All Stations in Co inverter
348. nged intellectual property rights of another party Property Confidentiality Any intellectual property in the Products is the exclu sive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Omron Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Omron All information and materials supplied by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party Export Controls Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws regulations and licenses regarding i export of products or information iii sale of products to forbidden or other proscribed persons and ii disclosure to non citizens of regulated technology or information Miscellaneous a Waiver No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver of rights by Omron b Assignment Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Omron s written consent c Law These Terms are governed by the law of the jurisdiction of the home office of the Omron company from which Buyer is purchasing the Products without regard to conflict of law princi ples d Amendment These Terms constitute the entire agreement between
349. nnection of the Digital Operator communication with the Digital Operator has been disrupted for 5 s or more the Inverter operation conforms to the setting of Selection of Operation on Digital Operator Disconnection b165 Parameter Default Function name i Unit No setting 00 Trip E40 D Selection of 01 Trip after deceleration stop E40 D Operation on Ge Digital Operator Ve Onn SS p Disconnection 03 Free run stop 04 Deceleration stop Initial Screen Selection Screen at Power ON The Digital Operator screen to be displayed at power on can be selected from among the following By factory default 001 d001 is selected Main Built in Digital Operator Parameter S EE i Default f Screen on which the Enter key was pressed last All items other than d and F001 are parameters d001 Output Frequency Monitor Initial Screen d002 Output Current Monitor 001 b038 Selection d003 Rotation Direction Monitor Each item corresponds to d d060 Inverter Mode Monitor 201 F001 Output Frequency Setting Do not use this setting eg 1 If 000 is selected and then the power is turned off without changing the setting this item b038 will be displayed the next time the power is turned on SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 86 suoljoun Functions 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Functions Initial Screen Automatic Switching Function This function is ena
350. not use this Inverter with an input phase loss connection Doing so may damage the Inverter The Inverter operates with 1 phase input during input phase loss causing a trip due to undervoltage overcurrent etc or damage to the Inverter Even if an input phase is open the internal capacitor is charged with voltage and electric shock or injury may occur When changing the cable connections refer to Precautions for Use SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 10 Design 2 2 Wiring In the following cases the internal converter module may be damaged Imbalance ratio of power supply voltage is 3 or more Power supply capacity is ten times or more than the Inverter capacity and 500 kVA or more Rapid change in power supply voltage Example When several inverters are connected with a short bus When the phase advance capacitor is turned on off Do not turn on the power and then turn it off again more than once every 3 minutes Doing so may damage the Inverter i Inverter output terminal U T1 V T2 W T3 For connection of the output terminal use the compatible cable or a cable with a larger diameter Otherwise the output voltage between the Inverter and the motor may drop Particularly during low frequency output a voltage drop occurs with the cable resulting in motor torque reduction Do not mount a phase advance capacitor or surge absorber because these devices may cause the Inverter to trip o
351. nput Terminal 7 Operation Selection Monitor or data range 00 NO NO contact 01 NC NC contact Default setting Set data Page 5 31 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Parameter No Multi function output terminal C021 C022 Output Terminal C026 Function name Multi function Output Terminal P1 EDM Selection Multi function P2 Selection Multi function Relay Output MA MB Function Selection 4 2 Function Mode Default setting Monitor or data range Page 00 RUN During RUN 01 FA1 Constant speed reached 02 FA2 Set frequency min reached 03 OL Overload warning 04 OD PID excessive deviation 05 AL Alarm output 06 FA3 Set frequency only 07 OTQ Overtorque Undertorque 09 UV Signal during undervoltage 10 TRQ During torque limit 11 RNT RUN time over 12 ONT Power on time over 13 THM Thermal warning 19 BRK Brake release 20 BER Brake error 21 ZS OHZ 22 DSE Excessive speed deviation 23 POK Position ready 24 FA4 Set frequency min reached 2 25 FAS Set frequency only 2 26 OL2 Overload warning 2 27 FVdc Analog FV disconnection detection 28 Fldc Analog FI disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output 32 NDc Communication disconnection detection 33 LOG1 Logic operation output 1 34 LOG2 Logic operation output 2 35 LOG3 Logic operation output 3 39 WAC Capac
352. ns 5 84 5 8 Restart FUNCIONS EE 5 94 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Vanous QUIPUL eu EE 5 110 O 10 Brake SENOS aeaa a a a 5 135 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control 5 144 5 12 Simple Position Control Function cccccecceccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeess 5 158 Sl Salely PUMGHOM eege 5 170 le Oer FUNCIONS aore vaieneusewaeisarsentewis Maan secaexsentensensenaunteuse 5 174 14 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULILI Contents Chapter6 Communication Function 6 1 COMMUNICATION SPECIFICATIONS cece ceccceeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeseeeeeneeenes 6 1 6 2 RS 485 Port Specifications and Connechon 6 2 6 3 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Parameters 00 000000000n 6 3 6 4 Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Protocol ccccecceeeeee sees eeeees 6 4 6 5 Explanation of Each HarameterhNo 6 8 6 6 To Save the Change to the Holding Register Enter Command 6 19 6 7 Co lInverter Communication 6 22 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 27 Chapter Maintenance Operations IEN Error Display and Remedial Actions nannnnannanannanannenannnnnnnnnnnrnnrrenrnnrernnne 1 1 T2 NROUDICSNOOUAG EE 7 10 Chapter8 Inspection and Maintenance 8 1 Inspection ANd Maintenance cece cecceeceeeceeteecneeceeceeceeeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeaeees 8 1 Chapter9 Specifications 9 1 Standard Specificatiom ES E 9 1 9 2 External Rn E Een EE 9 6
353. nt 9 9 to 655 3 ER Monitor Rotation F Forward d003 Direction o Stop 5 2 Monitor r Reverse 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 d004 i ee 1000 to 9999 5 2 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 h ih FI Example unge Multifunction A 38 A Ba Terminal S1 S2 ON 53 Input Monitor S7 S6 S5S4S3S2S1 Terminal S3 to S7 OFF Multi function CH CH CH Baton Peng d006 H Wes 0 Terminal P1 P2 ON 5 3 Output Monitor 2 SI O OFF Terminal AL OFF Output 0 00 to 99 99 Frequency 100 0 to 999 9 d007 Monitor after 1000 to 4000 9999 a conversion 1000 to 4000 9999 100 100 999 400 to 100 Real Frequenc o Oy d008 quency _9 99 to 0 00 5 5 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 400 1 to 999 9 1000 Torque d009 Reference 200 to 200 5 5 Monitor do10 forave Bias 5909 to 200 Monitor do12 Output Torque 599 to 200 Monitor do13 Output Voltage 9 6 to 600 0 Monitor SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Parameter No d014 d015 d016 d017 d018 d022 d023 d024 d025 d026 d027 d029 d030 d050 d060 d080 d081 d082 d083 d084 d085 d086 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series Function name Monitor or data range 4 1 Monitor Mode Input Power 9 9 to 100 0 Monitor 0 0 to 999 9 Integrated 1000 to 9999 Power Monitor 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 100000 to 999000 0 0 to 9999 1000 to 9999 10000 to 99990 100 to 999 10000
354. nt A086 Control is performed at a relatively slow rate so if a sudden load fluctuation like an impact load etc occurs the motor may stall resulting in an overcurrent trip When the frequency reference uses the terminal block analog input the automatic energy saving function may not function sufficiently In this case set Analog Input Filter A016 to 31 500 ms Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting Geier RUN Mode 00 Normal operation E Selection 01 Energy saving operation Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting O to 100 Response Slow to fast Accuracy High to low Energy saving Response Accuracy Adjustment A086 Commercial Switch CS Use this function to drive a system with large moment of inertia during acceleration and deceleration by using the Inverter and during constant speed by using a commercial power supply Allocate 14 CS to any Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 pares Default Function name Unit setting C001 to C007 Multi function 14 CS Commercial switch Input Selection Related functions b003 b007 j Switching from Inverter Operation to Commercial Power Supply Operation Switch MC1 to MC3 FW terminal and CS terminal according to the sequence shown on the next page When the CS terminal is turned ON the Inverter stops the output and the motor performs free run operation SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operati
355. nt settings of RUN Command selection FW RV Terminal FW terminal ON RV terminal ON FW RV terminals level level both OFF level Terminal Block STA terminal ON STA terminal ON STP terminal ON A002 01 ae edge edge edge F R terminal OFF F R terminal ON NC contact level level D Sam RUN key RUN key Digital Digital Operator F004 00 F004 01 STOP key Operator A002 02 LCD Digital FWD RUN key REV RUN key STOP key Operator Modbus communications A002 03 Forward command Reverse command Stop command Optional board A002 04 Operation stops when the FW terminal and RV terminal are both turned ON SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 22 suoljoun Functions 5 2 Basic Functions An overview of run stop operations using the FW RV terminals is shown below Output frequency Output frequency setting Forward direction 7 e 7 Time Reverse direction RUN lamp _ ON e OFF ON Forward commandi FW input ON OFF Reverse command OFF ON RV input RUN Direction Selection Select the rotation direction to be applied when a RUN command is input from the Digital Operator or external Digital Operator Becomes invalid when any RUN command issued from the control circuit terminal block or Remote Operator Parameter l Default Function name e Unit No setting Se RUN Direction 90 Forward operation E Selection 01 Reverse operation Rotation Dir
356. ny electrical or electronic components Circuits system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environ ments Any advice recommendations or information given orally or in writing are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty See http www omron247 com or contact your Omron representative for pub lished information Limitation on Liability Etc OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY Further in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted Indemnities Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and their employees from and against all liabilities losses claims costs and expenses including attorney s fees and expenses related to any claim inves tigation litigation or proceeding whether or not Omron is a party which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer s acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Products Without limiting the foregoing Buyer at its own expense shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or set tle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim that any Product made to Buyer specifications infri
357. o 10 V 10 bits Analog current input 4 to 20 mA 10 bits 2 2 Wiring MC ONU OFF ou OC R L1 m OC S L2 T L3 mr WITZ 24 VDC Motor Shorting bar Au cb DC reactor Remove the short bar kd when connecting a Nn P 2 DC reactor sc G RB N Braking Resistor MC A Multi function relay output MB Q hei Q P2 s Biet 10 VDC P1 EDM Multi function ligt outputs 2 outputs Ss Peet Q PC Is KI RS SC lt E H Serial communication port RS 485 Modbus RTU Q RS Terminal AM Resistor N Terminal Resistor i SC selector switch lt sc SC LI Optional board connector ae Communications Option Unit D Ground to 100 Q or less for 200 V class Ground to 100 Q or less for 400 V class 2 6 2 2 Wiring j Main Circuit Terminals EM Terminal name Description symbol R L1 L1 Main power supply Connect the input AC power supply Connect to terminals L1 and N TE input terminal on a single phase 200 V Inverter 3G3MX2 ABULLI U T1 Inverter output Connect a 3 phase motor VIT terminal W T3 1 DC reactor Remove the shorting bar between terminals 1 and P 2 and D47 connection terminal connect the optional DC reactor P 2 Braking Resistor Connect optional braking resistors If a braking torque is required E connection terminal E RB P 2 Regenerative Connect optional regenerative braking units When braking torque d braking unit is
358. o 100 0 o Signal On Level FBV signal output judgment level i 23 PID PID disabled Selection 24 PIDC 24 PIDC PID integral reset integral reset Multi function Output 04 OD PID excessive deviation ees PID Sleep Operation page Delay Time Terminal Selection 31 FBV PID FB status output C027 to C022 Multi function C026 Relay Output Function Selection Related functions A001 A005 d004 1 Refer to Frequency Operation Function on page 5 70 2 Refer to Analog Input FV FI on page 5 37 EN Reference When the PID function is used do not set the Analog Input Filter to 500 ms A016 31 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 74 suol uny Functions 5 6 Operation Functions i Basic Structure of PID Control Feedforward Disabled Oto 10 V 4 to 20 mA Manipulated Target value _ Deviation PE E ror _ V value Normal control Sensor aa e ER Ti s a ae UO fs of the Inverter Feedback Oto10V Transducer 4to20 mA Kp Proportional gain Ti Integral time Td Differential time e Operator s Deviation i PID Operation 1 P operation Operation where the manipulated value is proportional to the deviation target value current value Changes in steps Changes in lamps el be ia Large Large A 2 d po A072 V Manipulated value Small Small 2 operation Operation where the manipulated value is proportional to the time integrat
359. o 360000 0 01 s 2270h a LOW A293 Ss Ka 2nd Deceleration Time 2 SE 1 to 360000 0 01 s ES me 00 Switched via 2CH terminal 2 step Acceleration 01 Switched by setting SEH Deceleration Selection 2 SE Ge 02 Enabled only when Ge switching forward reverse A295 SH 2 step Acceleration HIGH O to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz Frequency 2 A295 2275h LOW R W A296 SZ 2 step Deceleration HIGH SE O to 40000 100000 0 01 Hz Frequency 2 A296 2277h LOW R W 2278h to Not used Inaccessible 230Bh 230Ch Electronic Thermal Level2 b212 2000 to 10000 0 01 00 Reduced torque characteristics 5 110 230Dh GOODIE TASIMAI b213 R W 01 Constant torque Characteristics Selection 2 ie tice Free setting 230Eh to Reserved 2315h Disabled Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation TE Enabled in constant 2316h SC brie Sg b221 R W speed operation Enabled in acceleration constant speed 5 114 operation Accelerates during regeneration 2317h Overload Limit 2 Level b222 100 to 2000 0 1 SES b223 R W 1 to 30000 0 1 s Parameter 2319h to Not used Inaccessible 2428h 2429h Overload Warning Level 2 C241 0 to 2000 0 1 5 115 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Register No 242Ah to 2501h 2502h 2503h 2504h 2505h 2506h 2507h 2508h to 2515h 2516h 2517h 2518h 2519h 251Ah 251Bh 251Ch 251Dh 251Eh 251Fh to
360. o set motor parameters when auto tuning is not used The parameters of a standard motor are set by default 2 These parameters are measured automatically when offline auto tuning is performed They can also be changed to desired value manually after tuning 3 Set an appropriate value according to the motor cable length used H Note 1 For moment of inertia J set a conversion value for the motor After setting the J value adjust the response speed in Speed Response H005 H205 The larger the Speed Response HO05 H205 the higher the response speed resulting in a steep torque rise the smaller the J value the lower the response speed resulting in gradual torque rise Note 2 In sensorless vector control an output in the direction opposite to the RUN command direction may be issued in the control in the low speed range etc If the motor s reverse rotation may cause a problem such as damage to the machine driven by the motor set Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection b046 to 01 Enabled Refer to Reverse Rotation Prevention Function on page 5 157 Note 3 Motor Cable Length Code Selection b033 is a parameter for compensating the current detection accuracy based on the difference in the motor cable length This parameter need not be set for 11 kW and 15 kW models Offline Auto Tuning Function In offline auto tuning whether the motor rotates or not can be selected The features of each setting are described below Term D
361. o the SC terminal 2 This wiring diagram shows an example of using the built in power supply of the Inverter If an external power supply is used refer to Connection to Programmable Controller PLC on page 2 22 Operation Refer to Test Run on page 3 10 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 3 8 parameter number becomes different C002 Multi function 01 RV Reverse 01 RV H other input terminal is used the Input 2 Selection parameter number becomes different uoljeiado D 3 2 Operation Method lt Running Stopping the Inverter via 3 wire Input and Setting the Frequency Using an Analog Current Signal gt Setting Parameter Default Function name Note No value Frequency Reference 01 Control circuit Au Selection 1 terminal block PS RUN Command 01 Control circuit GEES Selection 1 terminal block Multi function 20 STA 3 wire If other input terminal is used the a Input 1 Selection start SES parameter number becomes different C002 Multi function 21 STP 3 wire stop 01 RW If other input terminal is used the Input 2 Selection parameter number becomes different C003 Multi function 22 F R 3 wire 18 RS If other input terminal is used the Input 3 Selection forward reverse parameter number becomes different For details on the 3 wire input method refer to 3 wire Input Function STA STP F R on page 5 56 Change the following parameters if necessary Parameter Defa
362. o the password locked condition Password Clear 9 Perform password authentication The password cannot be cleared in the password locked condition in 3 0000 is displayed 10 Enter 0000 in Password Setting b190 b192 11 The system returns to the condition where no password is set initial condition and all password information is cleared d d VAN AR gt gt SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 8 Restart Functions 5 8 Restart Functions eee The following explains the operations performed upon restart Frequency Matching Restart and Frequency Pull in Restart The 3G3MX2 provides two restart methods frequency matching restart and frequency pull in restart which can be selected using the functions described below Functions relating to frequency Default matching restart and frequency Description pull in restart setting umt Selection of restart method upon cutoff of output after detection of momentary power interruption undervoltage Overvoltage Overcurrent Selection of restart method upon cutoff of b008 Restart Selection output after detection of overvoltage Refer to 5 97 page overcurrent Retry Selection SES Refer to 5 96 page Reset Restart Selection Selection of restart method upon reset C103 Refer to 5 101 page Selection of restart method after cancellation turning ON and OFF of free fun stop input Free run Stop Selection B
363. ock is selected for Frequency Reference Selection 1 A001 constant speed may not be recognized due to sampling In this case set C038 to 00 enabled during acceleration deceleration and constant speed or increase the value set in Analog Input Filter A016 Output current A Low Current Signal Detection Level C039 Low current LOC output ON on 5 129 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Operation Ready IRDY This signal is output when the Inverter becomes ready for operation ready to receive the RUN command Even if a RUN command is input while this signal is not output the Inverter will not operate If this signal is not output check if the input power supply voltage R S T is within the rated range Parameter f Default f Function name Unit No setting C021 to C022 Multi function Output Terminal Selection Multi function Relay 90 IRDY Operation ready C026 Output Function Selection Signal During Forward Operation FWR This signal is output while the Inverter is running forward While the Inverter is running in reverse or when stopped this signal is turned off Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting C021 to C022 Multi function Output Terminal Selection Multi function Relay 91 FWR During forward operation C026 Output Function Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series U
364. of Safety Function ccccccccceccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeey 5 170 Safety Function Gettng 5 170 How to Wire for Use Safety Funchon 5 171 WNO EXA MPE EE 5 172 5 14 Other FUNC CONS eege A 5 174 Mitalizaton SO WING D 5 174 User Parameter Manual Setting Funchon 5 177 User Parameter Automatic Setting Funchon ee 5 177 Inverter Mode Gelechon 5 178 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL suoljoun 5 1 Monitor Mode 5 1 Monitor Mode The following explains the Inverter s display functions such as the output frequency monitor and fault monitor Output Frequency Monitor d001 Displays the output frequency of the Inverter During stop 0 00 is displayed The monitor LED indicator Hz is lit while the d0O1setting is displayed aad Default Function name Unit setting 0 00 to 400 0 0 00 to 400 0 Output n eS doo MORIGE 0 00 to 1000 High frequency mode 00 Disabled The output frequency cannot be d001 d007 changed using d001 d007 b163 Frequency Setting Mode Selection 01 Enabled The output frequency can be changed using d001 d007 Related functions A001 F001 EN Reference If Frequency Reference Selection is set to Digital Operator A001 02 enabling d001 d007 Frequency Setting Mode Selection b163 01 lets you change the Output Frequency Monitor d001 setting using the Increment Decrement keys only during operation Changed Output Frequency Monitor d001 will be re
365. ol is selected for control method A044 A244 03 The torque bias value under this function assumes that the torque corresponding to the Inverter s rated current is 100 Accordingly the absolute value of torque varies depending on the motor to be combined 00 Disabled P036 Torque Bias Mode 01 Set via the Digital Operator 05 Input from optional board Parameter 3 Default 7 Function name i Unit No setting 200 to 200 Enabled when P036 01 P038 Torque Bias Polarity 00 As per sign Selection 01 Depends on the RUN direction SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 5 156 P037 Torque Bias Value Functions 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control le As per sign 00 When the polarity of a torque bias signal is the torque increases for forward rotation and when it is the torque increases for reverse rotation regardless of the RUN direction e Depends on the RUN direction 01 The torque bias signal sign and torque bias direction vary depending on the RUN command direction Forward command Applies torque in the same direction as the torque bias Reverse command Applies torque in the reversed direction of the torque bias Reverse Rotation Prevention Function This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method A044 A244 03 Because of its control characteristics the Inverter may output a rotation signal in the direction opposite to that of the RUN c
366. om the measured values of output voltage EourT Output power factor Pfout PfouT output current lout and output electric power Wout Wout x 100 4 3 Eout lout e Note 1 For output voltage use a measurement device that displays effective values of fundamental wave For current and electric power use a measurement device that displays all effective values Note 2 The Inverter output waveform under PWM control may have a margin of error especially at a low frequency Testers general purpose type are not applicable in many cases because of noise Measurement method of output voltage Diode 600 V 0 1 A max 200V class 1 000 V 01 A max 400V class Vc d Moving coil type 300 V 200V class 600 V 400V class Effective value of fundamental wave Vac Vac 1 1 x Voc 8 9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Specifications eee Describes the standard specification list classified by input power supply as well as external dimensions for different capacities 9 1 Standard Specification LiSt ccccscssseseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenees 9 1 9 2 External DIMENSIONS iiiicii cs Seca aia 9 6 9 3 Options EE 9 12 Regenerative Braking Unit GGG 28sHBUlvsvx scenes 9 12 Specifications of Braking Resistor 3G3AX RBA RBB RBCxxxx 9 14 DC Reactor SGSAX DEXXXKX EE 9 17 RadIO NOISE TE 9 19 Input Noise Filter G328AXNFlIvavx 9 21 EMC compatible Noise Eiter 9 25
367. oming voltage or equivalent the motor may not be stopped SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Example 1 DC voltage kept constant b130 01 Main circuit DC voltage V Overvoltage Suppression Level b131 Output frequency Hz i Time s Constant control at DC voltage Start deceleration Time s Example 2 Acceleration enabled b130 02 Main circuit DC voltage V Overvoltage Suppression Level b131 Output frequency Hz Time s deceleration Accelerates according to b132 Time s With this function enabled the actual deceleration time may be longer than the set value Particularly with b130 02 if b131 is set too low the Inverter may not decelerate Even if this function is enabled an overvoltage trip may occur depending on the deceleration rate and load condition When using this function the Inverter may reduce frequency depending on the moment of inertia of motor load and takes a long time to stop If the value set in b131 is lower than the incoming voltage or equivalent the motor may not be stopped When b130 01 PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant Though quicker response is expected when the setting of Proportional Gain b133 is increased if the setting is too large a trip will occur easily Response also becomes quicker whe
368. ommand 6000 2000 6000 Present position o P075 01 shortest control 8000 P060 A This setting is not required if control method is set to Sensorless vector control A044 A244 03 D If P004 is 00 counting will not be performed if the motor runs idle when neither FW nor RV is input This is because FW RV specify the motor rotation direction The value of d030 is cleared when PCLR position clear signal SPD speed position switch signal ORG zero return start signal or RS RS terminal input turns ON or the power supply is turned ON Calculations are based on a x1 number of pulses and are not dependent on whether a single phase or dual phase encoder input is used P003 P004 P A044 Enabled function 00 00 00 Pulse train frequency Frequency setting 1 phase pulse input Simple position control input including PID disabled 01 00 V f control with FB Encoder feedback Simple position control 00 to 02 disabled 01 02 Simple position Simple position control control enabled Encoder feedback RUN command ON D Output Ea O frequency Hz Speed E LL reference If the position command is Creep Speed Setting P015 small deceleration and KS positioning is performed before DC injection brake DB Ke the speed reference is reached KR Position POK output signal ON In simple position control DC injection braking DB is applied after moving to the target position according to the
369. ommand under certain conditions such as in a low speed range If the motor s reverse rotation may cause a problem such as damage to the machine driven by the motor set Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection b046 to Enabled Parameter Default F Function name Unit No setting Reverse Rotation 00 Disabled Disabled b046 ENER eege Enabled No reverse rotation Selection 5 157 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 12 Simple Position Control Function 5 12 Simple Position Control Function The following explains the simple position control mode Encoder Connection The hardware specification for pulse train input is described below Maximum RP terminal S7 EB terminal frequency 5 to 24VDC 32 kHz max 24 VDC 1 8 kHz max Dual phase pulse train Phase A pulse train Phase B pulse train input with 90 C phase to 1 8 kHz PNP open collector or PNP open collector or difference P004 01 02 voltage output encoder voltage output encoder 1 phase pulse train input 1 phase pulse train Direction signal direction P004 03 to 32 KHz PNP open collector or Sink source transistor or voltage output encoder selector switch 1 phase pulse train input 1 phase pulse train P004 00 to 32 kHz PNP open collector or voltage output encoder Wire the incremental encoder as shown below when using this function Dual phase Pulse Train Input the dual phase pulses to the
370. ommunication Error Timeout Time C077 When 0 is set the Co inverter communication function will stop if the data sent from the Master Inverter cannot be received If the function has stopped reconnect the Management Inverter or perform a reset by turning the RS terminal ON and then turning it OFF The communication timeout timer starts counting when the recipient starts waiting for data If data reception is not completed within the set time a timeout occurs t3 in the above figure and the operation specified by Operation Selection on Communication Error C076 takes place If the Management Inverter is the master the master switching command is sent after an elapse of the silent interval Communication Wait Time C078 following the sending of data by the Master Inverter t1 in the figure above If an Inverter other than the Management Inverter is the master the master switching command is sent after an elapse of the silent interval Communication Wait Time C078 following the receiving of data from the Master Inverter t2 in the figure above H OT Always started is selected for Co inverter Communication Start Selection the Management Inverter starts sending the moment the power is turned on Accordingly any delay in the power on timing of other Inverter prevents normal communication and the Management Inverter experiences a communication timeout If Always started is selected confirm starting of all other Inverters and t
371. on Curve Parameter S U reverse U A150 EL S Shape Acceleration Curve Ratio 1 A151 EL S Shape Acceleration Curve Ratio 2 A152 EL S Shape Deceleration Curve Ratio 1 A153 EL S Shape Deceleration Curve Ratio 2 b040 Torque Limit Selection b041 Torque Limit 1 Four quadrant Mode Forward Power Running b042 Torque Limit 2 Four quadrant Mode Reverse Regeneration 5 b043 Torque Limit 3 Four quadrant Mode Reverse Power Running b044 Torque Limit 4 Four quadrant Mode Forward op Regeneration 5 b045 Torque LADSTOP Selection 9 b046 Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection b049 Heavy Load Light Load Selection LL b089 Automatic Carrier Reduction C054 Overtorque Undertorque Selection C055 Overtorque Undertorque Level Forward Power Running C056 Overtorque Undertorque Level Reverse Regeneration C057 Overtorque Undertorque Level Reverse Power Running C058 Overtorque Undertorque Level Forward Regeneration C059 Overtorque Undertorque Signal Output Mode Selection H001 Auto tuning Selection H002 Motor Parameter 1 H202 Motor Parameter 2 H005 Speed Response 1 H205 Speed Response 2 H020 Motor 1 Parameter R1 H220 Motor 2 Parameter R1 H021 Motor 1 Parameter R2 H221 Motor 2 Parameter R2 H022 Motor 1 Parameter L 5 183 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Parameter No H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 H030 H230 H031 H231 H032 H232 H033 H233 H034 H234 P033 P034 P036 P037 P038 P039 P040 P041 5 14 Other Functions Function
372. on Functions j Switching from Commercial Power Supply Operation to Inverter Operation Switch MC1 to MC3 according to the sequence shown below Turn the CS terminal to ON and then OFF when both RUN command and CS input are ON After an elapse of the period set by Restart Standby Time b003 the Inverter will accelerate by matching the frequency to the rotation speed of the motor running freely frequency matching restart However the Inverter may restart at O Hz in the following cases The motor rotation speed is equal to or lower than 1 2 of the base rotation speed The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates The motor rotation speed dropped to below the level set by Frequency Matching Lower Limit Frequency Setting b007 Examples of Connections and Timing of Commercial Switching Operation MC2 Example of Commercial Switching Timing MC2 MC3 interlock time MC2 MC3 interlock time 0 5 to 1s 0 5 to 1s MC1 Inverter Power ON Inverter Power OFF Inverter Power ON motor MC2 Commerciale disconnected Commercial motor connected ___ s Commercial amp motor disconnected MC3 INV motor connected INV motor disconnected INV amp motor connected FW input ee CS input Frequency matching restart Motor rotation speed Free run Free run Frequency matching restart Inverter drive D Commercial power supply drive EH Inverter drive Output frequency
373. on OFF during deceleration A081 02 5 27 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACICILIZ 5 2 Basic Functions Maximum Frequency Set the maximum value of motor frequency to be used The set value corresponds to the maximum value of external analog input such as 10 V in the range from is 0 to 10 V For details refer to External Frequency Start End on page 5 40 The Inverter output voltage from the base frequency to the maximum frequency is the voltage selected by Motor Incoming Voltage Selection A082 A282 This function is disabled if the control method is Free V f Setting A044 A244 02 Refer to Free V f Setting on page 5 47 Parameter S Default Function name Unit No setting l Base Frequency 1 2 to 400 0 60 0 A004 A204 Maximum Frequency 1 2 1000 1000 0 Hz Note Data in indicates the value when the high frequency mode is selected Output voltage Motor voltage selection 100 Base frequency Maximum frequency EN Reference All parameters whose function code is 2XX apply to Motor 2 Motor 2 Control Switch between Motor 1 and Motor 2 using the input terminal allocated to 08 SET Example A020 Frequency of Motor 1 at Multi step Speed 1 Reference 0 A220 Frequency of Motor 2 at Multi step Speed 2 Reference 0 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 28 suoljoun j Functions 5 3 Input Output Terminals 5 3 Input Output Terminals The following explain
374. onitor 5 7 Input terminal response me 5 32 Integrated power monitor cece cee eeees 5 7 Internal DC injection brakunmg 5 138 Inverter mode monitor 5 10 Inverter mode selechon cece eens 5 178 sce Bp Ge ree rece ee a omer ene er er en 5 130 J N E sat PEE EPE TE EE E T EA 5 59 Jogging operation eee cccceseccsseesteeeteeeens 5 59 K ebe ee 5 7 L Be 5 24 LAD elt 5 24 Life assessment monitor 5 9 Bee 5 129 1 4 ih oO Cis EE 5 125 Low current sign 5 129 M Main circuit Iermmal cece eecneeeeeee 2 Main panel display selechon 5 87 Manual torque boost 5 49 Maximum frequency cccccccccsccsccsseesseetseens 5 28 TEE 5 131 Modbus RTU terminal resistor selector SWC EE 2 5 6 2 Momentary power interruption undervoltage 5 96 Monitor e ein tt e EEN 5 54 Monitor 2 eelechon cece eececeeeeteeeeeeees 5 134 Motor parameter selection 0010010001100100 5 145 A N EET AE AE EAEE AEE A 2 9 5 42 Multi function input monttor eee 5 3 Multi function input operation selection 5 31 Multi function output monitor 5 3 Multi function output terminal contact SEIC ION aa ae ee AN 5 34 Multi function output terminal selection 5 32 Multi function relay output terminal 5 35 Multi step position switching function 5 164 Multi step speed operation function 5 63 N NOC eea A een eRe are 5 128 O B EE 5 78 Offline auto tuning function s 000100110000 5 146 EE 5
375. ons 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Functions No Display reauirements Parameters displayed when the l ee applicable conditions are met Displayed when DC Os ea us ies injection braking is used 9 Displayed when PID is used Displayed when Co inverter communication is used Displayed during curved acceleration deceleration Displayed when controlled deceleration on power loss is used Displayed when the brake control function is used Displayed when the overvoltage suppression function during deceleration is used Displayed during simple position control is used A051 01 02 or C001 to C007 07 d004 A072 to A079 A156 A157 C044 EE C052 C053 C096 01 02 C098 to C100 P140 to P155 A097 A098 01 to 04 A131 A132 A150 to A153 A052 to A059 b050 01 02 03 b051 to b054 b120 01 b121 to b127 b130 01 02 b131 to b134 d008 P004 P011 P012 P015 P026 P003 01 P027 PO60 to P073 P075 P077 H050 H051 Note The comma in the Display requirements means OR User Setting b037 02 Displays only the parameters optionally set in U001 to U032 In addition to U001 to U032 d001 F001 b037 b190 and b191 are displayed Data Comparison Display b037 03 Displays only the parameters changed from the factory default All monitors d and F001 b190 and b191 are always displayed 5 89 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 7 Digital Operator Ope
376. oost Slip l i l A047 A247 load is applied Compensation Gain Rotation speed increases Gradually reduce the Automatic Torque Boost Slip i A047 A247 when load is applied Compensation Gain 1 Gradually reduce the Automatic Torque Boost A046 A246 Voltage Compensation Gain Overcurrent trip occurs when 2 Gradually reduce the Automatic Torque Boost Slip i A047 A247 load is applied Compensation Gain 3 Gradually reduce the Manual Torque Boost Voltage A042 A242 Setting SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 50 suoljoun Functions 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method Carrier Frequency The carrier frequency of the PWM waveform output from the Inverter can be changed Increasing the carrier frequency reduces the metallic noise from the motor However this may increase noise or leakage current from the Inverter Helps avoid mechanical or motor resonance Parameter p Default S Function name Unit No setting Heavy Load b049 00 2 0 to 15 0 10 0 Light Load b049 01 2 0 kHz 2 0 to 10 0 5 0 High frequency 2 0 to 10 0 Related functions b089 b083 Carrier Frequency Note The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity To raise the carrier frequency fc derate the output current Refer to Appendix at the end of this manual Set a derating output current value as electronic thermal level For details refer to Electronic Thermal Function on page 5 1
377. or The Inverter or converter is in good shape if the values from various parameters are nearly equal though they are not consistent depending on the types of elements or testers Tester polarity Measurement value red R L1 1 No conduction R L1 Conduction S L2 No conduction 2 S L2 Conduction qE 1 No conduction T L3 Conduction R L1 Conduction 4 R L1 No conduction S L2 N Conduction ele No conduction Conduction T L3 No conduction U T1 P 2 No conduction re ba U T1 Conduction VII No conduction 2 V T2 Conduction W T3 P 2 No conduction wm S PZ W T3 Conduction U T1 N Conduction DAS U T1 No conduction V T2 NL Conduction KA V T2 No conduction Conduction 6 W T3 No conduction m No conduction Pra re Conduction i Converter unit Inverter unit N No conduction nefa No conduction Regenerative braking unit Regenerative braking unit l I Converter unit HL Geh Z l Inverter unit SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 8 1 Inspection and Maintenance Measurement Methods of I O Voltage Current and Electric Power Below is a general measurement device for input output voltages current and electric power Measurement point Measurement device item reference Between R L1 and S All 200 V class 200 to 240 V Power L2 Er Moving iron effective 50 60Hz supply Between S L2 and T voltmeter or values 400 V cl
378. or 2 control S Input Selection The functions switchable via the SET terminal are as follows a Setting item control control F001 Output Frequency Setting F002 Acceleration Time Setting F003 Deceleration Time Setting A001 Frequency Reference Selection A002 RUN Command Selection 5 A003 Base Frequency A004 Maximum Frequency 7i A020 Multi step Speed Reference 0 A041 Torque Boost Selection 2 A042 Manual Torque Boost Voltage A043 Manual Torque Boost Frequency SS A044 Control Method A045 Output Voltage Gain A046 Automatic Torque Boost Voltage Compensation Gain A047 Automatic Torque Boost Slip Compensation Gain A061 Frequency Upper Limit A062 Frequency Lower Limit A081 AVR Selection A082 Motor Incoming Voltage Selection A092 Acceleration Time 2 A093 Deceleration Time 2 A094 2 step Acceleration Deceleration Selection A095 2 step Acceleration Frequency A096 2 step Deceleration Frequency b012 Electronic Thermal Level b013 Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection b021 Overload Limit Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 5 54 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method NA Setting item control control b022 Overload Limit Level b023 Overload Limit Parameter C041 Overload Warning Level H002 Motor Parameter H003 Motor Capacity H004 Motor Pole Number H005 Speed Response H006 Stabilization Parameter H020 Motor Parameter R1 H021 Motor Parameter R2 H022 Motor Parameter L H023 Motor Paramete
379. or reset operation are enabled 01 Both the STOP command and error reset operation are disabled 02 The STOP command is disabled and only the error reset operation is enabled STOP Key SESR Selection Soft Lock Function SFT Changing of various data can be prohibited This helps prevent data rewriting due to erroneous operation Select the soft lock setting and performing method from the following table To combine this function with a multi function input terminal allocate 15 SFT to any Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 When b031 is set to 10 the Data can be changed during RUN is enabled and only the functions specified in Chapter 4 Parameter List can be changed Take note that this function is not for locking the parameter but is the direction to reset This function can also be password protected Refer to Password Function on page 5 91 moka eter Function name Description out Unit No Sie setting ON Only b031 can be rewritten b031 can be rewritten ee lock function is disabled normal operation ron b031 and Frequency Settings F001 A020 o fa A021 to A035 A038 can be rewritten Soft Lock Soft lock function is disabled normal operation Selection Only b031 can be rewritten fe b031 and Frequency Settings F001 A020 ae A021 to A035 A038 can be rewritten b031 Data can be changed during RUN mode is enabled Only the functions specified in Chapter 4 Parameter
380. or the Modbus communication Modbus RTU error check The CRC code is a 16 bit data generated against the block of random length data in the 8 bit unit Generation of CRC codes uses the generation polynomial CRC 16 xX X19 X24 1 lt CRC 16 Calculation Example gt CRC 16 operator CRC FFFFh Target data Target data completed Bits c Remaining bit Swap the Hi and Lo bytes of CRC CR C CRC register 2 bytes CRC CRC XOR target data nnn a e ompleted CRC CRC is shifted to the right by 1 bit Overflowed bit due to the shift 1 Comoieted CRC CRC is shifted to S the right by 1 bit Shift the applicable data by 1 byte Total Communication Time The time from receiving query to the response by the Inverter will be the total of lt the silent interval 3 5 character length and C078 communication wait time setting gt If sending another query to the Inverter after receiving the response be sure to provide the silent interval length 3 5 characters at the minimum O 3 3 O D ot oO 5 TI c 5 O O 5 Normal Response If the Parameter No in the query indicates a loop back 08h writing to a coil s O5h OFh or writing to a holding register s O6h 10h the Inverter returns a response whose content is the same as the query If the Parameter No in the query indicates reading from a coil 01h or reading from a holding register 03h a r
381. otation Prevention Selection Heavy Load b049 Light Load Selection Others Torque limit Other SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI Function name 4 2 Function Mode Data can Default be set Eat Monitor or data range Set data i changed Page setting during d n RUN RUN O Reduced voltage startup time short to 255 Reduced 2 no yes 5 58 voltage startup time long 00 Complete display 01 Individual display of functions 02 User setting b037 04 no yes 5 88 03 Data comparison display 04 Basic display 05 Monitor display only 000 Screen on which the Enter key was last pressed 001 to 060 d001 to d060 CH nee e SS 201 F001 202 Do not use this setting 00 Disabled 00 Four quadrant separate setting 01 Terminal switching no yes 02 Analog voltage input 03 Optional board 8 jk i 200 no yes ol 0 to 200 o no Torque limit disabled 200 no yes Disabled Disabled Heavy load mode 4 20 1SI7 JoJOWIeIeY Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode 4 21 Parameter No Function name Controlled b050 Deceleration on Power Loss Controlled deceleration on power loss Deceleration b052 Hold Level of Ctrl Decel Deceleration b053 Time of Ctrl Decel Window Comparator FV SEN Upper Limit Level Window b061 Comparator FV Lower Limit Level Window b062 Comparator FV Hysteresis Width Window Comparator FI SE Upper Limit Level Window b064
382. ote 3 If the wiring distance exceeds 20 m the power cable size must be increased Note 4 A H IV wire 75 C is recommended Note 5 Use an earth leakage breaker ELB to ensure safety Note 6 To meet the UL standards always insert a UL standard fuse of class J type on the power supply side Note 7 Use a ground wire with a larger diameter than that of the power cable shown above Note 8 Tighten the terminal block screws with the specified torque If the screws are not tightened securely short circuiting or fire may occur Excessive tightening may cause damage to the terminal block or the Inverter Note 9 Choose the sensitivity current of the earth leakage breaker ELB depending on the total distance between the Inverter and the power supply and the Inverter and the motor Also use an earth leakage breaker of time delay type Use of a high speed type may result in malfunction Note 10 If a CV wire is used and routed through a metal pipe the leakage current becomes 30 mA km Note 11 Due to the higher specific inductive capacity of the IV wire the leakage current increases about eight times Accordingly use a wire with a sensitivity current of eight times the applicable level shown in the table below Also use a CV wire if the total wiring length exceeds 100 m Voltage output class Tightening torque Breaker ELB Total wiring length Sensitivity current mA 100 m max 50 300 m max 100 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER
383. oversight Please mark your manuals so that the corrections are noted on the pages concerned and then securely add any required pages from this Notification to the rear of the manual E Applicable Manual e This Notification applies to the SYSDRIVE MX2 Series Multi function Compact Inverter User s Manual that was issued in March 2010 Cat No 1570 E1 02 1 Relevant location Page 2 8 Digital Specifications in Control Circuit Terminals E Additional Information Multi function Select 7 functions from Voltage between each input terminal among 59 and allocate input and PSC them to terminals S1 ON voltage 18 V min through S7 EB Both sink OFF voltage 3 V max and source logics are Allowable max voltage 27 supported For details refer VDC to Connection to Load current 5 mA at 24 Programmable Controller PLC on page 2 22 Safety input Enabled when the safety function selector switch is turned ON For details refer to Safety Function on page 5 170 94 GS2 S3 GS1 2 Relevant location Page 5 172 Wiring Example E Additional Information When using the EDM function we recommend that you use the following wiring example to connect to the Safety Controller G9SP series Safety Controller MX2 series Inverter Safety Output Safety Output 24V DC 15 Test Output Safety Input When connecting to more that one Safety Controller or when connecting to other safety devices use the above di
384. ow Current signal UE TEE 5 129 Operation Ready HI 5 130 Signal During Forward Operation EWERT 9 130 Signal During Reverse Operation RV 5 131 Fatal Faut Signal MJA EE 5 131 Window Comparator WCFV WCFI Disconnection Detection FVdc Fldc 5 132 Frequency Command Source FREE 5 133 RUN Command Source REF 9 133 Motor 2 Selection GE IM 5 134 5 10 TE date EE 5 135 DC Injection Braking DR 9 135 Regenerative Braking Funchon 5 141 Brake Control FUNCTION EE 9 142 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control cccccesseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 5 144 Sensorless Vector Control 5 144 Motor Parameter Selection ccccccccecces eee eeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeees 9 145 Offline Auto TUNING FUNCTION cece ceeeceeeeeeeese sete eeseeeeaeeeaes 5 146 Torque Monitor Funchon 5 151 Overtorque Undertorque Selection OTO 9 152 Forgue Limit FUNCUON nice ice eis cee eens 5 153 Torque EADS TOP Function EE 5 155 TORQUE CONUO EE 5 156 Torque Bias Funchon eee eeceeceeceeseeeceseeeeeeseeseeseeeees 5 156 Reverse Rotation Prevention FUN ction c cccceceeeeeeeeeeneees 5 157 5 12 Simple Position Control FUNCtiON cccccsseeeeeeeeeees 5 158 Encoder Connection assensus aa 5 158 Simple Position Control Mode 5 160 Multi step Position Switching Function CP1 CP2 CP3 5 164 Speed Position Switching Function GD 5 167 Zero Retu RUNCHON Eet 5 168 9 13 Darely FUNGON E 5 170 Overview
385. ow the ON level the regenerative braking circuit turns OFF 5 141 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 10 Brake Settings Brake Control Function This function allows the Inverter to control the external brake of an elevating system When Brake Control Function Selection b120 is set to 01 Enabled the Inverter operates as follows 1 At RUN command input the Inverter starts output and accelerates to the release frequency 2 After the reaching to the release frequency the Inverter outputs the brake release signal BRK after the Brake Release Wait Time b121 elapses However if the Inverter s output current is less than the current value set in Brake Release Current b126 the Inverter does not output the brake release signal In this case the Inverter trips and outputs the brake error signal BER 3 When Brake Confirmation 44 BOK is set for a multi function input terminal and a brake release signal is output the Inverter waits for a brake confirmation signal without accelerating for the period set in Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 If the brake confirmation signal does not turn on within the period set in b124 the Inverter outputs the brake error signal BER resulting in trip If the brake confirmation signal is not allocated to a multi function input brake confirmation wait time b124 is disabled and the Inverter performs processing 4 after the brake release signal is output 4 Af
386. ower Limit 1 A062 ase Starting Frequency b082 Output Frequency Setting F001 Multi ke step Speed 1 Reference 0 A020 was Starting Frequency b082 Jogging Frequency A038 unae Output Frequency Setting F001 Multi Jump frequency SE step Speed 1 Reference 0 A020 A063 A065 A067 A064 A066 A068 WEE Multi step Speed References 1 to 15 A021 to A035 Hng 1 Free V f ee eC 7 b112 Bettener E Frequency Upper Limit 1 A061 Hoe Free V f EE 7 b112 E Lower Limit 1 A062 WAOE Free a Frequency 7 b112 ies Frequency Setting F001 Multi eines step Speed 1 Reference 0 A020 He i Frequency Upper Limit 2 A261 Maximum Frequency 2 A204 Bene Frequency Lower Limit 2 Frequency Lower Limit 2299 z Maximum Frequency 2 A204 Lescol A Frequency Setting F001 med Maximum Frequency 2 A204 step Speed 2 Reference 0 A220 Lu we Output Frequency Setting F001 Multi Frequency Upper Limit 2 A261 ee or step Speed 2 Reference 0 A220 Ge Frequency Lower Limit 2 A262 Output Frequency Setting F001 Multi SERE step Speed 2 Reference 0 A220 wos Starting Frequency b082 Frequency Upper Limit 2 A261 BEER a e Frequency b082 e e a Frequency Lower Limit 2 A262 MEET Starting Frequency b082 bei SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Output Frequency Setting F001 Multi step Speed 2 Reference 0 A220 Warning display Lt Si mrs LII I mea pS OC ZC Li a 3 a a 7 1
387. p after deceleration stop 02 Ignore 03 Free run stop Deceleration stop Selection of Operating 13A8h Level on Digital Operator b165 R W Disconnection 13A9h to Reserved 13ADh Selection disabled SAE Inverter Niode Selecion bizt Ray oh naucton motor 5 178 High frequency induction motor 13AFh to Reserved 13B6h Perform Initialization Initialization disabled b180 R W Perform initialization mode selection 13B8h to Not used Inaccessible 1400h There are no corresponding registers in Modbus communications for parameters b150 b160 and b161 13B7h 5 174 Mode Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Multi function Input 1 EZ Selection Multi function Input 2 SES Selection Multi function Input 3 Ee Selection Multi function Input 4 oe Selection Multi function Input 5 oo Selection Multi function Input 6 EEN Selection Multi function Input 7 Selection 1407h Parameter C001 C002 C003 C004 C005 C006 C007 H SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Monitor and setting Data Page parameters resolution 00 FW Forward 01 RV Reverse 02 CF1 Multi step speed 1 03 CF2 Multi step speed 2 04 CF3 Multi step speed 3 05 CF4 Multi step speed 4 06 JG Jogging 07 DB External
388. peration C sn EE STOP RESET Error Stop Error occurred occurred STOP RESET Reset SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals External Trip EXT Use this function to trip the Inverter via an error signal generated from a peripheral system In this case allocate 12 EXT to any Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 When the EXT terminal is turned ON E12 is displayed and the Inverter trips to shut off the output When the Inverter has tripped indicating E12 the trip will not be reset even if the error signal from external equipment is reset EXT terminal is turned OFF To reset the trip perform the reset operation or turn the power off and on again Parameter No C001 to C007 Do not turn on the EXT terminal after shutting off the power The fault monitor data may not be stored correctly RUN command PW RY PO EXT terminal input E E Free run H 2 ae Motor rotation speed ZS RS reset input AL output alarm signal Thermistor Trip Function This function enables thermal protection of the external equipment e g motor if its internal thermistor is connected to the Inverter Connect a PTC thermistor The Inverter will be tripped E35 when the resistance of the PTC thermistor exceeds approximately 3 kQ To trip the Inverter at less than 3 kQ increase the value of C085 To trip the Inverter a
389. peration Modbus RTU A142 Frequency 05 Optional board 1 Enabled when the Digital Operator with Volume 3G3AX OP01 is connected SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 14 1SI7 JeJOWIeIe Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range pera Page setting Operation 00 Addition A141 A142 Function 01 Subtraction A141 A142 gt oe Operator 02 Multiplication A141 x SE S Selection A142 gt oO E A145 Be i Ee Hz 5 Amount Setting 100 0 to 400 0 1000 D E 00 Frequency reference 5 71 6 requency A145 A146 Addition Sign l l 01 Frequency reference Selection A145 O O Acceleration Deceleration O EL S Shape A150 Acceleration Curve Ratio 1 EL S Shape A151 Acceleration Curve Ratio 2 0 to 50 EL S Shape A152 Deceleration Curve Ratio 1 EL S Shape A153 Deceleration Curve Ratio 2 A154 Deceleration 0 00 to 99 99 2 Stop Frequency 100 0 to 400 0 1000 E 5 62 5 Deceleration O A155 0 0 to 60 0 Stop Time hacg Gren 0 00 to 99 99 d 100 0 to 400 0 1000 a Operation Level A PID Sleep Delay Time 0 0 to 25 5 VR Start 0 00 to 99 99 Frequency 100 0 to 400 0 1000 VR End 0 00 to 99 99 Frequency 100 0 to 400 0 1000 163 VR Start Ratio 0 to VR End Ratio 164 VR End Ratio VR Start Ratio to 100 00 Use Start Frequency A161 5 73 DIE ech ech O O N O O
390. perature of the E21 0 Is the installation direction temperature main circuit exceeds the specified vertical value due to a high ambient Check the installation temperature etc Is the ambient temperature high Lower the temperature CPU A trip will occur if the built in CPU E22 D Is there any large noise communication experiences a communication source around error malfunction or error Countermeasures against noise p Faulty inverter Repair Main circuit A trip will occur if the main circuit board E25 U Is there any large noise error generates an error source around Countermeasures against noise p Faulty inverter Repair Driver error This error is detected by the driver IC E30 0 Is there any output short mounted in the Inverter circuit A trip will occur upon occurrence of Check the output wiring momentary overcurrent abnormal Is there any ground fault main element temperature or drop in Check the output wiring main element drive power in order to and motor protect the main element Operation Has the main element been 7 cannot be restarted following this trip damaged Check the IGBT Is there any clogging in the fan Clean the fins Thermistor A trip will occur upon detection of E35 D Is the motor temperature too error abnormal temperature based on the high resistance of the external thermistor if Check the temperature the thermistor input function is enabled
391. pply Inverter output Free run Motor rotation a Geer a YI etla Example 3 Motor frequency rotation speed gt b007 Power supply Inverter output ow 3 ZH PO Motor frequency 2 A rotation speedy TTT E A EE r Frequency matching restart Jt R oO Example 4 Motor frequency rotation speed lt b007 Power supply Inverter output Free run b007 ea B o 0 Hz restart SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 98 suoioun 5 8 Restart Functions i Alarm Signal Output upon Momentary Power Interruption Undervoltage during Stop Use b004 to select whether to enable an alarm signal output in case of momentary power interruption or undervoltage An alarm signal output continues while the Inverter control power supply remains Alarm Signal Output upon Momentary Power Interruption Undervoltage during Stop Example 1 b004 00 Disabled RUN command Output frequency AL output alarm signal RS input reset Example 2 b004 01 Enabled RUN command Output frequency AL output alarm signal RS input reset Functions Example 3 b004 02 Disabled also during deceleration stop RUN command Output frequency 4 d l AL output 2 alarm signal RS input reset 5 99 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 8 Restart Functions Reset RS
392. press torque reduction at a low speed range To select the automatic torque boost for A041 A241 set Motor Capacity H0O03 H203 and Motor Pole Number H004 H204 according to your motor Parameter Default Function name i Unit No setting 00 Manual torque boost nna e O Selection 1 2 01 Automatic torque boost Manual 0 0 to 20 0 5 E Torque Boost Voltage 1 2 Ratio to motor voltage A082 A282 G Manual Torque Boost 0 0 to 50 0 S PURSES Frequency 1 2 Ratio to base frequency A003 A203 ow a H003 H203 Motor Capacity 1 2 0 1 to 18 5 Eo kW setting H004 H204 Motor Pole Number 1 2 2 4 6 8 10 pole Automatic Torque Boost 0 to 255 A046 A246 Voltage Compensation Refer to Automatic Torque Boost on 100 Gain 1 2 page 5 50 l Automatic Torque Boost 0 to 255 A047 A247 Slip Compensation Gain Refer to Automatic Torque Boost on 1 2 page 5 50 i Manual Torque Boost Outputs the voltage set in A042 A242 or A043 A243 In A042 A242 set a ratio based on the voltage set in the motor voltage selection as 100 The ratio set here corresponds to the output frequency of 0 Hz If you raise the set value of the manual torque boost be careful about motor overexcitation Otherwise the motor may burn out The Manual Torque Boost Frequency A043 A243 is set in percentage terms based on the base frequency as 100 Switch between Controls 1 2 using the SET terminal which is a multi function input terminal to which 08
393. put S1 S2 S3 GS1 S4 GS2 S5 TH s6 S7 EB Terminals Query Field name Sg Slave address 01 Parameter No 01 Coil start address MSB 2 00 Coil start address LSB 06 HE address Coil number 1 Number of coils MSB 00 Number of coils LSB 07 CRC 16 LSB 9D CRC 16 LSB CO Field name pany Slave address i Input terminal S7 EB Parameter No 01 Input terminal S1 Number of data bytes 01 Coil data 45 45h 0100 0101 CRC 16 MSB 90 CRC 16 LSB 7B 1 Broadcasting cannot be performed 2 Note that the coil start address is 0006 which is smaller by 1 than the coil number 0007 The coil number less 1 corresponds to the coil address 3 Transfers the byte length data The most significant byte data received first indicates the younger coil address SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 6 8 uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No The data received as the response shows the statuses of coils 0007h to OOODh The received data 45h 0100 0101b is read as shown in the preceding page where the status of coil 0007h represents the LSB If the reading coil exceeds the defined coil range in the final coil data such coil data is regarded as 0 and returned Refer to Exceptional Response on page 6 18 if the coil status read command was unsuccessful Example If the statuses of 16 coils are read from Coil No 0001h the data sequence will
394. que Reference Monitor IdOO0O 5 5 Torque Bias Monitor IOO710l esse eeseeeeaeeenes 5 6 Output Torque Monitor IoO 12 5 6 Output Voltage Monitor TdO 3 5 6 Input Power Monitor JdO 1AT 5 7 Integrated Power Monitor TOO12 5 7 Total RUN Time dp 5 8 POWer ON TIME OO 104 EE 5 8 Fin Temperature Monitor dO18 cc ccccceecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeees 5 8 Life Assessment Monitor IdO272 5 9 Position Command Monitor TdO 2091 5 9 Current Position Monitor IdO 3201 5 9 User Selection Monitor 2 Types IdO20 5 10 Inverter Mode Monitor Idol 5 10 Faul C nter GOGO hn rnn aa 5 11 Fault Monitors 1 to 6 d081 to 086 eee eeeee sees sense eeees 5 11 Warning Monitor 090 DEE 5 11 DC Voltage Monitor TdiO2 5 12 Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor d103 5 12 Electronic Thermal Load Rate Monitor d104 eee 5 12 5 2 Basic Functions E 5 13 Heavy Load Light Load Gelechon 5 13 Frequency Reference Selection and Output Frequency Setting 5 15 RUN Command Selection c ccccccccsececeeeceeeeseeeseesseeeseeeeaeeeees 5 22 RUN Direction Selection EE 5 23 Rotation Direction Limit Selection ccc eccceecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 5 23 SOD SGIC beet Ee ee 5 24 Acceleration Deceleration Time ccccecccseeceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeaees 5 24 Base Frequency Ee 5 26 AVR FUNCION soree E E aa a aS 5 27 Maxim m FreguUentCysnedscns a a i 5 28 5 3 Input Outp
395. que limit switching 2 44 BOK Brake confirmation 46 LAC LAD cancel 47 PCLR Position deviation clear 50 ADD Frequency addition 51 F TM Forced terminal block 52 ATR Torque reference input permission 53 KHC Integrated power clear 56 Reserved 57 Reserved 58 Reserved 59 Reserved 60 Reserved 61 Reserved 62 Reserved 65 AHD Analog command held 66 CP1 Position command selection 1 67 CP2 Position command selection 2 68 CP3 Position command selection 3 69 ORL Zero return limit signal 70 ORG Zero return startup signal 73 SPD Speed position switching 77 GS1 GS1 input C003 only 78 GS2 GS2 input C004 only 81 485 Start co inverter communication 82 Reserved 83 HLD Retain output frequency 84 ROK Permission of RUN command 85 EB Rotation direction detection C007 only 86 DISP Display fixed no NO Not assigned 5 29 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 26 1SI7 JoJOWeIe Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode 4 27 Parameter No Multi function input terminal Function name Multi function Input Terminal 1 Operation Selection Multi function Input Terminal 2 Operation Selection Multi function Input Terminal 3 Operation Selection Multi function Input Terminal 4 Operation Selection Multi function Input Terminal 5 Operation Selection Multi function Input Terminal 6 Operation Selection Multi function I
396. quirements of any government authority Shipping Delivery Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron a Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron Omron will not drop ship except in break down situations b Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer c All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point unless oth erwise stated in writing by Omron at which point title and risk of loss shall pass from Omron to Buyer provided that Omron shall retain a security inter est in the Products until the full purchase price is paid d Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only and e Omron will package Products as it deems proper for protection against nor mal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions Claims Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the Products occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original trans portation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products from Omron in the condition claimed Warranties a Exclusive Warranty Omron s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron or such other period expressed in writing by Omron Omron disclaims all other
397. r Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name S No No parameters resolution Window Comparator FV ee 0 to 10 upper limit b061 Page o oo Hysteresis Width b062 2 EES Window Comparator FI 0 to 100 lower limit b064 g ed Upper Limit Level GE b065 x 2 en Sa Window Comparator FI 0 to 100 upper limit b063 Sec Lower Limit Level BS b065 x 2 be Window Comparator FI 0 to 10 upper limit b063 S pean Hysteresis Width Ge b064 2 A 1345h to Reserved 1348h 1349h Analog Operation Level b070 R w 0 to 100 255 no 1 at FV Disconnection Soe 134Ah Analog Operation Leve rei Raw 0 to 100 255 no 1 at Fl Disconnection 134Bh to Reserved 134Dh 134Eh Ambient Temperature b075 10 to 50 1 C 5 127 134Fh to Reserved 1350h 00 Disabled 1351h Integrated Power Clear b078 R W 01 Clear Return to 00 after clear 1352h Integrated Power Display b079 R W 1 to 1000 Scale 5 7 1 1353h Reserved 1354h 1355h Starting Frequency b082 R W 10 to 999 10000 0 01 Hz 5 57 1356h Carrier Frequency b083 R W 20 to 150 100 0 1 kHz 5 51 00 Initialization disabled 01 Fault monitor clear 02 Initializes data 1357h Initialization Selection b084 R W 1358h Initialization Data b085 Selection 1359h Frequency Conversion b086 Coefficient 135Ah STOP Key Selection 03 Fault monitor clear Data initialization 04 Do not set 5 174
398. r Output terminal status status MA MC MB MC SE e pe ee C036 Power Set value supply ON OFF ON FF value O oven Ose Resistance load Inductive load Max contact 250 VAC 2A 250 VAC 0 2 A capacity 30 VDC 3A 30 VDC 0 6 A MA MC Min contact 100 VAC 10 mA Capacity 5 VDC 100 mA Max contact 250 VAC 1A 250 VAC 0 2 A capacity 30 VDC 1A 30 VDC 0 2 A MB MC Min contact 100 VAC 10 mA Capacity 5 VDC 100 mA Functions 5 35 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 3 Input Output Terminals Output Signal Delay Hold Function ON delay OFF delay times can be set for each output terminal All output signals immediately turn ON OFF when the specified conditions are satisfied Depending on the selected signal chattering may occur In such a case use this function to hold or delay the signal Set the output terminals a total of three terminals corresponding to multi function outputs P1 EDM and P2 and multi function relay outputs MA MB and MC one by one For the output terminals and the corresponding parameters refer to the table below Output terminal OFF delay time P1 EDM C131 Relays MA MB MC C141 Parameter No Function name Default setting C130 C132 Output P1 EDM ON 9 9 to 100 0 Delay Time C131 C133 Output P1 EDM OFF 9 9 to 100 0 Delay Time C140 Output RY ON Delay 9 9 to 100 0 nm Time C141 Output RY OFF Delay 9 9 to 100 0 om Time SYSDRIV
399. r cause damage to the capacitor or surge absorber If the cable length exceeds 20 m particularly with 400 V class a surge voltage may be generated at the motor terminal depending on stray capacitance or inductance of the cable causing the motor to burn out To suppress surge voltage we offer a special filter 3G3AX NF xxx For details contact our authorized dealer To connect several motors provide a thermal relay for each The RC value of each thermal relay should be 1 1 times larger than the motor rated current The relay may trip earlier depending on the cable length In this case connect an AC reactor to the Inverter output j DC Reactor Connection Terminal 1 P 2 This terminal is used to connect the optional DC reactor By factory default a shorting bar has been connected between terminals 1 and P 2 Before connecting the DC reactor remove this shorting bar The length of the DC reactor connection cable should be 5 m or shorter If the DC reactor is not being used do not remove the shorting bar If you remove the shorting bar without connecting the DC reactor no power is supplied to the Inverter main circuit disabling operation SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 2 2 Wiring i External Braking Resistor Connection Terminal P 2 RB Regenerative Braking Unit Connection Terminal P 2 N All models in the 3G3MX2 Series have a built in regenerative braking circuit To improve braking cap
400. r lo H024 Motor Parameter J H030 Motor Parameter R1 Auto tuning Data H031 Motor Parameter R2 Auto tuning Data H032 Motor Parameter L Auto tuning Data 5 H033 Motor Parameter lo Auto tuning Data H034 Motor Parameter J Auto tuning Data There s no indication of control functions 1 2 on the display You ll see which one is enabled by checking whether the terminal is turned on off The control functions 1 2 cannot be switched during operation Switching is possible only while operation is stopped which means that the functions will switch after the operation stops e c O prar O LL SET terminal OFF Control 1 motor 1 OFF Control 2 motor 2 Inverter 5 55 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operation Functions 5 6 Operation Functions The following explains the parameters relating to operation functions 3 wire Input Function STA STP F R 3 wire input refers to a RUN command method which is useful when the Inverter is to be run and stopped using auto reset contacts such as pushbutton switches Set RUN Command Selection A002 to 01 Control circuit terminal block When 20 STA 21 STP and 22 F R are allocated to Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 the operation shown in below figure becomes possible Allocating the STP terminal disables the FW and RV terminals are disabled Parameter Default Function name i Unit No setting 20 STA 3 wi
401. r of frequency and motor Selection H001 to 02 poles according to the motor voltage selection according LN ratings to the motor ratings SE Motor capacity Base frequency Number of motor poles motor wattage After the auto tuning the Starts the automatic Step 4 Issue a RUN result is displayed operation command according to the setting of RUN Command Successful Selection A002 RUN b Aborted b Step 5 After the operation is completed use the STOP RESET key to cancel Issuing a RUN command starts automatic operation in the the result display following sequence ese RESET 1 1st AC excitation The motor does not rotate d D 2 2nd AC excitation The motor does not rotate d IG 3 1st DC excitation The motor does not rotate J Step 6 Reflect the 4 V f control operation The motor rotates until 80 of the base automatically measured frequency motor parameters in the operation data 5 Sensorless vector control operation The motor rotates until x of the base frequency A DE _ 6 2nd DC excitation The motor does not rotate i 7 The auto tuning result is displayed D If the motor does not rotate H001 01 is selected steps 4 and 5 are not performed The rotation frequency in step 5 is defined as follows if T represents the acceleration time or deceleration time in step 4 whichever i
402. ration Functions i Basic Display b037 04 The basic parameters are displayed factory defaults The following parameters are displayed when this function is enabled No Parameter No Function name 1 d001 to d104 Monitor Display 2 FOO1 Output Frequency Setting 3 F002 Acceleration Time Setting 1 4 F003 Deceleration Time Setting 1 5 F004 RUN Direction Selection 6 A001 Frequency Reference Selection 1 7 A002 RUN Command Selection 1 8 A003 Base Frequency 1 9 A004 Maximum Frequency 1 zech 0 A005 FV FI Selection 11 A020 Multi step Speed 1 Reference OU 12 A021 Multi step Speed Reference 1 13 A022 Multi step Speed Reference 2 14 A023 Multi step Speed Reference 3 15 A044 Control Method 1 16 A045 Output Voltage Gain 1 17 A085 RUN Mode Selection 18 b001 Retry Selection 19 b002 Allowable Momentary Power Interruption Time 20 b008 Overvoltage Overcurrent Restart Selection 21 b011 Overvoltage Overcurrent Restart Standby Time 22 b037 Display Selection 23 b083 Carrier Frequency 24 b084 Initialization Selection Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection During Deceleration N Gu b130 26 b131 Overvoltage Suppression Level During Deceleration 27 b180 Perform lInitialization Mode Selection 28 b190 Password A Setting 29 b191 Password A Authentication 30 C021 Multi function Output Terminal P1 EDM Selection 31 C022 Multi function Output Terminal P2 Selection 32 C036 Multi function Relay Output MA MB Contact Selection
403. ration and perform positioning before the speed command value is reached If the position command is 0 DC injection braking DB is applied immediately when the RUN command is turned ON The position at power on is recognized as the zero position 0 When the power is turned off the current value is cleared If the current position counter exceeds the specified position range a Position Control Range Trip E83 occurs and the Inverter runs freely If the PCLR terminal is allocated turning ON the PCLR terminal clears the current position counter The internal position deviation counter is cleared simultaneously In Reset Selection C102 select 03 Trip reset only If Reset Selection C102 is not set to 03 turning ON the Inverter s reset terminal STOP RESET key clears the current position counter To operate the Inverter by using the current position count value after resetting a trip by turning ON the reset terminal STOP RESET key be sure to set Reset Selection C102 to 03 EN Reference In the simple position control mode the direction of RUN command FW RV does not indicate the rotation direction The FW or RV signal starts or stops the Inverter The Inverter runs forward when Target position Current position is a positive value or runs in reverse when it is a negative value In the simple position control mode the ATR terminal is disabled Torque control is disabled Multi step Position Switching
404. rding to the target to be protected 2 Enter a desired password in Password Setting b190 b192 Note that 0000 cannot be used AAA Deel bere Ea AP e 90 2550 aso The dot indicates The blinking digit moves to the left 1 The blinking digit moves to the right that a password is currently set 3 The password locked condition is obtained b037 b031 can no longer be changed Password Authentication When a Person Who Knows the Password Changes the Data of b037 b031 4 Enter the password in Password Setting b191 b193 VW T for 1s A lol Displayed for 1 s REES Ca 5 If the password is correct Good is displayed and become editable If the password is incorrect Err is displayed and the system returns to the original condition password locked condition in 3 If no operation is performed for 10 minutes or the power is reconnected the system automatically returns to the password locked condition in 3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 92 suoinoun Functions 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Functions 9 93 Password Change 6 Perform password authentication The password cannot be changed in the password locked condition in 3 0000 is displayed 7 Enter a desired password in Password Setting b190 b192 AP AP A EA EAE gt gt gt gt 8 When the password is changed the system automatically switches t
405. re displays the data for Output Frequency Monitor d001 again However the selected mode continues to cycle among the function groups while the Mode Key is held according to the designed operation of the key Example A001 gt F001 b001 C001 Elapse of 3 seconds followed by display of 50 00 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 3 4 uoljeiado D 3 1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator i Operation Example in the Individual Input Mode If the parameter or data to be changed is far away from the currently displayed value use the individual input mode to change the parameter efficiently Step1 Increment Decrement Step2 Move the blinking digit to the Press the Enter key keys are pressed left right using the Mode Key and while the least simultaneously Enter key and change the value significant bit is using the Increment Decrement blinking to confirm the SE keys setting A The most significant digit blinks The individual input mode is effective regardless of whether a parameter or data Is currently displayed Parameter display ZE Pressed simultaneously d col v7 d A At Jean ee F008 ee F608 i je F808 A c O ul be Q O d sl la ailes sais amp A P A P A P A P The symbol digit blinks The 100 s digit blinks so The 10 s digit blinks so The 10 s digit blinks so so increase decrease the increase decrease the increase decrease the increase decrease th
406. re shows an emergency stop pushbutton switch Safety Unit G9SX GS226 T15 RC Certified under the applicable safety standards IEC61508 1ISO13849 When the emergency stop button is pressed the current flowing through GS1 and GS2 is cut off and the Inverter output is cut off As a result the motor enters a free run status This operation corresponds to stop category 0 under IEC60204 1 Note 1 Shown above are wirings that apply when the multi function input terminals are used based on the source logic If they are used based on the sink logic the wiring must be changed For details refer to Connection to Programmable Controller PLC on page 2 22 Note 2 The safety relay and emergency shutoff input signal line must use a shielded coaxial cable such as RG174 U by LAPP per MIL C17 or KX3B per NF C 93 550 with an outer diameter of 2 8 mm and length of 20 m or less Ground the shield Note 3 All inductor parts such as relays and contactors must have an overvoltage protection circuit g Example of System Components Shown below is an example of peripherals conforming to the applicable safety standards which are recommended as system components name G9SA G9SA301 301 OMRON Corporation IS013849 2 cat4 SIL3 G9SX pies oes G 226 T15 RC OMRON Corporation IEC61508 SIL1 3 NE1A NE1A SCPU01 V 1 OMRON Corporation IEC61508 GI Date of certification 06 06 2007 04 11 2004 27 09 2006 The Inverter meets the P
407. re start C001 to coo7 Multi function Ti emp 3 wire stop Input Selection 22 F R 3 wire forward reverse A002 Related functions ON OFF STA input start ON STP input stop F R input forward reverse switching Output frequency SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 56 suoljoun j Functions 5 6 Operation Functions Wiring Example When STA STP and F R are Allocated to Multi function Input Terminals 1 to 3 GS1 F R STP STA setting setting setting S5 TH S4 GS2 Forward Stop Start reverse NC contact NO contact In the case of 3 wire input STOP STP input is used with NC contact Take note that it is not necessary to set the output selection to NC for the Multi function Input Terminal Operation Selection C011 to C017 to which the STP input is allocated Starting Frequency Set the frequency for starting Inverter output when the RUN signal is turned on Use mainly to adjust the starting torque With Starting Frequency b082 set high the starting current should increase Therefore the current may exceed the overload limit and overcurrent protection may work to cause a trip Parameter i Default Function name Unit No setting goe Starting 0 10 to 9 99 100 00 ge Frequency RUN command mW ween JL Output frequency Output voltage SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operation Functions Reduced Voltage St
408. red The output current need not be derated for models denoted as Not required in the above table Use each model within the specified rated ranges Appendix 1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Appendix 1 Derating Table Models Not Requiring Derating 40 C Side by side 50 C Normal installation 40 C Side by side 50 C Normal installation Heavy load rating Light load rating 100 100 80 80 60 60 40 40 20 20 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 kHz 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 kHz Carrier frequency Carrier frequency Models Requiring Derating AU C Normal installation Individual installation 40 C Side by side installation 3G3MX2 A2002 sseeaseeeaeeeeeeeee 50 C Normal installation Individual installation Heavy load rating 1 6 A Light load rating 1 9 A 40 C Normal installation 40 C Side by side 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 kHz 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kHz Carrier frequency Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 AB004 Heavy load rating 3 0 A Light load rating 3 5 A E IT D E PTIT ET ET E E E TTE A 6 8 10 12 14 16kHz 6 8 10 12 14 kHz Carrier frequency Carrier frequency SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACILILID Appendix 2 Appendix 1 Derating Table 3G3MX2 A2004 Heavy load rating 3 0 A Light load rating 3 5 A E TE D E E E D EE HTH TTT TTT 40 C Normal installation A0 C Side by side e 40 C Normal installation A0
409. red at the location approximately 5 cm from the bottom center of the Inverter Panel interior temperature is applied if the Inverter is stored in a control panel Note 2 The smoothing capacitor which will deteriorate because of the chemical reaction caused by the temperatures of the parts should normally be replaced once every 10 years which is the expected design life and not guaranteed However if the ambient temperature is high or the Inverter is used with its rated current exceeded for example under overload conditions its life will be significantly shortened Appendix 7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output Appendix 3 Life Alarm Output When the product life becomes close to the end for limited life parts including the on board smoothing capacitor or cooling fan but excluding the main circuit smoothing capacitor an alarm can be output through the self diagnostic function Use it as a reference of the parts replacement period This alarm is output through the self diagnosis based on the expected design life not a guaranteed value Therefore it has a margin of error depending on your environment or operation conditions For details refer to Life Assessment Monitor d022 on page 5 9 Multi function Output Terminal Selection on page 5 32 and Multi function Output Terminal Contact Selection on page 5 34 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Appendix 8
410. rent voltage values are sufficiently away from the tripping values SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 3 4 Tripping 3 4 Tripping SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Upon detecting an error overcurrent overload etc during operation the Inverter cuts off the output to the motor to protect the motor and Inverter At the same time the ALARM LED indicator is lit and an error code is displayed Tripping refers to this series of operations When a tripping occurs the motor goes into free run status Identify the cause of the error from the displayed error code and remove the cause A RUN command is not accepted during a tripping To reset a tripping press the STOP RESET key If a Reset 18 RS is allocated to the multi function input terminal switching the reset input from ON to OFF resets a tripping Note however that a tripping may not be reset depending on the cause of the tripping In such case reconnect the power Also confirm the RUN command and various other input signals thoroughly before executing a reset If the RUN command signal remains ON the Inverter will restart immediately after the reset Overview of Operation upon Tripping Normal operation Error occurred Display example V EEE For details on error codes 255 refer to Error Code List in page 7 2 Output shut off a ARS l l A fess Il Ul 1 oil sl K ail Free ru
411. requency 2 of the maximum frequency Hz Parameter 7 Default g Function name i Unit No setting Arrival Frequency 9 9 During Acceleration acceleration Does not output arrival signal during C042 C045 Arrival Frequency 0 01 to 400 0 1000 During Outputs arrival signal during Acceleration 2 acceleration l Arrival Frequency 0 0 During GE ee arrival signal during eceleration c043 Cc046 Deceleration Hz Arrival Frequency 0 01 to 400 0 1000 During Outputs arrival signal during Deceleration 2 deceleration Multi function 01 FA1 Constant speed reached ouput Termina 02 FA2 Set frequency min reached Selection 06 FA3 Set frequency only Multi function 3 Relay Output 24 FA4 Set frequency min reached 2 Function Selection 25 FA5 Set frequency only 2 C021 to C022 C026 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 AO0000 5 122 suoljoun Functions 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals i Constant speed reached 01 FA1 This signal is output when the frequency reaches the level set by Frequency Setting F001 A020 A220 or any of Multi step Speed References 1 to 15 A021 to A035 Set frequency Output frequency FA1 output IT fon 1 of the maximum frequency foff 2 of the maximum frequency Example Maximum frequency fmax 120 Hz Set frequency fset 60 Hz fon 120 x 0 01 1 2 Hz foff 120 x 0 02
412. ress is 0011h which is smaller by 1 than the register number 0012h The register number less 1 corresponds to the register address Writing Into the Coil 05h Writes into 1 coil The following table shows the coil status change Coil status Data OFF ON ON OFF Written data MSB FFh 00h Written data LSB 00h 00h Example Issue a RUN command to the Inverter whose slave address is 1 The RUN command selection must be set to Communication A002 03 The coil number of the RUN command is 0001 N 6 10 uoipuny UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No Query Field name pring Slave address 01 Parameter No 05 Coil address MSB 2 00 Coil address LSB 00 Coil address Coil number 1 Written data MSB FF Written data LSB 00 OFF ON FFOOh CRC 16 MSB 8C CRC 16 LSB EI Field name SE Slave address 01 Parameter No 05 Coil address MSB 00 Coil address LSB 00 Written data MSB FF Written data LSB 00 CRC 16 MSB 8C CRC 16 LSB 23A 1 There is no response for broadcasting 2 Note that the coil start address is 0000 which is smaller by 1 than the coil number 0001 The coil number less 1 corresponds to the coil address Refer to Exceptional Response on page 6 18 if writing into the coil cannot be performed normally c O 2 O 5 D c O o 5 z Oo O 6 11 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACICILIZ 6 5 Explanation
413. rminal Either ON Positive Reverse Reverse according to ON negative reverse EB terminal 2 H the command rotation direction changes before the completion of positioning the current detected rotation direction will be maintained until deceleration of the Inverter output frequency has been completed and then the command rotation direction will be used However even if the Inverter output frequency follows the command rotation direction the actual number of motor rotations may not keep up and the present position will be counted in the opposite direction until it catches up causing deviation If this occurs operation can be improved by increasing the acceleration deceleration time 3 When a rotary coordinate system such as a turntable is used setting b075 01 allows for positioning in the rotation direction corresponding to the shorter moving distance In this case set the position per rotation in the rotary coordinate system in Multi step Position Command 0 P060 This must be a positive value The set value of PO6O is used to determine the correct rotation direction For position commands for which movement will actually be stopped set a multi step position other than PO60 for example P061 6000 Take note that this function can be used only when Feedback Pulse Train Input P004 is 00 or 01 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 162 5 12 Simple Position Control Function P075 00 4000 Position c
414. rrent x Rated current Rated current b025 Overload Limit 1 A A A A Level 2 0 20 to 2 00 0 10 to 1 50 Frequency Pull in Inverter rated Saed orren x Rated current Restart Level current A A A ia b083 Sainer 2 0 to 15 0 kHz 10 0 kHz 2 0 to 10 0 kHz 2 0 kHz Frequency Capacity Capacity NOOSE Motor Capacity 9 4 1018 5 kW __ indicated by 01 to 18 5 Io indicated by H203 1 2 the type the type Take note that the following parameters are not displayed in the light load mode Inverter rated pune current A Parameter Parameter No Function name Function name No d009 Speed Response 1 2 d010 Motor 1 2 Parameter R1 d012 Motor 1 2 Parameter R2 b040 Motor 1 2 Parameter L Torque Limit 1 b041 Four quadrant Mode Forward H023 H223 Motor 1 2 Parameter lo Power Running Torque Limit 2 b042 Four quadrant Mode Reversed H024 H224 Motor 1 2 Parameter J Regeneration Torque Limit 3 b043 Four quadrant Mode Reversed Ho30 H230 Motor 1 2 Parameter R 1 l Auto tuning Data Power Running Torque Limit 4 b044 Four quadrant Mode Forward H031 H231 volor u SEET Auto tuning Data Regeneration b045 Torque LADSTOP Selection Ho3zH232 Or Ue Paramotor Auto tuning Data b046 Reverse Rotation Prevention H033 H233 Motor 1 2 Parameter lo Selection Auto tuning Data C054 Overtorque Undertorque Selection H034 H234 Motor ve Parametry Auto tuning Data C055 ee P033 Torque
415. rt Level 2 00 x restart Rated current mrequeney bus 0 1 to Frequency reduction time at frequency b029 in Restart 3000 pull in restart Parameter Starting Frequency at interruption Frequency al Maximum frequency b030 Frequency Pull o in Restart e Set frequency Trip reset at power on example 1 Normal Output shut off Abnormal Trip reset current Selection Trip reset at power off example 2 C102 Reset Selection Normal Output shut off Abnormal Trip reset Trip reset at power on example 1 0 Normal Disabled Abnormal Trip reset SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 100 01 02 01 2 suoljoun Functions 5 8 Restart Functions SEH Function name Description el Unit No setting Trip reset only example 1 Not initializing internal ae such as current values upon trip reset Refer to Initialization Setting on page 5 174 Normal Disabled C102 Reset Selection Abnormal Trip reset o 0 Hz restart Reset Restart C103 Selection NO Frequency matching restart example 3 Frequency pull in restart example 4 C001 to Multi function RS Reset E C007 Input Selection Example 1 Trip reset at power ON C102 00 02 03 RS input AL output alarm signal Example 2 Trip reset at power OFF C102 01 RS input po AL output alarm signal Example 3 Reset enabled when normal C102 00 01 Restarts according to C103 L oaen KN R
416. ry or in property damage Alert Symbols in this Document A N WARNING Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Be sure to ground the unit Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or fire 200 V class type D grounding 400 V class type C grounding Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated Do not change wiring slide switches or optional devices while power is being supplied Always turn off the power supply to the Inverter before changing wiring changing the slide switches or attaching removing options Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff Doing so may result in
417. s 10 s max Cycle 1 10 10 s ON 90 s OFF Instantaneous 1 46 kW Short time rating 240 W The temperature relay operates if the built in resistor reaches approx 200 C and recovers at approx 170 C max Built in temperature fuse recovery impossible 250 VAC 200 mA R load 500 mA R load 200 mA R road D 20 C to 65 C short time temperature during transport 2 20 to 90 with no condensation 2 5 9 m s2 0 6 G 10 to 55 Hz At a maximum altitude of 1 000 m indoors without corrosive gases or dust Paint color Munselle 5Y7 1 cooling fan aluminum color 1 To use the braking resistor 3G3AX RAB RBB RBC for a regenerative braking unit of the 400 V class be sure to remove the built in resistor and connect 2 resistors of the same model in series If the regenerative braking unit of 400 V class is operated with a single braking resistor the braking resistor may be damaged 2 Set the DIP switches 3 The built in resistor incorporates a temperature fuse If the alarm terminal is not connected the fuse may blow out in order to prevent the resistor burning due to overheating If the fuse blows out the built in resistor must be replaced SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 3 Options Specifications of Braking Resistor 3G3AX RBA RBB RBCxxxx i Dimensional Drawing 3G3AX RBAXxxxx 20 5 MAX N E 3G3AX RBBxxxx L1 I
418. s larger Os lt T lt 50s x 40 50 s lt T lt 100 s x 20 100 s lt T x 10 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 150 suoljoun Functions 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control Torque 9 151 If sensorless vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics adjust the motor parameters depending on the phenomena as shown in the table below Operation Phenomenon Adjusting method Adjustment status item Speed change ratio is a Increase motor parameter R2 H021 H221 negative value gradually up to the set parameter x 1 2 H031 H231 ower running Speed change ratio is a Decrease motor parameter R2 H021 H221 positive value gradually up to the set parameter x 0 8 H031 H231 Increase motor parameter R1 H020 H220 Pete Insufficient torque at low gradually up to the set parameter x 1 2 H030 H230 frequency several Hz Increase motor parameter lo gradually H023 H223 up to the set parameter x 1 2 H033 H233 Reduce motor parameter J from the set H024 H224 Shock occurs during parameter H034 H234 startup Reduce the speed response H005 H205 Panne alate The motor momentarily Set Reverse Rotation Prevention rotates in the direction Selection b046 to 01 Enabled b046 opposite the reference rotation direction Reduce motor parameter J from the set H024 H224 r GE Motor hunting parameter H034 H234 eceleration Reduce the speed response H005 H205 Increase motor parameter J
419. s being initialized Appears when no applicable data is available a trip has not yet occurred in the fault monitor mode Appears if an error occurs between the Remote Operator and the Inverter Appears upon successful completion of auto tuning Appears upon failure of auto tuning SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Turns gp BILE Flashes RIL 7 2 Troubleshooting 7 2 Troubleshooting If the Inverter malfunctions or does not function as expected although no error display is shown take a remedial action by referring to the information below If the Inverter trips after showing an error display refer to Error Display and Remedial Actions on page 7 1 Condition Remedial actions ps The power does The shorting bar between Connect the shorting bar or DC reactor not turn on The terminals 1 and P 2 or 2 6 main POWER LED DC reactor is disconnected A EES The input wire is disconnected Check the wiring The motor does not The setting of RUN Set the correct RUN Command Selection turn after a RUN Command Selection A002 5 22 command is A002 is not correct issued The setting of Frequency Set Frequency Reference Selection Reference Selection A001 correctly according to the A001 is not correct frequency reference input method and specify the frequency The frequency is set to 0 If Frequency Reference Selection A001 is set to Hz 01 Control circuit terminal bloc
420. s subject to the Omron s Warranty and Limitations of Liability Change in Specifications Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our prac tice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifica tions of the Product may be changed without any notice When in doubt spe cial part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application Please consult with your Omron s representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product Errors and Omissions Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC e THE AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS e Schaumburg IL USA e 847 843 7900 800 556 6766 e www omron247 com OMRON CANADA INC HEAD OFFICE OMRON ARGENTINA e SALES OFFICE Toronto ON Canada 416 286 6465 866 986 6766 Cono Sur 54 11 4783 5300 www omron247 com OMRON ELETRONICA DO BRASIL LTDA e HEAD OFFICE OMRON CHILE e SALES OFFICE Sao Paulo SP Brasil e 55 11 2101 6300 e www omron com br Santiago e 56 9 9917 3920 OMRON ELECTRONICS MEXICO SA DE CV e HEAD OFFICE OTHER OMRON LATIN AMERICA SALES Apodaca N L e 52 811 156 99 10 001 800 556 6766 mela o
421. s the Inverter s input output signals Multi function Input Selection The following functions can be allocated to any of multi function input terminals S1 to S7 EB to operate each function that has been set Terminals S1 to S7 EB correspond to C001 to C007 You can select NO or NC contact input for each multi function input The same function cannot be allocated to multiple multi function input terminals If the same function was allocated to multiple functions by mistake the terminal to which the function was allocated last becomes effective no is allocated to all terminals to which the function was allocated earlier and their functions are disabled After allocating functions to terminals S1 to S7 EB make sure that the function settings have been stored Parameter No Description FW Forward 01 02 03 04 05 RV Reverse CF1 Multi step speed 1 CF2 Multi step speed 2 CF3 Multi step speed 3 CF4 Multi step speed A JG Jogging 07 DB External DC injection braking SET Motor 2 Control 2CH 2 step acceleration C001 to C007 deceleration Function 11 12 FRS Free run stop EXT External trip USP USP function GN 14 15 16 18 CS Commercial switch SFT Soft lock Soft Lock FV FI Analog input switch RS Reset TH PTC thermistor thermal protection Reset 2x O 5 29 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Reference item RUN Command Selection Multi step Speed Op
422. safety function but the EDM output did not turn ON check the GS1 and GS2 input circuits and EDM detection circuit annaa Default Function name Unit C003 Multi function 77 GS1 input safety input 11 C004 Input Selection 78 GS2 input safety input 2 C013 Multi function Input Operation 01 NC NC contact 1 C014 Selection Multi function C021 Output Terminal 62 EDM Safety device monitor 2 P1 EDM Selection Multi function Output Terminal P1 EDM Contact Selection C031 00 NO NO contact GS Input 00 Not tripped 00 Not tripped Cut off by hardware off by hardware b145 Operation bat aha ns T Selection 01 04 Tipped 1 When the safety function selector switch is turned e EE this setting is applied forcibly and the selection can no longer be changed 2 When the EDM function selector switch is turned ON this setting is applied forcibly and the selection can no longer be changed 3 An E37 trip occurs In the case of a competitive External Trip E12 setting E37 setting is given priority unless at power on A either the GS1 or GS2 input terminal turns ON while an E37 trip is still present safety cannot be ensured by the safety function SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 13 Safety Function Wiring Example i Wiring Example Wiring Example When EDM is Used Conforming to PLd under 1S013849 1 EDM feedback input T31 T32 T33 Safety switch The figu
423. se 3 wire 3G3MX2 A2022 3G3MX2 AB015 3G3MX2 A4040 Rated E s ABO22 Eeer Ken voltage Power supply 3G3MX2 A2007 3G3MX2 AB004 3G3MX2 A4015 A2015 AB007 Ada Adpen 1 6 x110x70 0 9 900 VAC 363AX NFO04 oe a Se 10 240x200x150 3 7 3G3AX NFO05 3G3MX2 A2110 Kos A 230 x 220x170 5 7 3G3AX NFO06 3G3MX2 A2150 _ e p ail 237 x220 x170 8 4 9 27 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 AOO00 9 3 Options AC Reactor 3G3AX ALxxxx i Dimensional Drawing 3G3AX AL2025 AL2055 AL4025 AL4055 AL4110 D max E max H max l l Xa lt Y C max 3G3AX AL2110 AL2220 AL2330 AL4220 AL4330 6 oJ i L A max D max E max H max H1 max SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 9 28 suoljeoijinads Specifications 9 3 Options 9 29 Specifications Model 3G3AX AL2025 3G3AX AL2055 3G3AX AL2110 3G3AX AL2220 3G3AX AL2330 Motor Dimensions mm capacity sk kg VT CT C J X Y gelt ZESE 82 40 150 92 50 67 2 8 3G3MX2 A2015 ia 3G3MX2 A2022 RE 40 150 92 50 75 4 0 3G3MX2 AB007 3G3MX2 AB015 F 3G3MX2 A2037 le 3G3MX2 A2055 ele 160 103 70 55 170 106 5 3 112 0 5 0 3G3MX2 AB015 0 3G3MX2 AB022 3G3MX2 A2055 3G3MX2 A2075 RRC 113 75 55 190
424. se Train Bias Amount P057 R W 100 to 100 1 163Ch Pulse Train Limit P058 R W O to 100 1 163Eh O P060 Position range setting HIGH Es reverse side to position range setting forward side Displays MSB 4 digits including Multi step Position Command 0 Goen 163Fh LOW A P061 Position range setting 1640h R W HIGH reverse side to position range setting forward side Displays MSB 4 digits including Multi step Position Command 1 P061 1641h LOW R W 5 164 P062 Position range setting HIGH dei reverse side to position range setting forward side Displays MSB 4 digits including 1642h Multi step Position Command 2 P062 1643h R W O Z 1644h Ge R W Position range setting i Sg HIGH reverse side to position Multi step Position range setting forward side 1 Command 3 P063 te 1645h R w Displays MSB 4 digits LOW including Position range setting HIGH reverse side to position 1646h TI RW Multi step Position Command 4 P064 LOW range setting forward side Displays MSB 4 digits including 1647h R W P065 R W Position range setting 1648h HIGH reverse side to position Multi step Position Command 5 P065 LOW range setting forward side Displays MSB 4 digits including 1649h R W T 5 164 R W Position range setting HIGH reverse side to position range setti
425. ses at the start of deceleration and exceeds the value of Overvoltage Suppression Level During Deceleration b131 After that when the main circuit DC voltage falls below the b131 level the Inverter starts deceleration again Parameter Default 3 Function name Unit No setting 00 Disabled Overvoltage Suppression 01 Enabled DC voltage kept constant b130 Function Selection example 1 During 02 Enabled Acceleration enabled Deceleration example 2 Overvoltage 330 to 395 200 V class 3 Suppression Level 660 to 790 400 V class l 60 V Deceleration 0 2 1 0 b131 During 760 Overvoltage 0 10 to 30 00 b132 Suppression Set the acceleration rate applied when 1 00 S Parameter this function is enabled Overvoltage 0 00 to 5 00 b133 Suppression Proportional gain for DC voltage constant 0 20 7 Proportional Gain control b130 01 only Setting Overvoltage 0 0 to 150 0 b134 Suppression Proportional gain for DC voltage constant S Integral Time control b130 01 only Setting 1 When b130 01 PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant Though quicker response is expected when the setting of Proportional Gain b133 is increased control tends to be divergent and this may easily lead to a trip Response also becomes quicker when the setting of Integral Time b134 is decreased but if the setting is too small the same situation may occur 2 If the value set in b131 is lower than the inc
426. set in Restart Standby Time b003 output is started from the value set in Starting Frequency at Frequency Pull in Restart b030 Thereafter The Inverter decelerates according to Frequency Pull in Restart Parameter b029 while keeping the output current at the value set in Frequency Pull in Restart Level b028 When the frequency matches the voltage the Inverter accelerates again to reach to the original frequency level If an overcurrent trip occurs under this method reduce the b028 setting EN Reference If a reset signal is input during the restart wait time the value of frequency at interruption stored in the Inverter s internal is cleared resulting in a O Hz restart SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 102 suoinoun Functions 5 8 Restart Functions Free run Stop Function FRS 9 103 Activating the free run stop FRS function shuts off the Inverter output letting the motor go into free run status This function is effective when you stop the motor using the mechanical brake such as an electromagnetic Note that an overcurrent trip may occur if the mechanical brake forces the motor to stop during Inverter output Allocate 11 FRS to any Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 The motor performs a free run stop while the FRS terminal is turned ON When the FRS terminal is turned ON and then OFF the Inverter will restart after an elapse of the time set in Restart Standby Time b003
427. sic Functions The following explains the basic parameters such as RUN Command Selection and Acceleration Deceleration Time Heavy Load Light Load Selection The rated specification of the Inverter is selected from the two types heavy load rating and light load rating The rated current is different between the heavy load rating and light load rating and the electronic thermal characteristics overload warning level and other items also vary accordingly Select either type according to the load actually used When the setting of Heavy Load Light Load Selection is changed the parameters shown in the table below are reset to their default values and at the same time the heavy load light load rating changes There is no need to reconnect the power or perform initialization The high frequency mode is supported only when the heavy load rating is selected For the high frequency mode refer to Inverter Mode Selection on page 5 178 Parameter Default F Function name S Unit No setting b049 Heavy Load Light 00 Heavy load mode CT i Load Selection Or Light load mode E EES The features of the heavy load mode and light load mode are described below Heavy load CT Light load VT Feature A load that requires high torque A load that does not require much under certain conditions such as at torque the start and during acceleration deceleration Application Lifts cranes conveyors etc Fans pumps air conditioners e
428. t Cp Cp Cp Epo CH CH CH CH o IW The capacitor service life is calculated every 10 minutes If the Inverter is turned on off frequently within this interval the capacitor service life cannot be correctly diagnosed The cooling fan life assessment function is not available for 1 phase 200V class motors of 0 4 kW max and 3 phase 200V class motors of 0 75 kW max because these motors are not equipped with a cooling fan Position Command Monitor d029 Position commands can be monitored during simple position control For details refer to Simple Position Control Function on page 5 158 Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting 268 268435455 to 2684 268435455 Displays MSB 4 digits for forward command Displays and MSB 3 digits Position Command for reverse command Monitor Example Command value 15600 gt Displays as 1560 Command value 15600 gt Displays as 156 d029 Current Position Monitor d030 The current position can be monitored during simple position control For details refer to Simple Position Control Function on page 5 158 Parameter Default f Function name 8 Unit No setting 268 268435455 to 2684 268435455 Displays MSB 4 digits for forward position Displays and MSB 3 digits Current Position for reverse position Monitor Example Current position 1560000 gt Displays as 1560 Current position 1560000 gt Displays as 156 d030 5 9
429. t Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong magnetic fields Locations close to power lines Main Circuit Power Supply Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as AC power supply voltage Operation and Adjustment Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high Provide a separate holding brake if necessary Maintenance and Inspection Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance inspection or parts replacement The life of the capacitor depends on ambient temperatures Refer to the diagram of product life specified in the manual When the capacitor stops operating at the end of the product s life the Inverter must be replaced SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 7 Precautions for Correct Use Precautions for Correct Use Installation Mount the product vertically on a wall with the product s longer sides upright The material of the wall has to be nonflammable such as a metal plate Restart after Trip Do not come close to the machine when using the Restart During Momentary Power Interruption function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may abruptly start Operation Stop Com
430. t V SE When AM Gain Adjustment C106 100 10 beet eet e ee When AM Gain Adjustment C106 200 ei AM Bias Setting C109 50 Torque 0 100 200 SES Note If 00 Output frequency is monitored during deceleration due to overload limit the displayed value may seem unstable in the low speed range In this case changing the selection to 07 LAD frequency stabilizes the displayed value SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 44 suoljoun j 5 4 Analog Signal AM Gain Setting Set the Inverter output gain according to the meters connected to the AM and AMI terminals Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting AM Gain 50 to 200 ee Adjustment Set a gain for the AM monitor ms S O to 100 S GE AM Bias Setting Set an offset for the AM monitor po o Note When a reset signal is input the offset becomes 0 once Example AM provides A to 20 mA output the offset value is 20 4 20 Default value Functions 5 45 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method The following explains the control related settings such as the control method and torque boost Control Method V f Characteristics You can set V f characteristics output voltage output frequency Switch between Control Methods 1 2 V f characteristics using the SET terminal which is a multi functio
431. t causing failure of the Inverter In addition to avoiding condensation avoid installing the Inverter under direct sunlight Avoid an environment where the Inverter may be exposed to dust gases corrosive explosive and or flammable grinding fluid mist or salt If a foreign object e g dust enters the Inverter it could result in failure of the Inverter If using the Inverter in a dusty place take appropriate measures For example place the Inverter in a closed panel When several Inverters are installed in a panel and a ventilation fan is mounted in the panel be careful about the layout of the Inverters and the air intake apertures Depending on the layout the Inverter s cooling effect may deteriorate resulting in an increase in the ambient temperature Ventilation fan Ventilation fan a ba Inverter Inverter OU Ou e Good example Bad example Heat Radiation from Inverter 1 phase 3 phase 200 V Inverter capacity kW Load with 100 loss W or oa oa ors s 22 or ss 75 4 a a ae 20 a8 78 ron 4 az te a as Efficiency at rated output 895 90 93 94 95 95 5 96 96 96 96 96 3 phase 400 V Inverter capacity kW 11 15 Load with 100 loss W 35 56 96 116 125 167 229 296 411 528 Efficiency at rated output 92 93 94 95 96 96 96 96 2 96 4 96 6 Backing Plate With a model of 5 5 kW or higher capacity cut off the connection points
432. t Signal 2 Selection 2 Logic Output Signal 2 Operator Selection Logic Output Signal 3 Selection 1 Logic Output Signal 3 Selection 2 Logic Output Signal 3 Operator Selection Parameter Function name No C142 C143 C144 C145 C146 C147 C148 C149 C150 ee Input Terminal 1 C160 Response Time 14A5h Input Terminal 2 C161 Response Time 14A6h Input Terminal 3 C162 Response Time 14A7h Input Terminal 4 C163 Response Time 14A8h Input Terminal 5 C164 R W Response Time 14A9h Input Terminal 6 C165 R W Response Time 14AAh Input Terminal T C166 Response Time 14ABh to 14ACh SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL E R R W R W R W R W R W pews gt fe Monitor and setting parameters Same with C021 and C022 Except that no 62 63 and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected Same with C021 and C022 Except that no 62 63 and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected Same with C021 and C022 Except that no 62 63 and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected Same with C021 and C022 Except that no 62 63 and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected Same with C021 and C022 Except that no 62 63 and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected Same with C021 and C022 Except that no 62 63 and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 Data resolution 0 D Q D 5 125 5 32 6 62
433. t greater than 3 KQ decrease the value of C085 Wire the external thermistor between control terminals S5 TH and SC and allocate TH to Multi function Input Terminal S5 C005 19 TH Set the following functions according to the specifications of your thermistor When this function is used keep the cable length between the motor and Inverter within 20 m Since the current flowing through the thermistor is weak consider separating the wires etc to prevent noise due to motor current Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting Thermistor 0 0 to 200 0 o Se Adjustment The gain of input voltage is fine tuned an SG C005 Multi function 19 TH PTC thermistor thermal 02 CF1 8 Input Selection protection Note If Thermistor is allocated to C005 but no thermistor is connected a trip occurs SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 AO0000 5 120 suoljoun 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Signal During RUN RUN A signal is output by a multi function output terminal or multi function relay output terminal while the Inverter is operating This signal turns ON only with Inverter output and it is not output even when a RUN command is issued by setting the frequency to 0 Hz The RUN lamp is lit when a RUN command is input Allocate 00 RUN During RUN to any Multi function Output Terminal Selections C021 to C022 or Multi function Relay Output Function Selection C026 A
434. t path Power ON 24 VDCo power supply Change to an external power supply Switch OFF A sneak current path will not occur if the short bar is removed and an external power supply is used 2 25 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Operation Po Describes the operating procedures including procedures for trial operation 3 1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator eee 3 1 Names of Parts and their Descriptions ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 Key Operation System cccccceccseecseeceeceeeteeeeeeteeeceeseeeeeeeeeeaeees 3 3 3 2 Operation Method ccccccccceeeceeeeeneeeneeesecesseneseeeeonesenenees 3 7 RUN Command Frequency Reference Input 3 7 S CG POSE PRU EE 3 10 Procedure for Test RUN BE 3 10 3A TONING BEE 3 12 Overview of Operation UPON Tripping onnsennanennnennnnnnnnnnnnnenennne 3 12 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Operation 3 1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator 3 1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator Names of Parts and their Descriptions omron SYSDRIVE RUN PWR 3G3MX2 INVERTER Data display ry pam LI USB connector Z 6 A PRG kel LED indicator Operation key RJ45 connector Description PWR E LED Lit green while the Inverter is receiving power ALARM LED Lit red when the Inverter trips ALM For information
435. t switching 1 41 TRQ1 is allocated to multi function input terminal S6 and Torque limit switching 2 42 TRQ2 is allocated to multi function input terminal S7 EB 42 4 41 TRQ1 42 TRQ2 OFF OFF gt b04 ON OFF gt b042 OFF ON b044 ON ON gt b043 To use the torque limit function in a low speed range also use Overload Limit Selection b021 b221 b024 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 5 154 Functions 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control Torque LADSTOP Function 9 155 This function temporarily stops the frequency deceleration function LAD when the torque limit function is actuated This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method A044 A244 03 Parameter S Default p Function name Unit No setting ae Torque LADSTOP 90 Disabled E Selection 01 Enabled Related functions A044 A244 b040 b041to b044 Output frequency L limit in progress during torque limit Time TRQ output SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control Torque Control This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method A044 A244 03 To operate in the torque control allocate 52 ATR to any multi function input terminal While the ATR terminal is turned on the torque reference input is enabled The torque reference source can be selected from two analog types Dig
436. t terminal MA MB are relay output NO or NC contact can be selected individually for each output terminal using C031 C032 or C036 00 RUN During RUN Signal During RUN 5 121 Frequency Arrival Signal 01 FA1 Constant speed reached Bao 02 FA2 Set frequency min reached 03 OL Overload warning 5 115 04 OD PID excessive deviation 5 73 05 AL Alarm output 5 119 06 FA3 Set frequency only 5 122 07 OTQ Overtorque Undertorque 5 152 UV Signal during undervoltage Restart Upon Momentary Power Interruption 09 5 96 Undervoltage Overvoltage Overcurrent 10 TRQ During torque limit Torque Limit Function 5 153 11 RNT RUN time over RUN Power ON Time Exceeded 5 124 12 ONT Power on time over 13 THM Thermal warning 5 113 19 BRK Brake release Brake Control Function 20 BER Brake error 21 ZS OHz 0 Hz Signal ZS 5 125 5 142 22 DSE Excessive speed deviation Simple Position Control Mode 23 POK Position ready 5 160 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 5 32 suoljoun 5 3 Input Output Terminals Frequency Arrival Signal 24 FA4 Set frequency min reached 2 5 122 25 FAS Set frequency only 2 26 OL2 Overload warning 2 Overload Limit Overload Warning 9 115 27 FVdc Analog FV disconnection Window Comparator Function detection 5 132 Fldc Analog FI disconnection detection 31 FBV PID FB status output PID Function 5 73 39 NDc Communication disconnection RS485 5 128
437. t terminal to issue a RUN command turn 5 23 terminals are turned ON only one of the two terminals ON SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 7 10 Maintenance Operations 7 2 Troubleshooting 7 11 The motor does not Rotation Direction Limit Selection Set the correct Rotation Direction Limit b035 is set and forward or turn after a RUN Selection b035 5 23 disconnected command is reverse rotation is prohibited SR The input terminal wiring Implement wiring correctly The ON OFF 5 19 for RUN command or status of the input terminal can be checked A shorting bar connection with Multi function Input Monitor d005 SE position is incorrect The analog input for Implement wiring correctly frequency reference or e For the analog voltage or Variable Variable Resistor wiring is Resistor input measure the FV SC incorrect terminal voltage using a tester etc to check if the correct voltage is output e l 5 37 e For the analog current input disconnect the wiring and measure the source F terminal current using a tester etc to check if the correct current is supplied 51 F TM Forced terminal Turn OFF the terminal to which the block is allocated to a applicable function is allocated multi function input terminal 5 85 and the terminal is turned ON even though a Digital Operator mode is selected 31 OPE Forced Turn OFF the terminal to which the operator is allocated toa applicabl
438. t type of the RS reset allocation terminal Has attempted to write into a register when auto tuning was enabled Has attempted to write into a locked register while a password was set Etc Has written into the read only register coil UV During undervoltage No Response The Inverter ignores the query and does not respond if Has received a broadcast command query of address 0 A communication error is detected in receiving a query The query slave address is different from the slave address set for the Inverter The time interval between 2 pieces of data that configure the message is less than a 3 5 character length Query data length is inappropriate The reception interval in a frame exceeds the 1 5 character length The error check code in the query does not match CRC error Has received a broadcast command for each group query of address 250 to 254 If the timer is set in the master to monitor response but no response is returned within the set time send the same query again 6 7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No Coil Status Read 01h Reads out the coil status ON OFF Example Read multi function input terminals S1 to S7 EB of the Inverter whose slave address is 1 Refer to the following table for the multi function input statuses Function name Data Multi function In
439. ta Function name i Page No No parameters resolution 2103h en Acceleration Time 2 mm to 360000 0 01 s Setting Ei 2104h LOW 5 24 2105h B SL Deceleration Time 2 1 to 360000 0 01 s Setting F203 2106h LOW R W 2107h to Not used Inaccessible 2200h vii Holding Register Number List 2nd Setting Groups A b C H and P nd Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name No parameters resolution 00 Volume 01 Control circuit terminal block 02 Digital Operator ee 03 Modbus communication 2201h E A201 R W Modbus RTU 5 15 04 Optional board 06 Pulse train frequency 07 Do not set 10 Operation function output 01 Control circuit terminal block RUN Command 02 Digital Operator Ge Selection 2 1 Aane RAN 03 Modbus communication GE Modbus RTU 04 Optional board 2203h Base Frequency 2 A203 300 to Maximum Frequency 2 0 1 0 4 Hz Base Frequency 2 to 2204h Maximum Meximum Frequency 2 2 A204 a 4000 10000 0 1 Hz md e to Reserved 2215h d RW Ge Kit EES Starting frequency to 0 01 Hz 5 63 Reference 0 M f 2 dom RW aximum frequency 2218h to Reserved 223Ah 1 After changing the 2nd RUN Command Selection provide an interval of at least 40 ms before the RUN command is actually executed SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULILI 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Get Parameter Monitor and setting Data Function name Page No parameters resolution 223Bh
440. ta clear C104 C001 to C007 1 Do not turn ON OFF the UP DWN terminal after shutting off the power Otherwise the Inverter may not store data normally SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 6 Operation Functions RUN command FW RV DWN input Acceleration deceleration will not be executed if the UP and DWN terminals are Output frequency turned ON at the same time This parameter is enabled only when Frequency Reference Selection A001 is set to 01 Control circuit terminal block or 02 Digital Operator or during multi step speed operation Note that 01 Control circuit terminal block can be used only when the analog command held AHD is enabled For details refer to Analog Command Held Function AHD on page 5 39 This function is disabled when an external analog input is used for frequency reference or it cannot be used to set a Jogging Operation frequency EN Reference The stored frequency set value can also be cleared The frequency reference that has been adjusted by UP DWN can be cleared by allocating 29 UDC to a multi function input terminal and then turning ON OFF the UDC terminal After clearing the data the set value conforms to the setting of C104 Output Voltage Gain The voltage output by the Inverter can be changed based on the voltage selected by Motor Incoming Voltage Selection A082 A282 which is handled as 100 Motor hunting can be avoided by lowering
441. tarting C100 R W pa Selection l y UP DWN Storage Do not store frequency 1469h Selection S C101 RW data 5 71 Store frequency data Trip reset at power on Trip reset at power off 146Ah Reset Selection c102 IRW E E is ON Trip reset only 5 100 O Hz restart 146Bh Reset Restart Selection C103 RW BE matening Frequency pull in restart UP DWN Clear Terminal GC 146Ch Mode C104 R W EEPROM data at 5 71 power on 146Dh MP Gain Setting C105 50 to 200 1 5 43 146Eh AM Gain Adjustment C106 50 to 200 1 5 45 146Fh to Reserved 1470h 1471h AM Bias Setting C109 0 to 100 1 5 45 aren Reseved Cd Overload 1 Warning Level 2 1474h to Reserved 1485h 1473h C111 R W 0 to 20000 0 01 5 115 Output P1 EDM ON Delay Time R sill eee C131 RW 0 to 1000 0 1 s 5 36 Delay Time Ssh ee C132 0 to 1000 0 1 s Time 1489h Ge EE C133 0 to 1000 oi 5 36 148An to Reserved 148F Output RY ON Delay 0 to 1000 0 1 s 5 36 1486h C130 IW O to 1000 0 1 s 1490h C140 Time 1491h Se EE C141 0 to 1000 0 1 s SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Register No 1492h 1493h 1494h 1495h 1496h 1497h 1498h 1499h 14A4h 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data Logic Output Signal 1 Selection 1 Logic Output Signal 1 Selection 2 Logic Output Signal 1 Operator Selection Logic Output Signal 2 Selection 1 Logic Outpu
442. tation C072 R W 1 to 247 No Selection 144Dh Reserved Communication Parit lege Disabled EE y C074 R W 01 Even 02 Odd Communication Stop Bit 1 1 bit 00 Trip 01 Trip after deceleration 1450h Operation Selection on C076 R W stop E Communication Error 02 Ignore 03 Free run stop 04 Deceleration stop 0 Timeout disabled Timeout disabled 1451h Communication Error C077 0 01 s Timeout Time DU ei al to 9999 1452h eee walt C078 0 to 1000 1453h to Reserved 1454h 1455h FV Adjustment C081 0 to 2000 0 1 1456h FI Adjustment C082 0 to 2000 0 1 1457h to Reserved 1458h 1459h Thermistor Adjustment C085 R W 0 to 2000 0 1 5 120 145Ah to Reserved 145Eh 145Fh Debug Mode Selection C091 EEN not change 1460h to Reserved 1463h 00 Modbus communication Modbus RTU Communication 01 Co inverter 1464h C096 communication 6 22 Selection i 02 Co inverter communication management meneen o e 38 4 kbps S SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALULLI 6 60 uoljOUNY UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data 6 61 Register E EE EE Parameter Monitor and setting Data Gd No No parameters resolution g Co inverter 1466h Communication Starting C098 R W 1 to 8 Station Number Co inverter 1467h Communication Ending C099 R W 1 to 8 6 22 Station Number Co inverter l l 1468h Communication S
443. tatus as Actual input signal status recognized by the Inverter C011 to C017 set values 00 OFF Open No conduction _ OFF NO contact Operating ON Closed Conduction ON 01 ON Closed Conduction OFF near Operating OFF Open No conduction _ ON SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 3 Input Output Terminals Input Terminal Response Time A sampling time can be set individually for each of multi function input terminals S1 to S7 EB Helps remove chattering and other noises If the terminal input becomes unstable because of chattering etc increase the data value The larger the data value is the slower the response time A setting range of O to 200 is available which corresponds to approx 2 to 400 ms Parameter Default g Function name i Unit No setting C160 to C166 Input Terminal 0 to 200 x 2 ms Response Time Approx 2 to 400 ms ft ms Note The response time is ignored upon power ON or reset For example if the power is turned on while the FW terminal is still ON operation resumes immediately regardless of the set value of response time Multi function Output Terminal Selection The following functions can be allocated to Multi function Output Terminal P1 EDM to P2 selections C021 to C022 and Multi function Relay Output MA MB Function Selection C026 Multi function output terminals P1 EDM P2 are open collector output while multi function relay outpu
444. tc Rated current example 1 0 A 3 phase 200 V 0 1 kW 1 2 A 3 phase 200 V 0 1 kW Overload current rating 150 60s 120 60s The setting ranges and default values of the following parameters are different between the heavy load rating and light load rating Take note that when the heavy load light load setting is changed using b049 the default values of all these parameters other than H003 H203 will also change Even when the parameters shown in the table below are set to values within a range supported by both the heavy load mode and light load mode these values will be reset to the default value once b049 is changed N Function name 2 etting range Default value Setting range Default value S 00 Constant 00 Constant 00 Constant 00 Constant torque torque torque torque 01 Reduced 01 Reduced Control Method torque torque 1 2 02 Free V f 02 Free V f setting setting 03 Sensorless vector control A044 A244 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALIULILI 5 2 Basic Functions Function name No Setting range Default value Setting range Default value DC Injection O to 100 50 0 to 70 50 A054 l Braking Power Startup DC 0 to 100 O 0 to 70 O A057 Injection Braking Power DC Injection A059 Braking Carrier 2 0 to 15 0 kHz 5 0 kHz 2 0 to 10 0 kHz 2 0 kHz Frequency Overload Limit 1 b022 b222 0 20 to 2 00 1 50 x 0 10 to 1 50 1 20 x x Rated current Rated cu
445. tective functions such as warning signals Electronic Thermal Function This function calculates the rise in motor temperature in the Inverter based on the output current output frequency motor characteristics and other data to protect the motor against overheating Provides the most appropriate protection characteristics taking into account the decline of the motor cooling capability at a low speed Outputs an alarm before the electronic thermal trips The time limit characteristics of the electronic thermal vary depending on the setting of Heavy Load Light Load Selection b049 i Electronic Thermal Level EE Function name Data range Default Unit No setting 0 20 x Rated current to Inverter b012 b212 Electronic Thermal Level 1 2 1 00 x Rated current rated A current Example 1 Heavy load setting Example 2 Light load setting Alarm time s Alarm time s 0 109 150 200 Motor current A 116 120 150 Motor current A ratio relative to b012 b212 ratio relative to b012 b212 Electronic Thermal Characteristics Although only one type of electronic thermal characteristic curve is available each for heavy load and light load the frequency characteristics can be switched by Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection b013 b213 A standard motor requires reduced load current because the lower the motor rotation speed is the lower the cooling capacity of its self cooling fan gets When the frequency drops
446. ted in PID Selection A071 the PID feedback value can be monitored Also conversion is possible using PID Scale A075 d004 display Feedback value x PID Scale A075 Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting 0 00 to 99 99 Ss in increments of 0 01 100 0 to 999 9 Displayed in increments of 0 1 PID Feedback 1 000 to 9 999 Displayed in increments d004 l Value Monitor of 1 1 000 to 9 999 Krieger in increments of 10 io PP Displayed in inorements 100 to 999 Displayed in increments of 1 000 A075 PID Scale S S E 99 99 Displayed in increments of Related functions A071 A075 suoljoun Time SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 2 Functions 5 1 Monitor Mode Multi function Input Monitor d005 The LED lighting position indicates the input status of the multi function inputs The item that the built in CPU recognizes to be input is indicated as being ON This does not depend on the NO NC contact setting Example Multi function input terminals S7 EB S2 S1 ON RP terminal multi function input terminals S6 S5 TH S4 GS2 S3 GS1 OFF SE _ Display CT C0 CO Oo f Lit CH C A UH oer 0 Turned OFF ar ae ae Oe Oe S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 Gi ON OFF OFF OFFKOFF ON ON If the input terminal response time function is used the recognition of input is delayed Refer to Input Terminal Response Time on page 5 32 Monitoring cannot be performed even whe
447. ter To use internal DC injection braking set Internal DC Injection Braking Selection A051 to 01 Enabled Set the Startup DC Injection Braking Power using A057 and set the startup DC Injection Braking Time using A058 regardless of the edge or level operation Examples 1 a 1 b Set DC Injection Braking Power A054 to define the braking power other than at startup Use Internal DC Injection Braking Frequency A052 to set the frequency at which to start DC injection braking Once DC Injection Braking Delay Time A053 is set the Inverter stops output when the frequency reaches the A052 value after the RUN command FW has been turned off During the set time in A053 the motor remains in free run status After an elapse of the period set in A053 DC injection braking starts Edge and Level operations for internal DC injection braking work differently when the RUN command switches from STOP to RUN Edge operation Giving priority to DC Injection Braking Time A055 performs DC injection braking for the set time in A055 DC injection braking operates for the set time in A055 when the output frequency reaches the set value in A052 after the RUN command FW is turned OFF Even when the RUN command is turned ON DC injection braking continues to be applied during the period set in A055 Examples 2 a 3 a Level operation Giving priority to the RUN command shifts to normal operation ignoring the DC Injection Braking Time A055 When t
448. ter Ready A 0 Not ready l 1 During trip 0014h FA1 constant speed reached i H 0 OFF 0015h FA2 set frequency min reached oN Kee 0 OFF 6 27 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 AOO00 Coil No 0016h 0017h 0018h 0019h 001Ah 001Bh 001Ch 001Dh 001Eh 001Fh 0020h 0021h 0022h 0023h 0024h 0025h 0026h 0027h 0028h 0029h 002Ah 002Bh 002Ch 002Dh 002Eh 002Fh 0030h 0031h 6 8 List of Modbus Communication Modbus RTU Data OL overload warning OD PID excessive deviation e AL alarm output FA3 set frequency only OTQ overtorque undertorque e UV signal during undervoltage LS TRQ during torque limit RNT RUN time over ONT Power ON time over THM thermal warning Reserved BRK brake release BER brake error ZS 0Hz DSE excessive speed deviation e POK position ready FA4 Set frequency min reached 2 FA5 Set frequency only 2 OL2 overload warning 2 FVdc analog FV disconnection detection Fldc analog FI disconnection detection Reserved SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL O cl O gt O O O O gt O gt CO A o CO CH O O ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 1 ON 0 1 0 Pe o OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
449. ter the brake confirmation signal is input or after the brake release signal is output if BOK is not selected the Inverter restarts acceleration up to the set frequency after the period set in Acceleration wait time b122 elapses 5 After the RUN command is turned OFF the Inverter decelerates to the Break ON Frequency b127 and turns off the brake release signal BRK 6 When Brake Confirmation 44 BOK is set for a multi function input terminal and the brake release signal is turned OFF the Inverter waits for the brake confirmation signal to turn OFF without decelerating for the period set in Wait Time for Confirmation b124 If the brake confirmation signal is not turned off within the period set in b124 the Inverter outputs the brake error signal BER resulting in trip If the brake confirmation signal is not allocated to a multi function input Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b124 is disabled and the Inverter performs processing 7 after the brake release signal is turned OFF 7 After the brake confirmation signal is turned OFF or after the brake release signal is turned OFF if BOK is not selected the Inverter restarts deceleration down to 0 Hz after the period set in Stop Wait Time b123 elapses b125 Brake Release Frequency Brake Wait Time for Confirmation Output frequency E ER ile ii o O ez es al TSE lt lt b123 Brake Stop Wait Time RUN command DI FW input 8B b121 Brake Release Wait Time
450. that there No faults is no abnormal odor caused by damage or overheating Disconnect 5 MQ min 500 V Inverter main class DC circuit terminals megger U T1 V T2 and W T3 and short circuit the motor wires 3 phases Then use a megger to measure the resistance between the motor wires and ground terminal 1 Smoothing capacitor life depends on ambient temperature Refer to Appendix 2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve for the replacement reference 2 The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and or dust Check the operation through daily inspections 3 The replacement reference year cycles and diagram of smoothing capacitor life are based on the expected design life which is not guaranteed 8 5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 8 1 Inspection and Maintenance Megger Test For a megger test of the external circuit be sure to disconnect all the terminals of the Inverter and not to apply the test voltage to the Inverter Use a 500 V DC megger for a megger test Conduct the megger test for the Inverter s main circuit after short circuiting terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 RB 1 P 2 and N using wires as shown below Conduct an Inverter megger test only to the main circuit not to the control circuit Use a high resistance tester for a power distribution test of the control circuit Do not use a megger or buzzer
451. the reduction multiple also decreases and the thermal level current drops as well The reduced torque characteristics depend on the heat radiation of a standard motor Parameter Default S Function name i Unit No setting Electronic 00 Reduced torque characteristics ee o TOENA 01 Constant 01 Constant torque characteristics characteristics b019 b213 Characteristics Selection 1 2 02 Free setting SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ACLILIL 5 110 suoljoun 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Reduced Torque Characteristics Multiplied by the time limit characteristics set in b012 212 for each frequency Reduction multiple Zu EE x 0 8 Segen e x 0 6 U 5 16 50 0 6 20 60 Base frequency Inverter output frequency Hz Example 3G3MX2 base frequency 60 Hz light load setting rating 9 6 A b012 Alarm Alarm time s time s 60 60 0 5 dE Motor SE Motor j 11 1 11 5 14 4 A current A H anon 115 A current A 116 120 150 92 8 96 120 Constant Torque Characteristics Do not skip this setting when using a constant torque motor Reduction multiple Al c O prar O LL x 1 0 x 0 8 0 3 60 Inverter output frequency Hz Example 3G3MX2 base frequency 60 Hz heavy load setting rating 8 0 A b012 60 Hz reduction multiple x 1 0 Less than 3 Hz reduction multiple x 0 8 Alarm Alarm tim
452. the gain If the control method is Sensorless Vector Control A044 A244 03 the setting change is effective only while operation is stopped After the setting has been changed be sure to turn Reset RS terminal to ON and then OFF The motor parameter is recalculated after the reset Do not change the setting significantly during operation As a guide keep the change to within 10 A sudden change in output voltage may trigger an overcurrent trip Parameter Default Function name Unit No setting Set the rate of reduction of output voltage 100 Output Voltage A045 A245 Gain 1 2 20 to 100 Related functions A082 A082 100 Motor incoming nea AO82000 voltage selection A082 x A045 A045 A245 A282 x A245 Base frequency Maximum frequency SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 72 suol uny 5 6 Operation Functions PID Function This function enables process control of such elements as flow rate air volume and pressure To use this function set A071 to 01 Enabled or 02 Reverse output enabled You can disable the PID operation in progress using an external signal To use this function allocate 23 PID disabled to any of the multi function inputs While the PID terminal is turned ON the Inverter disables the PID function and outputs normally You can limit the PID output under various conditions Refer to Maximum Frequency on page 5 28 Frequency Limit
453. the torque corresponding to the Inverter s rated current is 100 Accordingly the absolute value of torque varies depending on the motor to be combined SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control Default Unit setting Function name No A044 A244 Control Method 1 2 03 Sensorless vector control do12 Output Torque 200 to 200 Monitor Output torque C027 MP Selection 02 Output torque 07 8 C028 AM Selection 11 Output torque signed 7 l 1 This setting can be allocated only to C028 Overtorque Undertorque Selection OTQ This function outputs a signal upon detection of the estimate motor output torque exceeding a given level This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method A044 A244 03 Take note that under all other settings the output becomes indeterminable This function is enabled when the Overtorque Undertorque 07 OTQ is selected in Multi function Output Terminal Selection Parameter Default Function name i Unit No setting Overtorque 00 Overtorque SES EEN 01 Undertorque Selection Overtorque 0 to 200 Undertorque Level OTQ signal output level for forward power Forward Power running Running Overtorque 0 to 200 Undertorque Level OTQ signal output level for reverse Reverse regeneration Regeneration Overtorque 0 to 200 C057 Undertorque Level OTQ signal output level for re
454. tialized set to no SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 14 Other Functions Inverter Mode Selection Changing the setting of Inverter Mode Selection alone does not change the mode After changing this setting perform an initialization Mode Selection Command b180 When the Inverter mode is changed the fault monitor data is cleared and the parameters are initialized The current Inverter mode can be monitored using dO60 Although the maximum output frequency of the 3G3MX2 is 400 Hz switching to the high frequency mode permits output of up to 1 000 Hz Since the high frequency mode is supported only in the heavy load rating setting set the high frequency mode after selecting Heavy Load Rating b049 00 The rating type cannot be changed to light load when the high frequency mode is selected To perform initialization or clear the fault monitor data while in the high frequency mode set appropriate values in b084 and b094 and then perform initialization via b180 according to the normal initialization procedure It is not necessary to set a value in b171 Sensorless vector control operation cannot be performed in the high frequency mode Switching between Normal Mode Heavy Load Rating or Light Load Rating and High frequency Mode CO P L VK XJ ea mr DI bit Ui Initialization L mt PHI Dt E Initialization High frequency mode ATE att DUDU D U High frequency
455. tion A098 Pattern Selection Operation mode acceleration deceleration function 4 13 Default setting Monitor or data range 10 00 15 00 cl Ee 10 00 ene 0 01 to 99 99 15 00 100 0 to 999 9 S 1000 to 3600 40 00 15 00 gee Ee 10 00 15 00 sch Ee 00 Switched via 2CH terminal 01 Switched by setting 02 Enabled only when switching forward reverse 5 66 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 1000 00 Linear 01 S shape 02 U shape 03 Reverse U shape 04 EL S shape zech 4 2 Function Mode Default a A ean Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range Set data changed setting during during RUN RUN A101 Fl Start Frequency 0 00 to 99 99 Wi EI End 100 0 to 400 0 1000 GC A102 Frequency Page A103 FI Start Ratio 0 to FI end ratio to FI end ratio oer FI End Ratio Ci C start ratio to FI start ratio to 100 00 00 Use a Frequency A105 ae A101 01 0 Hz Acceleration A131 Curve Parameter 01 small curve to 10 large Deceleration curve A132 Curve Parameter Taz adjustment Acceleration Deceleration 5 68 Operation 00 Digital Operator A141 Frequency 01 Digital Operator volume S Selection 1 02 FV voltage input 03 FI current input 5 70 Operation frequency Selection 2 07 Pulse train frequency N EER 2 e d Ur b 04 Modbus communication O
456. tion input terminal if the selected frequency reference RUN command sources are not the control circuit terminal block If 51 Forced terminal block is selected by any Multi function Input Selections C001 to C007 the Inverter is operated with the signal from the frequency reference source and RUN command source selected in A001 and A002 when the input signal is OFF When the signal is ON the Inverter is forced to operate with the frequency reference or RUN command from the control circuit terminal block If you switch on off this function during operation the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter output Before resuming operation stop the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again If the Forced operator 31 OPE and forced terminal block function are turned ON simultaneously the forced Digital Operator function is given priority When the F TM terminal is turned ON with the FV FI terminal turned ON and VR volume on the external Digital Operator selected the frequency reference that was selected when the FV FI terminal was OFF is selected Parameter Default Function name i Unit No setting C001 to C007 Multi function 51 F TM Forced terminal block 8 Input Selection Related functions A001 A002 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Functions Selection of Operation upon Digital Operator Disconnection If the Inverter detects disco
457. tion is used it is recommended to use Sensorless Vector Control A044 03 in which high torque is generated at start For details refer to Sensorless Vector Control on page 5 144 Parameters Required for Brake Control Function Parameter d Default Function name Unit No setting b120 Brake Control 00 Disabled Function Selection 01 Enabled 0 00 to 5 00 Brake Release Wait Seta time required for the output current Time to reach the rate of the release current after reaching the release frequency 0 00 to 5 00 Set a mechanical delay time from when the release signal is output until the brake is released 0 00 to 5 00 b123 Stop Wait Time Set a mechanical delay time from when the release S b121 Acceleration Wait Ss Time signal is turned off until the brake is closed 0 00 to 5 00 Brake Wait Time for Set a wait time longer than the time from when Confirmation the release signal is output until the brake sends the release completion signal to the Inverter b124 0 00 to 400 0 Seta frequency to output the brake release signal Brake Release b125 Frequency Hz 0 0 to 2 0 x Inverter rated current Inverter Set an output current that allows the rated A brake to be released 2 current 0 00 to 400 0 b127 Break ON Frequency Set a frequency to close the brake during stop C001 to C007 Multi function Input 44 BOK Brake confirmation E Selection Brake Release ee Current Hz
458. tional Response on page 6 18 if writing into multiple coils cannot be performed normally SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 5 Explanation of Each Parameter No Writing Into Multiple Holding Register 10h Writes into consecutive multiple registers Example Set Acceleration Time Setting 1 F002 to 10 s for the Inverter whose slave address is 1 Since holding registers 1103h and 1104h used for Acceleration Time Setting 1 F002 have a data resolution of 0 01 s the data to be written should be 1000 0000 O3E8h when setting 10 s Query No Field name Slave address Parameter No Register start address MSB Register start address LSB Number of registers LSB Number of bytes Written data 1 MSB LSB MSB LSB 2 3 4 5 Number of registers MSB 6 T 8 9 Written data 1 10 Written data 2 11 Written data 2 12 CRC 16 MSB 13 CRC 16 LSB wi N e Response Field name Slave address Parameter No Register start address MSB Register start address LSB Number of registers MSB Number of registers LSB CRC 16 MSB CRC 16 LSB 1 There is no response for broadcasting Example Hex 01 10 11 02 00 02 04 00 00 03 E8 B2 98 Register address Register number 1 0000 O3E8h 1000d 10 00 s Example Hex 01 10 11 02 00 02 E5 34 2 Note that the holding register start address is
459. to 65 53 HOS0 H230 auto tuning data Primary resistance Motor 1 2 Parameter R2 0 000 to 65 53 H031 H231 auto tuning data Secondary resistance Motor 1 2 Parameter L 0 00 to 655 3 SES auto tuning data Leakage inductance Motor 1 2 Parameter lo 0 00 to 655 3 HOSSNZ 3 auto tuning data No load current Motor 1 2 Parameter J 0 001 to 9999 H034 H234 auto tuning data Moment of inertia A003 A203 Base Frequency 1 2 30 0 to Maximum Frequency 1 2 Ber A054 Internal DC Injection Braking 99 Disabled Selection 01 Enabled 200 21 5 220 230 240 This function can be selected for 200V class models A082 A282 Motor Incoming Voltage Selection 1 2 380 400 415 440 460 480 This function can be selected for 400V class models Related functions b046 Depends on the Capacity Depends on the Capacity Depends on the Capacity Depends on the Capacity Depends on the Capacity mH These parameters are measured automatically when offline auto tuning is performed They can also be changed to desired value manually after tuning If HOO2 H202 remains 00 after the completion of auto tuning the motor parameters obtained by auto tuning are not reflected in the operation data If the auto tuning result indicates that the tuning was aborted perform auto tuning again If a trip occurs during auto tuning the auto tuning processing is forced to stop No abort message appears Trip
460. tory default III Ar SES SEEEEEEEEER slalalalalelalelalala C Ici D bl kA D SESE BBN ontrol circuit terminal bloc d zaal O 6 S 6 LG Control circuit terminal block B CHARGE indicator A ANO D ir it Main circuit terminal block rhe Name Description Modbus RTU Use this Terminal Resistor selector switch for RS 485 terminals on the control circuit Termination resistor terminal block When this switch is turned ON the internal 200 Q Resistor is connected selector switch Safety function Turn this switch ON when using the safety function Turn OFF the power before selector switch turning this switch ON OFF For details refer to Safety Function on page 5 170 EDM function Turn this switch ON when using the EDM output of the safety function Turn OFF selector switch the power before turning this switch ON OFF For details refer to Safety Function on page 5 170 USB connector Use this mini B USB connector to connect a PC Even when the Inverter is being operated by a PC etc via USB connection it can still be operated using the Digital Operator Connector for Use this connector to connect the Digital Operator Digital Operator Connector for Use this connector to mount the optional board optional board Communications Units and other options can be connected Control circuit These terminal blocks are used to connect various digital analog input and output terminal blocks A signals for inverter control etc
461. ttempted to change the register that cannot be changed during operation Has issued the enter command during operation UV Has written into the register during trip UV SEI Has written into a soft locked register Has attempted to change an I O terminal that cannot be changed Has attempted to change the contact type of the RS reset allocation terminal Has attempted to write into a register when auto tuning was enabled Has attempted to write into a locked register while a password was set 23h Has written into the read only register coil UV During undervoltage SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 6 18 uoljoUNy UOIEOIUDUUUUOZ Communication Function 6 6 To Save the Change to the Holding Register Enter Command 6 6 To Save the Change to the Holding Register Enter Command Issuing If a holding register write command 06h or consecutive holding register write command 10h is used the new register value will become effective but it will not be stored in the Inverter s EEPROM memory Accordingly once the Inverter power is cut off the status will return to the one effective before the holding register was changed To store the change to the holding register in the Inverter s EEPROM memory issue an Enter command according to the method specified below When the control parameters are changed the motor parameters must be re calculated In this case also perform recalcul
462. uding any interest or penalties thereon imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or indirectly by Omron for the manufacture production sale delivery importa tion consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder including customs duties and sales excise use turnover and license taxes shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Omron Financial If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Omron Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement Omron may without liabil ity and in addition to other remedies cancel any unshipped portion of Prod ucts sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all amounts including amounts payable hereunder whether or not then due which are owing to it by Buyer Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts Cancellation Etc Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses Force Majeure Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes beyond its control including earthquakes fires floods strikes or other labor disputes shortage of labor or materials accidents to machinery acts of sabotage riots delay in or lack of transportation or the re
463. uency 10 Cooling fin temperature 11 Output torque signed 13 Do not use this setting 16 Optional board Arrival Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 Hz During Acceleration Arrival Frequency During Deceleration 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Arrival Frequency During Acceleration 2 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Arrival Frequency During Deceleration 2 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Creep Speed Setting SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Starting Frequency to 10 00 HZ Zero Return Mode Starting Frequency to 10 00 1 Frequency Hz Shaded cells are the same as those for Normal Mode heavy load rating Starting Frequency to 5 00 100 00 Hz Starting Frequency to 5 00 100 00 Hz High frequency Mode Setting range Default 00 Output frequency 01 Output current 04 Output voltage 05 Input power 06 Electronic thermal load rate 07 LAD frequency 10 Cooling fin temperature 13 Do not use this setting 16 Optional board 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 to 1 000 00 Hz 0 00 suoljoun 9 182 5 14 Other Functions The following parameters are not displayed in High frequency Mode Parameter No Function name d009 Torque Reference Monitor d010 Torque Bias Monitor d012 Output Torque Monitor A097 Acceleration Pattern Selection A098 Deceleration Pattern Selection A131 Acceleration Curve Parameter S U reverse U A132 Decelerati
464. ult Function name No value F002 Acceleration 0 01 to 99 99 s 100 0 to 999 9s 10 00s Time Setting 1 1 000 to 3 600 s 30 00 s F003 Deceleration 0 01 to 99 99 s 100 0 to 999 9s 10 00s Time Setting 1 1 000 to 3 600 s 30 00 s Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal Block F R SIP STA setting setting setting E 10 VDC Jh lt H 24 VDC IRO e E E Operation Frequency setting 4 to 20 mA Forward Stop Operate reverse NC contact NO contact 1 Allocate 16 FV FI Analog input switch to a multi function input to use as the current setting If terminal FV FI is not allocated the frequency reference becomes the sum of voltage input FV and current input Fl To use only one of voltage and current therefore short the other analog input to the SC terminal 2 This wiring diagram shows an example of using the built in power supply of the Inverter If an external power supply is used refer to Connection to Programmable Controller PLC on page 2 22 Operation Refer to Test Run on page 3 10 3 9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 3 3 Test Run 3 3 Test Run An example of basic connection is given below Refer to Operation Method on page 3 7 when issuing a RUN command frequency reference from the control circuit terminal block Refer to Name of Parts of the Digital Operator on page 3 1 for the parameter setting method K 3 phase power supply x x Connect to terminals
465. ult Function name setting 00 Enabled when 3G3AX OP071 is used SC is set using the volume on the e Digital Operator 3G3AX OP01 01 Data is set using the control circuit terminal analog input signal 02 Data is set using the Digital Operator or Remote Operator set frequency F001 03 Data is set via Modbus communication Modbus RTU A001 Selection 1 04 A201 Frequency Data is set from optional board Reference Selection 2 Frequency Reference Ge is set using a pulse train Refer to Pulse Train Frequency Input on page 5 82 07 Do not set 10 The operation result of the set frequency operation function is defined as a frequency reference Refer to Frequency Operation Function on page 5 70 02 Output Frequency 0 0 starting frequency to Maximum Frequency F001 A Setting 1 2 C001 to C007 Multi function Input 16 FV FI Analog input switch Selection 1 Only when Frequency Reference is selected to Digital Operator A001 A201 frequency can be set using F001 the output If only one frequency reference method is available data is set using A001 A201 according to the above table If a frequency is set in F001 the same value is automatically set in Multi step Speed 1 Reference 0 A020 F001 A020 If Motor 2 Control is enabled SET input ON the same value set in Multi step Speed 2 Reference 0 is set F001 A220 To switch between two frequency references by combinin
466. ulti function input terminal and turn this terminal ON and then turn it OFF Depending on its factor the trip may not be reset using the reset terminal In this case reconnect the power supply Fault monitor 1 t JU Alarm factor Inverter status at the time of the alarm Refer to Error Code List on page 7 2 Error code Output frequency at the time of the alarm Hz Power turned on or initialization in progress with the reset terminal ON During stop During deceleration Output current A at the time of the At a constant speed alarm During acceleration P N DC voltage V RUN command issued at the time of the alarm at frequency 0 During startup du lt O Ke DO Sam Q O Ou LA us J E us DC limited Total RUN time until the time of the alarm h During overload limit Forcing in progress or servo ON ee ee emt e wi pen Note This is the Inverter condition when a trip has occurred It may be different from the apparent operation of the motor During PID control or when the frequency is input using an analog signal the Inverter may be repeating brief decelerations accelerations due to analog signal fluctuation etc even when the motor appears to be operating at a constant speed Total ON time until the time of the alarm h EE EEE ETTE EEE EEEE EEEE ee E meee ee ee ee em em em em ee ee em em e em em e ee ee e em ee e mm
467. unction mode 1 or 2 set P075 Positioning Mode Selection to 00 limit oer Default Function name Unit setting 01 Zero retum mode2 0 Zero return mode 2 00 Forward side SS Zero Return 00 Zero return mode 1 P068 Zero Return Mode Direction Selection 041 Reverse side Zero Return Mode 1 0 00 to 10 00 100 0 P070 Frequency ge Zero Return Mode 2 0 00 to 400 0 Frequency _ 69 ORL Zero return limit signal Selection 70 ORG Zero return startup signal i Zero Return Mode 1 P068 00 Open ON ORL input Output frequency Zero Return Mode 1 Frequency P070 3 DB Zero Position 1 Accelerate until the zero return mode 1 frequency speed according to the acceleration time 2 Operate at the zero return mode 1 frequency speed 3 Apply DC injection braking DB the moment an ORL signal is input SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 168 suol uny Functions 5 12 Simple Position Control Function i Zero Return Mode 2 P068 01 ORGinpt_ ON ORL input Output frequency Zero Return Mode 2 Frequency P071 Position 4 a Zero Return Mode 1 Frequency P070 ORG input ORL input Output frequency 3 1 Accelerate until the zero return mode 2 frequency Speed according to the acceleration time 2 Operate at the zero return mode 2 frequency speed 3 Start decelerating the moment the ORL signal turns ON
468. unication l oes Parity Selection e y 02 Odd Communication C075 Stop Bit Selection o do 1 to 247 Communication function 1 1 bit 2 2 bits 8 4 31 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Default setting Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range 00 Trip E Operation 01 Trip after deceleration 2 Selection on stop PONG Communication 02 Ignored Error 03 Free run stop Q 04 Deceleration stop O Q Communication i c i 0 00 Timeout disabled z C077 Error Timeout 0 01 to 99 99 Time O O Communication C081 FV Adjustment 0 0 to 200 0 C082 FI Adjustment 0 0 to 200 0 100 cogs nermistor 0 0 to 200 0 100 0 3 Adjustment O sl C091 E TOCE Use 00 Do not change Selection 00 Modbus communication Modbus RTU Ee 01 Co inverter Communication SS C096 Selection communication 02 Co inverter S communication E management inverter LE Co inverter 5 Communication Ke w SE Starting Station l T Number z Co inverter O Communication oie Ending Station Number Co inverter 00 485 terminal C100 Communication 01 Aave stared no no Start Selection l y SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 2 Function Mode Page 5 O nm lt a CD n el 3 Ei w es es y 5 40 s 4 32 1SI7 JoJOWIeIeY Parameter List 4 2 Function Mode 4 33 Parameter No Others O D gt ech C1
469. upported Side by Side Zero Clearance Installation Since the Inverter can be installed with its right or left face contacting a wall or other structure the installation space can be reduced SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 1 2 MO9IAIBAO Overview 1 1 Functions Note The carrier frequency etc must be derated depending on the model Password Function Comes with the password function to prevent reading or changing of parameters without proper access privileges 1 3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts Overview N A i A R PWN il VANTIN Wi by COW A A A Wa E A VA VWE ge S VL gt L KR x v RA N NS 6 Optional board cover 5 Terminal block cover 7 Backing plate 1 2 Appearance and Names of Parts 3 phase 200 V 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 75 kW 1 phase 200 V 0 1 0 2 0 4 kW AN OAT SA N AAA A ey as oO NO Th TA ai V N No e et Dees a E CaN S gt Oo NO Oo 2 iw E S o O O EAR M o d oO Toe ee bt Tee x2 508 gt gt gt x goez a Soc SE Q 2o22 Sacks OD ce CC En OD Ce co 8 BC S ch soeg Wi sag 665 isage e OM YW Cooling fan cover Cooling fan Cooling fin 1 2 3 4 Main housing Note 3 phase 200 V 0 75 kW models come with a cooling fan e 1 p
470. urrent trip occurs because of rapid deceleration If b054 is too small or if the Deceleration Time of Ctrl Decel b053 is too long an undervoltage trip occurs because of insufficient regeneration power i Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss b050 01 After the power is shut off during operation the Inverter decelerates to a stop while keeping the voltage below the setting of Deceleration Hold Level of Ctrl Decel b052 If the power is shut off during operation and the voltage falls below the DC Bus Voltage Trigger Level of Ctrl Decel b051 the frequency deceleration width decreases to the Freq Drop to Start Ctrl Decel b054 and then the Inverter decelerates for the Deceleration time of Ctrl Decel b053 If an overvoltage condition occurs the level of Deceleration Hold Level of Ctrl Decel b052 is exceeded due to regeneration while the Inverter is decelerating this function does not operate and the Inverter will not decelerate until the overvoltage condition is reset Main circuit PN PN voltage b052 b051 2 Undervoltage level O LE Time sec Output frequency gt Hz LL Time sec 5 107 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 8 Restart Functions Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss DC Voltage Constant Control b050 02 Without Recovery b050 03 With Recovery lf a momentary power interruption or main circuit DC voltage drop occurs during operation the Inverter decelerates w
471. ury 6 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Precautions for Safe Use Precautions for Safe Use Installation and Storage Do not store or use the product in the following places Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to exposure to combustibles Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals Locations subject to shock or vibration Transporting Installation and Wiring Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction Do not hold by the terminal block cover but hold by the fins during transportation Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input output terminals Doing so may result in damage to the product Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body Do not connect any load other than a three phase inductive motor to the U V and W output terminals Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations Not doing so may result in damage to the produc
472. ut Terminals cccccsseceeceeeseeceseeeeeeseeneeeeeees 5 29 Multi function Input Gelechon 5 29 Multi function Input Operation Selection cccceccseeeseeeeeeeeeees 5 31 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Input Terminal RESPONSE Tumme 5 32 Multi function Output Terminal Selection ccccececeeeeeeee eens 5 32 Multi function Output Terminal Contact Gelechon 5 34 Output Signal Delay Hold Function annannnannannennennnennnnnnnnennnnnn 5 36 5 4 Analog EI EIER 5 37 Analog INDUL EN EE 5 37 Analog Input Filter FV FI Sampimg 5 38 Analog Command Held Function AH 5 39 Analog INDULAGIUSUIMENE EE 5 40 External Frequency Start End ccccccscccscecsseecesceeseseeeseeeenaes 5 40 MP Terminal Pulse PWM Output 5 42 AM Terminal Analog Output 5 44 5 5 Settings Relating to Control Method cee 5 46 Control Method V f Charachertstcel 5 46 FOrgue BOOST EE 5 49 Camer FregUGNCY ebe ee eebe 5 51 Automatic Carrier Frequency Reduction Function annannaanaa 5 52 Motor 2 Control Function GETT 5 54 5 6 Operation Functions sicicacessessacestecevccapnsnnccssccszansnccseccaaneminess 5 56 3 wire Input Function STA STP ER 5 56 Starting FREQUENCY EE 5 57 Reduced Voltage Startup Selection ccc ccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 58 Jogging Operation Ion 5 59 FICQUGNCY nn IEN 5 60 Frequency JUMP Function E 5 61 Acceler
473. uthentication password B Related functions b031 b037 Note 1 0000 cannot be set as a password Note 2 Sixteen characters including O to 9 A b C d E and F hexadecimals can be used to set a password SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 7 Digital Operator Operation Functions p Overview of Password Function Example Password A Password not set default condition b190 0000 input accepted b191 0000 input not accepted b037 can be changed Input 1234 in b190 Input 0000 in b190 password setting password clear Password locked input EN ols Authentication OK b190 0000 input not accepted Password authentication 190 1234 input accepted b191 0000 input accepted 8 b191 1234 input not accepted The power has been reconnected b037 cannot be changed no operation has been performed b037 can be changed for approx 10 minutes A password locked condition or the password has been changed The condition changes to the above once the password The value of b037 cannot be changed is successfully authenticated Although the password setting information has not been cleared the value of b037 can be changed The password locked condition is restored automatically if the power is reconnected or no operation is performed for approx 10 minutes i Password Setting Password Setting 1 Set Display Selection b037 Soft Lock Selection b031 acco
474. val Frequency 0 00 to 99 99 SE uring 100 0 to 400 0 1000 mz Deceleration 2 Pulse Train C047 Output 0 01 to 99 99 Coefficient Feedback C052 Comparison 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 no yes Signal Off Level a Feedback C053 Comparison 0 0 to 100 0 no yes Signal On Level Level and output terminal status 1SI7 JoJOWIeIeY SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 4 30 4 2 Function Mode Default Parameter No Function name Monitor or data range setting Page Overtorque C054 Undertorque Selection Overtorque undertorque SS level Forward Power Running Overtorque C056 undertorque 00 level Reverse Regeneration 0 to 200 Overtorque C057 undertorque e level Reverse Power Running Overtorque C058 undertorque A level Forward Regeneration Overtorque 00 Enabled during Undertorque GES Signal Output Mode Selection acceleration deceleration Electronic C061 Thermal 0 to 100 Warning Level 0 Hz Detection 0 00 to 99 99 C Cooling Fin 064 Overheat 0 to 110 100 Warning Level 03 2 400 bps 04 4 800 bps 05 9 600 bps 06 19 2 kbps oor Speed Selection 07 38 4 kbps ES 57 6 kbps 76 8 kbps 115 2 kbps 00 Overtorque 01 Undertorque Level and output terminal status 01 and constant speed 01 Enabled only during constant speed Parameter List Communication 072 Station No Selection Ee 00 No parity Comm
475. vates the window comparator output when the FV FI analog input value is within the upper and lower limit levels of the window comparator Analog inputs such as disconnection detection can be monitored on a desired level Hysteresis widths can be set for the window comparator upper and lower limit levels Levels and hysteresis widths can be set separately for individual FV FI inputs The analog value to be adopted upon WCFV WCEFI output can be fixed to a desired value Set values in FV FI Disconnection Operation Levels b070 b071 If no is set the analog input value will be directly reflected FVdc Fldc outputs are the same as WCFV WCEFI respectively Earemeter Function name Data range 2e au Unit No setting 60 Window Comparator bO FV Upper Limit Level Lower limit level Hysteresis width x 2 0 min to 100 b063 Window Comparator Set an upper limit level Fl Upper Limit Level Window Comparator DU FV Lower Limit Level 0 to Upper limit level Hysteresis width x 2 100 max b064 Window Comparator Set an upper limit level FI Lower Limit Level b062 Window Comparator O to Upper limit level Lower limit FV Hysteresis Width level 2 10 max S Window Comparator Set a hysteresis width for the upper FI Hysteresis Width and lower limit levels 0 to 100 no ignored Set the analog value to be adopted upon WCFV WCFI FVdc Fldc p output 27 FVdc Analog FV disconnection Multi function Output detect
476. verse power 400 o Reverse Power running Running C055 C056 Overtorque 0 to 200 Undertorque Level OTQ signal output level for forward Forward regeneration Regeneration Overtorque 00 Enabled in acceleration deceleration Undertorque and constant speed operation C059 Signal Output 01 Only duri tani F Multi function 07 OTQ Overtorque Undertorque Output Terminal Selection C058 C021 to C022 Multi function C026 Relay Output Function Selection SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 152 suoljoun Functions 5 11 Sensorless Vector Control Torque Limit Function 9 153 This function limits the motor output torque This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method A044 A244 03 You can select any of the following 3 torque limit functions from Torque Limit Selection b040 Four quadrant separate setting mode In this mode torque limits are set separately for the four quadrants of forward power running forward regeneration reverse power running and reverse regeneration using Torque Limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 Terminal switching mode In this mode the values set in Torque Limits 1 to 4 b041 to b044 are switched based on the combination of torque limit switching terminals 1 and 2 TRQ1 TRQ2 which are set using multi function input terminals Selected torque limit values are enabled for all operation modes
477. viation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 3 Read and Understand this Manual Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AN
478. warranties express or implied b Limitations OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ABOUT NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABIL 14 ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or oth erwise of any intellectual property right c Buyer Remedy Omron s sole obli gation hereunder shall be at Omron s election to i replace in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof the non complying Product ii repair the non complying Product or iii repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non complying Product provided that in no event shall Omron be responsi ble for warranty repair indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron s analysis confirms that the Products were prop erly handled stored installed and maintained and not subject to contamina tion abuse misuse or inappropriate modification Return of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment Omron Compa nies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with a
479. without repeater regulated by the RS 485 network can be connected across the network Station No 1 operates as the Management Inverter in Co inverter communication Accordingly be sure to provide a Management Inverter of Station No 1 The Master Inverter can write data into holding registers in a given Slave Inverter Up to five different station numbers and holding registers can be specified at a time When one data transmission is completed between the master and slave the Master Inverter changes sequentially and data transmission is repeated according to the details set for each Master Inverter AR DES Inverter 02 Inverter 03 Inverter 04 Data transmission from the Inverter 01 master to the slave Switch the Master Inverter from 01 to 02 1 2 Data transmission from the Inverter 02 master to the slave Switch the Master Inverter from 02 to 03 3 4 Data transmission from the Inverter 03 master to the slave Switch the Master Inverter from 03 to 04 Data transmission from the Inverter 04 master to the slave Master Inverter 1 The Master Inverter is switched automatically by the Management Inverter 2 A command to switch the Master Inverter from 01 to 02 is sent after an elapse of the silent interval Communication Wait Time C078 following the data transmission from the Inverter 01 master to the slave 3 Upon receiving the data sent from the Master Inverter the Management Inverter sends the n
480. y b082 for longer than the Encoder Disconnection Detection Time P077 PO77 0 when the output frequency is equal to or higher than the Creep Speed Setting P015 Encoder disconnection Excess speed The Inverter is tripped when the motor rotations equal or exceed the maximum frequency times the Overspeed Error Detection Level P026 0 Position control range trip A trip will occur if the current position exceeds the Position Range Setting P072 P073 during simple position control 5 83 5 160 5 161 E80 U The encoder wiring is disconnected or there is a faulty connection Check the encoder wiring The actual motor rotations is less than the Starting Frequency b082 for longer than the Encoder Disconnection Detection Time P077 Adjust the parameters Increase the setting in P077 and P015 This error also occurs if the number of motor rotations is less than the starting frequency during simple position control Adjust the parameters Increase the setting in P077 and P015 E81 0 This is determined via speed detection with the encoder The encoder wiring is disconnected or there is a faulty connection Check the encoder wiring The number of encoder pulses is not correct Check the Number of Encoder Pulses P011 The actual motor rotations exceeded the error detection level Adjust the Overspeed Error Detection Level P026 E83 D Check the current position
481. y of Functions b037 01 If a specific function is not selected its relevant parameter is not displayed For details on the display requirements refer to the following table No ispay requirements requirements 1 Displayed when 2 is set Displayed when Control 2 method 1 is sensorless vector control Displayed when Control 3 method 2 is sensorless vector control Displayed when Control 4 method 1 2 is free V f setting Displayed in the free electronic thermal mode Displayed when Control 6 method 1 is free V f setting Displayed when Control 7 method 2 is free V f setting SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Parameters displayed when the applicable conditions are met EL F203 A201 to A204 A220 A241 to A247 A261 A262 A281 A282 A292 to C001 to C007 08 A296 b212 b213 b221 to b223 C241 H202 to H206 H220 to H224 H230 to H234 d009 d010 d012 b040 to b046 C054 to A044 03 C059 H001 H005 H020 to H024 H030 to H034 P033 P034 PO36 to P040 d009 d010 d012 b040 to b046 C054 to C059 H001 H205 H220 to H224 H230 to H234 P033 P034 PO36 to P040 C001 to C007 08 and A244 03 A044 02 or C001 to C007 08 and A244 02 b013 02 or C001 to C007 08 and b213 02 A044 00 01 A041 to A043 A046 A047 C001 to C007 08 and A244 00 01 b100 to b113 b015 to b020 A241 to A243 A246 A247 5 88 suoljoun Functi
482. y parts must be provided by the user 10 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Revision History Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number located at the lower left of the front and back covers Cat No 1570 E1 02 Revision code Revision Revision Changes and revision pages code date S Gs 01 September 2009 First printing 02 March 2010 Revised information on the simple position control function and revised corrected manual contents SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 11 About This Manual About This Manual 12 This User s Manual is compiled chapter by chapter for user s convenience as follows Understanding the following configuration ensures more effective use of the product Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Appendix Overview Design Operation Parameter List Functions Communication Function Maintenance Operations Inspection and Maintenance Specifications Overview Describes features and names of parts Provides external dimensions installation dimensions peripheral device design selection instructions and other information necessary for design Describes names of parts the Inverter s operations including how to use the keys on the Digital Operator and the monitor function List of parameters set via Digital Operator
483. yed in increments of 10 100 Displays in increments of 1000 Frequency 0 01 to 99 99 b086 Conversion Set in increments of 0 01 Coefficient d007 d001 x b086 00 Disabled The output frequency cannot be d001 d007 changed using d001 d007 b163 Frequency Setting Mode Selection 91 Enabled The output frequency can be changed using d001 d007 Note Data in indicates the value when the high frequency mode is selected If Frequency Reference Selection is set to Digital Operator A001 02 enabling d001 d007 Frequency Setting Mode Selection b163 01 lets you change the Output Frequency Monitor d001 setting using the Increment Decrement keys only during operation Changed Output Frequency d001 will be reflected to the Output Frequency Setting F001 Pressing the Enter key stores the setting in the EEPROM Since F001 is rewritten while d0O7 is still displayed there may be a time gap between the key operation and display change depending on the acceleration deceleration time While the PID function is activated or being stopped the output frequency cannot be changed The frequency cannot be changed in the individual input mode by pressing the Increment Decrement keys simultaneously SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL 5 4 suoljoun Functions 5 1 Monitor Mode Real Frequency Monitor d008 Displays the real motor frequency when Pulse Train Input Termina
484. z C026 Multi function Relay Output Function Selection Output frequency ZS output ON 2 ON Output Signal Logic Operation LOG1 to LOG3 9 125 This function performs output signal logic operations inside the Inverter No not assigned 62 63 and logic operation results LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected Three types of operators AND OR and XOR can be selected Output signal 1 Output signal 2 LOGx AND LOGx OR LOGx XOR The setting parameters vary depending on the logic output signal selected Refer to the following table to set the necessary parameters Operand 1 Operand 2 Operator selection selection selection 33 Logic operation output 1 LOG1 C142 C143 C144 34 Logic operation output 2 LOG2 C145 C146 C147 35 Logic operation output 3 LOG3 C148 C149 C150 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER S MANUAL 3G3MX2 ALILILIL Selected signal 5 9 Functions Relating to Protections Warnings and Various Output Signals Example To output a logic output 1 LOG1 signal through AND operation of RUN signal 00 RUN and Set frequency min reached 02 FA2 to multi function output terminal P2 Multi function Output Terminal P2 Selection C022 33 LOG1 Logic Output Signal 1 Selection 1 C142 00 RUN Logic Output Signal 1 Selection 2 C143 02 FA2 Logic Output Signal 1 Operator Selection C144 00 AND an N LL FA2 LOG1 Parameter Default S Function name

5 - Motionsolutions.com

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents